SEOTips.ws

Sponsored Video

Cora SEO Software measures 520 on-page and off-page SEO factors for your keywords

9 Time-Saving Tools for Social Media Marketers

9 Time-Saving Tools for Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you need to spend less time on repetitive social media tasks? Are you looking for tools that let you balance automation with a personal touch? In this article, you'll discover nine tools to help marketers save time while maintaining a human presence on social media. Listen to this article: Relationship-building Tools Just like any relationship, connecting on social media starts with finding the right people and reaching out in a human way. Here are some automation tools to help you do that. #1: Notifier Linking to other people's amazing content not only helps establish your own authority, but is also one of the best ways to make meaningful connections. If you're smart about leveraging those connections, you'll reach out directly every time you include someone else in your own work. With Notifier, simply enter the URL into an article you've published (whether on your own site or as a guest contributor) and the tool will pull out all of the people mentioned in the post, tag them based on their Twitter handles, and queue up those shares via Buffer. Here's what a recent article pulled in. Notifier then lets you select how many mentions you want to include in each share and will schedule them to drip out over a chosen time frame. #2: Leadfeeder Visitors pass through your digital presence every day by browsing on your website, looking at your product or services pages, or maybe even consuming your content, all without submitting their information. This means that most of the time you have no digital record that those visitors even exist (outside of raw Google Analytics traffic counts). Leadfeeder is especially valuable to B2B organizations, because it will connect your onsite Google Analytics with your visitors' off-site social profiles so you can see who's coming to your site, which company they're from, and what they're interested in. Once you've identified your visitors, you can easily assign visitors to a campaign, customize your automated responses based on what they've shown interest in, and then measure the results. #3: Socedo Many marketers overlook the bottom-line benefits of lead generation on social media because they haven't found the right tool to automate prospecting and report key metrics like testing. Similar to Leadfeeder, Socedo is another great tool that helps you zero in on your ideal prospects via Twitter and LinkedIn, so you can collect their profile information and add them to your sales pipeline and CRM. Most notably, Socedo's analytics provide robust reporting that links directly to platforms like HubSpot. This allows you to see exactly how specific campaigns have paid off, both on engagement and ultimate conversions. Having a system in place that treats social leads differently from more heavy-handed email campaigns is vital, especially if you want to stay human. Commerce Tools When it comes to advertising, selling, and customer service on social, things get even more inhuman than merely connecting with new leads. Here are three tools that strike an excellent balance among making the sale, supporting current customers, and being genuinely social. #4: Yotpo User-generated marketing in the form of reviews and recommendations is one of the most powerful purchase drivers online. While many websites feature reviews and testimonials, they drop the ball when it comes to sharing those same golden nuggets natively on social media. Enter Yotpo. Yotpo will incentivize reviews by offering bonuses or coupons to your existing customers. It will collect your reviews in a centralized database for easy access and allow you to instantly "push" your reviews both to your website and your social streams. Take Nest Bedding, for instance. Using Yotpo, Nest Bedding was able to integrate user-generated content into a host of their social selling platforms, most notably Facebook. Why this relentless "customer-centric" focus? Easy. Because,

How to Optimize Facebook Custom Tabs for More Conversions

How to Optimize Facebook Custom Tabs for More Conversions

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to boost conversions from your Facebook app? Have you thought about promoting it with Facebook ads? Supporting your Facebook custom tab with complementary Facebook ads will drive more views and deliver more conversions. In this article you'll discover how to combine Facebook custom tabs with Facebook ads to boost conversions. Listen to this article: #1: Focus on the Benefits You may have heard this saying before: Benefits sell, features don't. Focusing on the benefits for your target audience can make a big impact on conversions from your ads. Whether your Facebook custom tab app is a promotion, contest or newsletter sign-up form, your goal should be to get the people who come to the page to take the action you want them to. How do you do this? You focus your messaging on how filling out the form will benefit your customer. To figure out your most important benefits to promote, create a features and benefits chart and spend some time brainstorming. Start by filling in the features column of your chart. Next, think critically about each feature you've listed and the value that it provides to the audience you're targeting with your ads. Once you've filled in both sides of your features and benefits chart, pick the top two to three benefits. Promote these two or three benefits with your ads and emphasize them in your app copy. The bottom line is, to make a greater impact with your app's copy and drive up conversion rates, focus your copy on the solution that your product or service provides. In other words, focus on the incentive your brand is offering. If you keep your copy about your visitors' wants and needs, you'll see more success with your ads. #2: Define Your Goal After you've identified the key benefits you want to promote, the next step is to determine the most important goal of your Facebook ads and design a custom tab app to reflect it. Here are some goals you might have: Capture the email addresses of users who are interested in your product or service. Drive downloads of a lead-generating resource. Get people to take advantage of a special offer by downloading a coupon. Get sign-ups for an online marketing event you're hosting, like a webinar. Drive engagement (for example, voting and/or an image submission on a photo contest) on a marketing campaign you've built. Your Facebook ads should always direct people to an app that has a clear focus, rather than to your website. Why? Your website is full of distractions. The fewer distractions your ads' destination has, the more likely you'll accomplish your Facebook advertising goals. To optimize conversions from your ads, design your Facebook custom tab app without any of these design elements: a navigation bar; social icons; unnecessary links, tabs and buttons; and drop-down menus. Remove any information or clickable link or button that doesn't support the goal of your landing page. #3: Take Design Cues From Top-Performing Ads Split testing different versions of a Facebook custom tab app is tough for two reasons. First, if you don't have a large Facebook advertising budget, you may not get enough traffic to your app to make any valid assumptions. Second, there are too many variables. You could end up going in circles testing a million little things, everything from the color of your call-to-action button to the copy of your secondary headline. Instead of split testing your app, it's better to split test the three main components of your Facebook ads: the headline, body copy and image. Discover your best-performing Facebook ad, and then update your landing page's design to incorporate that ad's headline, copy and image. After a few days of running your Facebook ads, you'll be able to determine which ad is performing best. Based on what you discover, update your app's headline and primary image to match your highest-performing ad.

16 Writing Tools for Social Media Marketers

16 Writing Tools for Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you create copy for social media posts? Do you want some tools to help you improve the quality of your posts? Whether you work on your own or with a team, there are tools that make it more likely your social media posts will publish without errors and with correct word counts. In this article you'll discover 16 writing tools for social media marketers. Listen to this article: #1: WriteRack Do you frequently post tweets that are longer than the maximum 140 characters? If so, you'll need to send a "tweetstorm," or a series of tweets one right after the next. Doing this manually can be time-consuming. Instead of writing out each tweet, sign up for WriteRack and put your entire long tweet into the tool. It then divides it up, numbers it, and posts all of your tweets at once. Done and done! #2: Slick Write Slick Write is a user-friendly website that lets you copy and paste your social content directly into an analysis window. Slick Write analyzes your writing to find grammatical, spelling, and punctuation errors. Depending on the level of editing you want, settings can even be adjusted to catch mistakes like biased language and gender-specific pronouns. #3: Help.PlagTracker Originality is one of the most important components of any social media post. If you have a lot of competitors active on social media, you'll want to stand out as a unique brand. Run all of your posts through the Help.PlagTracker website before you publish them. This helps you to ensure originality and avoid the pitfalls of plagiarism. #4: Polish My Writing Polish My Writing (also known as After the Deadline) is a user-friendly grammar correction website that goes a step further. You can use it to get style suggestions for your content. The words to be corrected are simply underlined in red, blue, or green (depending on the correction), so the writing isn't cluttered or crowded as you edit. #5: Ulysses Ulysses is an app for anyone who does a lot of writing. The app lets you write no matter where you are, and will organize all of your writing in one place (including texts, new content, email, and writing projects). If you're in charge of managing a social media account, it can save you a lot of time by allowing you to access and organize your content at any time. The app costs $24.99. #6: Writefull Have you ever toggled back and forth between your word processor and Google trying to figure out if the phrases you want to use are correct or accurate? This works, but it's also intrusive and leads to distraction. Writefull is an app that integrates with your word processor to take over the role of Google. You can find out on the spot whether your phrases make sense. #7: Word Counter If you're planning to send out a lot of tweets about an upcoming product launch or a new promotion, you'll need to word them perfectly to make the most use of Twitter's 140-character limit. You can achieve this easily by using Word Counter. #8: Grammar Monster Grammar Monster won't correct your writing, but it will help prevent mistakes in the first place. Grammar Monster is an educational site where you'll find grammar and writing lessons, quizzes, grammar tips of the day, and a huge selection of grammar rules divided into categories. #9: Spellchecker Pretty much as you would expect, Spellchecker is a website that will quickly and accurately check your writing for spelling errors. #10: Grammar Check Grammar Check lets you copy and paste your content into its editing software. The site will then correct everything from dangling modifiers to unnecessary ellipses. #11: Papers Gear Editor Papers Gear is a professional custom writing service. You can hire an editing team to proofread and check grammar on your blog, articles, website copy, social media content, and any other important documents for your business. You can also get assistance with formatting your content. #12: Hemingway App

How to Boost Your Facebook Ad Visibility

How to Boost Your Facebook Ad Visibility

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Facebook ads to promote your business? Are you struggling to connect with your audience? By fine-tuning your Facebook ads, you can capture the attention of both customers and prospects. In this article you'll discover how to boost the visibility of your Facebook ads. Listen to this article: #1: Use a Clutter-Free Image With Minimal Text The image you choose for your ad depends on what business you're in and whom you're targeting. If you're a personal brand, you may want to choose a picture of yourself, because a friendly face can improve the performance of your ad. It's also possible to get good results with images that show a product or something else that's relevant to what you're advertising. When choosing an image, make sure that it isn't too busy or cluttered. And avoid using an image that has Facebook's shade of blue because people may dismiss your ad, thinking it has something to do with Facebook. It's also helpful to add a border around your image. Keep images text-free, or use a very small amount of text. Facebook has implemented a 20% rule for text in an ad image, which means text can cover no more than 20% of the image. In a tiny ad on the sidebar of a page, a lot of text on an image wouldn't be legible anyway. #2: Write Short, Attention-Grabbing Copy Your ad copy should be short and enticing and grab the user's attention immediately. Spend some time coming up with your ad copy. Facebook suggests you include a timeframe and a price (when appropriate) and stick to one call to action. You can create multiple ads with different text. Then test them to see which gets the most engagement. There are two distinct components to the ad copy: the headline and the text. In the news feed, the ad's headline (which is clickable) appears under the picture, and in the sidebar, it appears before the text copy. Try to keep the headline to a single line in the ad. The text copy sits above the image in the news feed or under the headline in the sidebar. Keep the text short enough that the person viewing the ad won't have to click the See More button. #3: Explore Audience Targeting When you're targeting an audience for your ad, don't just type in male/female, 30 to 40 years old, in a certain city and hope for the best. It's important to know who your customers are so you can drill down and segment accordingly. Target the people you want to be connected to you and your brand. For example, if you're advertising something that people can buy, you might want to target those who have bought from you before or expressed an interest in buying at some time. When creating your ad, always choose the location, age, gender and interests you're targeting. Most people won't list their job title or very personal details on their Facebook profile, so you can leave these details out. Target interests by specifying the pages that your ideal customer likes. You can target your direct competitors' pages. For example, if you're a photographer in Toronto, target the followers of the page of a competing photographer in the area. You might also want to target the pages of businesses whose products and services are complementary to yours. These people likely have the same customers as you. For example, if you're a web designer, target people who like the pages of a particular copywriter. Look at the profiles of people who like your page and see what other pages they like. You'll probably find common likes among your fans. Make sure that you target the actual pages, which show up in Interests, rather than the interests themselves. Note that there seems to be no real rhyme or reason to the pages that Facebook pulls up in the Interests section. You may enter the name of a page that has over 20,000 likes, and Facebook won't find it, but one with 2,000 likes may show up if you search for it. This is something you'll have to test for yourself when choosing page...

20+ Social Media Hacks and Tips From the Pros

20+ Social Media Hacks and Tips From the Pros

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for the newest social media tips and techniques? Want to know how the experts are staying ahead of the social media marketing curve? We asked top social media pros to share their favorite tips for getting the most out of social media. In this article you'll discover 25 ways to improve your marketing and save time. Listen to this article: #1: Get Around the 140-Character Limit on Twitter Yes, there are tools that save long-winded tweeters, but they really just add a link that takes the reader to a website, out of the stream. Here's a hack that lets you run long, while keeping your readers right there on Twitter. I learned this one from SMMW speaker Amy Schmittauer. First, send a tweet as you normally would ... but end it with an ellipsis or a cliffhanger of some kind. Next, reply to your own tweet! You can do this from your own stream. There's no need to leave the @mention of yourself in there. Remove it so you don't look like you're talking to yourself. Now, visitors who see the first tweet (or either of them) in your stream can see the full length of the super-long tweet by clicking the View Conversation link. Here's what it will look like: Voila! You've broken out of the 140-character jail. It's definitely a hack in the truest sense, but it works! Andy Crestodina is co-founder of Orbit Media. #2: See Restricted LinkedIn Profile Search Results Ever look for people on LinkedIn, but the search results you see are restricted based on your membership level? Because the majority of profiles are indexed on Google, you can use the search engine to do a more comprehensive search. For example, if you find that you can't access the full profile information of someone on LinkedIn, go to Google and type: site:linkedin.com "name of person" If you're looking for marketing managers who mention Dublin in their profile, you can type the following into Google: site:linkedin.com//pub "marketing manager" Dublin Now you can see much of the information LinkedIn's barriers hide from you. Ian Cleary is the founder of RazorSocial. #3: Accelerate Social Media Follower Growth S4S (also known as Share for Share or Shoutout for Shoutout) is a tactic in which you form mutually beneficial partnerships with other influencers in your niche/market. Basically you post each other's content with a reference or tag to each person on an agreed-upon social media platform. We used this social media hack and have gone from 0 to 400,000+ followers on Instagram in under a year. It's great because the hack works on any social media platform: Twitter, LinkedIn, Facebook, Instagram, Pinterest, Periscope, you name it! Nathan Chan is the publisher and editor of Foundr Magazine. #4: Reduce Inflammatory Facebook Fan Posts and Comments Because our Facebook page community can be rowdy, I add words commonly used to attack another fan or our Facebook page to a list of words in the Page Moderation section of Page Settings. When a banned word is used in a comment, the comment is hidden from the general public, but appears to the person who left it and their friends. I ban words like "unlike," "unliking," and "clickbait" as well as things like "!!," "!!!," and "!!!!" because I've found that no one ever uses multiple exclamation points to tell you how much they love you. Holly Homer runs Kids Activities Blog and Quirky Momma Facebook page, and is the founder of Business 2 Blogger. #5: Verify the Effectiveness of an Influencer This is a very difficult time to be in marketing. Ad blockers are diminishing returns and overwhelming information density makes it hard for our message to be heard on Facebook, Twitter, and other channels. This is one reason influence marketing is so important today. Even small companies and agencies need to tune into people who can effectively carry a message online to an engaged audience. But how do you know if an influencer is influen...

How to Include Recipes in WordPress Posts

by Keith Lock @ Tips and Tricks HQ

In this video tutorial, you will learn: How to install and activate the JetPack plugin. How to activate JetPack’s Recipes shortcode. How to find the Image URLs from the WordPress Media Library to be used within your recipe. How to use the Recipes Shortcode to easily add search engine friendly Rich Recipes with Print Buttons […]

What 10 Agencies Said about Hiring Freelance Copywriters: #SEOprochat Recap

by Jessica Kandler @

Every other week, MySiteAuditor brings together experts from SEO, web design, and digital marketing agencies across the U.S. and around the world for a Twitter...

The post What 10 Agencies Said about Hiring Freelance Copywriters: #SEOprochat Recap appeared first on .

Boost Squarespace Website Traffic with SEO and SEM

Boost Squarespace Website Traffic with SEO and SEM

by Christine Darby @ Blog | Squarespace, MailChimp | Collaborada

Does your business need more website traffic? Business to Consumer (B2C) companies need a steady stream of visitors who are ready, willing, and able to buy, while Business to Business (B2B) companies need to continuously generate leads for their sales pipelines. Keep reading to learn about SEO and SEM.

4 Ways Visual Content Improves Social Media Results

4 Ways Visual Content Improves Social Media Results

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want better engagement for your social media campaigns? Wondering how visual content can help? Using visual content to support your messaging makes it easier to grab your audience's attention. In this article, you'll discover how visual content can support your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Drive Interest and Clicks With Simple Imagery Your social media followers are looking for you to provide relatable, easy-to-understand content. The Travel Channel demonstrates this concept in their Daily Escape series on Facebook. To draw fans in, they'll post a stunning destination photo and a brief description. Notice that the Travel Channel doesn't post a full URL to their blog post. Instead, they post a bit.ly link so it doesn't draw the reader's eye away from the short description. Why use a ton of words when you can let your image do the work for you? It's easy to create your own simple, stunning images that speak to your followers. #2: Sustain Viewer Interest With a Variety of Visuals The goal of any social media marketer is to use messaging that amplifies the brand. A goal that's just as important, however, is to create content that sparks a conversation with fans and followers. To do that, you need to post different types of visual content. Target does a great job of this in their social media marketing. On their Facebook page, you'll see a good mix of recipes, videos, partnership announcements, sales alerts, and more. Target has a strong Pinterest presence, too. Their well-designed and well-organized pin boards provide a wealth of ideas for everyone from wedding planners to interior designers and more. The visual product presentation is more effective than simple links or photos of the store. Target's visual marketing is consistent in its branding, and the company obviously has several templates they're using to create content. So how do you achieve consistency in your visual content? Once you've established your visual content style, use different templates across your social media platforms to reach as many users as possible. If you're a small business, you may not have an army of graphic designers at your fingertips. In that case, consider using an online design tool to create your own simple, beautiful images. To provide a variety of types of visual content, use memes, screenshots, how-to's, tutorials, tips, quotes, mood images, statistics, discounts, puzzles, and polls. #3: Spark Engagement With Fan Photos Once you’ve created visual content for your social channels, how do you get people to pay attention to it? The most successful brands know their audience and market well. Take Harley-Davidson, for example. While Harley-Davidson is a brand that's globally known, it's a particular favorite among the Baby Boomer and Generation X audiences. The company will encourage fans to share photos of their Harleys on social media and then post them on the company's Facebook page. To find out more about your target audience, look at your Facebook Insights to get an idea of the gender, age, and location of your followers. Instagram has also started to roll out tools for business accounts. The data provided by your social media accounts will help you target the right audience to help your business grow. Once you know your audience, find out where and when they're most likely to consume your content. #4: Create Relevancy With Trends, Events, and Holidays Content is king, but if you want your posts to be noticed, start paying attention to trends. Think about holidays, special days, newsbreaks, movie premieres, and more. Tie your message to something that's relevant now, make it visual, and soon you'll start to see positive results. Consider using a tool to help you keep track of holidays and trends. Find one that gives you templates you can customize to deliver your message. Support Your Message With Visual Design

How to Use 360-Degree Video in Your Social Media Marketing

How to Use 360-Degree Video in Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using video on your social channels? Have you thought about 360-degree videos? 360 videos produce more engagement and message retention than normal videos. In this article you'll discover how to create a 360 video and use it for your business. What Is 360-Degree Video? 360 videos (also known as VR or virtual reality) are clips displaying a spherical scenario where the camera has recorded all possible angles of the environment. Listen to this article: When watching 360 videos, you can interact and choose the content you're viewing. On a computer, you can view 360 videos with Chrome, Opera or Firefox. Click and drag the mouse on the video to see different angles. You get an even better viewing experience on mobile. Simply move your smartphone around to see different angles. You can enhance the mobile experience by watching the video in a Cardboard viewer, which allows a 3D-interactive experience of the video. 360 videos are not new to social media, as YouTube introduced them in March 2015 and made them available for video ads a few months later. Since then, a few companies have embraced the new technology, producing videos that leave viewers amazed. More recently, Facebook has also made this technology available, which is likely to contribute to starting a new social media trend. How to Create 360 Videos Creating a 360 video is easier than you may think. The software provided with your camera and the social network where you host the video manage most of the process. You don't need any advanced knowledge of editing software. To create a 360 video, follow these steps: Get a 360 Camera Creating 360 videos requires a special camera with lenses that cover all of the angles around the camera. It's also possible to create these videos by using six cameras recording simultaneously in a cube configuration. However, this process is usually more complex and requires advanced editing. Some of the camera models currently on the market are Ricoh Theta, IC Real Tech, 360Cam, Nokia Ozo and Bublcam. Record in 360 Mode To record a 360 video, you need to change your mindset for a whole new technology, remembering that you'll be recording everything around the camera. With traditional video, you might have props hidden outside of the frame to help you with your video, such as a teleprompter, other people, etc. All of this would be seen in a 360 video. Preview the Video A 360 video uses the same file format as any other video, and can't be visualized in spherical mode without using specific software (or a social media network). All of the cameras provide their own apps to preview your videos, which gives you an idea of the final result. However, remember these applications are just viewers. The video file is not converted into any special format. Edit the Video Before publishing 360 videos online, you can edit them with most editing software to include titles and buttons, adjust color, merge clips, add background music, and so on. When editing, you'll be working with a strange image format that is just a flat-stretched representation of a spherical recording, as shown here. This view can make the editing process a bit challenging in the beginning. But in reality, editing a 360 video is no more complex than editing any other video. Upload the Video Finally, the most important and easy step of all is to upload your video. The process is as simple as uploading any other video. Both Facebook and YouTube will automatically recognize the clip as a 360 video, and prepare it to be viewed. Nothing else is needed. Creating 360 videos is a relatively simple process. If you're ready to get started with 360 videos for your business, here are some ways to use the ideas below to boost your social media engagement. #1: Showcase Your Products Nescafé is one of the first companies to see the potential of this technology.

Integrate Google Search Console With Unamo SEO

by Adam Coombs @ Unamo Blog

Now you can integrate your Google Search Console properties with your Unamo SEO Campaign with GSC data storage for up to 2 years! ​​ You’ll have all of your relevant SEO data on one platform to expedite your analytics and decision making processes. ​ The integration will pull all of your data from GSC into […]

How to Use Native Ads to Support Your Social Media Marketing

How to Use Native Ads to Support Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for ways to supercharge your social media efforts? Have you considered native ads? Native ads not only help build your social followers and boost social engagement, they also drive high-quality consumers to your branded content. In this article you'll discover what native ads are and how to integrate them into your social media marketing. Listen to this article: What Are Native Ads? The Content Marketing Institute defines native advertising as paid marketing that delivers useful, interesting and targeted information to your audience in a form that looks like the site's native, or non-ad, content. The different forms that native ads can take vary greatly. They can be Google paid search results, promoted listings on Twitter, sponsored updates on LinkedIn, Facebook promoted or sponsored posts or even articles on sites like Forbes, BuzzFeed, The Huffington Post and The New York Times. Native ads can also appear as content-recommendation engines at the end of articles. Here's how to start integrating native ads into your social media marketing. #1: Define Your Goal Whatever the form, native ads offer many potential benefits to your business. Joe Pulizzi of the Content Marketing Institute says native ads can help you build brand awareness and trust, plus help bring subscribers to your content. And keep in mind that your content doesn't always have to be new. Native ads can be a great way to attract new audiences to previously published posts. Additional benefits of native ads include SEO and social proof. Promoted posts on a strong social media site get your message in front of a larger audience and can drive traffic back to your website or blog. Native ads can be especially helpful if you have a new site and haven't had time to build up strong SEO. Unlike other forms of digital marketing such as banner ads, native ads on social media can collect social proof such as likes, comments and shares. This increases the credibility of your message and viral opportunities for your brand. More awareness can equal more authority in the form of links and social signals, which can produce better rankings. Native ads can also help you build social media audiences. A sponsored post on Facebook or Twitter can attract new users to follow you, and sponsored stories can grow likes and followers, but only when the content resonates with users. A sponsored post with little organic traction will do poorly. Promote social media content that is already popular for further exposure to a wider audience. #2: Develop Quality Ad Content To get the most from your native ad investment, focus on creating content that is helpful and interesting, attracts attention and provides value. And fight the urge to sell. Additionally, Zoe Robinson of Add3 suggests these best practices for native ads: Publish the content that the ad is promoting on your own site. If your article features an infographic, chart or graph, be sure it appears on your site first with its own URL. Include a call to action that links to your blog or other social channels. Quality content is key. Go beyond marketing and break down departmental silos to leverage the expertise of others in your company. Create content your audience will find less disruptive and more engaging through segmentation with tools like geo-targeting, demographics and interests. Zoe also recommends measuring metrics beyond traditional click-through rates. Consider metrics such as brand affinity or purchase intent to determine native ad success. #3: Use Native Ad Targeting PR software and services company Cision suggests targeting sponsored content to Facebook users who are already customers or lookalike audiences that share characteristics with existing fans. You can also retarget native ads to people who have come to your website to view a product or service or deliver native ads based on search interest.

How to Create a Fan Content Campaign in 7 Easy Steps

How to Create a Fan Content Campaign in 7 Easy Steps

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Have you considered collaborating with your fans? Do you know how to create a user-generated content campaign? When you include fans, you not only increase brand awareness and reach, but also collect great content that can be repurposed to achieve other business goals. In this article you'll discover how to run a successful user-generated content campaign for your business in seven steps. Listen to this article: Why Fan Content? Social media and smartphones have made it easy for customers to create high-quality content and distribute it to their personal networks. In many ways, social sharing has become modern-day word-of-mouth marketing. Every time customers share a photo of your products or services, your brand receives a mark of social validation. These posts serve as online endorsements that are interpreted as objective and authentic. Contests and campaigns are among the most effective ways to encourage fans to post photos and videos about your brand. Why? Interactive social campaigns give your customers an explicit reason to upload and share great content with their social followings. In turn, their followers will engage with this content and your brand's organic reach will grow. Here's how to run a social campaign to generate great fan content for your brand. #1: Find or Create an Evergreen Hashtag To track the content that your customers will post online, you need to create an evergreen hashtag that represents your brand as a whole. It can be anything from #yourbrandname (#Nike, for example) to #missionstatement (#JustDoIt). Even if you haven't promoted a brand hashtag, your customers may have created one for you. Once you've created or identified your hashtag, make sure that it's highly visible. Display it in your social posts, in your email signatures, on package inserts and on your website. The goal is to make it easy for customers to discover your hashtag and interact with your brand. Here, One Kings Lane has placed their branded hashtag, #MyOKLstyle, on a package insert that encourages customers to share their post-purchase experience online. #2: Map Campaign Goals to Business Goals After you've established your evergreen hashtag, outline what you want your social campaign to accomplish. Why are you asking customers to post and share photos of your products or services online? The goal of your campaign can be anything. Decide whether you want to increase followers on Instagram, generate more leads, increase sales or simply collect more usable content for your brand. What's important is to find your focus and identify how your social campaign will help you achieve your business goals. Country Club Prep wanted to augment their brand lifestyle by using customer photos to represent their preppy style. Using the hashtag #PrepInABox, the company created a customer photo gallery on their website to showcase how their products are worn by everyday people. #3: Choose Social Networks Now that you've laid the foundation for your campaign, you need to decide which social platforms to use for conducting your collection and outreach. Remember that the channels you choose should reflect your target audience. The best place to reach potential customers is on the platforms that they're already active on. Don't know where to start? Here's a breakdown of the demographics for each social network. Decide what network is the best fit for your target audience and start asking customers to submit content to your campaign. #4: Reward Loyal Customers Offering prizes, free product samples, discounts or even public recognition is a great way to boost participation in your campaign. These are all strong incentives to get your customers posting. To spark conversation around your social campaign online, it's important to recognize your most loyal customers. Thank them for being brand advocates and delight them with prizes and discounts.

How Cori O’steen Donated to Charity and Grew Her Online Business to $10M/Year

by Victor Levitin @ eBay Sellers Journey to $100,000 a Month

This July, I had the opportunity to share our eBay journey with other sellers while lecturing at the eBay Open event in Las Vegas. eBay invited two sellers – Cori O’Steen and myself, to share our insights with other sellers to help them grow their businesses. While my lectures focused on how Max and I optimized our listings to constantly increase sales, Cori shared how she used charity and personality to get a competitive edge....

The post How Cori O’steen Donated to Charity and Grew Her Online Business to $10M/Year appeared first on eBay Sellers Journey to $100,000 a Month.

How to Create Quality Facebook Canvas Ads

How to Create Quality Facebook Canvas Ads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to reach more mobile Facebook users? Wondering how Canvas ads might help? Facebook Canvas lets you create full-page, interactive mobile ads that work like landing pages for tablet and smartphone users. In this article you'll discover how to create quality Facebook Canvas ads. Listen to this article: Why Facebook Canvas? Facebook Canvas is a new tool for advertisers, built specifically for the mobile platform. Facebook users can scroll through Canvas ads to view photos, watch videos, and discover your company's story. Canvas is free to use beyond the standard Facebook advertising costs, and its drag-and-drop interface requires no coding knowledge. The ads are fully immersive, so there's nothing else on the page vying for users' attention when they're scrolling through or clicking on the content in your ads. And while interactive media is normally a concern because of loading times (long loading times drive people away in every corner of the web), Canvas ads load almost as soon as they're selected. This is because they're hosted on Facebook rather than redirected to an outside page. In fact, they can download up to 10 times faster than general mobile web pages. Here are some ways you can use Facebook Canvas to maximize the impact of video ads for your business. #1: Complement Videos With Text and Images To use Canvas effectively, you need to take advantage of everything it has to offer. The tool allows you to share much of the same content you can post on your website, such as articles, photographs, videos, and even products. You have the option to display photos in carousel format, which Facebook introduced last year. You can add up to five images with optional links in one Canvas ad. Facebook is slowly rolling out the ability to create a carousel of videos as well. While there may be an emphasis on video in Canvas ads, you should also consider using other content options to better tell your company's story, highlight your products, and pique consumer interest. A genuinely compelling multimedia Canvas ad will capture attention and engage your audience, which can translate to increased web traffic, more conversions, and more sales. You can also use your video content in a variety of ways. For example, you might create a video that highlights the core principles of your brand and then include a carousel of products. Alternatively, you might include a series of customer testimonials or behind-the-scenes highlights of your company. Tailor your video to your marketing goals, whether that's greater brand awareness or increased sales, to get the best results. Kit and Ace used this video in a Canvas ad to bring awareness to their brand and get their line of all-day technical performance apparel in front of their target market. . #2: Tell a Story With a Series of Video Clips Facebook allows a maximum of 2 minutes of video for your canvas, but you can split up the video content however you want. One tactic is to use a series of 15- or 20-second clips, as in this social media campaign for Evan Williams' Bourbon. . Not only are shorter clips more likely to hold your audience's attention than longer videos, but they also give you the freedom to explore different facets of your business or highlight individual customer experiences. This greater flexibility in storytelling allows you to truly guide your audience through the experience and direct them toward what you want them to see. #3: Draw the Viewer in With Immersive Content Videos let you harness the power of both visuals and words to tell your company's story. It's important, therefore, that you come across as genuine and sincere. Design your videos (and your entire canvas) to elicit some sort of emotion, whether it's funny, heartfelt, or exciting, and then tailor your words to that goal. Keep your language simple, but emotional. Never use business jargon or buzzwords in your video ads.

Theft: 9 Ways to Protect Yourself From Losing Your Data

Theft: 9 Ways to Protect Yourself From Losing Your Data

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you rely on your computer for business? Is your computer and data secure? To learn more about ways to protect yourself and your business, this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast gives you insight into the subject. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, you'll learn different ways to protect your data and make sure your business is back up and running very quickly if you were ever to lose it. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Computer Security Why secure your computer? There are two main reasons to secure your computer. Peace of mind. If your hard drive was to crash or you had your computer stolen, you need to know that it doesn't spell the end of your business. It allows you to sleep at night. Theft and a hard drive crash are almost the same outcomes. Peace of mind is a big deal. Business continuity. You don't want the loss of your computer to be the end to their business. This is why it's essential to implement security measures. The good news about a lot of this stuff is, it's set and forget. It only takes a small amount of your time, and in certain cases some financial investment, to know that you will be able to continue to operate no matter what happens to your computer. Recently I received a phone call from my office informing me that my two iMacs had been stolen. When the police arrived we were informed that another office within the same building had also been targeted. The alarm system was set, it hadn't been disarmed and even the motion sensors hadn't been triggered. They broke through the office window, taking the computers with them. You'll hear the reason why my office was vulnerable. In total I lost about a day and a half of my time and you'll discover how I got back online within 5 hours. I thought I would share my story with you and hopefully you'll be able to take some notes from it. Here are 9 tips to protect yourself from losing your data. #1: Set-up a remote backup I highly recommend that you have a remote back-up plan in place. I use CrashPlan and for approximately $60 a year have unlimited back-up capabilities. Listen to the show to hear how CrashPlan works and the different account levels they offer. #2: Back-up to an external hard drive You have to make sure that your hard drive is external from your computer. If you put yourself in the minds of the thief, they want to make a quick buck. They don't really care about your hard drive, just your computer. An external hard drive is critical. In my case they left the hard drive behind and I was able to plug it into my new computer. It was the key to everything. For the iMac they have got a really cool thing called Time Machine. Make sure you store your external hard drive somewhere out of sight. Remember the thieves unplug all the cables and just take the computer. Listen to the show to hear how Time Machine works similar to CrashPlan, and how it can get you back up and running very quickly. #3: Secure your browser passwords You should make sure you have a password to log onto your computer. A password can be a deterrent, although when someone does steal your computer, they are likely to reformat the hard drive, rather than try to figure out the password. Make sure you also password protect your web browser. This is really important because we access our banking accounts, merchant systems, blogging tools, email etc from within a web browser. Everything seems to live out in the cloud these days.

How to Improve Your Pinterest Boards and Gain More Followers

How to Improve Your Pinterest Boards and Gain More Followers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to grow your Pinterest following? Are your Pinterest boards performing? Adding the right types of boards to your Pinterest profile will help increase your visibility and followers. In this article you'll discover how to create Pinterest boards people want to follow. Listen to this article: #1: Stay Relevant With Evergreen Content Boards with evergreen content are important for attracting Pinterest users, and they remain both relevant and interesting to people year-round. Having a Christmas board during the holiday season is normally a good strategy. Ideas for gifts, decorations and food will likely go over well in those few weeks. Come December 26, however, that board will lose a lot of allure for most users. While you'll occasionally get a stray pinner who is interested and saves the board for next year, most users won't be too invested after the holiday has passed. Ideally, it's best to have a large number of boards featuring content that will perform well for longer periods of time. This content will stay relevant, and you can anchor your boards and followers through Halloween jack-o-lantern patterns and stocking stuffer recommendations in December. For example, Food and Wine's evergreen boards Best Brunch Recipes and Grilling drastically outnumber Halloween Party Ideas in the number of pins. Long-term, you'll want both new users and current followers to engage with your pins and follow your boards so they'll continue to be exposed to your content and share it. Evergreen boards are ideal for this purpose. They allow you to push out new content to boards with plenty of followers, getting increased exposure and staying relevant and active. If you curate boards that offer value for longer periods of time, you'll consistently gain more followers. #2: Appeal to Pinners With Current Trends Though it's important to have a solid base of evergreen boards on Pinterest, it can also be hugely beneficial to have a few boards focused on current trends. Whether you dedicate a new board to gifts under $30 for the holiday season or create a board for your best-selling items throughout the year, having at least one immediately relevant board can help catch users' interest. Create a current trends board to promote your most popular or newest items. Sephora uses this tactic with their Trending Now board, which showcases their most popular and talked-about products. They also have Makeup of the Day and Today's Obsession boards that capitalize on this same idea, promoting relevant content that users would be interested in right now. Plenty of Pinterest users want to keep up with the latest trends, so if you have a current trends board that you update regularly, you can grab a lot of followers. Every time you update this board, you're distributing pins of your most popular or newest items for followers to see, increasing the chance that they'll repin and share them with their own followers and the rest of the Pinterest world. Thanks largely to the sense of urgency, current trends boards are a great way to feature your products and drive sales on Pinterest. The only struggle with this type of board is that you need to update it consistently. If you don't, your "trending now" theme will become outdated, and you'll lose user interest and followers quickly. Stay on top of your current trends board to increase followers with content that is important and timely now. #3: Feature How-To Ideas to Draw In DIYers As a site full of recipes, home décor and style recommendations, Pinterest hosts a large amount of DIY content. You can learn how to wear a pashmina 20 different ways, make an apple pie from scratch and update your kitchen with nothing more than spray paint and super glue (though, for the record, not all ideas are necessarily advisable). It's no secret that Pinterest and many of its pinners love the DIY and how-to ideas that show up all over the ...

Kickstarter: How Crowd Funding Is Changing Business

Kickstarter: How Crowd Funding Is Changing Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you considered crowd funding? Are you wondering how it can help your business grow? To learn about how Kickstarter has transformed the process of funding projects, I interview Richard Bliss for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Richard Bliss, host of the podcast Funding the Dream on Kickstarter. He's also a coach and consultant for crowd funding. Richard shares the do's and don'ts when it comes to creating a Kickstarter project. You'll learn the process in detail of how Kickstarter works for both the campaigner and the supporter. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Crowd Funding How would you describe Kickstarter? Richard believes that Kickstarter is a new phenomenon that most people are familiar with. He says the idea is similar to what happens in a church when they pass around a collection plate. The crowd helps fund an idea, a passion or something that they all would like to get more of. It's very public radio– and television–esque in its approach. Listen to the show to find out how Kickstarter has been around nearly 4 years and seems to have hit mainstream now.  Why entrepreneurs and marketers need to pay attention to Kickstarter Richard explains how Kickstarter is totally changing the rules of how we think about money. Traditionally it's the money that blocks us from fulfilling our dreams. However, what crowd funding and Kickstarter have done is made the money worry go away and that leaves us with "Now what do we do?" If you have an idea for a game or a project, for example, you can put it out there and Kickstarter allows you to go find like-minded people. These people want to see you succeed because they like what you are doing. We buy into people's passions. You'll hear an example of someone who wanted to do a tour through New Zealand taking video and photographs and how with help from Kickstarter, she achieved her goal. Kickstarter is not into causes, political campaigns, charities, funding businesses or equity. They are into one thing: If you have an idea for a project, which includes a beginning, an end and a deliverable, they will help you fund it. Richard describes what the deliverable can be and why it has to be clearly defined. You'll discover why the founders of Kickstarter built the platform and the reason it started with film and music. Listen to the show to find out how Richard picked the name for his podcast, Funding the Dream. Types of businesses that benefit from Kickstarter Richard explains how film is the largest category when it comes to sheer numbers. Sundance Film Festival has had 14 of their projects backed by Kickstarter. This year for the first time, an Academy Award was won by a Kickstarter project. Amanda Palmer made news when she raised more than $1 million to fund her new CD. Richard explains how Kickstarter has 13 different categories and 50 subcategories. One of the biggest categories that gets covered in the news is technology. Transformation is what is happening with Kickstarter and crowd funding. Every Kickstarter category that catches fire turns everything upside down. Richard gives an example of a project he has backed recently and how in the past you'd have to convince a bank to give you a business loan for your idea. But Kickstarter totally transforms the money. You'll hear the difference between reward-based and equity-based crowd funding. Richard tells the story of how his reputation led Kic...

Video SEO: Factors for Ranking in the Top 10 on Google

by Adam Coombs @ Unamo Blog

What does it take to rank your video in the top 10 results on Google? And on YouTube? Well, these are two very different enterprises entirely. A recent study found that 64% of all YouTube videos appearing in Google search results had a different rank hierarchy when searched on YouTube. In other words, videos ranking […]

Google Analytics: How to Make Smart Marketing Decisions

Google Analytics: How to Make Smart Marketing Decisions

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to know if your content and social activities are supporting your business? Are you wondering how you can use Google Analytics to track your progress? To learn how to use Google Analytics to help make smart marketing decisions, I interview Andy Crestodina for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Andy Crestodina, author of Content Chemistry and co-founder of Orbit Media (a Chicago-based web design agency). Andy has also written for Social Media Examiner and he's a Google Analytics expert. Andy shares how to use Google Analytics to help you make informed marketing choices. You'll discover why analytics are so important to your business success and step-by-step instructions on how to get started. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google Analytics Why go beyond the basic metrics of blog comments, social share numbers and page views? Andy explains that these basic metrics will not give you return on investment (ROI) information. The formula he uses is traffic × your conversion rate = success, which can be leads, subscribers or ecommerce customers. The more you're aware of how things are connected and the deeper you look down the funnel, the more equipped you'll be to make better decisions. It's just like the dashboard of a car. You'll hear what happened when I looked a lot deeper into the analytics of a Social Media Examiner article that ranks number one in Google search, and why it made me realize that it wasn't doing as well as I thought. As a marketer, you need to reprogram your mind to what really matters, and it's not what immediately meets the eye. Listen to the show to find out why it's so important to pay attention to the conversion rate. Do you need to be a data nerd to benefit from all of this? Andy says that you don't have to be a data nerd. The only math you need to know is that anything times zero equals zero. Andy relates it to a Magic 8 Ball. You can ask a question, shake up the analytics and find the answer. As a marketer, you need to know how to look at these numbers. It gets easier over time. For every action you take, you can measure it and see if it works, and then make improvements. Listen to the show to find out why Google Analytics is similar to using Photoshop. Common mistakes marketers make with Google Analytics According to Andy, it always comes down to the setup of Google Analytics. There are two or three basic steps you need to take in the Admin section of Google Analytics that make your data much more meaningful. One of the first things you need to do is filter out the traffic from your own IP address. Until you do this, your analytics will be polluted by your own activity. Within the Admin section, you can create an IP address filter. To find out what your IP address is, just type "What is my IP?" into Google search, and it will give you the number. You'll discover what to do with this number in the dashboard to ensure your results are more meaningful. The next step (which is important) is goals. Until you set up your goals, you'll only have half of the picture. Listen to the show to find out what's important if you are a relatively low-traffic site or you're into content or social media marketing. The definitions of goals and conversions A conversion is when a visitor takes an action on a website. There are different types of conversions and analytics that you can set up,

Missing Facebook Pages: What to Do When Facebook Takes Your Page Away

Missing Facebook Pages: What to Do When Facebook Takes Your Page Away

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you know what to do if your Facebook page vanishes? Want to be ready when and if that day comes? To share what happened when the Social Media Examiner Facebook page disappeared and how we handled it, keep reading. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I am joined by Erik Fisher, community manager of Social Media Examiner. Erik and I will explore what happened when our Facebook page disappeared. You'll discover what to do if the same thing happens to you. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How Our Page Disappeared and What We Did About It Finding out On a late Sunday afternoon with my home filled with kids and cousins and my wife cooking dinner, I eased into the couch to watch a football game. Since I drained the battery playing with my new iPhone, it was charging in another room when a text message came at 4:12 PM: “We have a bit of an emergency. Our Facebook page is missing. You around?” I had missed the text. The phone rang 12 minutes later, and my wife picked it up. Our community manager Erik Fisher was calling to tell me what happened. Between the time he texted me and when he called, Erik poked around Facebook and confirmed it. The Social Media Examiner Facebook page had disappeared. And I mean it was really gone. I even received a notification that my personal profile was incomplete because it didn’t list where I worked. I checked to see if I could view the page on mobile or on my laptop, if I could get into the admin side of the page and if the Facebook Fan widget appeared on our site. The answer for everything: no. Listen to the show to learn why it's important to instruct your team to call you in an emergency situation. First thoughts Initially, I thought we’d been hacked. Then I recalled how after I did the Chalene Johnson story we'd taken all the steps necessary to secure the accounts of all of our staff. We secured email with 2-step authentication to our corporate Gmail accounts and we turned on Facebook Login Approvals. Plus, we recently completed a security audit of everyone on our team, and have a master document of who has administrative access to what. These are all steps you can take to secure your business accounts, and you can hear more about how to implement them in the podcast. Listen to the show to hear our thoughts about "what if" the page was gone permanently. First steps After I got off the phone with Erik, everything around me faded into the background. Within minutes I posted the following to friends only: Ok friends, our Social Media Examiner Facebook page has fully disappeared from existence? Anyone have any suggestions on what to do? Posted by Michael Stelzner on Sunday, November 8, 2015   Initially, I decided to share it only to friends just in case there was something nefarious going on. Later on, I changed the status to public. Here are some of the questions people asked me: Did your admin accounts get compromised? Are you spending enough to have a dedicated rep? Any notifications from Facebook? Are you accidentally unpublished? Did you move it to the Business Manager? The answer to all of these questions was "no." I searched all over to find out how to submit my issue to Facebook. I reached out to my network and someone eventually told me about the Report Pages that Disappeared form. I also found where Facebook hides its support responses. Listen to the show to discover what I determined I should have done at the beginning. Reaching out to friends I've been developing relationships with folks for ye...

How to Sell on Instagram

How to Sell on Instagram

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is your business on Instagram? Do you want to use Instagram as a revenue stream? To find out how to use Instagram for sales, I interview Jasmine Star. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Jasmine Star, a professional photographer who specializes in Instagram marketing. Her story starts with law school, transitions over to photography, and ultimately goes to Instagram. Jasmine is sure to inspire you with ways to sell with Instagram. Jasmine shares how to sell your products and services via Instagram. You'll discover the advantages of using Instagram for selling. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Sell on Instagram Jasmine's Story In 2005, Jasmine was in her first year of law school at UCLA when she got the news that her mother's brain cancer was in the final stages. She left school and moved home. Jasmine knew she didn't want to go back to law school and decided to give photography a try. For Christmas, her husband gave her her first digital camera and she started her wedding photography business. When her business exploded that first year, it helped her identify as an entrepreneur. Jasmine joined Instagram six years ago but says she used it haphazardly until just a few years ago. When she learned how to use Instagram strategically as a marketing vehicle for her business, it was a game-changer. Since then, she's been named one of the top 10 wedding photographers and one of the most influential photographers, which she believes is due to her varied and intentional use of Instagram and other social media platforms. Listen to the show to discover more of Jasmine's backstory and why she believes she was called to live a passionate life. Why Instagram Works for Selling Jasmine shares one of her favorite quotes from author Simon Sinek, "People don't buy what you do, they buy why you do it." In her opinion, there's no better platform than Instagram to showcase why you do something. She believes Instagram's powerful storytelling components give you the ability to make customers loyal before a purchase has been made. If you can tell a powerful story in fewer than 87 characters (the caption limit), along with a photo that matches and elevates the storytelling component, you'll win at Instagram. Listen to the show to learn what Jasmine says makes Instagram different from other platforms. How to Get Seen on Instagram It's no secret that people are seeing the effects of the Instagram algorithm on their visibility in the news feed, and that's why Jasmine says it's more important to build an audience of the right kind of followers than to collect followers just to increase your numbers. Visibility in the news feed comes from having engaged followers who care about your business, leave comments and likes, tag their friends, and share your posts. An account with a lot of followers who aren't engaged won't be indexed high by the algorithm. This results in fewer people seeing that account's posts, which then results in fewer people liking and commenting. So, all things being equal, if one account has 200 followers and another has 2,000 followers, and each account routinely gets 20 likes and two comments, the account with fewer followers is more likely to be seen, because it's perceived as more relevant. To build an audience of the right followers, Jasmine suggests creating an ideal client profile. Figure out where your ideal client is on Instagram and why, she says. Then figure out how to serve the people who follow you. Creating value will nurture and grow your audience,...

How an SEO Audit Tool Can Improve Your Sales Funnel

by Niko Vergis @

Charlie Rose is the owner of SEO Mechanic and one of our longest standing members since 2014. He’s an online marketing guru who has managed...

The post How an SEO Audit Tool Can Improve Your Sales Funnel appeared first on .

Influencer Marketing: What You Need to Know to Get Started

Influencer Marketing: What You Need to Know to Get Started

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Does your company work with influencers? Want to incorporate influencers into your marketing? To discover what you need to know about influencer marketing, I interview Lee Odden. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Lee Odden, an influencer marketing expert. He's the author of Optimize, the CEO of TopRank Marketing, and his company produces TopRankBlog.com. Lee explores influencer marketing and what you need to know to do it well. You'll discover how to work with influencers. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Influencer Marketing What is influencer marketing? Lee says the roots of influencer marketing are in advocacy and public relations organizations. You're essentially working with people who are really famous in an industry. The idea is to create an affinity for the brand for however that celebrity is known, and to reach the audience that celebrity has been able to attract. Lee adds that people still have the idea that if they convince famous people to talk about their company, then they'll be famous too. The reality is that, today, especially in the world of social media, people are empowered to follow their passions to create, curate, connect with others, and attract a following. This allows people to create their own influence. Everyone is influential about something, Lee says. Not just famous people can be part of your influencer marketing program. An influencer can be an employee like "Ted in engineering," who has a blog with 5,000 subscribers. Or, it could be that person with a million followers. It could even be customers who are advocating for you every chance they get. When you work with people who have subject matter expertise and an active network, you can advance your brand goals in some really powerful ways. On platforms like YouTube, Instagram, and Snapchat, there's a whole category of people called creators. They have various levels of celebrity, influence, or network size, and have anointed themselves as experts. There are marketplaces where brands can go and literally shop for a tweet, an Instagram image, product placement in a YouTube video, etc. For companies in the business of paying to play, it's a good fit. There are also brands that want to develop relationships with people who are truly thought leaders in their industry, or up-and-comers. They want to develop relationships, because they have an affinity for each other and have things their common audiences care about. There's no right or wrong, but it's important when setting expectations to know what you're going to get out of it. What is the distinction between a celebrity and a thought leader? Lee brought up an expression he borrowed from Scott Monty, "brandividual." This is someone truly invested in developing his or her own brand, except they're an individual. These professional influencers write books, give keynotes, and do all sorts of amazing things. Lee adds it's an important distinction to make between someone who is exclusively focused on being well-known and someone who is a true thought leader. He's not saying a brandividual can't be a thought leader. A thought leader is someone expressing original thought. They're creating content based on intelligence, experimentation, and observations. Brian Solis is a great example of a thought leader, Lee says. In addition to being really good at promoting himself, Brian is constantly experimenting. He does research. He interviews. And then collects, analyzes, and interprets the data. His experiments and experiences help form the thought leader con...

How to Find More Customers With Twitter

How to Find More Customers With Twitter

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to find new customers for your business? Have you considered searching for them on Twitter? Thanks to public updates, searchable bios and a plethora of third-party tools, you can find customers on Twitter easier than you can on any other network. In this article I'll show you how to find your current and future customers on Twitter, without advertising. #1: Start With a Strong Profile Before you start looking for potential customers on Twitter, you need to make sure that any potential customers who visit your profile know who you are and what you do. Listen to this article: Start by visiting your Twitter profile and reading your bio. Make sure that any products, services and qualifications are clearly listed in your bio, along with your website link and location. If they're not, click Edit Profile and add them. Once you're finished, save your changes. To complete your profile, make sure that you pin a tweet at the top that highlights your business, products, services, free ebook, top case study or anything else you want to promote to potential customers. You can create a new tweet for this or use one you've recently tweeted. Click on the three dots beneath your tweet to pin it to the top of your profile. Pinning the tweet ensures that potential customers don't miss the message you're trying to send them. Once your profile is set, you can start searching for potential customers on Twitter. #2: Search for Potential Customers Using Their Bios Can you identify potential customers by keywords they use to define themselves and by their location? If so, you can use Followerwonk to discover them. This Twitter search engine allows you to search for people using the criteria shown here. You then get the following search results. As a free user of Followerwonk, you need to click through to the person's profile to follow or add him or her to a Twitter list. If you want to do the latter, start by going to your Twitter profile and clicking on the Lists tab (to the left of the Edit Profile button). Scroll down to find the Create New List button. Give your list a name that you'll recognize, add a description and set the list to Private. If it's set to Public, each user you add to this list will be notified. When you visit the profile of a potential customer, you can follow that person and/or add him or her to your newly created list. To add someone to a list, click the Settings wheel icon to the left of the Follow button. Now go to your Twitter list and see the news feed of updates from the potential customers you've added to your list. Use this list to start engaging with your potential customers. #3: Get Specific Tweets Delivered to Your Inbox Do you know your potential customers' needs or pain points? Do they share them on Twitter? If they do, you can get potential customers, primed to buy, delivered directly to your inbox. Start by using Twitter search to query a few things you think your potential customers might talk about on Twitter in relation to your products or services. For example, if you have a web hosting company, you might want to search for recommend web hosting ? -http -link to find people looking for recommendations for web hosting. The -http -link­ part will remove a majority of the results that contain links, which usually won't be tweets from potential customers. Once you find a few good searches, head over to IFTTT, sign up for a free account and create a new recipe. Start by selecting Twitter as the trigger channel. Next, choose New Tweet from Search as the trigger. Paste in your Twitter keyword search that generated some potential customers. Then select your choice of an instant email, email digest or Gmail notification as the action. The best option is an instant email or Gmail, as you want to be the first person to respond. Now customize the email you want to receive.

Word of Mouth: Getting Others to Talk About Your Business

Word of Mouth: Getting Others to Talk About Your Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want more people to talk about your brand or business? Want to discover how to get the ball rolling? To learn about word-of-mouth marketing, I interview Ted Wright. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview word-of-mouth marketer Ted Wright, author of the book, Fizz: Harness the Power of Word of Mouth Marketing to Drive Brand Growth. He's also the founder of Fizz, an agency that specializes in word-of-mouth marketing. His clients include Intuit, Pabst Blue Ribbon, Verizon, Intel and many others. In this episode Ted will explore word-of-mouth marketing. You'll discover why word-of-mouth marketing is important in the age of social media, as well as things you can do to get people talking. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Word of Mouth How Ted became interested in word-of-mouth marketing Ted talks about when he attended the University of Chicago School of Business in 1999. At that time the computer lab was basically a windowless cave with 20 rows of 20 computers each, Ted recalls. Early one morning working in the lab, he noticed the ambient light was blue. It was because the Netscape screen was mostly blue, and that's the site everyone used. After 20 minutes or so of searching fruitlessly and getting frustrated with Netscape, somebody leaned over and suggested Ted try Google, which he did. Ted's test search term was his mother's name, Dr. Lynette Wright, a fairly famous medical geneticist. However, since they share the same last name as the guys who invented airplanes, most search engines easily got confused. "Google returned my mother as the second search term, instead of eight pages deep, which was the norm for other sites," Ted shares. He kept working and 20 minutes later, Ted noticed the guy next to him getting frustrated. So Ted leaned over and explained Google to him. About four or five hours later, Ted finished working, stood up, looked around and noticed the light in the room changed from the ambient blue of Netscape to the ambient white of the Google screen. Ted, who's always trying to figure out how things work, found that very interesting. So during his second year at the University of Chicago, he blew apart the history, math, psychology and epidemiology of word-of-mouth marketing. After graduation, Ted decided to start his own business. That company, which he started 15 years ago, is now called Fizz. Listen to the show to discover the unique way in which Ted watched TiVo and Google get adopted. The importance of word-of-mouth marketing Ted defines word-of-mouth marketing as "identifying your influencers and coming up with a story that is interesting, relevant and authentic that ladders back to qualities of your brand and then sharing that story as much as possible." That's the first part. The second part, Ted says, is "creating for your influencers as many opportunities as you can as a brand or a company for them if they feel like it to share your brand's story with as many people as they would like to do so." Ted shares the word-of-mouth marketing campaign he ran for Pabst Blue Ribbon (P.B.R.) with the brand manager at the time, Neal Stewart. The goal was to get more people in America to drink P.B.R. Ted identifies the three critical components of a story being shared: Is the story interesting to influencers so they will pick it up, study it and really understand it? Is it relevant to influencers' audiences? Is it authentic the way they currently understand the brand and the category in general?

6 Location-based Social Media Monitoring Tools

6 Location-based Social Media Monitoring Tools

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to reach local customers on social media? Are you monitoring the online conversations near your business? Geo-specific social media monitoring tools help businesses engage with customers who are close to their brick-and-mortar stores. In this article I'll share six location-based monitoring tools to use for local social media marketing. Why Use Location-Based Monitoring Tools? Geo-specific social media monitoring tools are different from the conventional keyword-based monitoring tools in many respects. For one thing, these tools offer a clear picture of what's happening at a particular location, which helps you reach out to local audiences. Plus, they allow you to connect better with your community by engaging with local social media influencers and leveraging local hashtags. Listen to this article: If you do social media for a company with multiple locations, here are some excellent tools to explore. #1: Search Real-time Feeds With Geofeedia Geofeedia allows you to search real-time social feeds by location to discover geolocation social media posts from anywhere worldwide. You also have the ability to monitor multiple locations to archive, curate and share your content. Simply draw a custom perimeter or enter an address on Geofeedia's digital map. It will then display all social content posted by users in that particular area. While the tool searches by location first, you also have the ability to filter your search by keywords, date, time, users and more, across various social media channels including Facebook, Instagram, Twitter, Flickr and YouTube. Discover what's trending in an area. Then leverage those trends by including the right keywords and hashtags into your social conversations. Geofeedia offers custom social media monitoring solutions for different industries. The pricing depends on the features you require, as well as the number of locations you want to monitor. #2: Engage and Target Customers With WeLink If you're looking for a cutting-edge social monitoring tool for geo-specificity, WeLink is an excellent option. It lets you engage your potential customers with targeted ads and instant offers on their preferred social media channels. This easy-to-use tool combines keyword-based monitoring with geo-specific listening to offer enterprise-grade location-based social monitoring solutions. The result is a hybrid solution, which uses cellular data mining and WiFi to help you discover and collect all social chatter within your selected area. Gather feeds from all popular social channels using this tool. Use WeLink across various verticals including event management, retail, malls, airlines, hospitality, sports teams and stadiums, schools, security and law enforcement, etc. WeLink offers custom pricing, depending on the features you require. #3: Listen to Trends With Sysomos Sysomos enables you to listen to what's trending locally and understand what your customers are talking about. Use this location-based tool to discover and dig into social content posted by local influencers. Sysomos will gather digital content from popular social media platforms like Facebook, Twitter, Google+ and LinkedIn, as well as posts on blogs and forums. It then collects and displays insightful actionable data in a single platform. Filter digital conversations by both keywords and demographic information. This makes Sysomos particularly beneficial if you're targeting customers within a specific age group or gender, for instance. Discover which topics, trends and brands particularly interest your target audience, and then create marketing campaigns based around these areas. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=N2DpsHXh5rY Sysomos differs from other location-based social media tools in many ways. For one thing, it collects both real-time and previously posted content on any topic across social networks. Plus, you have the ability to capture the conversations most r...

9 Productivity Tools for Social Media Marketers

9 Productivity Tools for Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you a busy social media marketer? Looking for tools that will save you time? Using the right tools to stay focused and work more efficiently will help you get more done in a day. In this article you'll discover nine productivity tools for busy marketers. Listen to this article: #1: Save Content Inspiration for Later Use Evernote to create a journal of content ideas and inspiration sources. With text, audio and image options, you can type, dictate or snap an image of whatever has caught your eye. Evernote syncs with all of your devices, so you'll have access to it wherever you are. Reach for it when you're feeling stuck for content ideas. #2: Block Distracting Websites Throughout the course of a day, we have distractions coming at us from a variety of directions. If you intend to spend just a few minutes on Pinterest, only to end up spending half a day looking at recipes, you need Cold Turkey. Use Cold Turkey to group distracting sites, such as social and news sites, and then block them off for certain time periods. Remember, if you're a social media manager who uses native websites to schedule your messages, this probably isn't the app for you. The app works great when you're putting off real work, like drafting your next blog post or newsletter or creating a report for your boss. Set it up for an hour or two and allow yourself some time to write distraction-free. #3: Create Canned Email Responses Do you get a lot of similar emails from customers, such as questions about your return policy or other support-related questions? Save yourself some time and effort with the Canned Responses add-on in Gmail. Rather than write a new response every time, you can save an email as a canned response and use it over and over again. What's great about this feature is that it's not a simple auto-responder that feels robotic and soulless. You can edit canned responses to personalize them for a particular recipient or tailor your answer to a question. To access it, go to your Gmail Inbox and click on the gear icon and select Settings. Then click on the Labs tab to find Canned Responses and select Enable. Now you can save or access your canned responses in the lower-right corner of the New Message window. #4: Secure Account Log In Credentials Do you keep a list of all of your passwords for emails, websites, social media platforms and third-party apps and tools? Is that document really safe? What if you're on the go and can't remember your password for a site? 1Password is the solution for protecting your passwords and giving you quick access to them. The app will store your passwords securely, and autofill them whenever you need them. It's available for Mac, Windows, iOS and Android and as a browser extension. #5: Automate Recurring Tasks Think about all of the repetitive and mechanical tasks you do in the course of a day. Then delegate those tasks to IFTTT and free up your time to focus on bigger things. You can choose from a huge list of social media recipes or create your own. Maybe you want to build a Twitter list for a specific hashtag or get an email notification when someone mentions your business in a tweet. #6: Find and Attribute Images Do you spend a lot of time looking for images online? Have you ever tried to hunt down one specific image? Whether you followed a dead end link or are looking for attribution information to credit an original source, TinEye can help. Use the TinEye browser extension to do a reverse image search and find the original source of any image. #7: Create Tasks From Emails We're all bombarded with emails asking us to do things and complete tasks. You're likely overwhelmed with the sheer volume of email you receive and the challenge of trying to stay on top of requests. If you're using Gmail, you can create to-do items right from your email messages. After you open a message,

How a Simple Productivity Tool Helped Create the World’s Best Marketing Blog

by Glen @ ViperChill

Today’s blog post will reveal my biggest goal for 2016, nine niche ideas with huge potential and the most effective productivity technique I’ve used over the last few years. Let’s begin by talking about the productivity technique which is often referred to as the Pomodoro Method. If you’ve followed any kind of productivity guide online […]

Content for Business: How to Build Your Business on a Solid Content Foundation

Content for Business: How to Build Your Business on a Solid Content Foundation

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a great idea for a business? Wondering if content marketing will help move the needle? To discover what it takes to build a content-driven business, I interview Joe Pulizzi. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Joe Pulizzi, founder of the Content Marketing Institute, author of the book Epic Content Marketing and the founder of Content Marketing World, the leading conference for content marketers. Joe's latest book is Content Inc.: How Entrepreneurs Use Content to Build Massive Audiences and Create Radically Successful Businesses. Joe will explore how you can build a sustainable small business with smart content marketing. You'll discover the six steps to take to create a content business in any niche. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content for Business When and why Joe started the Content Marketing Institute Joe shares how he got into the content marketing industry. He was vice president of custom media (also known as content marketing) at business publishing company Penton Media until 2007. At Penton, Joe and his team helped advertisers who wanted to do something unique tell their stories. For example, if a company like Microsoft wanted to tell a story to an executive audience, Joe and his team would help them create an ongoing newsletter, a magazine, blog series or webinar series. Joe did that for seven years. Joe left Penton at the end of March 2007 and wrote his first blog post titled "Why Content Marketing?" on April 26, 2007. That led up to Joe launching Junta42, which he says was basically the eHarmony for content marketing. The idea was to match brand sites that wanted to outsource some portion of the content process (creation or distribution) with agencies that would pay for the service to get the leads. Joe explains how in 2008, with no money, no paid distribution and about 2,000 subscribers, he decided it was time to build relationships with influencers. He started a research project called The Top 100 Content Marketing Blogs. (I was on the list first for White Papers and then Social Media Examiner.) He notified everybody who was on the list, and it just took off. Fast-forward to 2009, Joe shares, the model was working and they matched up about 1,000 projects. However, they were still having trouble getting companies to pay for a subscription to the service, even though they were driving leads to them. After his best case study (they sent a $1 million+ customer to an agency, and the agency decided not to renew their subscription), it finally hit Joe that this business was not going to work. Although Joe was "in love with his product," he finally figured out the key was to fall in love with your audience and focus on their needs and pain points. His audience was asking for training, education, consulting and speaking. They weren't even ready for a matching service, because they didn't even know how to create a content marketing strategy. Joe pivoted to the education and training concept and launched Content Marketing Institute six months later. That was May 2010. "At that moment we said we were going to create the leading online destination for content marketing, the leading magazine and the leading event," Joe recalls. "And within two years we were able to do that." Listen to the show to hear how Joe and I first connected, as well as the similarities between our projects. Why now is the time to get into a content-driven business Content Inc. is Joe's fourth book. The other three are content marketing–related and f...

Why Your Team Needs a Growth Manager

by Sherice Jacob @ The Kissmetrics Marketing Blog

Growth hackers…growth managers…growth marketers — startups these days are all about growth. But are these titles just different names for the same kind of job? And if you’re a startup, which type should you hire and why? This article will help shine some light on one of the hottest and most lucrative jobs in the […]

Facebook Freebooting: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Freebooting: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use video in your marketing? Want to make sure your copyright is protected? There are simple steps you can take to brand your videos so you're protected if people upload them to Facebook as their own. In this article you'll discover how to protect your video content from freebooting on Facebook. Listen to this article: What Is Freebooting? Freebooting (also known as video piracy) is the act of downloading someone else's copyrighted video (usually from YouTube) and uploading it to Facebook as your own. You need to protect your content and make sure you don't unknowingly propagate the work of pirates. Joe Hanson of It’s Okay to Be Smart explains that freebooting "is not the same as sharing or linking or embedding [online media] from its original source. Freebooting means downloading it without permission from the creator or copyright holder and redistributing it for your own use, often for your own monetary gain. When it comes to video piracy in 2015, Facebook is ground zero." http://i.imgur.com/oqvxxMB.jpg Of the videos on Facebook, 72.5% are pirated. "According to a recent report from Ogilvy and Tubular Labs, of the 1,000 most popular Facebook videos of Q1 2015, 725 were stolen reuploads," says Hank Green. "Just these 725 'freebooted' videos were responsible for around 17 BILLION views last quarter." A recent trend I'm seeing on Facebook is scraped YouTube videos that have been lightly edited and compiled into a montage with large captions or subtitles on the video itself. Given that Facebook has the Autoplay feature on both desktop and mobile, users are more likely to feel drawn in to watch a video and click/tap for the audio if they read the caption. Freebooting hurts people who work hard to create their video identity. For instance, if you're monetizing your YouTube channel, you'll miss out on ad revenues if someone is scraping and reusing your videos. Facebook is just starting to dig into revenue sharing for their ads, but it's only available to a select few advertisers so far. Granted, if there's a call to action or watermark on an illegally uploaded video, it could potentially help increase the visibility of the original creator. But still… Here's how to protect your content, deal with piracy when it happens and avoid sharing pirated videos. #1: Understand Facebook and YouTube Video Piracy Policies YouTube is stringent with their copyright links, so they'll take infringed content down immediately if a complaint is filed. Unlike YouTube, Facebook won't automatically take down pirated content. Facebook is clearly on a mission to ramp up their own video consumption. Native Facebook video posts have the most organic reach, which is probably what has spawned this trend among users. Under pressure to do something about freebooting, Facebook came up with video matching technology to make life a lot harder for pirates. It lets the creator know when a duplicate video is being shared on Facebook. "Videos uploaded to Facebook are run through the Audible Magic system, which uses audio fingerprinting technology to help identify and prevent unauthorized videos from making their way onto the platform," Facebook states. #2: Report Freebooted Videos Destin Sandlin of Smarter Every Day created the following video (which you can share on Facebook) to simplify what freebooting is and the impact it has for content creators. He talks about a German DJ who created a YouTube video that got over 5 million views in four years. A verified Facebook page then downloaded the video from YouTube, uploaded it as a native Facebook video and got 5 million views in four days. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=L6A1Lt0kvMA Destin shares three tips for what to do when you come across freebooted videos anywhere on the Internet. He says to capture the freebooted content (with a screenshot or video screen capture), comment (state that it's stolen and direct people back to the original vid...

Why Things Catch On: The Science of Why People Share

Why Things Catch On: The Science of Why People Share

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to understand the science behind why people share? During this fascinating interview I explore these very concepts. To learn the reasons why people widely share content, I interview Jonah Berger for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jonah Berger, author of The New York Times bestseller, Contagious: Why Things Catch On. He's also a marketing professor at the Wharton School and columnist for BusinessWeek. Jonah shares the reasons behind why people engage with word of mouth and why marketers should pay attention to this. You'll learn about the 6 principles that drive people to share. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Why People Share How Jonah become fascinated by the reasons people engage in word of mouth As a scientist, Jonah thought it would be interesting to study why things go viral or why certain stories circulate around the water cooler. He grew up studying math, chemistry, computer science and material science and thought it would be interesting to apply these hard science tools to social science problems. It was after reading the book The Tipping Point that he was inspired to think about these things and soon realized there hadn't been a lot of research done on the subject. Listen to the show to find out why he spent his academic career trying to study these things and bottle the phenomena. Why social media marketers should pay attention Jonah starts with how a lot can be done with social media and that there are tons of content out there already from many brands and organizations. Some content does better, but it's not about luck and it's not random. Jonah and his team spent a decade doing research to try to understand why people share word of mouth. With the 6 principles they discovered, you can make it more likely for your own posts to be contagious. People will share them and pass them onto others. You'll find out what the research entailed and how it led to the discovery of the psychological drivers behind sharing. Word of mouth can be over 10 times as effective as traditional advertising. People trust word of mouth more. It's also more targeted than traditional advertising. Plus it's cost-effective, if you can get it to work. It doesn't cost you anything to get people to talk about your brand. However, it requires you to understand why they are talking about some things rather than others. Following the rigorous academic research, Jonah decided to write the book Contagious to help people apply the insights, so their products and ideas could take off. Jonah explains how when the science was applied to a number of different companies to increase word of mouth in a given campaign, there was an increase of 20-50%. You can definitely guarantee more views and more shares when you follow the 6 principles. Listen to the show to find out what you need to do to help activate your existing customers and get them to spread that message to more potential new customers. The 6 principles in Contagious Jonah gives the high-level of each principle, which is called the STEPPS framework. These 6 principles drive people to talk and share. Social currency Triggers Emotion Public Practical value Stories These steps are based on psychology. It's about being able to understand the motivation or the drivers that cause us to pass things on. Some people wonder if you need all 6 principles for it to work.

5 New Facebook Live Video Features for Marketers

5 New Facebook Live Video Features for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you interested in live video? Want to learn more about Facebook Live? Facebook Live has expanded its features, providing you with new Facebook marketing opportunities. In this article you'll discover what Facebook marketers need to know about the newest Facebook Live video features. Listen to this article: #1: Post Live Video to Your Profile, Pages, Groups, and Event Pages The first of the new features with Facebook Live video relates to where you can broadcast. For starters, everyone should be able to broadcast live video to a personal profile, which is visible based on the settings you choose (public, friends, etc.). Second, you should be able to broadcast live video to your Facebook pages, which will automatically have public visibility. You need to navigate to your Facebook page within the main Facebook app and tap on the Publish button. There, you'll see the option to post live video as your page if it's available to you. Third, you should be able to broadcast live video to most of the Facebook groups you belong to. It will be visible to anyone who can see posts within that group. The visibility of your live video in groups is based on the privacy settings of the group itself. Also refer to each group's rules as to whether it allows live video posts. The group mentioned in the following example does not. Finally, you should be able to broadcast live video to most event pages if you've been invited to the event and have responded as interested or going, which is visible to anyone who can see the event. This visibility is determined by whether the event was created as public or private. Considerations for Group and Event Admins For Facebook group and event admins who want to create live events for their group members and event subscribers, live video is going to be a great tactic to use. This will be especially beneficial for private mastermind and membership groups that want to go the extra mile with private Q&A sessions, special guests, and other value-add bonuses. As far as moderation goes, however, there are no controls to limit who can post live video to Facebook group and event pages. If members can post a status update to your group or event page, they can post live video. As CEO of Social Chefs and Facebook group admin Christian Karasiewicz noted, "The core principle is you need to build a manageable but engaged group. Kind of like Cheers, where everyone knows your name." If you haven't done this, moderating the live video content posted to your groups and events could be a tricky issue. It's much simpler to scan a text post or click through to a link to see if the content is self-promotional or questionable. Watching a lengthy live video, or one that's currently being streamed, is a completely different matter. This has forced some admins to implement a no live video rule, deleting live video posts as soon as they appear. While there are no current settings for admins to specifically stop people from posting live video, there are general settings that would allow all posts to require moderation before going live in a group. General moderation settings for events will usually look like this. #2: Go Live There aren't many new features for going live yet, but filters and the ability to draw on your screen are on the way, according to screenshots like the one below from Facebook's live video media assets. Until then, your experience will look like more like this. When you're ready to go live to any of the above-mentioned areas, start by entering your status update and tapping the live video icon. Then, enter a description for your live video. When you tap the Go Live button, you'll see a simple countdown timer to get you prepared to be live. You can tap on the icon at the top right to switch from your front-facing to rear-facing camera throughout your broadcast. Once you go live,

How to Better Your SEO in an Hour with Internal Link Building

by Kristen McCormick @ ThriveHive

Every small business owner wants to get more traffic to their website.  Organic traffic, in particular, is the most coveted form of traffic and refers to […]

The post How to Better Your SEO in an Hour with Internal Link Building appeared first on ThriveHive.

Google Tag Manager: What Marketers Need to Know

Google Tag Manager: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use tracking codes on your website? Have you heard of Google Tag Manager? To discover what Google Tag Manager is and how to use it, I interview Christopher Penn. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Christopher Penn, the VP of Marketing Technology at Shift Communications. His book is titled Marketing Blue Belt and he's also a Google Analytics expert. His brand-new course is the 2016 Marketing Plan Framework: How to Build a Data-Driven Customer Journey. Chris is also co-host of the Marketing Over Coffee podcast. Christopher will explore Google Tag Manager and the future of analytics. You'll discover how to set up and use Google Tag Manager. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google Tag Manager What is Tag Manager Christopher says Tag Manager is a digital bucket that makes it easier to manage website tags such as a Facebook or Twitter remarketing tag, a pixel from an ad tracking system or a piece of java script. He explains that when a website has a lot of pages, or if you use a marketing automation system, such as as Marketo or Pardot to manage multiple websites, things can easily get lost. He says you put the code for Tag Manager on every page of your site only one time then, instead of modifying the tags of individual pages, you simply put new tags in and out of the bucket. Chris adds that it's a lot more reliable than manually managing tags for each page. Listen to the show to discover how Tag Manager can speed up your site. The importance of Tag Manager In addition to speed, Chris believes reliability is a big reason to use Tag Manager. If you have a lot of different webpages, websites or use marketing automation services that have their own landing pages, forgetting to put tags on all those pages will ruin your analytics, Christopher says. As long as you use the bucket on every page, you're covered. The flexibility of Google Tag Manager, is really important. It allows you specify that you want some tags on some pages, other tags on all pages and certain conditions to be met for still others. Chris shares an example. Say you are promoting an event, like Social Media Marketing World, and you want to put a tag on the event page for people who have visited the page, but haven't yet purchased a ticket. If you've haphazardly put tags everywhere, you could lose track of what page your tag needs to be on. With Tag Manager, you can specify it to fire the tag if the url has "smmw16" in it. Tag Manager is also important for social media marketers who don't have control over website updates. If you're with a big company and constantly have to go through the IT department to add new tags or if you have a small website and use an outside consultant for website maintenance, it becomes difficult to update tags in a timely manner. With the bucket on every page, you can add and subtract tags through Tag Manager and no one needs to update the website. Chris illustrates another benefit of using Tag Manager by sharing the example of someone hard coding a Google Analytics tag into their WordPress theme. When the theme is updated, their analytics tags go away. Use Tag Manager with Google Tag Manager for WordPress plugin, and WordPress will automatically put the bucket on every page so you can update the theme as much as you want without losing those tags. Listen to the show to learn about assigning roles within Tag Manager. How to set up Tag Manager Chris says if you already have a Google Analytics account, you can go to TagManager.Google.

Supporting Customers With Facebook: What Businesses Need to Know

Supporting Customers With Facebook: What Businesses Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are your customers active on Facebook? Have you got a plan to support your customers via Facebook? To learn how to use Facebook to support customers, I interview Mari Smith. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Mari Smith, the world's leading Facebook marketing expert. She co-authored Facebook Marketing: An Hour a Day and is author of The New Relationship Marketing. Mari also teamed up with Facebook to assist in educational events. Mari will explore a few new updates from Facebook and how to use Facebook for customer service and support. You'll discover how to create a good Facebook experience for your customers. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Supporting Customers With Facebook Recent Updates: Instant Articles and Facebook Messenger Mari believes Instant Articles were inspired by the video autoplay function on Facebook. Instant Articles, which make content more appealing, enticing and engaging, are only visible on the iPhone at this time. Introducing Instant Articles, a new tool for publishers to create fast, interactive articles on Facebook. Posted by Facebook Media on Tuesday, May 12, 2015   Currently there are only nine media partners that can create Instant Articles, which are posts that come alive with audio and movement on the page (animation, video). The New York Times, National Geographic, BuzzFeed, The Atlantic, The Guardian and BBC News are some of the publishers creating these interactive articles. Mari also shares about the changes to Facebook Messenger. At the F8 Conference in March 2015, Facebook announced they're opening up the Messenger API. This means any third-party developer can create an app that will work with Messenger. So if someone sends you a link to something in a Facebook message, it may ask you to install an app when you click on it. Messenger is also integrating with businesses, although there are only a few online merchants doing this as of now. With this functionality, when people make a purchase, Messenger will ask them if they want to get updates for this merchant via Facebook Messenger. That's almost as good as having a person's cell phone number, Mari explains, because there's a high open rate for SMS messages. Using this technology, merchants can make purchase recommendations or send shipment updates via Messenger, for example. It basically opens up the dialog between the business and the customer. Listen to the show to hear how Instant Articles are similar to LinkedIn Publisher. Why businesses should use Facebook for customer service Mari believes Facebook should be part of a business's customer service plan, since most people are already on Facebook and many use Facebook through mobile devices. Mari talks about how she was recently interviewed for a Wall Street Journal article on how companies like JP Morgan and Coca-Cola are turning off voicemail, and cutting millions of dollars in expenses by doing this. Mari thinks it's a sign of the times. The biggest challenge for businesses is that customers have so many different ways to contact them: a tweet or DM on Twitter or a Facebook wall post, comment or direct message. It can be unwieldy. Companies should also look at the features recently added for business pages on Facebook. The newest call to action button on ads is "Call Now." Facebook wants people to call businesses. They realize if a phone is in someone's hand, they can just press the Call button. The challenge is businesses would need to have staff on standby or a system in plac...

Twitter Traffic: How to Double Your Traffic to Your Content

Twitter Traffic: How to Double Your Traffic to Your Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Twitter for business? Are you wondering how to use Twitter to increase traffic to your blog? To learn how to use Twitter to grow your business, I interview Kim Garst for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Kim Garst, CEO of Boom Social, a company and blog that specializes in social media marketing. One of Kim's areas of topical expertise is Twitter marketing. Kim shares how she uses Twitter to promote her content and offers. You'll learn about what type of content works best and how frequently you should share it. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter for Business How do you use Twitter to help your business? Kim describes many ways to leverage Twitter to help grow your business. One way is to use news updates. Kim refers to Twitter as the "info superhighway." A lot of people don't use Twitter search in the same context as they would with Google. In many cases, the news hits Twitter before it hits the major news channels. There are real people out there who share real information in real time. With Twitter, you can leverage the search function as a way to keep track of your competition. You can search for keywords and find conversations in real time. It's a great way to pay attention to trending topics. You'll hear an example of a news story where 85% of the people polled said they found out about an incident on Twitter before the traditional news got the information. One of the biggest values that Kim has found for Twitter is to drive traffic. It's the most responsive targeted traffic source that you can have at your fingertips. Listen to the show to find out how Kim uses Twitter to drive traffic to her Facebook Page. How Twitter can drive more traffic to a website Kim describes the free offers on built-in tabs on her Facebook Page and why she tests them first on Facebook. Twitter is unique in that you can share your free offer 2-3 times a day; whereas on your Facebook Page it would be considered overkill. A tweet has a lifespan of about 30 seconds, so you can share your free offers multiple times a day and it's seen as acceptable. Different viewers see them as they come through their news feeds. Kim explains the strategy behind sharing the same link multiple times a day and why you shouldn't use the same tweet throughout the day. You'll want to switch them up and test different wording to see what people respond to the most. Kim uses HootSuite to schedule her tweets. You'll find out why it's the number-one opt-in source for leveraging her Twitter traffic to her Facebook Page. Kim shares how she monitors and keeps track of each tweet's performance and why you should only run 2 or 3 at a time, otherwise it's overwhelming. You'll hear what type of content Kim shares from her own articles and how frequently she schedules them. Twitter is Kim's number-one traffic source. She has leveraged the same concept for her clients and increased their traffic by 100-400%. Kim highly recommends that you share content that is still relevant and holds value. You'll hear an example of how to use a hashtag when promoting a blog article and why hashtag content has more relevance. Listen to the show to find out what is one of Kim's top converters. Common mistakes businesses make on Twitter Kim says the mistake people make with their Twitter account is to remain inactive. You need to be consistent regardless of which platform you use,

Podcasting Renaissance: Is Podcasting Making a Comeback?

Podcasting Renaissance: Is Podcasting Making a Comeback?

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you thinking of starting a podcast? Do you believe podcasts are making a comeback? Do you find yourself listening to more podcasts lately? To explore why podcasting may be entering a renaissance period, I interview Mitch Joel for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Mitch Joel, author of Six Pixels of Separation and founder of the Six Pixels of Separation podcast. Mitch shares his experiences from when he first started podcasting in 2006 to now. You'll learn why now is a great time to start a podcast and pick up some useful podcasting tips. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Podcasting Then and Now Stories from the beginning of podcasting Mitch talks about the people who inspired him back in 2006 when he first started podcasting. He explains how C.C. Chapman was one of the early adopters of podcasting and introduced Mitch to CastBlaster. You'll hear how people consumed audio back then and why podcasting started. What really made podcasting was the subscription model. You could now download 5-6 hours of rich content specific to your niche. People looked forward to podcasts to make their commutes useful by listening to relevant content. Mitch explains how many of the early adopters got fatigued quickly and what you can learn from this if you're interested in podcasting. You'll find out the questions to ask yourself before you start a podcast. Mitch talks about persistence and consistency being paramount to success in any social media channel. To produce the best content, you need to have an appetite to constantly hunt for interesting stories to tell. Listen to the show to find out what you should ask yourself before you start a podcast. The meaning behind the word "podcasting" Did podcasting ever die? Mitch explains the possible reasons why people thought podcasting had declined. He compares podcasting to other social media platforms and the different speeds in evolution. Is the word "podcast" still valid today?  Mitch thinks podcasting is part of the zeitgeist now. Mitch talks about how podcasting is more serialized and scheduled than online radio, which is streaming and more like regular radio. Listen to the show to hear more about what "podcasting" means today. The resurrection of podcasting Mitch shares the time when he realized that there could possibly be a resurrection for podcasts. He thinks the resurrection of podcasting is due to quality in terms of technology and delivery rather than podcast production. With today's technology, smart devices and LTE in the palm of our hand, we can more easily access audio than ever before. We now have the ability to consume this content when we want and the audience is there in a major way. As more and more people adopt these devices, there are going to be more people who are naturally inclined to get better content. Listen to the show to hear the podcasts that made Mitch realize the possibility of a resurrection. Podcasting tips from Mitch Mitch explains how his podcast format has changed since when he first started, compared to today. You'll discover the different formats of podcasts people are doing today. Mitch opens his podcast show with the question "Who are you and what do you do?" He explains why he does this and how this question enables the people he's interviewing to present themselves to his audience. Listen to the show to hear more about the meaning behind the question.

Creating Advanced Facebook Custom Audiences Using Google Tag Manager

Creating Advanced Facebook Custom Audiences Using Google Tag Manager

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you looking for advanced ways to build Facebook audiences for retargeting? Do you know you can combine Google Tag Manager with Facebook Pixel Events? To explore the value of using these tools together, I interview Chris Mercer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Chris Mercer, an analytics expert who specializes in helping marketers measure and optimize their marketing. His course is called Master the Fundamentals of Google Tag Manager. You can find him at MeasurementMarketing.io. Chris explores how to use Google Tag Manager to take your Facebook retargeting to the next level. You'll discover how to create and use Facebook Pixel Events in your Facebook marketing. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Pixel Events and Google Tag Manager Chris's Story Chris, who has a background in sales and marketing, left corporate America to investigate online business. Five or six years ago, he started a site called WP Training Videos. The site was designed to help people understand and learn WordPress, but after customers requested help with building websites, the company's business model changed. To learn about analytics, Chris installed Google Analytics and set up tracking on opt-in and lead generation forms. When he showed his analytics to a client, the client stopped asking about changing the website design and wanted to learn more about tracking results. Chris soon had more clients who were interested in analytics, and about four or five years ago, the business pivoted again. Chris's business became Measurement Marketing, which is dedicated to making Google Analytics more accessible to the masses. His clients were often people who installed Google Analytics but didn't know how to use it. Today, Chris works with marketers, marketing teams, and agencies. He shows them what's important to measure, helps them build measurement machines, and shares what to do with the data they collect. Listen to the show to discover one of the biggest struggles for marketers. What Is Google Tag Manager? Google Tag Manager is a tool that was designed to solve an enterprise-level problem. The problem arose about 10 years ago when this new upstart, Facebook, started putting out pixels (snippets of code to copy and paste on a site) that enabled marketers to track things online. It was revolutionary at the time. After the Facebook pixel arrived, large businesses had to figure out how to bridge the gap between marketing and IT. To add the code to web pages, marketing had to submit IT help desk tickets, because IT developers were the only people allowed to mess with the website. As a result, IT departments developed bottlenecks and couldn't focus on the right projects, and marketing teams couldn't get the pixels on the pages fast enough. By the time IT added a pixel to a page, the campaign that marketing wanted to measure had been over for eight weeks. Tag Manager was created to solve that problem. Marketing teams can use it to put out individual snippets of tracking code (for instance, a Facebook remarketing or conversion pixel) that they can use at any point without having to involve developers. Tag Manager gives marketers granular control over their measurement and tracking. I ask about the difference between Google Tag Manager and Google Analytics, and Chris explains Google Analytics does three main things. It collects its data, stores the data, and builds reports based on the data. Google Tag Manager replaces Google Analytics' ability to collect its own data. Tag Manager collects the data and sends it to Google Analytics so it can stor...

Growing Your Audience: How to Increase Your Social Following

Growing Your Audience: How to Increase Your Social Following

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use social media to build an audience for your business? Are you wondering how you can convert your audience into customers? To learn how to grow an audience that wants more and more of what you have to offer, I interview Jeffrey Rohrs for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jeffrey Rohrs, co-host of the Social Pros Podcast and author of the new book, Audience: Marketing in the Age of Subscribers, Fans and Followers. He's also the vice president of marketing insights at Exact Target. Jeff shares why an audience is so important for marketers. You'll learn about seekers, amplifiers and joiners and how these audience types relate to your business. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Growing Your Audience Why an audience is so important for marketers Jeff explains that in his book Audience, he homes in on the concept of proprietary audience development. It's what people in social media, email marketing and even mobile have been doing, but he approaches it from a different angle. When Jeff talked to marketers about their audiences, which included Facebook fans, Twitter followers, YouTube subscribers and email subscribers, they didn't seem to have a strategy. In most cases, strategy was an afterthought or the outcome of a momentary campaign. Marketing was traditionally organized around a campaign. Jeff refers to it as a beginning, a middle and an end, then a cake to celebrate the results and then repeat it. You'll discover why audience development is a responsibility, primary to marketing. Originally marketers delivered the promise via email, but now you have to take that style of thinking into the social and mobile channels. Proprietary audiences will only be there if you build them. If not, you'll have to pay in the form of advertising. Jeff's message is to take a look at everything you do in marketing and try to optimize it to build a proprietary audience, because it gives you a huge competitive advantage. Before the Internet, creative thinkers only had to worry about great creative. They didn't have to assemble an audience because mass media did that for them. The difference today is not only coming up with the creative, but also thinking about distribution and building an audience that belongs to you—one that nobody else has access to. So when you have that great piece of content, you are able to push the button and reach your audience. You'll hear Jeff explain why it's important for businesses to have people in charge of audience development across all channels. Listen to the show to find out why proprietary audience development is the flipside of the content marketing coin. The definition of seekers, amplifiers and joiners Jeff explains that these are the three top-level audiences that marketers have exclusive access to. 1. Seekers Seekers are people who look for information or for entertainment. For example, you're a seeker when you turn on your TV and flip through the channels to find something to entertain you. You're also a seeker when you use Google or Google Maps. Search engine optimization is all about the process of delivering seekers to your website. Seekers are momentary. Once they have their fill of entertainment or find the information they need, they go away without a trace. You'll find out what you need to do with this audience type. 2. Amplifiers Amplifiers are what social media is built upon.

How to Launch Your Product Using Facebook

How to Launch Your Product Using Facebook

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you launching a new product or service? Want to create buzz and get the word out to the right people? Facebook is a great way to promote the launch of a product or service and generate excitement. To be successful, you need to plan your content, write your posts and make good use of the tools Facebook has to offer. In this article you'll discover how to launch a product or service using Facebook. #1: Before Pre-launch: Start Planning Early You'll want to map out your launch strategy at least two months ahead, and most likely even earlier than that. Plan what types of launch material you'll have available to share on social media to get the buzz going. You may also need to start designing some of these materials. Listen to this article: If you have an online product, you can use some great freebies to help get people onto your list. Some examples of great freebies or launch materials include: Images and infographics: Think about designing several versions of your images so they're size-optimized for each social site. Also, if you'll be using them in a Facebook ad, make sure the images are 1200 x 628 pixels and comply with the 20% text rule. Free ebooks, reports or white papers: These freebies could be part of your final product or something valuable that will promote the final product. Free webinar or other educational content: If you're launching an online product, you may want to host a webinar, telesummit or some other type of live event. Plan when that event will occur and when you'll start promoting it. Sale or discount period: If you're offering an introductory price, figure out how long that will last and how many posts you might have around that promotion. Facebook contests: If you're having a contest to promote the launch or new product, plan the timing and determine what type of contest will work best for you. When launching a course, for example, you might plan all of the content and decide when you'll communicate about it to people on your email list and in your social media posts. If affiliates or promotion partners will be helping you get the word out about your product or service, start assembling that team and putting together resources for the team to use. Be sure to make it easy for affiliates to build buzz on Facebook and other social media channels. Write a variety of Facebook posts and tweets so they can either cut and paste them or have a great starting place to add their own wording. Social Media Examiner provided a variety of images to their affiliates to help promote Social Media Marketing World. Some of the images were appropriate for Facebook ads, while others were useful for tweets or blog posts. They also provided a variety of tweets and Facebook updates that were ready to use, and people just had to add their affiliate link. #2: Pre-launch: Build Buzz To start building buzz and generating excitement around your product or service, post teasers about it. If appropriate, use both your Facebook page and profile to let your Facebook fans and personal friends know that something is coming. Using video on Facebook to promote your launch will go further in the news feed. Make sure you're creating a variety of content. You can see that this video post reached nearly 39,000 people and had over 8,000 views. You can also give people a sneak peek into your process. Bathers Beach House in Australia started posting about their restaurant months before it opened. They shared the building process, gained the interest of potential diners and grew to over 4,000 fans before they even opened their doors. This led to a successful opening of their restaurant, and they continue to have high engagement and interaction. If you have affiliates or promotional partners, consider co-creating material to launch the product, such as a webinar or live Q&A session. Gena Shingle Jaffe launched a legal course for entrepreneurs,

SearchCap: Google iOS app trends, difficult clients & content SEO

by Barry Schwartz @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: Google iOS app trends, difficult clients & content SEO appeared first on Search Engine Land.

The eBay Listing Tools We Used to Grow Our Sales to $100k / Month

by Victor Levitin @ eBay Sellers Journey to $100,000 a Month

In this post I’m going to share the eBay listing tools Max and I used to grow our sales. During a period of 6 months we were able to push our eBay listings to the top of the search results on 5 different eBay sites: US, UK, AUS, DE, FR and increase our eBay sales by 220% and win eBay awards for outstanding sales. The method to achieve this was by constantly revising our listings...

The post The eBay Listing Tools We Used to Grow Our Sales to $100k / Month appeared first on eBay Sellers Journey to $100,000 a Month.

3 Steps for Adding Video to Your Social Media Marketing

3 Steps for Adding Video to Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is video part of your social media marketing mix? Looking for tips to get started with video? Making the right decisions in three key areas will help you create videos that engage people. In this article you'll discover three steps to add video to your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Choose a Video Type The great thing about social media is that you can create many different types of videos to keep your publishing schedule interesting and your followers engaged. Eighty-eight percent of businesses say that video is an important part of their marketing strategy. However, the biggest struggles are to stop recycling old content and choose the right type of video content. Here are five ways that you can include video in your social media marketing. Grab Attention With Pre-roll Video Pre-roll video ads are short 15- to 30-second videos that grab the viewer's interest in a product or service. You can use them on social media sites such as YouTube, Facebook, Twitter and Instagram. The secret to a successful pre-roll video is to gain the viewer's attention quickly, as most people naturally gravitate towards the Skip button or scroll past videos on their news feed. This pre-roll video from Geico pulls the viewer in by showing a runaway vacuum. Use humorous tactics like this to make your video stand out in the news feed and compel viewers to watch the whole thing. (Editorial Note: This video was removed from public view after this article published.) httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Xmzm1JCOqtU Show Viewers How to Do Something One way to produce highly targeted content is to teach your audience how to do something. This helps you improve shares and attract new followers. Fitness trainer Kayla Itsines regularly produces videos that teach her target audience how to do various fitness moves. Content like this has helped her become an influencer in the fitness industry, gaining her 4.4 million followers on Instagram. Her videos are easy to follow and they feature content that people would normally expect to pay money to see. http://www.instagram.com/p/_XYsJfACNp/ "How to" video searches on YouTube are up to 70%, with over 100 million hours watched on the platform. Problem-solving content is valuable and video is one of the best ways to offer it. Capitalize on Trending Topics Marketers are always hoping to create the next viral video, but with so much competition, it's not as easy as it sounds. That's why it's important to take advantage of the trending topics across social platforms. The Trending Topics sections on both Twitter and Facebook are popular sources of news content for social users. If you create a video related to a trending topic, you can potentially tap into a huge market. Jimmy Fallon created an a cappella video to celebrate the new Star Wars movie. Creating content around a popular event helped this video to secure millions of shares across social media. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ZTLAx3VDX7g Take a look at the events likely to create a buzz during the calendar year and incorporate these into your video marketing strategy. Go Behind the Scenes Showing people what goes on behind the scenes at your company is a great way to connect with your audience on a personal level. It helps close the gap between brand and customer, which is important in the world of marketing. In this video, Ben and Jerry's introduces one of their Flavor Gurus and gives viewers a brief look at what goes into creating their products and what it's like to work for the company. http://www.instagram.com/p/39m2aMRkLn/ Showcase Products When it comes to video content, 76% of consumers say that they would share a video if it's entertaining. When you incorporate a product video into your social strategy, it's important to strike a balance between promoting your product and keeping the tone light, fun and informal.

The Art of Story: How to Captivate an Audience

The Art of Story: How to Captivate an Audience

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you give presentations or speak to clients? Want to illustrate your knowledge with better stories? To discover how to improve your stories, and your storytelling, I interview Michael Port. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Michael Port, the author of NYT best seller: Book Yourself Solid. He also teaches workshops called Heroic Public Speaking, where he applies the craft of acting to public speaking. His latest book is Steal the Show: From Speeches to Job Interviews to Deal-Closing Pitches. Michael will explore how to find, use and create stories in your marketing. You'll discover tips to improve the delivery of your stories. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: The Art of Story Michael's story Michael shares how he started his career as an actor. He has a master from the graduate acting program at New York University. Michael worked professionally on the shows Sex and the City, Third Watch, All My Children, Law & Order and 100 Center Street, as well as in the films The Pelican Brief, Down to Earth and The Believer. He earned a living doing commercial voice overs for companies including AT&T, Pizza Hut, Braun, Coors Beer, MTV and others. After he left acting, Michael says he decided to talk his way into a job for which he was completely unqualified. He pitched himself, got the job and worked his way up in the fitness industry on the business side. He credits his post-acting success to being an actor, as he was able to perform during life's high-stakes situations. When the spotlight and eyes are on you, the way you perform will determine the quality of your life, Michael says. After Michael left the fitness industry, he went into consulting for businesses and started writing books, and he saw it more and more. Over the last 13 years, Michael realized he had to meld his experience and training as an actor, his experience as a professional keynoter and what he knows about the business world. That's what Steal the Show is about, Michael says. Half the book is on the techniques associated with being a great public speaker and the other half is focused on performing during life's everyday situations. Listen to the show to learn more about how Michael coaches speakers, as well as why he originally resisted helping people with their public speaking. Why people love stories People love narrative, wonder and imagination, Michael says. Stories can get us out of our own head and into another world. We turn everything into a story, he continues. Politics, religion, love, our success or our failures become stories. Sometimes the stories we tell actually get in our way and sometimes they can change the world. Michael talks about a researcher named Jonathan Gottschall, who studies the neuroscience behind stories. Jonathan says the constant firing of our neurons in response to fictional stimuli strengthens and refines the neural pathways that lead to skillful navigation of life's problems. Listen to the show to discover in what way projects are stories. How to find your stories People sometimes draw a blank when they start to work on a presentation or prepare for an upcoming meeting, because so many things have happened over the years. Those experiences and stories are not top of mind, since you are more likely thinking about today and tomorrow. There are four different prompters for the discovery part of the process. Take a piece of paper and write out four columns, one for each of these categories. Then, when you go to craft a speech or presentation for a sales pitch,

Setting Your Customer Engagement Emails on Automation Using Kissmetrics

by Zach Bulygo @ The Kissmetrics Marketing Blog

Human attention spans are embarrassingly bad. I’d be lucky to get just 5% of people to read this entire post. Most probably won’t get past the intro, so I’ll get to the point: In this age of infinite distraction, brands that can keep their customers engaged with the product are bound for long-term success. Fads […]

How to Research and Locate Your Audience Using Social Media

How to Research and Locate Your Audience Using Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to connect with your customers on social networks? Do you know where they hang out online? To optimize your social media marketing efforts, it's important to know who your customers are and which social networks they spend their time on. In this article you'll discover how to connect with your target audience on social media. Listen to this article: #1: Identify Your Ideal Customer One of the first questions I ask is, "Who is your ideal customer?" Some of the answers I've received include women, people who have to eat to survive, bosses, employees and people looking for work. While these answers may be true for you, too, they won't help you find your audience because they don't help you prioritize where to spend your time. John Lee Dumas has famously talked about identifying your business avatar. This means you'll want to create a fictional persona of your ideal customer, to the point of naming it, knowing how many kids it has or what it does on the weekends. The clearer your avatar is, the easier it is to find people on social media who resemble the persona. #2: Determine Your Audience Size Once you have a good sense of what your audience looks like, you can use Facebook Ads Manager to estimate the size of your audience. For example, if you want to reach women in Maine who are interested in nutrition, you can find out that 62,000 people on Facebook match that audience. This is also good business information, because if your audience is too small, you may need to change your offering to expand your audience. On the flipside, if your audience is too large, you might want to target a narrower niche to start. Of course, not everyone is on Facebook. According to recent research, almost 60% of Americans are on Facebook. That number may be more (or less) depending on where your audience lives, their age, gender and household income, but it's a good starting point. #3: Survey Your Customers If you've been in business for any length of time, you have customers you can survey. For the purposes of optimizing your social media campaigns, wisely spending your ad dollars and targeting guest blogging opportunities, you need to know where your audience hangs out online. As part of your survey, ask your current customers the following questions: What social media sites do you regularly use? What websites do you visit for information on _______ (for example, remodeling ideas, pricing strategies or whatever is appropriate for your business)? Do you listen to podcasts? If so, which ones? Do you regularly read blogs? If so, which ones? What people do you follow or pay attention to online? You can also use free tools like SurveyMonkey or Google Forms to collect your answers. In this video, Steve Dotto walks you through how to create your own forms with Google Forms. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=wwf72lwPLVY Google Forms is a great way to collect feedback on live events, for example, because it graphically displays your audience's feedback. Go to your form results and select Form > Show Summary of Responses from the drop-down menu. #4: Research Online Behavior What do you do if you're just starting out, your customer base is too small for meaningful results or you're expanding into a new category? In cases like these, or simply to supplement your surveys, you can research online behavior. The Pew Research Center has an excellent breakdown of where your audience spends their time online. It's not difficult to find studies and infographics that provide information on specific platforms or other countries. For example, check out this chart from MarketingCharts to see a makeup of the top social media channels based on gender, age, education and more. #5: Find and Connect With Your Customer Once you get the results from your survey and have reviewed the demographics of the available research, it's time to put that knowledge to work across different so...

3 Ways to Grow Your Audience on Snapchat

3 Ways to Grow Your Audience on Snapchat

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more followers on Snapchat? Are you taking advantage of every connection option? Using the right tools to their fullest potential will grow your following and increase the chances that others will discover your Snapchat profile. In this article, you'll discover three ways to grow your audience on Snapchat. Listen to this article: #1: Make an In-Person Connection The easiest way to get people to follow you on Snapchat is when you're with them in person, where it's simple to share your username (and make sure you've spelled it correctly) or your snapcode. Add by Username If you want to add someone by username, open Snapchat and tap Add Friends. Then tap Add by Username. Finally, type in the username ("johnleedumas," for example) and tap the plus sign. Add by Snapcode An increasingly popular way to add people to your Snapchat is to give them your snapcode. You'll find your unique snapcode on your home screen. Someone can take a picture of your code with their phone and then easily add you, and vice versa. To add people by snapcode, first you take a picture of their snapcode with your phone. Then open Snapchat and tap Add by Snapcode. Next, tap the snapcode of the person on your camera roll. Finally, tap Add Friend. Another cool feature of snapcodes is that you can simply open Snapchat, point your camera at your friend's snapcode, and tap and hold the snapcode. This will automatically add that person. #2: Post Your Snaplink on Your Social Channels Leveraging other social platforms is another great way to increase your Snapchat following. You can share your username and snapcode like in step 1; however, the easiest way for someone to add you on Snapchat is online with your snaplink. Similar to unique snapcodes, everyone has an individual snaplink. You can share your personal snaplink on other social platforms, and even in your emails to your audience. To create your personal snaplink, simply type snapchat.com/add/ and then your username (for example, snapchat.com/add/johnleedumas). Snaplinks are powerful, because you can simply tap on someone's snaplink on your smartphone, and the Snapchat app will automatically open and add that person. No other steps are required and there's no username to memorize. #3: Engage With Users on GhostCodes GhostCodes can help you grow your Snapchat following even faster. The app makes it easy for people with similar interests to find one another without requiring a previous connection outside of Snapchat. Think of GhostCodes as a phonebook for Snapchat. You create a profile on the app and upload your snapcode so others can add you on Snapchat. You can also browse the app's directory to follow other Snapchat users based on categories that interest you. How's how to get started with GhostCodes. Set Up Your Profile First, download the GhostCodes app from the App Store or Google Play. Then open the app and create your account. Fill in your personal information, including your Snapchat username and a brief bio. Next, you're prompted to add your snapcode. To do this, open Snapchat and tap on the little ghost icon to see your snapcode. Then take a screenshot of it. (On iOS, press and hold the Home and power buttons simultaneously. On Android, press and hold the Home and volume-down buttons simultaneously.) Next, go back to GhostCodes and tap the ghost on your screen. The screenshot you just took will appear and you've now added your snapcode! Finally, add your interests (this will help other like-minded people find you). Select a category that best fits the type of content you create on Snapchat. You can only pick one category, but you can change it later if needed. For example, select Inspirational as your category, so other users searching the Inspirational category can find you. Use the App After setting up your account,

How a Simple Productivity Tool Helped Create the World’s Best Marketing Blog

by Glen @ ViperChill

Today’s blog post will reveal my biggest goal for 2016, nine niche ideas with huge potential and the most effective productivity technique I’ve used over the last few years. Let’s begin by talking about the productivity technique which is often referred to as the Pomodoro Method. If you’ve followed any kind of productivity guide online […]

8 Ways to Use Google+ Hangouts for Your Business

8 Ways to Use Google+ Hangouts for Your Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Google+ Hangouts? Interested in ways to use them for your business? Google+ Hangouts are a great way to hold group meetings, interact with customers, interview people and share your expertise. In this article you'll discover eight ways to use Google+ Hangouts for your business. Listen to this article: A Quick Introduction to Google+ Hangouts Before getting into ways to use Google+ Hangouts, here's a quick look at the types available. For public Google+ Hangouts, you'll want to choose Google+ Hangouts on Air. Google+ Hangouts on Air allow you to have up to 10 hosts in a live hangout that is publicly accessible on Google+, your YouTube channel and your website. You can record hangouts directly to your YouTube channel for future use. For private Google+ Hangouts, choose Google+ Video Hangouts, which allow you to have up to 10 participants in a video chat that is accessible only to the people invited. You can run Google+ Hangouts from your desktop browser or by using the recommended Google apps. Try running a private Google+ Hangout with yourself and a select group of people to start with, so you can install the proper browser software and test out the controls before you go live with a hangout. Google+ Hangout Controls & Apps At the top of a Google+ Hangout, you see controls that (from left to right) allow you to invite people to the hangout, mute your microphone, turn off your webcam, adjust your bandwidth settings, configure your video and sound settings and end the hangout. In the left sidebar you'll find apps that allow you to do specific things during the hangout, some of which are available only in hangouts on air, not in the video hangouts. These apps may also be ordered differently depending on which ones you choose to use or have used in the past. Starting at the top in the above image, you find the Group Chat app icon, which opens a chat box on the right side of your hangout. This is a great way to invite a person to interact during the hangout, even if he or she isn't one of the 10 people in the video with you. Next, you have the Screen Share app icon. This allows you to share your screen to show slides, live software demos and other information on your desktop. The Tag icon allows you to showcase links from websites of your choosing on the right side of the hangout. These can be links to your website, social profiles, landing pages and other items that your hangout attendees and viewers would need. The Q & A icon allows you to specifically start a Q&A in the hangout. The Camera icon enables you to take a screenshot of the hangout while it's live. You can use this feature at a specific point during the hangout to create a thumbnail image to use for your YouTube video preview. You can also use it anywhere you're planning to promote the hangout replay. The Video Camera icon allows you to control who is being shown during the hangout and how guests will appear when they join the hangout. Use the UberConference app icon to create a conference call number that people can use to call in to the hangout if they're unable to access the live video stream. The Control Room app icon allows you to quickly control which participants in the hangout are seen and heard. You can also use it to kick people out of the hangout if needed. The Hangout Toolbox app icon triggers a box of features you can use to further enhance your hangout. In the example below, you can see how to add a lower-third banner with your name tagline or a custom overlay image so every person on the hangout is identified when they're on video. The Effects app icon toggles special effects you can use on your video during the hangout. These are more for personal use than business use. Finally, there's a YouTube app icon that allows you to choose a YouTube video to stream live during your hangout.

Making your shop more SEO friendly

Making your shop more SEO friendly


Tictail Help Center

There are many ways to get your shop to rank higher on Google, however there are no magic formulas that are guaranteed to work. But with this guide, we hope to help you get on your way. SEO (Search...

Google Analytics and Social Media: What Marketers Need to Know

Google Analytics and Social Media: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you track the return on your social media activity in Google Analytics? Want to discover some valuable shortcuts? To explore cool hacks for Google Analytics, I interview Annie Cushing. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Annie Cushing, Google Analytics expert and chief data officer at Outspoken Media digital marketing agency. She's a total analytics geek who loves teaching other marketers how to make the most of their analytics data. Annie explores Google Analytics, social reporting, dashboards, and more. You'll discover how to customize Google Analytics reports for yourself. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google Analytics and Social Media What's New in Google Analytics Starting May 15, 2017, Google Analytics will allow people to do remarketing across multiple devices. Annie explains that if someone visits your site on their mobile device and then comes back to it on their laptop, as long as they're logged into Google in both places, you'll be able to target them across their devices. This new capability is a huge step forward for remarketing audiences because few people shop only on their computer, tablet, or phone. Annie explains that Google previously relied on user IDs to offer remarketing features, but most businesses couldn't implement the technology very easily. Only advanced analysts could set it up for sites where users were highly incentivized to log in. Because most businesses don't have sites like that, this new ability is groundbreaking. Annie says one issue she regularly sees with clients is they seldom use Google Analytics for retargeting. Instead, they use AdWords and DoubleClick. However, Google Analytics enables marketers to get much more granular with targeting. For instance, you can serve an ad to someone who visited a certain page but didn't convert or to someone who put something in a cart but didn't check out. Hopefully, multiple-device retargeting will incentivize more people to take advantage of Google Analytics. Listen to the show to discover how a retargeting ad saved Annie last Christmas. Google Optimize Google recently announced they were releasing Google Optimize, a free tool for A/B testing. For example, say you want to experiment with product page design, such as the placement of the price or Buy button or different font colors or text. In an A/B test, you run two versions of your page and compare how each version performs. Up until this point, Optimizely has been the industry standard. At Social Media Examiner, we use Visual Website Optimizer. Annie believes Google Optimize is perfect for small- to mid-sized or even large businesses. (Google Optimize 360 is the enterprise-level version.) Annie recommends that businesses get what they can from the free version first. Then as your organization develops more sophisticated testing needs (for instance, reducing the bounce rate or increasing the conversion rate), consider paying for more advanced features. Annie also notes that Google Optimize is user-friendly. To move things around, you simply drag and drop. You don't have to ask a developer to customize the page for you. Listen to the show to hear my description of how optimizing tools work. Ad Blockers and Do-not-track Technology Annie explains how ad blockers and do-not-track tools impact your analytics data differently. If you run display ads on AdWords, then ad blockers will impact your overall effectiveness. As people choose to block ads, impressions and conversions will decrease. A lot of publishers,

Small Business Social: How to Build Relationships

Small Business Social: How to Build Relationships

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use social media to attract and engage customers? Are you wondering how you can use social media to market your business and drive sales? To learn how you can develop relationships with social media and content, I interview Jeff Korhan for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jeff Korhan, author of Built-In Social: Essential Social Marketing Practices for Every Small Business. He also trains and coaches small businesses on social media marketing at Jeff Korhan.com. Jeff shares his knowledge of and experience with social marketing from running his own small business, and how you can implement it into your business. You'll learn about the 'Social Marketing Process' and the importance of collaboration and cooperation. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Build Relationships With Content and Social Media What did the experience of running a local landscaping company teach you about social marketing? When Jeff first started his local landscaping business, he had just completed 10 years in the corporate world and was fairly ignorant of how small businesses operated. He started to research and study the industry he was about to move into and discovered by accident that small businesses were less formal than the corporate world. Even back then, people wanted to get to know you. Today it's something that can easily be done with social media. You'll find out what Jeff discovered about consumers and why it was the key to getting his business off the ground. Jeff explains how going door-to-door led him down the road to content marketing. Not only did he spend a lot of time with customers, he also spent time reaching out to other people in his industry. The one thing they all had in common was that they all used Yellow Pages for advertising. This led him to explore other options to stand out from his competitors. You'll discover what kind of advertising worked for Jeff and an example of an ad he used. Jeff figured out before the age of social media that he could get business by educating his consumers with his expertise. He started to look for a way to differentiate his business from local competitors and found out that there were a lot of unanswered questions. You'll find out what you need to do to resonate with your customers to help build your business. Listen to the show to find out why you need to start thinking of how you can be the source of answers and how educating people can make you an authority. The Social Marketing Process  Jeff explains the 3-step Social Marketing Process, which is: Content attraction Social engagement Sales conversion The first component is that content attracts attention. You should start at the beginning. Use content to attract the attention of people to help build an audience. You need to publish the information online, where people can find it. The second component is to engage with people and develop relationships using social media. Over time, once you have developed trust, this is when the third component, the sales conversion, almost becomes a byproduct if you've got a sales process in place and you know how to convert people to whatever it is you're selling. Jeff finds that some businesses don't have a reliable sales process. In his book, he writes about how to develop that process and if you have one, how to make it even better. When it comes to knowing what kind of content to produce,

How to Help Clients Understand SEO Audits

by Jessica Kandler @

For many marketers, search engine optimization is a key strategy to helping clients meet their online goals, but it can be a huge challenge to...

The post How to Help Clients Understand SEO Audits appeared first on .

3 Ways to Advertise on Twitter

3 Ways to Advertise on Twitter

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you thinking about running Twitter ads? Wondering what your options are? Twitter advertising isn't difficult to set up, and for a very small amount of money it can provide an additional stream of traffic, customers and revenue. In this article, you'll discover three cost-effective ways to advertise on Twitter. Determine Your Campaign Budget To control the cost of your campaign and minimize your risk, it's important to set a total and daily budget. This means you'll have to decide the value of a new follower, lead or click-through to your website. Listen to this article: When choosing the amount, you should pay less than the result is worth to you. Otherwise you'll lose money. Remember, though, to take into account the lifetime value of a new customer or lead, not just the initial value of that first action. When you're satisfied with the numbers, set aside the total amount of money you're prepared to spend; this is your total budget. Divide your total budget by the number of days you're going to run your campaign (say three or four days); this is your daily maximum budget. Adjust these figures as necessary, depending on your comfort level and the metrics that apply to your business. Remember, your first attempts at Twitter advertising should be viewed as an experiment. It's an investment in figuring out the winning formula for your business. When you have your budget figures ready, it's time to set up advertising for the three most effective objectives: increasing followers, traffic and leads. #1: Attract New Followers Follower campaign ads are designed to increase visibility and grow your followers. They appear as Promoted Tweets in the person's timeline, and as Promoted Accounts in the Who to Follow boxes on the Home, Profile, and Search results pages. To create a Promoted Account campaign, go to Twitter Ads. If this is your first time in Twitter Ads, you'll be prompted to enter your country, time zone and payment details. Next, choose Followers from the Select a Campaign Objective menu, and give your new campaign a name. Set the campaign dates and select the audience you want to target with your campaign. Next, enter the location, gender and language of the people you want to reach and the devices you want your ads to appear on. You can further target your audience by the people they follow, their interests, behaviors and demographics, the events they're interested in and even the pets they have. There's a wealth of options for targeting the audience for your ads, but you don't want to choose too many in one go. When you add more than one audience feature, your ads will be shown to people who fit any of the criteria, rather than all of them, thus broadening your audience instead of narrowing it. The more tightly targeted your audience is, the easier it is to see which ads are performing and which are not. If there's a number of things you want to target, it's better to split them into separate campaigns so you can measure the results more effectively. A sensible starting point for your first campaign might be simply to target people who follow a competitor, or people who have a particular interest that you can select from the list. You can also upload your own lists of people to target by their email address or Twitter ID, or retarget people who visited your website. Once you've defined your audience, choose an amount you're comfortable with to set your daily maximum budget and a total budget for the campaign. Click on Show Advanced Options to see your pricing options. I recommend you set either a target bid, or a maximum bid, depending on how much a new follower is worth to you. Next, create some tweets that will show in mobile and web timelines. In your tweets, include the words "Follow us" and tell people why they should follow you. I recommend that you don't include an image or any links,

7 Best Practices (and Tools) for Managing Your Remote Content Team

by Caroline Maurer @ Content Marketing Institute

Do you manage a remote content team? Even if your employees work in the office, the team likely works virtually with freelancers and agencies. Learn seven tips – and tools – to help create a more efficient and effective team. Continue reading

The post 7 Best Practices (and Tools) for Managing Your Remote Content Team appeared first on Content Marketing Institute.

Instagram Marketing: How to Get Started With Instagram

Instagram Marketing: How to Get Started With Instagram

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Instagram for your business? Are you wondering how Instagram can help with your marketing? To learn how to get started with Instagram marketing, I interview Sue B. Zimmerman for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Sue B. Zimmerman, who is known as the Instagram Gal. Sue helps businesses use Instagram to find their ideal customers. She's used Instagram herself to increase traffic to her Cape Cod retail boutique by 40% in only 12 months. Sue shares the strategy behind her Instagram success. You'll learn how to take advantage of using photos and short videos and how to make the most of hashtags. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Instagram Marketing Why marketers should consider Instagram Sue states that she didn't know what Instagram was until a little over a year ago. She became curious when her twin daughters were using it. Sue shares that one of the reasons why marketers should consider Instagram is because it's mobile. It's a great way for your business to communicate directly with people with whom you want to build trust and credibility. There's no better way for people to see what you are up to. Instagram is a free mobile app, which you can download onto your iPhone or Android phone. It allows you to share photos or videos with your target market. It's very quick, easy and fun to use. There are 20 filters that you can have a lot of fun with. You'll discover why hashtags and @mentions are most important for marketers and businesses. Listen to the show to find out what type of image gets the most likes and comments for Sue. Who is Instagram ideally for and how does it differ from Pinterest? Sue believes they are similar but have slightly different approaches. Sue has a very active Pinterest account, which is also very successful for her boutique. Both Pinterest and Instagram have grown into their own thriving communities. With Instagram, you can tell a story with both photos and videos. As soon as you upload an Instagram image, you can see within seconds that someone has liked it. With Pinterest however, you tell people what you like. You curate your boards and highlight what you like from things that are already online. Sue gives an example of how she is able to seize opportunities presented to her with customers in her boutique. It's a great way to create a fun mood. The hashtags that you use to describe the image or the video are how people follow you or find you. You'll hear what hashtags Sue uses at an event and why it helps create more interaction. You have to remember that people look for certain hashtags for their industry to stay top of mind. From a business perspective, when an image grabs your attention, you can choose to click into the account and see if you want to follow the person. Once you start to follow an account, it will show up in your feed. You can also unfollow accounts at any time. Sue believes that she can put a visual strategy together for any kind of business. You'll hear the different types of businesses she has worked with. In the B2B world, it's not necessarily about the products you sell, it's about visual feelings. Images of sunsets, nature and oceans get a lot of likes because they are visually pleasing. It's not just about business. Listen to the show to find out what the benefits are when you share your passions visually as an individual. Examples of businesses that use Instagram well

Basic WordPress Maintenance Tips

by Scott Wyden Kivowitz @ TeslaThemes

As WordPress users, and site owners, it’s our responsibility to properly maintain our sites. Whether we do it ourselves or hire a company to do it for us – either way, it’s crucial to do these regular tasks. Backups This might be the most important of all ongoing maintenance that all site owners should be […]

The post Basic WordPress Maintenance Tips appeared first on TeslaThemes.

How to Perform a Detailed Analysis of Your Social Media Competitors

How to Perform a Detailed Analysis of Your Social Media Competitors

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want better results from social media? Have you considered researching your competitors? If you're not getting the results you want from social media, a little research and the right tool can help you refine your social media strategy. In this article, you’ll discover how to perform a detailed competitive analysis and improve your social strategy. Why Competitor Analysis? Competitor analysis lets you discover how your competitors use social media. You can see how your competitors position themselves on social media, what they share and how their audience responds. You can also find out what social media networks work best for your competitors, what information you should include in your social profile and page bios and what types of status updates get the most engagement. Listen to this article: While you can gain these insights for free on your own, it takes time to find multiple competitors' social accounts, collect all of the data (followers, engagement, etc.) and then analyze that data. To show how using a tool can help you gather the data more quickly and present it in an easy-to-analyze format, this article uses Rival IQ as an example. Now, let's look at how to do social media analysis and apply what you learn to improve your social media strategy. #1: Create a Landscape With You and Your Competitors To get started, you'll want to sign up for a free 14-day trial of Rival IQ's service. If you're just doing a one-time analysis of your competitors' social media strategy, you should be able to get it done before the free trial period ends. Otherwise, you'll want to choose a plan that best fits your needs. For each company (including your own), you'll be able to analyze and monitor one account per social network (Facebook, Twitter, Google+, Instagram and YouTube). Once you set up your account, create your first landscape by clicking the + button under the Landscape drop-down menu at the top left. In the dialog box that appears, enter the name for your landscape and click the Create Landscape button. Next, enter the website address for your company and select it from the drop-down list if it appears. Then click the Add to Landscape button. This will allow you to compare your social media presence and content against your competitors'. After Rival IQ confirms that your company has been added, continue adding your top competitors. Enter each competitor's website address and click the Add to Landscape button each time. When you're finished adding companies, click Done Adding Companies. When you click Done, your screen will refresh to show your landscape's dashboard. Rival IQ will confirm the accounts it has found for your company and your competitors. If the companies are new to their system, it might take a little while to update, but usually no more than 24 hours. If you know that one of your competitors has an account on a network that Rival IQ didn't find, you can hover over it and suggest it to them. They'll usually add it within 24 hours. In the above example, the only accounts Rival IQ didn't find were the ones that didn't exist for the specified companies. Once everything is set up, you're ready to start your analysis. #2: Find Social Engagement Opportunities Begin your analysis with the social networks where your competitors have profiles and pages. This should tell you at a glance if you're missing a network that might be beneficial for your social media strategy. In this case, you might assume that out of all of the networks, Instagram is the least important because a few of your competitors don't have a presence there. But that might not always be true, which you'll see shortly. In addition to seeing what social networks your competitors are on, check to see which ones they have the largest audiences on. You can do this by clicking the Cross-Channel link in the left sidebar and then clicking on Detailed Metrics at the to...

Failing to Start: Why We Accept Mediocrity and How to Change

Failing to Start: Why We Accept Mediocrity and How to Change

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you accept your lot in life? Are you afraid of starting something new? To learn how to accept who we are and how to make a change, I interview Seth Godin for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Seth Godin, the bestselling author of Purple Cow, Tribes, Linchpin and many others. His most recent book is The Icarus Deception. He's also the CEO of Squidoo. Seth shares his experiences of having an idea and going for it, even if you think it might fail. You'll learn why he thinks everyone should be willing to fail and why art is so important. You'll also discover how Seth used Kickstarter to fund The Icarus Deception. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Taking Risks The idea behind The Icarus Deception The idea behind The Icarus Deception was Seth's manifesto rant that will hopefully shine some light on the revolution that he thinks we are living with right now. Seth explains how people don't understand the impact of the Industrial Revolution of 1880–1910. Before 1880, there was no such thing as jobs. The unemployment rate was zero and most people worked on the land or for their family business. The Industrial Revolution changed this and it also changed government, regulations, school, culture and society. It invented the weekend. We accept all this because it happened before we were born. You'll discover why right now we have a new revolution that is replacing the fading industrial age. What's happening now is that we have a revolution built with the connection we have about ideas, people to people and the ability to reach markets. We'd have never thought back then that one person working by him- or herself anywhere in the world with a laptop could touch a million or a billion people. Seth talks about how PSY, who made the Gangnam Style video in South Korea, was viewed 900 million times and how this was impossible 15 years ago. When Seth wrote Permission Marketing 12 years ago, he didn't realize that he was writing about a different way to make connections with people. He believes that it isn't about Facebook or Twitter, it's about a passion for doing things that might not work. The industrial age is about polishing things so they do work. It's the giant gap. Seth wants to teach people to like the idea of doing something that might not work. Listen to the show to find out more about why it's connections that create all of the value in business. Why the commonly told version of the Icarus story is no longer relevant Seth believes that all myths are true, to the extent that although there are no supernatural beings involved, they're about us. Myths have developed over thousands of years to talk to human beings about how to be our best selves. The myth involves Icarus and his father Daedalus stranded on an island. Daedalus fashions some wings for his son and says, "Put these on, but don't fly too high because if you do, the sun will melt the wax and you will die. But more importantly, don't fly too low because the mist in the water will get in your wings and you will surely perish." Seth explains the reason why the industrialists want us to fly too low is because they benefit from this. Listen to the show to find out why Seth thinks we are flying too low and what he wants us to do about it. The meaning of art Seth shares his definition of art. Art is the work of a human being doing something that has never been done before,

3 Instagram Analytics Tools for Marketers

3 Instagram Analytics Tools for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your business ready for Instagram's algorithm? Looking for tools to analyze your Instagram engagement? Tracking engagement will help you serve quality content that keeps you at the top of the Instagram feed. In this article you'll discover three tools to track and evaluate how people respond to your content on Instagram. Listen to this article: Instagram's Feed Algorithm Last week, Instagram announced that they'll be releasing an algorithm that will prioritize what's shown in users' feeds. This algorithm will determine what content Instagram believes people will be most interested in and then show the most relevant posts at the top of the feed, regardless of how many accounts users follow or what time zone they're in. If you do content marketing on Facebook, you know how important it is to make sure you're ranked highly within a social media platform's algorithm. Algorithms that prioritize content in a user's feed can (and will) inevitably affect your business on those platforms. When the Instagram algorithm kicks in, maintaining high levels of engagement will help keep your content on top, whether you're a small company or a large one. Why You Need Instagram Analytics Tools As the algorithm launch approaches, it's important to use analytics tools to see which portion of your Instagram audience is interacting with what content, what content is performing best, and which audience segments you may be missing. As you learn from these analytics, you can create stronger and more relevant content that your audience will be more receptive to. Though Instagram shares the same ad platform as Facebook, the platform does not yet have an analytics tool like Facebook's Insights and Audience Insights. Fortunately, there are a number of third-party Instagram analytics tools available for businesses and marketers to measure their marketing efforts. The following three tools will help you to track and evaluate the success of your content and overall marketing efforts on Instagram. #1: Simply Measured Simply Measured advertises its analytics tool as being the "end-to-end analysis of all your social media networks," and this includes Instagram. It can be a great tool for marketers. Simply Measured offers a variety of reports and analyses, some of which are free and some are available only with a paid plan. When you first visit the site, you can get a free user report on any Instagram account (with up to 25,000 followers) in exchange for following the company on Twitter. This user report provides an in-depth analysis of the past two months, including your top post, best days and hours for engagement, top photo tags, top filters, and the amount and types of engagement you've received on your posts. Additional analytics tools come with pricing plans starting at $500 a month, and include features like cross-platform analysis, social brand and hashtag monitoring, and the ability to add unlimited users to the account at no additional charge. #2: Iconosquare Iconosquare is a go-to tool for anything Instagram, including contests, management tools, and so on. It's also true for analytics. Iconosquare's analytics allow you to track important metrics like follower growth and losses, best times to post for maximum engagement, engagement rates, and engagement growth. It also shows your best performing content, both in terms of likes and comments. Iconosquare offers a 7-day free trial, during which you can access the analytics information to see if the tool is right for you and for your business's needs. The plus plan is currently $28.80 a year and includes features like daily email reports, comment trackers, and analytics on the key Instagram metrics discussed above. #3: Sprout Social Sprout Social is a popular tool that many businesses already use, and it offers detailed reporting on a profile's Instagram activity. You can find analytics under the Reports section.

How to Tell Stories With Facebook and Instagram Carousel Ads

How to Tell Stories With Facebook and Instagram Carousel Ads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to make sure your ads stand out on Facebook and Instagram? Have you tried Carousel Ads? While many businesses use Carousel Ads solely to promote products, the ads also provide an excellent opportunity to showcase your brand’s unique narrative. In this article, I’ll share how to use storytelling in carousel ads to promote your products and stand out from your competitors. Listen to this article: #1: Grab Attention With the First Image The first rule of storytelling (and advertising for that matter) is to start out strong. Be sure the first image in your carousel ad series grabs attention and makes sense on its own. Since users may not scroll through all of the images in the series, you want to get your message across right away. Otherwise, you risk confusing your audience and wasting impressions. For example, in Progressive's #ActYourAge carousel ads, the first image immediately stands out. It uses a white background, which is very different from normal photography on the platform, and has a man playing with a baby's mobile (also known as a carousel). The picture is so unexpected and kooky, the user can't help but read the line below: "Dump your parents' car insurance company. #ActYourAge." While your first image shouldn't rely on any of the others to get its point across, it should still be intriguing enough to get users to swipe through to the end. #2: Make Them Swipe With any story, the point is to keep the reader engaged throughout and ultimately to read through to the end. Just as authors want to keep their readers interested, the same is true with carousel ads. Once you've hooked the user with the first image, encourage continued engagement with the other images. This gives your brand more exposure and increased recall. This carousel ad by Tesco Foods certainly elicits the "I can't stop swiping" response. To see the entire photo users must swipe through all of them. This is a great example of drawing a user through a story and, in this case, a very delicious-looking one. Test out this concept for your brand. Use Photoshop's splice tool (or play with pictures in your favorite design program) to cut separate images from a larger one. #3: Create a Scene Relating to your audience and evoking emotion are the other important parts of storytelling. To do these, provide the context necessary for users to feel like they're right there with you. Place them at the scene. Choose photos carefully to create imagery for carousel ads. Then write copy to draw in your audience. The TV series Wet Hot American Summer did a great job getting their audience members to envision themselves at Camp Firewood. Pictures show the characters hanging out and doing things with their friends. Plus the image and copy pairing is so clever that users not only picture themselves there, they also remember how they felt when they attended summer camp years ago. Obviously it's easier to set the scene when you're advertising something with a plot, like a television show or movie. However, for products and services, figure out how your brand fits into your customers' lives and create a scene that demonstrates it. For example, if you're advertising a shirt, rather than show still images of it, think about the lifetime of the shirt. It goes from fresh and new in a package to being worn to being cleaned to being borrowed by a friend, etc. Photos that showcase a story create a plot, which evokes emotion from your customers. #4: Think Sequentially The order of events is essential to story comprehension. A well-edited sequence provides a natural pace to the story within your ad. Help move your users through your story. Showtime did a great job incorporating natural sequence into its recent ads around the second season of Penny Dreadful. In just four photos you can tell the story is about a man on the run. He shoots someone, says goodbye to his girlfriend and runs away to a church.

Using YouTube to Build Your Brand, Authority and Business

Using YouTube to Build Your Brand, Authority and Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use YouTube videos to market your business? Are you wondering how you can get more viewers and engagement for your channel? To learn about how YouTube can help you build your brand and authority, I interview Steve Spangler for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Steve Spangler, author of Fire Bubbles and Exploding Toothpaste and Naked Eggs and Flying Potatoes. He also has three YouTube shows focused on science experiments. They include Sick Science, The Spangler Effect and Spangler Science TV. Steve shares how he uses YouTube to build his brand and business and his experiences along the way. You'll learn how to measure feedback and metrics from your viewers to boost your video engagement and visibility. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: YouTube Visibility Steve's YouTube story Steve shares his story of how he first started out, and along the way started working in television with Denver NBC affiliate KUSA-TV 9News as their Science Education Contributor. You'll hear the story of how in September 2005, on Spangler Science Monday on NBC, Steve did one of his experiments on live TV with his co-anchor. The experiment was to drop a Mentos candy into a bottle of diet coke. The co-anchor he was working with didn't move away fast enough and she got covered in soda. This is how he wrote a post called "News Anchor Gets Soaked, Science Experiment Goes Awry." httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ZwyMcV9emmc The post went viral. And he got called into the office at Gannett, because they wanted to know what he had done to shut down the server. The video got a million views on YouTube back then. Steve says that although you don't get rich off of the video, you do acquire some business success when you find out what to do with the video or traffic. Listen to the show to find out how Steve's Mentos experiment led to an agreement with Mentos to produce Geyzer tube related toys. How YouTube is helping businesses Back in 2005, everyone was asking why you would put free content online. Steve had a feeling that it was the right thing to do. In 2007, he started uploading videos to YouTube because he believes that video helps brand awareness. Steve explains even though he has done television for 22 years and has made 1200 television appearances, he says that none of it compares to the quasi-celebrity you get with YouTube. There are people who know who you are, know your brand and are brought to your services because they see you on YouTube and they think that's the authority. Listen to the show to find out why you don't have to wait for anybody to give you that break and what you need instead. The strategy behind different YouTube show formats Steve's YouTube page is the main landing page for his channels. You'll find 600-700 videos. There are clips from old shows and old interviews. These are typically in a news format because that was the line of work he was in at the time. Sick Science was created because as a professional speaker, Steve is on the road a lot and his team needed to continue to pump content into the stream. Their editor and creator, Bradley Mayhew, came up with the idea to put the focus on the experiment and not the personality. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-RlzFmREfFI The only difference from the previous format was that they show a science experiment and in the comment section ask people to tell how they think it works.

Building Business Ideas That Succeed: How to Preflight Your Ideas

Building Business Ideas That Succeed: How to Preflight Your Ideas

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a great idea for a business? Is there a new product you want to create? To discover how to improve your chances for success, I interview Pat Flynn. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Pat Flynn, the host of the Smart Passive Income Podcast, who blogs at smartpassiveincome.com and helps hundreds of thousands of entrepreneurs and aspiring entrepreneurs build their dream businesses. His latest book is called Will it Fly? How to Test Your Next Business Idea So You Don't Waste Your Time and Money. Pat will explore how to increase the likelihood that your next product idea is successful. You'll discover ways to test and validate your ideas. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Building Business Ideas That Succeed How Pat's architect background has helped him in business When Pat started in online business, he taught architects how to take the lead exam. He shares that people reached out to him and thanked him for helping them in their careers, and he says that feeling was different from anything he experienced in the world of architecture. Pat talks about what he did and didn't like about working as an architect, and how the long-term process of breaking a giant project down into chunks helped him when he started in entrepreneurship. He says the process of working hard on a building, planning ahead, and not knowing what it will be like until people are actually using it all translate to building and launching product. Architects and entrepreneurs go through similar processes, Pat says. Each of them are building a solution for a client's problem. As you build it, you make changes, you pivot and you learn as you go. To be successful in any business you need to learn how to adapt and solve other people's problems. Listen to the show to learn what software skill Pat used in architecture that he still uses in business. Why Pat wrote a book about the pre-launch phase In addition to Pat's weekly Smart Passive Income podcast, he does a show called AskPat, during which he answers a voice mail question submitted from his audience via SpeakPipe. One of the most common questions asked is "How do I know if this idea I am working on is worth spending the time?" He tried to answer this question on both shows and found there wasn't enough time for him to cover the topic. The topic was validated through an audience survey (Pat uses SurveyMonkey) in early 2015, when he segmented the people who said they had yet to start a business. By far, their number one concern was not wanting to waste time on something that might not be successful. That's when Pat decided he needed to write a book to people with amazing ideas, that might be life-changing products or services, move forward. Listen to the show to hear the reason behind the title of Pat's new book. Making mistakes Assumptions are great because they are ideas, Pat explains. However, if you act on those assumptions without knowing whether it's something people would actually pay for, that's when you have an issue. Pat shares how a couple of WordPress plugin ideas he had turned into a $15,000 mistake. He didn't discuss the ideas with anybody because it was such a good idea, he didn't want to share it. Plus, he wanted to keep it a secret in order to have an awesome reveal on launch day. Had he simply discussed these ideas with his target audience and people in his mastermind groups, it would have been clear that the idea was merely a starting point. He could have gotten feedback and turned it into something that would actually wo...

26 Tips to Improve Your Pinterest Marketing

26 Tips to Improve Your Pinterest Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Could your Pinterest marketing use a jumpstart? Are you curious about what's working for other businesses? Tweaking techniques that have been successful for others can help you drive traffic, connect with your target audience, and increase sales. In this article, you'll discover 26 tips to improve your Pinterest marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Share Pin It for Later Links The Pin It button encourages users to pin content from your site onto their own boards. Engagement is captured even when users aren't on the platform. The same idea holds true for Pin It for Later links. You can post Pin It for Later links, along with the prompt "Pin it for Later" across social media. To create a Pin It for Later link, attach the URL of the pin you want users to save, add it to a post on social media after explaining what it is, and attach it to the phrase "Pin it for later!" This is a great way to drive traffic to Pinterest and build up repins. #2: Add 20-30 Keywords in Promoted Pins Keywords are the most important targeting feature you can use with promoted pins. Pinterest recommends that you use 20-30 keywords per promoted pin. That's just enough to get you noticed, but not so many that you're showing your content to the wrong people. Using a large number of keywords can help you cover all of the broad, specific, short, and long keywords you need. You'll show up better in searches when users are looking for content like yours, and it helps ensure that your pin is placed in the right category. These keywords won't show up on promoted pins; they work instead like targeting criteria, matching your content with the people looking for it. Think outside the box. Dollar Shave, for example, recently promoted their razors for Father's Day gifts, and attached a Father's Day keyword even though it's not a direct description of the product. #3: Feature Multiple Products in Single Pins Featuring multiple products in your pins can help them to get more engagement. This tactic can add value to a single pin for two reasons: first, you show users how many amazing things you have to offer; and second, you have a better chance of appealing to more users by featuring more options. You can feature multiple complementary products (like an assembled outfit from your collection) or show multiple uses for a single product (like six types of crafts that use mason jars). Not only does this increase the chance of appealing to more users, but it can also lead to larger sales. #4: Capitalize on Image Height Pinterest's pages are full of vibrant, high-quality, colorful images. So how do you make yours stand out? Image size (or image dimension) matters a great deal. While Pinterest automatically scales all images you upload to match the exact width, you choose the height of your images. Vertical pins (pins that appear taller) perform better on Pinterest. It's recommended that you use image dimensions from about 2:3 and 1.3:5 (with the minimum recommended width being 600 pixels). Note: While you can design pins with the extended dimensions 1.2:8, pins that reach the maximum height don't perform quite as well. #5: Include Text Overlay on Images While descriptions matter, images reign supreme on Pinterest. However, visuals still need a little help sometimes. To catch the attention of users scrolling quickly through feeds, add text overlay directly onto your images to make them stand out and explain why your pin and the content behind it are so valuable. In most cases, text shouldn't make up the majority of the pin. It can, however, be helpful to show off step-by-step tutorials, listicles, or a few words telling pinners what the pin is. Keep the text simple, the phrases short, and all of it easy to read. Bold text can make the description stand out. Plus, make sure the text is strongly contrasting in color from the rest of the image. #6: Choose Light Over Dark Images

Instagram Ad Rollout Will Make It the Top Media Buy: New Research

Instagram Ad Rollout Will Make It the Top Media Buy: New Research

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Instagram for your business? Have you thought about advertising on the platform? Instagram just began offering paid advertising opportunities through select developer partners. In the coming months the platform is expected to create a Facebook-like self-serve option for any budget. In this article you'll discover findings from studies about Instagram's current reach, and the potential to reach targeted audiences with ads. Evolution of Instagram Ads In December 2014, Instagram reported its user base hit 300 million, 64.2 million from the U.S. alone. More exciting to brands and marketers than strict user numbers, however, was the engagement rate. Instagram users like, comment and re-gram at a rate of between 3.1% (Socialbakers research) to 4.2% (Forrester research). Comparably, Twitter and Facebook posts have engagement rates of .07% and below. Listen to this article: With population and engagement numbers like these, of course brands wanted to get access to Instagram audiences. For three years now, Facebook has been working on the correct advertising mix for Instagram. Until June 2015, businesses could only reach Instagram audiences by posting content, commenting, sharing and liking consumer posts. Instagram's few brand partners could place sponsored posts, much like Facebook's boosted posts. Strict ads, however, were not available. In June 2015, Instagram rolled out the call-to-action buttons Shop Now, Learn More and Install Now, which take users to mini-apps within Instagram, rather than brand websites. That way, users stay on Instagram once they've shopped, learned and installed. Now Instagram has provided advertising opportunities for all brands… provided you enter via one of their developer partners. These partners include Ampush, Brand Networks, 4C, Kenshoo, Nanigans, Salesforce Marketing Cloud, SocialCode and Unified. They require a minimum spend, so if you're a small business, you won't be able to take advantage of Instagram's new advertising opportunities until later in the year. Facebook's advertising followed the same path: It offered advertising to certain brands and then eventually made ads user-friendly enough that a developer intermediary was not needed. If you don't have the budget to utilize developer intermediaries, now is a good time to familiarize yourself with Instagram so that when the ads roll out to everyone, including small businesses, creating and posting an ad will be a simple task. On its blog, Instagram explains: Instagram ads will be available to advertisers of all types later this year. We are currently testing self-serve buying interfaces and APIs with a small group of partners, and we expect to make them more widely available over the coming months. With the context understood, small- and medium-sized businesses must evaluate whether Instagram is the right place for them. The following research will help with these decisions. #1: Instagram's Access to Facebook Data Offers a Significant Opportunity Lighting a fire under many marketers, Instagram currently doesn't have the pay-to-play platform that Facebook instituted in spring 2013. Before that point, companies that had built Facebook audiences had the luxury of getting each post to nearly every earned follower. Facebook then dropped organic reach to 6% and lower, forcing companies to pay to boost posts for as little as $1 per day if they wanted to reach more of their earned audience. Conversely, on Instagram, for the foreseeable future, each post will reach close to 100% of its earned audience… free! Well, free except for the time costs and any costs involved with Instagram's partners or other outside consulting. When Instagram will go to the Facebook-style pay-to-play platform is unclear. Until that time, you'll save significant marketing dollars experimenting with which content wins the most attention, engagement and likes. This said,

Online Reviews for Local Businesses: What Marketers Need to Know

Online Reviews for Local Businesses: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you own or manage a local business? Are you leveraging the full power of online reviews? To discover how to leverage online review services, I interview Martin Shervington. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Martin Shervington, one of the world's leading experts on Google+ and Google for Business. As a trainer, speaker and consultant, he helps marketers understand how to best utilize Google's services. Martin will explore online reviews for local businesses. You'll discover how to get reviews for your business, as well as how to respond to negative reviews. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Online Reviews for Local Businesses Google for business In June 2014 Google launched Google My Business, which simplifies how people set up pages. Part of this is for local businesses, so they can appear on a map, get reviews and so on. Martin has been doing research on this and says businesses are not quite connecting the dots on Google+ marketing and using this powerful tool. He says as of last year, only 37% of businesses had claimed their Google listing, 63% have not. Listen to the show to discover more about Google My Business. The impact of reviews Martin has spoken to hundreds of businesses (owners and staff) about reviews. People use reviews as a socialized way to judge the businesses around them, which get more customers as a result of reviews. For example, Martin shares, Tasty Thai in San Mateo can attribute thousands of dollars of revenue to one single positive Yelp review from a guy who had been to Thailand and loves their Thai food. At the moment Yelp has a lot of people's attention, and Martin hopes Google reviews will get to that level as well. Reviews can bring tourists, new people and new business. The downside is there's the potential for negative reviews. "[Businesses have to have] good service, good product and sometimes be willing to say when you haven't got it 100% right," Martin says. Listen to the show to hear about an amazing experience I had while traveling, based on a Yelp review. Google listings Martin explains how Google sometimes auto-generates a business listing, and a lot of people's businesses are listed without them knowing about it. To determine if your business has an auto-generated listing, Google your location to see if anything comes up. If it doesn't, go to Google.com/business to set one up. If it is already set up, click where it says "claim this listing," so you can control uploading photos, reply to posted reviews and more. When you set up a page on Google they verify it by phone or by mail. There are two different types of local pages, Martin continues, a storefront and a service area. If you run your business from home, say you are a service area to hide your address. Once you've claimed your property or set up your page from scratch, there are several things you can do: change the profile image (which is the icon people see when you make comments or reply to reviews), change your cover photo, manage your photos, add what you do to the description area, post on that Google page, reply to reviews, share reviews and more. You can even embed the best reviews on your website. This is how you take the social proof you get from reviews and spread it onto your website. The Google My Business dashboard provides a higher-level frame-of-reference around the things that are connected to your business, such as analytics, your YouTube channel, the page insights and the Google+ page itself.

5 Creative Ways to Use Snapchat Geofilters for Business

5 Creative Ways to Use Snapchat Geofilters for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for new ways to increase your Snapchat visibility? Have you thought about using Snapchat geofilters? When applied creatively, Snapchat geofilters can help you increase brand awareness, engage your community, and reach new audiences. In this article, you'll discover five unique ways to use Snapchat geofilters for business. Listen to this article: Why Geofilters? Snapchat's rise has been meteoric. Over 100 million users watch 10 billion video clips daily. The platform has transformed video storytelling, and its native tools have incredible social media marketing value. Now, you can create your own specific geofilters and use them to advertise to your audience. Snapchat geofilters are the perfect way to harness your audience's attention, because they're already digesting your content. Geofilters make it easier for your audience to engage and promote your product or brand organically. Here are some ways to use Snapchat geofilters for your business. #1: Announce New Product Launches When launching a new product, you want to encourage your community to find out more about it and ultimately make a purchase. By using a Snapchat geofilter, you're showing your audience that your products are important and worthy of branded filters. You're also adding a marketing element that connects the audience emotionally to the brand. Everlane's Elevate Summer used branded geofilters for its summer collection. The company also partnered with magazine editors for Snapchat takeovers. On the Everlane Snapchat account, the editors gave their opinions on collection favorites. With this approach, you can showcase the importance of a new product line and give real-time insights to your community on what products to check out. When you want to catch the eye of your audience for new products, create a Snapchat geofilter. #2: Share Company Culture To promote company culture and your business offerings, you can create a Snapchat geofilter for your office. Employees could become your biggest digital advocates as they use the geofilter to share with their communities. You can encourage employees to share behind-the-scenes events at your company or interview colleagues about their favorite parts of their job. This one-to-many sharing can impact your company in a positive way and your reach will be exponential. Sharing your company's strengths to a larger audience will encourage top talent to want to join the team. For Partner Day, HubSpot created a special geofilter using their signature orange hue. Employees and partners used the geofilter to highlight the best moments of the day. To encourage sharing, design a geofilter as a digital name tag that will allow users to insert text about who they are and what they do. Empower your employees to engage on Snapchat with a branded geofilter. It will help boost company morale and audience reach. #3: Promote Charity Events Using geofilters for live events creates an inclusive element that bonds the community. For charity events, they can help build awareness for a cause. Creating Snapchat geofilters for events will add an element of surprise and delight for your guests and will allow people to share the event in real time. They can also increase visibility and messaging in a fun and effective way. Imprint.City, a non-profit focusing on cultivating community through art, hosted a masquerade charity event to raise awareness. Because the attendees were already going to use social media at the event, organizers created a Snapchat filter to make the event more digitally accessible. Many community influencers used the filter, which helped spread the word about the organization and its cause. You can also use the snaps taken by your guests for future marketing materials. Promote them on other social networks or in pamphlets for fundraising efforts. #4: Support Your Presence at Trade Shows Getting prospects to your booth at trade shows can be a str...

Launching With Social: A Study of What Works and What Does Not

Launching With Social: A Study of What Works and What Does Not

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you planning to launch a new blog, product or service? Do you want to know how to organize and execute a successful launch with social media? To share ways you can use social media to launch or celebrate anything, this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast gives techniques and insights learned from the launch of My Kids' Adventures' Parenting Adventures podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, you'll learn how to plan your launch and what assets to include. You'll also find out what worked for us and what didn't. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Launching With Social Start the launch process The first thing I did was to prepare a PowerPoint presentation for people on the internal team. If you're a one person show, you can prepare the same ideas and present them to a friend or even to yourself. What's important is to go through the process below. First you need to identify the audience you want to target. As part of the annual survey for Social Media Examiner and My Kids' Adventures, we asked two questions.: "Do you listen to podcasts?" and "Are you a mom or a dad?". Based on the responses we were able to determine that dads listen to podcasts more than moms which helped us to resize our expectations. You then need to identify your biggest asset. Whenever you launch anything, you should use what I call tag-along marketing. You've built an audience somewhere - with a blog, a newsletter, an existing podcast. This asset you own is there for you to use. Piggyback some of the marketing efforts for your new venture on it. My biggest asset was the Social Media Marketing podcast. Next take a look at who you're up against. I looked at the Kids & Family category and identified Sesame Street, Adventures in Odyssey and other podcasts from established brands that have been around forever as competitors. You need to establish what your product is all about. To wrap everyone's heads around Parenting Adventures, I simply shared that it's a 30 minute interview show followed by a fun activity. Then choose your launch date. The Parenting Adventures podcast launched on Friday, June 13, 2014. Listen to the show to hear why this date was chosen to launch the Parenting Adventures podcast. Find the best way to launch One of my strongest assets are the relationships we've built. From these relationships, I was able to identify different "camps" of people we could reach out to for their support. One of the obvious camps was staff and contractors who work for our company. For the second camp, we identified allies from the bloggers and podcasters the My Kids' Adventures marketing team has been building relationships with for a year. Another camp included people who write for My Kids' Adventures and the last camp was made up of my personal friends. Listen to the show to find out other things we had in the launch pipeline. Leverage your website traffic When people come to your website to read an article, they might discover you have something more to offer. We added the Parenting Adventures podcast to the website navigation bar at the top of the page, to the sidebar and the About Us page. I also put together a 'help us spread the word' page to give people everything they need to promote the show for us. On that page I included a video to thank people for their participation. Listen to the show to discover how we are using this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast to promote Parenting Adventures. Make it frictionless

How to Make Instagram Ads That Stand Out

How to Make Instagram Ads That Stand Out

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to advertise on Instagram? Ready to take your Instagram ads to the next level? Instagram has quietly rolled out some great features to help advertisers grab attention and drive traffic. In this article you'll discover four features you can use to create Instagram ads that stand out. Listen to this article: #1: Drive Traffic to Your Website Until recently, Instagram ads only supported the objectives of mobile app installs, video views, and reach/engagement. Now you can choose from two additional ad objectives: Clicks to Website and Website Conversions. This is the first time businesses have been able to send users to their site from individual posts, rather than just through their sole profile link. This could be a game-changer in making Instagram a stronger sales tool. You can use both of these objectives in photo, video, and carousel ads, so you'll be able to use every type of ad format for both clicks and conversions. Viewers will see a sponsored ad with an image, a description, and a clickable call-to-action button that will take them to your site. Call-to-action buttons include the options you're already familiar with from Facebook, including Book Now, Contact Us, Shop Now, and Learn More. To create these ads, choose either Send People to Your Website or Increase Conversions on Your Website for the objective. Next, you can add a pixel to your campaign. If you choose Increase Conversions on Your Website for the objective, you'll be asked to choose what type of conversion to optimize for. Now continue to create the ad as usual, and make sure that you select the appropriate call to action. The call to action is the only clickable part of the ad, so it needs to be appealing and match your offer. #2: Stand Out With Landscape Images Previously, the images and videos you shared on Instagram had to be cropped into a square format. While that option is still available, you can now use landscape and portrait formats as well. These formats allow you to make your images taller or wider than the square format allows. This gives you more cropping options to ensure your images show everything you want in them. Plus, the unusual formats help your posts stand out in Instagram's feed. When creating an Instagram ad, you choose the format of your image in the creative section. Once you upload or select your image, you'll see an option to crop it. When you click the gray button and select Instagram, the cropping window gives you two options for cropping your image. Click Original to crop it based on the image's original format (landscape or portrait), or click Square to crop it as a square. In the image below, you can see how different cropping options affect what users see in the feed. Keep in mind that carousel ads are currently only available in square formats. #3: Tell a Story With Carousel Ads To create image carousel ads for Instagram, you need to connect your Instagram account to Facebook. This is easy to do if you haven't done it already. Facebook carousel ads are well-known and frequently used, and they're also available for Instagram ads. Businesses typically use Facebook carousel ads to feature multiple products or benefits in one ad, in an effort to increase sales. However, one of the best uses for Instagram's carousel ads is storytelling. Although Instagram can be used as a selling platform, businesses use it more often for engagement, building brand rapport, and increasing followers. Telling a story or narrative through multiple images can help you accomplish all of these goals. You can create a carousel ad in the creative section of the ad setup process. As soon as you get to the creative page, you're asked how you want your ad to look. You can choose a single image, a video, or multiple images in one ad. For carousel ads, choose the Multiple images in one ad option. Next,

Optimize Your Squarespace Contact Page

Optimize Your Squarespace Contact Page

by Christine Darby @ Blog | Squarespace, MailChimp | Collaborada

What is a “well designed” contact page, and how do you know if you’re getting it right? Keep reading! 

Ultimate WordPress SEO Guide for Beginners (Step by Step)

Ultimate WordPress SEO Guide for Beginners (Step by Step)


WPBeginner

Want to improve your WordPress SEO? Here are all the WordPress SEO best practices, tips, and the best WordPress SEO plugins that you need to know about.

6 Ways to Improve Engagement With Social Media Content

6 Ways to Improve Engagement With Social Media Content

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you struggle to get your fans to engage? Interested in ideas to get people talking? Simple content ideas can give you something to talk about, even if you feel like you don't have anything new or original to say. In this article you'll discover six ways to create social media conversations with content. Listen to this article: #1: Ask Your Audience Questions Everyone wants to be heard, so consider asking questions in your social media posts. This gives your audience the opportunity to chime in with their opinions, tips and wisdom. Inviting people to join the conversation makes them feel like your company cares about what they have to say. It also provides insights into your audience that can inform your marketing decisions. Prior to opening a new location, YO! Sushi asked their Facebook followers to guess where the new location would be, based on photos of local landmarks. Everything that Loot Crate does on social media pertains to the gamer and geek culture. In this Facebook post Shenron the dragon asks the audience a question from Anime Expo. Female Entrepreneur Association is all about inspiring and empowering female entrepreneurs and creating a community for them. The question posed below not only engages their audience, but also creates a sense of community among members who are planning to attend the same conference. Money Crashers, which provides expert information on personal finance, flips the script in this post and asks the audience to share their tips. Asking a simple question like "Where in the world are you?" is an easy way to connect with people and find out more about them. This Facebook post from Sprouting Photographer provides an inspirational quote and then asks followers to share their favorite quotes. #2: Post Lighthearted or Humorous Content If you're having a rough day, lighthearted or humorous social content can lighten your mood a bit. You can be that ray of sunshine for your followers, and at the same time, develop meaningful relationships. The Honest Company, whose mission is to empower people to live happy and healthy lives, does a great job of using graphics. The brand is lighthearted, so this amusing post ties in perfectly. If you see content that makes you smile, it will probably make your followers smile as well. In this post Save The Date Wedding Podcast shares a cute animal video from BuzzFeed. Headspace, a meditation app, posts graphics that people can identify with and asks followers to tag friends on Instagram who are like-minded. Denise Duffield-Thomas has an audience of female entrepreneurs who work from home, so she knew this photo of a smartphone cover would make them laugh. #3: Show Off Your Personal Side The more people connect with you on a personal level, the more likely they are to do business with you. If you're a business owner, give people a glimpse into your personal life. If you're a marketer, show what it's like behind the scenes of your company. This post from business strategist Amber McCue reminds people that she, too, is juggling a family life and career. By sharing this post about her kids, she connects with other entrepreneurial moms. Fizzle focuses on helping people start businesses. They post behind-the-scenes photos of their staff spending time together, which helps them connect with their audience. Even Oprah takes readers behind the scenes on her social accounts. In this Instagram post she's learning to make Tibetan dumplings for a lesson she showed on Periscope. Natalie Sisson's followers are interested in her Suitcase Entrepreneur lifestyle, and this Facebook post gives them a taste. #4: Share Inspirational Quotes We all love to be inspired. That's why posts with quotes are so popular on social media. When choosing quotes, keep in mind the perspective of your customers and what they hope to achieve. DailyWorth,

6 Ways to Use Advanced Twitter Search for Increased Influence

6 Ways to Use Advanced Twitter Search for Increased Influence

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to be a recognized expert in your industry? Looking for relevant conversations to weigh in on? Using Twitter's Advanced Search to monitor keywords and conversations can help you connect with influencers and uncover opportunities for thought leadership. In this article you'll discover six ways to use Twitter's Advanced Search to increase your influence in your industry. Listen to this article: #1: Find Conversations to Participate In Doing a keyword search on Twitter is a quick and easy way to find out what people in your industry are talking about, identify accounts to follow, and discover new business opportunities. With Twitter's Advanced Search, you can create complex searches with keywords that are relevant to your industry. To start, choose three or four keywords that are relevant to your industry and use the Boolean search operator "OR" to create a single search for all of your terms. For example, search for "digital marketing" OR "digital marketing advice." Look at the search results to find conversations in your niche. Then join relevant discussions to offer expert advice and build meaningful connections with people in your industry. Use the OR operator to ensure that every key phrase or search term is relevant to your mission. Keep this list updated and weed out the keywords that aren't helping you find the best results. Soon you'll have a filtered list of conversations to review on a daily basis. You can also add keywords like "recommend" to find prospects looking for services you offer. You can also use a keyword search to optimize your own Twitter profile. Add keywords to your bio to help other users find you. Including key phrases (such as "public speaker" and "charity worker") may help you uncover new opportunities. #2: Monitor Hashtags for Media Opportunities You can follow specific hashtags and keywords to discover people who are looking for thoughtful comments or quotes. For example, the hashtag #journorequest is popular among journalists and industry writers. You can create an advanced search that pairs both #journorequest and your key industry terms ("skincare expert" or "facial expert," for example) to find opportunities for free coverage in print and online. Once you've uncovered opportunities through hashtag monitoring, reach out to users to share your expert insights. This helps you get media coverage for your business and create meaningful connections. #3: Connect and Converse With Industry Peers Your influence is often measured by the network you keep. Use Twitter's Advanced Search filters to find key contacts and people to follow in your industry. Filter Results by Account In Twitter's search box, search for a keyword (or group of keywords). Then to filter your results, click More Options and select Accounts to see only those accounts that contain your keywords. Once you create a tailored list of key industry contacts, follow those users, add them to a list, or use a monitoring tool like TweetDeck to track what they're saying. Filter Results by People You Follow You can also limit your search to only the users you follow. To do this, enter your search term (for example, "social media data"). Then filter your results by clicking More Options and selecting From People I Follow. Your search results will only include tweets that match your search query and are from the accounts you follow. Filter Results by Date You can add a date range to find conversations relevant to your topics of interest and occurring within the last few weeks from users you follow. This gives you the opportunity to add comments, share your insights, and show thought leadership within your online peer group. Filter Results by People You can also use Twitter search to find previous conversations you've had with your contacts. This is a great way to revive relationships and build camaraderie.

How to Connect With Local Customers via Social Media

How to Connect With Local Customers via Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to increase your visibility in your local market? Wondering how social media can help? When you understand which features on social media support local marketing, you can focus the power of Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, and Instagram to expand influence in your little corner of the world. In this article you'll discover how to connect with local customers on the top social media networks. Listen to this article: #1: Connect With Customers on Facebook There may be over 1.4 billion active users on Facebook, but only a fraction of them live near your business. Fortunately, there are ways you can overcome the low organic reach of Facebook pages to engage your local customers. Promote Facebook check-ins at your business. When people check in, they're giving you free visibility in the news feed. Whether you incentivize check-ins (free coffee) or simply display visual reminders for customers to check in, this is a great way to promote your business to a local audience. Boost your posts. Facebook has added some targeting tools to boosted posts, including the ability to target lists you've uploaded through Facebook Ads Manager. Target a segmented email list of local people to make sure they see your important posts. Post an update to your business page, and then share it as yourself. This allows you to reach a wider audience. By sharing it personally, you can decide whom to share the post with and focus on people in your local community. Don't go overboard with this tactic, however. Your family may not enjoy an endless series of updates about your free ebook. Promote Facebook events. Hosting local events such as social media breakfasts, lunch and learns, or business after hours increases your visibility both online and off. Create a Facebook event and share it with your fans and friends or promote it. Everyone invited to the event will continue to see it in their notifications and in upcoming events unless they decline the invite. Again, focus your invites on people who live and work near you. Target Facebook ads to a local audience. Use the tools in the Ads Manager and Power Editor to target people based on their location. You can also upload your segmented email list to target local people with your ads. Create a lookalike audience based on your list. (Remember to add a filter so that all of the resulting people are still local.) #2: Reach Out to Your Community on Twitter Twitter may not be the social media behemoth that Facebook is, but it can be valuable for marketing to a local audience. Both your Twitter profile and your business's profile provide many opportunities to connect with the local community. For example, you can include a recognizable landmark in your header photo, mention your home team allegiance in your bio, or list your city or state in the location field. It's also helpful to set up Twitter lists, which allow you to create segmented groups of interesting people and businesses around a certain topic. If you're not using lists, you're probably swimming in noise in your news feed. For instance, I have a Mainers list to keep tabs on what people are saying in my home state and an Influencers list to track industry trends. Use a tool like Hootsuite or TweetDeck to pull lists into columns and improve your signal-to-noise ratio on Twitter. Lists need to be created manually. Chances are high, though, that someone has already created a list of people near you, whether you live in Oatmeal, Texas or Sandwich, Massachusetts. Look at the lists of some of the more connected people near you, and if you see one that's interesting, subscribe to it. Use Twitter's Advanced Search as a good way to find leads for your local business. Suppose you own a knitting store and want to find local knitters on Twitter. Go to Advanced Search and search for "knitting" or "knitters" or "yarn" within 15 miles of your store. On the results page,

5 Instagram Changes: What Marketers Need to Know

5 Instagram Changes: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you up to date with the latest Instagram changes? Want to know what the changes mean for marketers? In addition to a brand-new logo, Instagram has rolled out updates to its ad products, video features, and news feed algorithm. In this article, you'll discover how the most recent Instagram changes can affect your marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Video Length Increased Ready to share longer videos on Instagram? In case you haven't heard, Instagram rolled out an increased time limit for videos from 15 to 60 seconds in April. Most users should have this capability with the latest version of the app. You can shoot video directly from the Instagram app or use your photo library. Features allow you to add filters, turn off the sound, and choose the cover photo. With these changes, you can share more video content, especially if you like to repurpose content from other networks, such as downloading your Snapchat story video to Instagram. #2: Videos Show Views and Viewers Now you can find out how many people are viewing your videos on Instagram. Simply look at the view count below each of your videos. When you click on your number of views, you'll get to see the number of likes, along with the option to follow those who liked your video. This may give you an idea of the amount of reach you're getting versus engagement. So if you see that hundreds of people viewed a video, but only a handful liked it, you can assume that it didn't resonate well with your audience. If you have hundreds of views and hundreds of likes, however, you have a winning video. #3: A Tap on Photo Ads Reveals the Call to Action When someone taps once on your ad photo, it brings up your call to action. You can let users click through to your website or app, depending on what you configured when setting up your Instagram ad. Note that this isn't the case with ad videos on Instagram. If you do a single tap on an ad video, it will turn on the sound. A second single tap will turn off the sound. Do a double tap to like the video, just as doing a double tap on an ad image will like the image. This is something worth noting when choosing between image and video. #4: Profile Click-throughs From Ads Include the Call to Action If you link your Instagram profile to your Instagram ad, when someone taps on your Instagram profile, it will place your ad's call to action at the top of your profile. Note that this only happens if users go to your profile by tapping on it above your ad. If they were to access it anywhere else, the call to action would no longer be there. Linking is something to keep in mind when choosing your call-to-action button text. When someone taps through to your Instagram profile from your ad, you'll want to display a call to action and profile bio text that align with your campaign. Would you want Apply Now, Book Now, Contact Us, Donate Now, Download, Learn More, Shop Now, Sign Up, or Watch More at the top of your profile? And what bio text and link would you want below that? Keep this in mind for every Instagram ad campaign. #5: News Feed Visibility Shifts With Algorithm While most people are focused on the logo change, the biggest change is the rollout of the enhanced Instagram algorithm. If you take a close look at your own Instagram news feed, you may notice that it's no longer in chronological order of newest posts first. Instead, you'll see posts in the order that Instagram deems the most important to you. It's not overall engagement or recency that wins the news feed, but rather how much Instagram thinks you care about that particular Instagram user. For example, a photo with 9 likes and no comments from three hours ago from someone you occasionally engage with is several posts ahead of a photo with 180k likes and 640 comments from an hour ago from a celebrity with a verified profile whom you rarely engage with. As an individual,

What is SEO?

What is SEO?

by Christine Darby @ Blog | Squarespace, MailChimp | Collaborada

As a small business owner, you have probably heard the term Search Engine Optimization or SEO. What is it and why is it important? Read More >>

SearchCap: Yelp hits Google again, link building & SMX East preview

by Barry Schwartz @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: Yelp hits Google again, link building & SMX East preview appeared first on Search Engine Land.

How to Map Behavioral Metrics Into Your Key Business Drivers

by Today's Industry Insider @ The Kissmetrics Marketing Blog

Digital marketing is a blessing to marketers because of the wealth of data it provides. Online marketers can analyze and dissect innumerable elements to gain a deeper understanding of the habits and preferences of their customers. As a result, they can effectively put themselves in their customers’ shoes and optimize the entire experience. This allows […]

4 Tips to Improve Your Pinterest Exposure

4 Tips to Improve Your Pinterest Exposure

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is the Pinterest algorithm burying your pins? Looking for tips to get better exposure in the Pinterest Smart Feed? Pinning more isn't always the answer to increasing your visibility on Pinterest. In this article you'll discover four ways to improve the quality of your pins and boards on Pinterest. Listen to this article: #1: Clean Up Your Account Every Month For Pinterest's algorithm to view your account as high-quality, you'll want to focus on curating the best of the best. In turn, Pinterest will be more likely to recommend your pins to others. Not all popular pins are created equal and many of your account's pins won't get substantial repins from your followers. To make sure your account is up to date, set aside time once a month to go through your boards and delete all of the pins that have fewer than five repins. Here's an easy way to delete underperforming pins from a board: Click on the board and then click on the Move Pins button at the top right corner of the board. Next, click on the red Move button. Now you're able to scroll down and view all of the pins on your board and note the number of repins each one has generated. Select the checkmark on each pin that has fewer than five repins. When you're done, click the red Delete button. Currently you can delete only 50 pins at a time, and be careful to stay below 100 daily pin deletions or Pinterest may block you. You should also wait at least seven days before you delete a new pin. Deleting pins is a lot of work, but if you want to build a valuable Pinterest presence, it's a tactic you can't ignore. #2: Pin and Repin Based on Popularity It's very tempting to repin every amazing image, but if you pin indiscriminately, you'll end up with a collection of great images that offer little value to your audience. To curate a popular account with boards that give value to your followers, look a bit further to see how many repins each image actually has before you share it to one of your own boards. Joy Cho / Oh Joy! has an impressive 12.8M followers on Pinterest, and her account is a great example of what happens when you only repin popular pins to your account. Pro tip: It's good practice to check the link of each image before you repin to make sure you're not directing people to a broken link or dodgy website. Check your Pinterest stats to see which of your boards are most popular. This information isn't limited only to your owned boards, but also extends to any group boards you pin to. When you want to share a new original pin from your website or blog, pin it to one of your popular boards and make sure the pin is related to the theme of the board you choose. #3: Combine Pinterest Analytics With Google Analytics to Identify Traffic-Driving Pins It's important to have your website verified on Pinterest. Not only does this reinforce your credibility, but it also allows you to view your website stats. This makes it possible to see which of your original pins from your website or blog are the most popular on Pinterest. You'll want to cross-check this information with Google Analytics and use the combined stats to verify which of your popular pins are driving traffic to your website. To find out, sign into your Google Analytics account and then go to Acquisition > Referrals > Pinterest. Look at the Visits column to detect high-performing pins. Create similar pins to deliver more of what your audience likes, which will improve your pinning strategy. #4: Adjust Board Elements for Visibility in Search If you have a board that isn't getting the visibility you expect or isn't generating the repins you want, you can change your board title to see if the board's performance improves. First, click on the board you want to change and then click on the Edit Board button. Next, you'll see an edit screen where you can change a number of elements for your board, such as the name (or title), description,

An Inside Look at What We're Currently Working On

An Inside Look at What We're Currently Working On

by Lauren Hooker @ Blog

This isn’t a normal Elle & Company blog post.   In a normal Elle & Company blog post, I share strategies and write about topics after I’ve already had time to experiment and figure out what works.   But after reading your replies to my annual survey a month or two ago, I saw that you want to see things as they’re happening. You requested more behind-the-scenes.    Your wish is my command.   I have to admit, though - this is a little out of my comfort zone. Because if something doesn’t work out the way I hope it will, my failure will be public knowledge. All of you will know about it.    But that’s a more honest look at running a business, isn’t it? Trial and error, falling down once, and getting up twice.   So here’s the inside scoop about what my team and I are focusing on this quarter, along with why and how we plan to accomplish it. 

Pinterest Marketing: How to Succeed on Pinterest

Pinterest Marketing: How to Succeed on Pinterest

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Pinterest for your business? Want to know what works on Pinterest? To learn how to improve your Pinterest marketing, I interview Jeff Sieh. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Jeff Sieh, the is founder of ManlyPinterestTips.com, a site designed to help guys understand the marketing power of Pinterest. He also hosts the Manly Pinterest podcast where he explores the latest in Pinterest marketing. Jeff will explore marketing with Pinterest. You'll discover why your Pinterest following matters, as well as Pinterest posting tips. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Pinterest Marketing Jeff's backstory Jeff has a digital marketing agency in Longview, Texas, where he builds websites and does video marketing. A couple years ago, he decided it was time to take the plunge into social media. Driving home from a long road trip, Jeff was listening to the Social Media Marketing Podcast episode with Cynthia Sanchez, and got intrigued by Pinterest. Once he started playing on the platform, Jeff noticed it was driving a lot of traffic to his relatively new blog. After Jeff's Google+ post, called Manly Pinterest Tip #1, about sharing a secret board with his daughter, did really well, he wrote Manly Pinterest Tips #2-5.  Jeff explains that his concept for Pinterest was a play on the fact that everyone thinks Pinterest is for women. His "manly" version really took off. Jeff did an initial version of his podcast with four other guys. They did seven episodes before switching formats. At the beginning of the year, Jeff brought back the Manly Pinterest Tips podcast as a solo, weekly show, and has interviewed Pinterest experts, like Peg Fitzpatrick, Rebekah Radice and Cynthia Sanchez. He's done about 30 episodes. Since the Manly Pinterest Tips podcast did well, Jeff embarked on an experiment in branding. He figured it took a year to grow a good, manly beard. So he decided he would launch the website and build the brand for a year. "If it doesn't work, I can shave the beard off, it'll be fine," he says. "Well, it worked." Jeff explains the concept of secret and group boards. A secret board is something that only you or you and other people you designate can see. They are a great way to gather info for yourself or for collaboration. You can also create public group boards. Jeff has a board with Peg Fitzpatrick about bacon and an Instant Instagram Tips. Listen to the show to hear more about Jeff’s secret boards. Men & Pinterest Contrary to popular belief, there is tons of stuff for guys on Pinterest. Jeff explains that men are the fastest growing demographic on Pinterest. In 2014 the number of men on Pinterest doubled. In fact more men use Pinterest in the United States every month than read Sports Illustrated and GQ combined. To make his point about good content for men on Pinterest, Jeff calls out boards from the National Hockey League, the National Football League and Major League Baseball. Jeff also mentions his popular woodworking board, DIY boards (from Lowe's and Home Depot, for example) and more. All of this content appeals to men. Listen to the show to discover why Jeff finds the stereotype about men and Pinterest funny. Buyable pins Buyable pins are a way for people to purchase products through Pinterest. It's rolling out this summer, starting mostly with major brands like Macy's, Neiman Marcus and Nordstrom, and ecommerce platforms Shopify and Demandware. Buyable pins will be huge for business,

Facebook Carousel Content: How to Make Your Posts and Ads Stand Out

Facebook Carousel Content: How to Make Your Posts and Ads Stand Out

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to use multiple images in a single Facebook ad or post? Have you tried Facebook's Carousel feature? The Facebook Carousel feature allows you to publish multiple images and links in one post or ad. In this article you'll discover how to set up and use Facebook carousel posts and ads in your Facebook marketing. Listen to this article: Why Create Carousel Posts and Ads A Facebook carousel post or ad is a creative way to get more content into a smaller space. You can feature five unique images, each with different headlines, descriptions, and URLs all within the same story. Publish a carousel post or ad as an organic story on your page wall and/or an ad unit; either can easily be viewed on desktop and mobile. According to a report by Kinetic Social, carousel ads perform 10 times better than regular ads. Plus, since 90% of Facebook users access via mobile, that's a great use of a small amount of real estate. Advertisers should get much more for their dollars by doing a horizontal ad unit that can scroll back and forth. Carousel ads are also available on Instagram. There are a few options when it comes to carousel posts and ads. Create an organic carousel post, turn an organic carousel post into an ad, or create a carousel ad from scratch. #1: Create an Organic Carousel Post To create a carousel post directly on your page, type or paste a link on your wall. It automatically populates a preview, which should have at least one image. Remember, the more images in your blog post, the more will populate and the fewer you'll need to upload directly. Typically, Facebook's og:image tag on blog posts preselects the link preview image and most blogs only have one that populates when the link is shared on Facebook. So when creating carousel format wall posts, you'll need to get creative with sourcing additional images. Usually you can find more images on the blog post you're sharing. Most links you share on Facebook will automatically populate with that preview image, which is 1200 x 628 pixels, the standard dimensions for a link post or ad. However, since carousel images are square, Facebook will crop out the center of the image. If the original image gets cut off in a way that doesn't make sense, you may need to remove the image that populates, and upload a square one. It's recommended that you size carousel images at 600 x 600 pixels. Click the plus sign and then upload additional pictures (up to five total) to use for your post. Select high-quality images that contain less than 20% text. This is especially important if you plan to turn your carousel post into an ad. Use Facebook's Grid Tool to make sure your images will be approved, should you decide to turn the post into a carousel ad. Drag and drop your images to change the order. Hover over each image and click the link icon to edit each destination URL. You're also able to edit the headline. Click on the headline and then edit the text. Your other option is to build a carousel post from the photo upload section. Go to upload Photo/Video and select Create a Photo Carousel. Then add the link. It will populate the images and allow you to add more. Facebook will populate your images into the carousel post. Add new pictures if necessary, and then edit the links and headlines as above. Boost Your Carousel Post After your carousel post gets some organic reach and engagement, you can easily turn it into a carousel ad by boosting the post. I recommend doing this through Ads Manager, rather than the Boost button, because there are more targeting and placement options. Go to Ads Manager and click Create an Ad. Select Boost Your Posts, and choose the page and the post. Set your audience, budget, and schedule. Then preview your ad. Click the Place Order button when you're satisfied with the ad. Again, keep in mind the less than 20% text rule.

How to Run a Successful Twitter Contest

How to Run a Successful Twitter Contest

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to boost engagement on Twitter? Have you thought about running a Twitter contest? Twitter contests are a creative, fun way to attract more followers, engagement and shares on the platform. In this post you'll discover how to run a Twitter contest for your business. Listen to this article: #1: Identify the Objective Successful marketing starts with clear goals, and this is true for Twitter contests, too. Think about what you hope to achieve with your contest. For example, you might want to increase traffic to your website or collect email signups from potential prospects. Or perhaps you're keen to increase the number of followers or generate more brand mentions on Twitter. Deciding on the goal of your campaign is key, as it will inform the type of contest you launch. #2: Choose a Prize The prize has an important bearing on the overall success of your contest. Choose something that is highly relevant to your brand or related to your company or services in some way. A free iPad is an impressive prize, but it's unlikely to generate long-term gains or brand engagement unless your company offers iPad-related products or services. A Twitter contest isn't an opportunity to offload that box of branded pens or last year's merchandise though. Do a brainstorming session with your team and discuss what types of prizes are likely to excite your loyal followers and inspire new ones. Opt for prizes that are useful, exclusive or seasonal to generate more interest. This is obviously easier for consumer-focused brands, such as those that offer retail, fashion, tech and edible products. However, service-based businesses can package a service or offer tangible prizes like ebooks, branded stationery, free memberships or access to exclusive training materials. You could also team up with other brands or companies and offer a prize bundle to make the reward even more substantial or compelling. #3: Select a Contest Type When selecting a contest type, it's important to consider the barrier to entry for the contest and how it will affect the number, quality and relevance of entries you receive. For example, a simple contest that requires only a retweet will have wider appeal than one that also requires people to upload a photo or answer a question. However, this additional level of effort will help to separate half-hearted followers from those who are really invested in your brand or product. There are a variety of different Twitter contests that work well. Here are three types to consider for your business. Sweepstakes A sweepstakes contest is perfect if your main objective is to drive followers to a landing page on your website. When you tweet about the contest, share the link to your landing page and include text that drives people to enter the competition on your website. Keep in mind that including a number in your tweet, as Rosetta Stone did in this example, increases retweets by 17%, according to Twitter. The level of success of this type of contest will be influenced by the number of followers your brand already has on Twitter. Without a request for retweets or replies, this contest is unlikely to increase brand reach or grow your followers. However, because the contest is hosted on your website, you can promote it on your other social media channels and in your email campaigns, too. Tool tip: Tools like Wishpond or Woobox make it easy to launch custom sweepstakes Twitter contests and manage entries. Retweet and Follow Reward loyal fans with an exclusive contest and encourage new followers with a retweet and follow contest. This is a good choice if you want to boost your reach on Twitter, encourage retweets, attract new followers and increase @mentions of your company's Twitter handle. To encourage more engagement on Twitter, ask followers to submit a photo or answer a quiz to qualify. For example,

Why Podcasting Is a Trend Marketers Need to Follow

Why Podcasting Is a Trend Marketers Need to Follow

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you considered podcasting for your business? Are you wondering if now is the right time to start? To learn about the amazing growth and the opportunities that exist for marketers, I interview Michael Wolf for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Michael Wolf, who is the host of the NextMarket Podcast. He's also the chief analyst at NextMarket Insights, where he tracks the growing world of podcasting. Michael's approach to analyzing podcasting is unique. Michael shares the research he carried out to help him discover more about podcasting, and where the market is headed. You'll discover why the business category is one of the biggest areas for growth, and the reason why advertisers are now taking notice. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Podcasting for Marketers Research carried out to discover more about podcasting for business Mike is an analyst and loves to dig deep into topics that are normally around technology and media. However, because he's a big fan of podcasts, he noticed that more people had started to use them, although he didn't see a corresponding change in attitude from people in the media world. Over the last five years, podcasting has been viewed as a less popular form of media. Even online and new media startups haven't embraced it. So Mike decided to dig in and find out why. Mike talked to many people including big-name hosts like Adam Carolla, Ira Glass from This American Life and Steven Dubner from Freakonomics. He also had contact with people behind the scenes at organizations such as Libsyn and Microsoft. During his research, Mike recorded all of the conversations he had with these people, which led to an article he wrote for Forbes in April 2013 called "Funnymen and iPhones: Why the Podcast Is Finally Coming Into its Own." Listen to the audio clip below to find out what Adam Carolla had to say. http://soundcloud.com/nextmarket/a-podcast-about-the-podcast Apple has primarily owned the investment side of podcasts with iTunes. The podcast world hasn't seen great investment in technology, developers or venture capitalists. You'll find out the kind of momentum Mike has seen when it comes to the investment side of this platform, and what podcasting categories have shown a lot of growth. Listen to the show to find out what the 2013 Social Media Marketing Industry Report revealed about what marketers thought of podcasting. Has podcasting seen any kind of uptick in 2013, and if so, why? Mike explains how the teams at Libsyn and SoundCloud, which host the files, have seen phenomenal growth. Also some of the big-name podcasters have seen traffic reach new records in download numbers every month. All of the signs are from a metrics perspective. When you talk to people about their numbers, there is definitely growth. When you look at the iTunes charts, you'll notice there are new podcasts launched every day/week across a number of categories. Mike says that part of the reason for the growth of this platform is that a lot of people see podcasting as a less crowded channel than blogging. It's also a form of deeper engagement. You'll discover what has created the perfect storm for this new growth in listenership, and why new technology built into cars will produce a whole new opportunity. Podcasts are a multitask platform that allows people to give you 20 minutes or so of their time every day or week to listen to you.

Live Video Tools: The Best Apps for Going Live

Live Video Tools: The Best Apps for Going Live

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you planning to start a live video show? Want to know which tools you'll need to broadcast live? To explore the best live video apps and software to produce your own live show, I interview Ian Anderson Gray. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Ian Anderson Gray, the founder of Seriously Social, a blog focused on social media tools. Ian is also a live video tools expert. His courses include Seriously Social OBS Studio and Seriously Social Wirecast. Ian explores the best live video software for beginning and advanced broadcasters. You'll discover which software and add-ons offer the features you need. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Live Video Tools Ian's Live Video Story When Facebook Live started rolling out, Ian felt like everyone had access before he did, because he was an Android user (at the time) living in the United Kingdom. In his search for a workaround, Ian discovered OBS Studio, a free tool for Macs and PCs. With OBS Studio, Ian found a way to broadcast from his computer to his Facebook page, profile, and groups. That was his entry into Facebook Live and live video. Ian wrote a blog post on how to broadcast from your computer with OBS Studio and went out of his way to make the process as easy as possible for people to understand. He even included a tool that allows people to get the magic stream key necessary to broadcast with OBS Studio. Since Ian posted the article last year, the article has had just under three million views. Listen to the show to discover what platform Ian tried using before Facebook Live. What Stops Marketers From Going Live? Two things stop marketers from going live: "the fear and the gear." But Ian believes fear is what really gets in people's way. People are afraid they'll say something silly or wrong. They might be worried their cat will jump on the keyboard, the webcam will fall over, and it will be a complete disaster. Or maybe they're afraid others will think they're a fraud. Marketers also have issues with technology. People think they can't go live because they don't have this webcam, that phone, or a decent lighting setup. Those are excuses for people who are simply scared of getting on camera and communicating their message. Everyone gets nervous, explains Ian, who's trained as a professional singer. He feels it too. The key is to channel your nervous energy into your performance. If you feel nervous or scared, Ian says, it's a good thing. It shows you care. The best performance Ian ever gave was when he was absolutely petrified before he went on stage. The worst performance was when he was entirely complacent. He thought the performance would be absolutely fine, and it turned out to be a disaster. To help you overcome that fear, Ian recommends warming up your voice before each broadcast. Exercise the lower part of your voice up to the high part of your voice. These exercises will likely make you feel a bit more at ease. Also, when you warm up, using the high and low parts makes your voice more engaging. By using your vocal range, you're not trying to become a different person. You're heightening your personality by putting more energy behind it. Listen to the show to hear Ian's example of a vocal warm-up and what your voice might sound like if you don't warm up. Basic Apps The easiest apps for live broadcasting are web-based. Fire up your browser (Safari, Chrome, Internet Explorer, etc.), and go to the tool's web page. BeLive, probably the best-known app, has an advantage because has a free trial. You can broadcast up to two 20-minute broadcasts...

8 Takeaways from “SEO for Startups”

by Marvin Russell @

Last night I attended “SEO for Startups: Best Practices”, an SEO event organized by Stella Fayman and Tim Jahn of Entrepreneurs Unplugged. I must say...

The post 8 Takeaways from “SEO for Startups” appeared first on .

SearchCap: Bing fact checking, Google mobile tips & Bing agency awards

by Barry Schwartz @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on Search Engine Land and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: Bing fact checking, Google mobile tips & Bing agency awards appeared first on Search Engine Land.

6 Tips to Improve Your Facebook Posts

6 Tips to Improve Your Facebook Posts

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you marketing on Facebook? Do you want better reach for your Facebook posts? Using the right posting tactics will give you better results from your Facebook marketing. In this article you'll discover six tips for more effective Facebook posts. Listen to this article: #1: Create a Posting Road Map Many businesses start posting on Facebook without a plan. As a result, their posts often don't address the needs of their audience. Consider creating a road map for your posts covering various topics. For example, if you're in the fitness industry, your content could cover fitness tips, blog marketing, healthy recipes and so on. The more topics you add to your content bucket, the more variety you can offer to your audience. After you choose the topics you'll cover, create a calendar. A content calendar maps out what to post each day. Having a schedule also helps you build in enough time to create your social media images. If you're not sure how far out to schedule your posts, creating a content calendar for one week in advance is a good rule of thumb. This gives you the flexibility to keep up with timely topics. #2: Write Your Text for Skim Readers Rather than debate the length of Facebook posts, consider the decreasing attention span of users. A study by the National Center for Biotechnology Information showed that people have an attention span of 8 seconds, which is 1 second less than that of a goldfish. If you apply that to Facebook, the first three to four words of your update are crucial to grabbing your audience's attention. For help creating a compelling Facebook update, try a tool like CoSchedule's Headline Analyzer. Enter your post copy in the text box, and the tool will provide recommendations to improve your update. #3: Analyze Your Written and Visual Content, Then Optimize On Facebook, there are four types of content you can post: links, images, videos and text updates. According to a Socialbakers study (which analyzed 4,445 business pages between October 2014 and February 2015), video is the most important engagement driver, followed by text updates, links and photos. However, before choosing content types for your posts, take time to analyze your business and audience. For example, if you want to drive traffic to your blog, the link format likely would work well for you. On the other hand, if brand awareness is your main goal, images and videos are a better bet. Suppose that you want to drive attention to a link in the description. So in the post, you include an image along with the link. When you analyze the clicks for that post, you find that out of 51 post clicks, there was only 1 link click. The takeaway is that the content type you chose did not effectively drive attention to the link. Make sure that you check your analytics to see if you're choosing the right content types. #4: Consider Using Brand Hashtags Do you use hashtags while posting on Facebook? A recent Buffer study revealed that posts without hashtags outperform posts with hashtags on Facebook. However, before you dismiss the idea of hashtags altogether, test them for yourself. Is there a particular hashtag you use for your branding? Using hashtags on Facebook can make sense if they contribute to your brand positioning. Adidas frequently uses the hashtag #teamadidas in their posts because it's synonymous with their brand. Hashtags also may be effective if you're posting about a trending topic. #5: Customize Your Facebook Post Descriptions When you post a link on Facebook, it fetches the metadata automatically. This can be edited. For example, suppose that you want to republish a post. All you need to do is change the description metadata to fit the post description and suit the current context. Remember that Facebook posts are now searchable, so this is an excellent opportunity to add your keywords, too. #6: Experiment With Your Publishing Times

Blogging: A Business Model for Growth

Blogging: A Business Model for Growth

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you blog for business? Are you wondering how the blogging can help your business? To learn how a blog can be the center of your entire marketing program and explode your business's growth, I interview Joe Pulizzi for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Joe Pulizzi, founder of the Content Marketing Institute and co-author of Get Content, Get Customers and Managing Content Marketing. Joe shares his blogging story and how sharing free content grew his business. You'll learn how blogs can grow your email list, why multi-author blogs may be worth exploration and how to widen your professional network. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content Marketing What is content marketing? Joe tells us that people think content marketing is a buzzword. He says that 2013 is the year for content marketing to become part of the vernacular used by more marketing folks and business owners. It's important to realize that content marketing has been around for a long time. Joe looks at the example of John Deere creating The Furrow magazine back in the late 1800s. The company published the magazine because they wanted to create a true resource and educational component for farmers to be more successful business owners. The only way to do that back then was to have a magazine. They didn't have blogs, webinars or in-person events. It's the first representation of what is now content marketing. Joe explains that today, we're all basically media companies and publishers. It's really the essence of what content marketing is and because there are no technology barriers; everybody is doing it. The idea is that companies create or curate valuable, compelling and relevant content on a consistent basis. Usually it's to maintain or change behavior, and attract or retain a customer. If you're a traditional media company, you create content to get revenue in one of two ways: 1) getting your content sponsored in some way and 2) selling your content. This is how a traditional publisher goes to market. That's the business model. However, if you're a small business, you're creating content because you ultimately want to sell something. You're not necessarily making money directly from the content, but sales are coming in a later form or you're growing relationships with people who are then more likely to buy from you at a later date. Listen to the show to find out why the barriers to entry are very low and why consumers are more accepting of content in different forms than they have ever been. Joe's blogging story Joe describes the term blog as being a very important tool. He started out in the content marketing industry in 2000, with a company called Penton Media. Penton still is the largest independent business publisher in North America. They publish magazines mainly in industries like heating and air conditioning,  major manufacturing or food service. Joe ran the custom content division for all of these properties, which meant that if someone didn't want to advertise in a magazine, the publisher sent them over to Joe. It was his job to find a different way to make money from these people because he couldn't sell them ads. Joe tried to figure out how to help these companies tell better stories: "How were companies going to get attention if they didn't have a compelling story to tell?" Joe shares examples of the market share of the most popular television shows.

Creating Persuasive Videos: How to Move Viewers to Action

Creating Persuasive Videos: How to Move Viewers to Action

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create marketing videos? Are you wondering how to get people to go from passive observers to active participants? To learn how to create videos that people want to watch and get them to take action, I interview James Wedmore for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview James Wedmore, author of The YouTube Marketing Book, founder of Video Traffic Academy and--in my opinion--one of the smartest video marketers on the planet. James shares his knowledge and experience on video creation and taking your viewers to the next level. You'll learn the 5 important elements of what goes into persuasive video. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Persuasive Video Creation Why video is so important for marketers James describes how he has always considered video as a communication tool. A video can be simple, quick and efficient and can be used in an unlimited number of ways. Coming from a film background, James realised he could plug in video to everything people teach  him. You'll learn the different uses for video on your website and the benefits to your audience. James says YouTube is the most shared website and form of content inside of Facebook. You'll learn about the full potential and power of video and discover why James encourages people to get in front of the camera. Listen to the show to find out how we use video at Social Media Examiner. A 5-part YouTube video guide designed to move people to take action James explains that although the equipment you use is important, it's strategy that comes first. It's about the way the video can be executed and make it original. You'll find out the real strategy behind his videos and why he tries to share content once a week with a video on YouTube. Every video James makes is based off his 5-part template below. The 5 parts of the YouTube video template are: Attention Grabber Intro Bumper The Content Outro Bumper Outtakes You'll learn why you need to keep your YouTube videos as succinct as possible. And you'll discover what James did with his videos to have more success, great results and higher audience attention rates. Below is James' YouTube Tutorial on How to Create a Video. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-ZKbSWjvE7M 1. Attention Grabber. You don't need to spend time introducing yourself. You need to say what you are going to talk about in the video or ask a question. By 8 seconds into the video, you should have a good idea of what you are going to be talking about for the next 5 minutes of the video. James describes why it's so important in the first few seconds to make sure you tell the person watching the video what they will gain. You have to provide value for your audience. YouTube is not a place for commercials. You'll get the views by answering the questions they will have. James calls it a mini transformation. You'll find out why being able to keep their attention, allows for stronger engagement. 2. Intro Bumper. This is the time when you can throw in a little commercial. It's the best way to brand your show. It adds a level of professionalism and legitimises you. For this part of the video, which needs to be less than 6 seconds long, James explains how he used software called VideoScribetv. It's a great place to put your logo, a picture of yourself, your tag line and a tune. These can be made at a low cost at Videohive. You can then hire someone on Fiverr,

5 Ways to Grow Your LinkedIn Group

5 Ways to Grow Your LinkedIn Group

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more people to join your LinkedIn group? Are you looking for tips to get more exposure for your group? LinkedIn groups are a great way to generate leads and increase influence within an engaged community. In this article, you'll discover five ways to quickly build a larger membership for your LinkedIn group. Listen to this article: #1: Optimize Your Group Description One way to attract more members to join your LinkedIn group is to optimize your group description. This is the description that appears on every group page. In your description, lead with the ultimate reason why people should join your group. This is the first piece of information they see, so it makes sense to highlight your value proposition in this section. Make sure you also spell out the purpose and benefits of joining your group. You'll want to include industry keywords to make it easier for people to find your group when they're searching for groups to join. Identify four to five keywords that are most relevant to your group and use these keywords to optimize your description. Don't forget to mention that self-promotional material is not allowed; otherwise, your group will receive a lot of spammy posts from members who are only there to promote their products or services. You're looking for members who can provide actual value to your LinkedIn group. LinkedIn has a built-in feature that flags posts that are potentially self-promotional or spammy, so even if people do attempt this you can still moderate their posts. #2: Invite Your LinkedIn Connections Because LinkedIn groups are now private, you'll need to manually invite your LinkedIn connections to join. To do this, go to your group's main page and click the Invite Others button. A search box appears where you can type in the name of individual connections who meet your group's criteria. Avoid inviting people who aren't likely to be interested in joining. You can usually tell whether they're suitable by viewing their profile and job title. You can select multiple connections to invite. If you plan to invite as many as possible, start with the letter A, and work your way down to Z. This is the only way to invite a large number of connections. It's important to note that inviting connections does vary by group type. For example, in standard groups, anyone can invite connections to join, but only group managers and owners can pre-approve members and invite them by email address. With unlisted groups, only owners and managers can invite members. Plus, an invitation is required to join unlisted groups. #3: Ask Colleagues and Peers to Promote Your Group Do you know someone with a massive database in your target market? How about someone who runs a digital publication in your niche? Consider asking relevant people to promote your group to their members, and offer an incentive in return. This is how mutually beneficial relationships work, and it could result in many new members for your LinkedIn group. You want to sound as human as possible when doing this type of outreach. Avoid using automation platforms, because most people can tell when you're using one. One-to-one email works best. When you compose your outreach email, start by suggesting you have a new channel that their audience could receive tremendous value from. Use bullet points when identifying this information to make it easier for the recipient to read. If you don't have many industry contacts, consider spending more time working on your personal brand. #4: Send a Newsletter to Your Email Database The importance of growing an engaged email database is well documented. In fact, according to the 2016 B2B Marketing Outlook Report, 60% of marketers are set to conduct more email marketing campaigns in 2016, highlighting its importance. As when doing influencer outreach to your target market, you should create one-on-one emails that are short and to the point an...

7 Super Secrets of Selling SEO

by Marvin Russell @

This is my 11th year selling SEO, and my skills have evolved and gotten so much better each year. But, I’m only as good as my experience....

The post 7 Super Secrets of Selling SEO appeared first on .

Medium: Why Bloggers Should Consider Publishing on Medium

Medium: Why Bloggers Should Consider Publishing on Medium

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Want to position yourself as an authority on a specific subject? Have you considered publishing your blog posts on Medium? To explore how Medium can benefit bloggers and marketers, I interview Dakota Shane. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers, business owners, and creators discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Dakota Shane, a social media columnist for Inc.com. He co-founded Arctiphi, a social media agency for breweries and restaurants. He's also a top writer in the social media category on Medium. Dakota shares how to maximize your content's reach using Medium. You'll discover tools and tactics for building your email list with Medium articles. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Medium Dakota's Story Right after Dakota graduated from college in 2015, he and his brother launched their agency. Dakota was learning all he could about marketing, social media marketing, and content marketing from podcasts, books, and client experience. Dakota comes from a family of creative people and grew up writing stories. In his career, this writing bug stayed with him and he wanted to write about what he was learning as a marketer. At the time, his two choices for housing content were the blogosphere and LinkedIn. Although the blogosphere was the gold standard, Dakota felt that the landscape was saturated and it would take too much time and effort to gain a following while also working a full-time job and running a business. The articles Dakota wrote on LinkedIn flopped, and the platform also seemed a little too formal for his voice. When Dakota found out about Medium, he was excited because it looked like a place where he could talk and write the way he wanted. Based on everything he'd learned since college, Dakota wrote an article titled 200+ Podcasts, 100+ Articles, and 20+ Books in 11 Bullet Points. Then he dug up the personal Twitter handle of the editor of his favorite Medium publication (The Mission) and sent him the link. The editor replied, saying the article looked great and would be published in the morning. The next day, Dakota woke up to a slew of notifications: hundreds of people shared and thousands of people had already read the article. He saw the power of Medium as a platform and realized his life and business were about to change for the better. Dakota has been seriously writing on Medium for the last year and a half, and his consistency on the platform has led to opportunities with niche social media blogs. To get those opportunities, he gathered links to his highest-performing works on Medium, wrote a pitch on why he would be a good fit for their publication, saved it as a draft, and kept sending it out. After landing spots on bigger social media blogs, Dakota used those credits as leverage to get his first speaking gigs and podcast interviews. On his third try pitching to Inc.com, he landed a column and has been writing for them for the past few months. Listen to the show to discover who shared Dakota's first Medium post. Why Write on Medium? There are four reasons to write on Medium. First, Medium provides a ready-made audience that most writers, creators, or marketers don't have and that would take years to build. Second, and most importantly, Medium presents an opportunity right now because it's at that sweet spot between an emerging platform (which could be a risk) and an established platform (which could be saturated). Since it's in this position, Medium can open doors for a creator, writer, or marketer to brand themselves as an authority on a specific subject. Although Medium has kept recent metrics to themselves, as of late 2016 there were 60 million monthly use...

5 Tips for Better Facebook Live Broadcasts

5 Tips for Better Facebook Live Broadcasts

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Thinking of going live on Facebook? Wondering how to get the most out of your Facebook Live broadcast? With Facebook Live, you can show your expertise in real time, take people behind the scenes, and much more. In this article, you'll discover five tips to succeed with your next Facebook Live broadcast. Listen to this article: #1: Promote Before You Broadcast Facebook Live allows you to target your personal network, the fans of a business page (if you're an admin), a group, or an event. If you can't find a group or event to meet your needs, consider starting one. It's important to let your audience know about your upcoming live video with news feed posts. Experiment with images and perhaps even a short video to tell them about the bigger video to come. If your live video is important enough, you can boost your announcement posts as paid Facebook ads. Then, remind your audience again right before you go live. For example, here's how NASA Earth promotes upcoming live videos in their news feed and encourages interactions. Don't forget about the world outside of Facebook. Invite your blog readers, email subscribers, and followers from other networks. Include a link to your account, business page, group, or event. #2: Prepare and Practice Before you broadcast your live video, you need to do some preparation to ensure that viewers will be able to hear you clearly without distraction, follow your future broadcasts, and participate. Set Up Your Location Here are some tips for optimizing the location and setup for your live video: Try to minimize background and ambient noise. While users will expect the production quality to be a bit raw and unrehearsed, be sure that they can see and hear you without undue distractions. Decide whether to hold the phone yourself or use some type of mount. You could also delegate the job to a co-worker. For the live video, you can use either the front- or rear-facing camera. Choose a spot that has a strong broadband connection. Facebook recommends that live videos last at least 10 minutes, but you can go as long as 90 minutes. Tip: Forward your calls to avoid distractions during your broadcast. Set a Policy for Instant Feedback Two new Facebook Live features allow viewers to provide feedback and ask you questions during the broadcast. They can click on the same six emoji reactions that replaced the simple like back in February. These will appear for a few seconds onscreen; Facebook compares them to applause and boos. Users can also comment during the video, so you should decide in advance how and when you will acknowledge your audience. Facebook recommends that you address commenters by name and make it clear how much you appreciate their involvement. If you need to block a user, click on the profile picture next to their comment and select Block. Note that when the video is replayed, the comments will appear at the same point they did during the live event. Do a Practice Video Before you use Facebook Live for the first time, consider doing a practice run. To get all of the practice time you need, set Facebook's Who Should See This? privacy setting to Only Me. You'll see the live video exactly as it will appear, but no one else will. If you're having trouble changing the privacy setting from the mobile app, open your desktop or laptop and set your preferences at Facebook.com. Your changes will be integrated automatically by the app. Remember, Facebook doesn't allow business pages to post to a group or event, so you'll need to use a personal account in those instances. You can remind your audience about your company association in posts and during the video. To launch your live video, open the Facebook app and go to the personal, business, group, or event page that you want to target. Tap to start a new post and look for the Live icon at the bottom of the screen. In Android,

Facebook Marketing Mistakes: What to Avoid and Why

Facebook Marketing Mistakes: What to Avoid and Why

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you struggling to make Facebook marketing work for your business? Many marketers don't know how to connect with their audience on Facebook in a meaningful way for their business. To learn how to get Facebook marketing right, I interview Brian Carter for our new Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This New Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a brand-new show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Brian Carter, author of The Like Economy and LinkedIn for Business. Brian shares insights into the common struggles and misconceptions marketers have with Facebook marketing today. You'll learn what to focus your efforts on and a few simple tactics that work. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Marketing for Business The misconceptions marketers have about Facebook. Brian explains why constant promotion is boring and what marketers should do instead. He describes how marketers should be using Facebook, and if you are not already on Facebook how to check it out and interact. You'll learn why it's all about selling the dream and bridging the gap. One thing to do is to have a vision of the life that your customer is trying to live and portray that through photos and maybe even videos. Brian shares some examples of businesses doing this well.  One of these businesses creates their own someecards. Discover how you can test this kind of tactic in your Facebook marketing. Listen to the show to find out how you can create cool stuff to get people to start sharing more of your content. The biggest mistakes marketers repeatedly make on Facebook. Brian describes the 5 things you need to do to sell on Facebook as shown on his Facebook Diagram below and outlines the mistakes marketers make at each one of these steps. Once you have your fans and you have reached them, you still need to persuade them. Listen to the show to find out how to make Facebook marketing work for your business. The Facebook metrics you need to pay attention to and why Consider the possibility that your business might be having trouble because people may not be aware of you or they're not engaging. You might not be showing up in their news feed or maybe you're showing but they're not buying for some reason. Look at the metrics to figure out which part you're having trouble with. You'll learn how to balance the number of fans on your Facebook page with the effective reach of your Facebook marketing and what Brian considers "trash-can metrics." Listen to the show to learn how to determine the metrics that matter most to your business. How B2B businesses can approach Facebook marketing Brian discusses the different options to target B2B customers on Facebook and feed people into your sales funnel. When it comes to ads, you need to have passionate fans. Your fans have to be passionate, affordable and they need to be buyers.  Discover how to get to know your customers in Facebook terms. Ask "What other things do your customers like?" There are a couple of tools for finding out your fans' likes: Optim.al and Infinigraph. Listen to the show to find out more about qualifying your audience on Facebook. Brian shares his best Facebook marketing tip: Share a photo and give a call to action such as "Click Like if..." To find out more about Facebook, check out our first podcast episode with Mari Smith, who shares insights on Facebook mobile. Survival Tip: Use Images on Facebook Recently Mari Smith and I experimented with this and it really does work. If you want to get maximum exposure for what you share on Facebook, use images to dominate Facebook news feeds.

How to Curate Your Social Content With Reddit

How to Curate Your Social Content With Reddit

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for new content to share to your fans and followers? Have you considered Reddit as a source for valuable content? Using Reddit will reveal unique and interesting content that helps you stand out from the crowd. In this post you'll discover how to use Reddit for content curation and inspiration. Listen to this article: #1: Find Subreddits in Your Niche Many marketers already know Reddit is useful for discovering content, but browsing its individual communities, called subreddits, can be time-consuming. Fortunately, you can make that task easier if you create a multireddit, which is a custom dashboard of content around a particular topic. First, you need to find subreddits you want to include in your multireddit, and compile a master list of subreddit names, organized by topic. Discover Relevant Subreddits There are thousands of active subreddits, so it's important to find those that share the best content in your niche. Here are some easy ways to search for relevant subreddits: The subreddit search box lets you search for all subreddits related to a keyword (for example, fitness). Use the Reddit site search to find site-wide mentions of your keyword, plus a list of subreddits where the term appears most frequently. You can use advanced search operators to focus your search. You can also combine advanced operators. For example, I did a search for posts with "paleo" in the title on the r/xxfitness subreddit. I then sorted the results by New to see the most recent posts. To perform granular searches, use the Boolean operators AND, OR and NOT (or the minus symbol). You can also group keywords with parentheses. Along with search features on Reddit, you can use metareddit to find subreddits. This third-party directory allows you to filter results by number of subscribers and last post, as in the example here. The results are displayed in a word cloud, where the size of the words correlates to the number of subscribers. Make a List of Subreddits To keep track of the subreddits you find, create a spreadsheet of subreddit names organized by topic. As you find subreddits you want to add to your multireddit, note the subreddit's name after the r/ in its URL (for example, http://www.reddit.com/r/HealthyFood). Here's a list you might create for health and fitness subreddits. #2: Create a Multireddit Once you've found a group of relevant subreddits, organize them as a multireddit. You can include all of the subreddits you found in one big multireddit or create a handful of more specific multireddits. After you log into the site, go to the Reddit front page, and click on the dotted line on the left side. Click the Create button, and type in a name for your multireddit. (Note that you can't use spaces or symbols in the multireddit name.) When you're finished, click Create again. Now that you've created your multireddit, you can begin adding subreddits to it in the upper-right corner of the screen. Type a subreddit name into the Add Subreddit box and click the plus sign (or press Enter) to add it to your multireddit. You can also add a description for the multireddit and choose whether it's public (other redditors can find it) or private (only you can view it). Open the sidebar from the front page to access any multireddits you've created. You can filter the content in your multireddit using the tabs at the top of the page: Hot: Posts that receive the highest engagement (upvotes/comments) New: The most recent posts Rising: Posts that are gaining popularity Controversial: Posts that receive an equal mix of upvotes and downvotes Top: The most popular posts of all time Gilded: Posts that received reddit gold Promoted: Sponsored content You can also search for keywords within your multireddit. For example, if you're looking for healthy recipes to share on your social channels,

3 Ways to Use Social Media to Increase Your Search Visibility

3 Ways to Use Social Media to Increase Your Search Visibility

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to improve your search ranking? Wondering how your social activities can support your SEO? In this article you'll discover three ways social media can improve your visibility in search results. Listen to this article: #1: Dominate Your SERP You probably see SERPs every day without giving them a second thought. Simply put, SERP stands for "search engine results page." Every time you search for a keyword or phrase, the search engine displays a SERP. If you claim your business name on the top social media profiles, it's more likely that you'll "own" the first page of results when people search for you. For example, the SERP from a search for the name "KlientBoost" shows the company's website followed immediately by their profiles on Twitter, LinkedIn, Facebook, and YouTube. KlientBoost owns the search engine results page for their business. To start owning the SERP for your business or brand name, use a service like KnowEm to check for the availability of your business name across popular social media platforms. This makes it easy to reserve your name on as many platforms as possible in a short amount of time. As you claim your social media profiles, you'll need to populate those profiles with your business information, branded images, and links back to your blog or website. While it's true that the links in most social media profiles are "no-follow" (meaning they don't actually pass on authority to your website), these links can help you build trust and credibility in your website's backlink profile with search engines, so make sure to include them. #2: Stand Out Visually With YouTube Video Because most search results are full of text, results that include a video stand out on the page. This means they're likely to gain more clicks even if they place lower on the page. To take advantage of this, create high-quality YouTube videos that answer questions your customers and prospects are likely to ask. Lawn care company LawnStarter posts videos on their YouTube channel that answer common questions people have about maintaining their lawns. The videos are entertaining and stand out in the search results like the one below for the search "how to mow wet grass." #3: Reach Influencers to Support Quality Backlinks When it comes to getting your website or blog to show up in search results for non-branded terms (such as a service you provide), the most influential metric to track is external links to your site. Backlinko analyzed 1 million search results and found that there's a significant correlation between organic search ranking and the number of quality external backlinks. By leveraging social media, you can extend the reach of your content to a larger audience, which will also likely increase the number of clicks and shares it receives. In basic terms, More Shares = More Backlinks = Higher Search Placement. Keep these points in mind to get more visibility and shares for your content: Long-form content gets more shares than short-form content. Having at least one image leads to a dramatic increase in social shares. Lists and infographics get more social shares. To take this one step further, you can pay to promote your content to influencers to generate quality backlinks. Whether you want backlinks from journalists, industry publications, or other influencers, paid campaigns on Twitter will help you get your content in front of them. Why Twitter? A lot of journalists and influencers use it to find trending stories to cover. Putting your best content in front of these people increases the likelihood that they'll use your content in a story. Depending on your business, you can also apply this tactic to Facebook and LinkedIn. Use a tool like BuzzSumo to identify the people who are best positioned to give your content a quality backlink by sharing it or covering it in a story. To get started, log into BuzzSumo and click on Twitter Influencers.

5 Easy SEO Tactics Nobody Does

by Marvin Russell @

Below are five of the easiest and most commonly missed SEO tactics that anyone can do. They are so easy and so effective that I...

The post 5 Easy SEO Tactics Nobody Does appeared first on .

Facebook Marketing: Why It Is Time to Rethink Everything

Facebook Marketing: Why It Is Time to Rethink Everything

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Facebook to market your business? Wondering how marketing on Facebook is evolving? To explore how marketers should adjust to Facebook's recent and future changes, I interview Mari Smith. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Mari Smith, the world's leading Facebook marketing expert. She co-authored Facebook Marketing: An Hour a Day and is author of The New Relationship Marketing. Mari shares why it's time for marketers to rethink how they use Facebook. You'll discover where Mari believes Facebook is headed. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Marketing The Facebook Algorithm Mari explains that the Facebook algorithm pre-filters content that users see in their news feeds. The algorithm manages the vast amount of content posted to Facebook and thus helps advertisers, while hopefully showing Facebook users the most relevant content among the thousands of posts they could see. Users can have as many as 5,000 friends, join up to 6,000 groups, and follow up to 5,000 pages. With posts coming from all of these sources, users might see as many as 15,000 posts. Mari says that the Facebook algorithm narrows down what users actually see to about 1,500 posts, and from that pool of content, narrows what users might see even further to about 300 posts. Mari says the algorithm is complex with about 100,000 weights, of which only about a half-dozen are known. For instance, Facebook favors stories from users' friends, video content, and so on. Also, when the algorithm came out in 2008, along with Facebook business pages, it made the news feed non-chronological. Mari explains that the algorithm exists because Facebook needs to keep users coming back and also offer value to advertisers. Each day, the average user logs on about 14 times (more for marketers), and is on Facebook an average of 50 cumulative minutes. That creates a huge captive audience, which is a massive amount of potential to offer advertisers. To maintain that value, the algorithm encourages user engagement. Mari notices how she loves keeping up with her friends and community via Facebook and sees an advertisement about every third post. The better the targeted ad, the more likely she is to respond. Mari also notes that by encouraging user engagement, the algorithm also encourages users to share information with Facebook. This information helps Facebook keep the users and advertisers happy. I ask what marketers should do so users see more of their content in the news feed. Mari recommends not only sharing video, but also slightly increasing the length of videos. For uploaded videos, Mari has discovered a minimum of 90 seconds makes content more visible. For a live video, Mari recommends broadcasting for at least 5 minutes. Mari says Facebook favors slightly longer video because it enables Facebook to insert mid-roll ads. These ads break in and run for about 20 seconds. At the moment, mid-roll ads are in beta and you have to sign up before they'll appear in your video. Also, Mari says these ads appear only if you have at least 2,000 followers of your profile or page and 300 concurrent viewers. Mari explains that the decline in Facebook user posts and the algorithm's preference for camera-based content are related. Facebook is moving more into the camera mode because over the past three or four years, users have been sharing fewer status updates. Typing a post is harder than snapping a picture and adding sticker or filter. Mari stresses that real-time signals are also important to the visibility of your co...

Twitter Marketing: How to Use Twitter for Business

Twitter Marketing: How to Use Twitter for Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Twitter for your business? Are you wondering how Twitter can help you build relationships? To learn about Twitter marketing and how it can help your business, I interview Mark W. Schaefer for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Mark Schaefer, author of Return on Influence and The Tao of Twitter. He's also a marketing faculty member at Rutgers University and he blogs at Grow. Mark shares how he uses Twitter to create stronger business relationships and improve customer service. You'll learn about the best Twitter tools and how they can fit into your marketing strategy. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter for Business Where Twitter fits into the marketing strategy for businesses Mark explains that the amazing thing about Twitter is that it can do many different things. It's a great learning tool and a place to keep up with the news. And the best approach to using Twitter is personal networking. When he talks to clients, he asks them, "Are you the type of business that can benefit from going to a Chamber of Commerce meeting or a local networking meeting?" If you are, then yours is the right kind of business to be on Twitter. If you are the type of business that can benefit from personal networking, Twitter should be something you consider. Small talk on Twitter goes a long way toward building brand loyalty. The unique aspect of Twitter for business is that you can find people. It's difficult to find people and build a following for your blog or on Facebook. On Twitter, it's easy. In Mark's book, The Tao of Twitter, there's an entire chapter dedicated to finding relevant targeted people to follow on Twitter. They don't even have to follow you back. You can start to build your audience on your own and learn from people and connect with them. Just add a comment here and there. There is great power in being able to retweet. "Retweet" simply means you re-share someone else's content that they posted in a tweet. When you do this, it does a couple of amazing things. First of all, it's like saying, "Thank you! Good job! I appreciate this content!" and second, it helps you to get on their radar. If you do a good job of surrounding yourself with a relevant targeted audience, this audience will provide you with great content. You're now able to create value for your audience through the content of others. After you retweet someone a couple of times and make an attempt to engage, they're going to notice you. It's a wonderful way to build your audience, network and connect. It's networking on steroids. Mark's policy is to follow people back because you never know where it's going to lead. The great thing about Twitter and social media in general is that you can make it into anything you want. There are no rules. The strategy that Mark follows is that if you're a legitimate person trying to connect, the other person will follow you back because that's the real value of Twitter. Listen to the show to find out about how the code in the Retweet button works. Mark's favorite Twitter tools Mark feels that there are many great tools out there, but the main one he uses is HootSuite. Twitter can quickly become an unmanageable wall of noise. To help with this, Mark's advice is to segment your Twitter followers into lists. This way you can avoid missing anything from the people you learn from. It's a very powerful platform.

SearchCap: AdWords AMP landing pages, Google & Apple tracking & SEO mistakes

by Barry Schwartz @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: AdWords AMP landing pages, Google & Apple tracking & SEO mistakes appeared first on Search Engine Land.

4 Reasons LinkedIn Premium Is Good for Marketers

4 Reasons LinkedIn Premium Is Good for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use LinkedIn? Have you considered a LinkedIn Premium account? While most people start with the free version of LinkedIn, there are a number of useful paid features that make a Premium account worth the investment. In this article, you'll discover four ways LinkedIn Premium can help you improve your marketing. Listen to this article: Why Use LinkedIn Premium? LinkedIn was developed specifically for growing your business and building relationships. Marketers and business owners spend money on their businesses each month; whether it's a CRM tool (like Salesforce or Nimble), a business consultant or virtual assistant, or a tech person or service to manage their website. LinkedIn is that same type of investment, yet with social aspects. Plus, in some cases, it's easier to see the results of your efforts on LinkedIn than with other resources. LinkedIn's Business Plus features are integrated and easy to use within your LinkedIn account. (Note: There is also Sales Navigator, which is a sales prospect management tool.) Here's how LinkedIn Premium can help your business. #1: See Everyone Who's Viewed Your Profile While a free LinkedIn account shows you only the last five people who viewed your profile, a Premium account shows everyone. If more than five people a day view your profile, it's worth investing in Premium. With a free account, if you decide to be anonymous, you lose the ability to see who's viewed your profile. With a Premium account, you can remain anonymous and still see who has viewed your profile. You also have more sorting tools with a Premium account. That way you can see if people from a specific company, industry, or with a specific title have viewed your profile. The people who view your profile are usually clients, prospects, colleagues, classmates, or competitors. An additional level of detail allows you to better engage with people and be more specific in your responses and messaging. Plus, you can see which competitors look at you and find out what they're doing. From Who's Viewed Your Profile, it's easy to send a message to your first-level connections or invite new people to connect. Click on their name, and invite them to connect from their profile. This does two things: It allows you to view their profile and customize the invite. If you just click Connect from Who's Viewed Your Profile, LinkedIn will send out a default invitation. Connection Requests Always customize your connection requests. Even though they're harder to see on desktop, they pop right up in the mobile app. Because more than 50% of LinkedIn members use the mobile app over the browser, it makes sense to customize your invites. When inviting someone to connect from this area, I recommend the following text: "I noticed you viewed my profile on LinkedIn. I'd love to answer any questions you have. Let's connect to make communicating easier." When sending the connection request, choose Friend as your option for how you know someone, since people can no longer see how you know them. The designations in Who's Viewed Your Profile (such as company name, where they live, and their titles and industries) will help you see whether your profile is attracting the right people. If the people who view your profile live in another country, are in an unrelated industry, and are nowhere near your target client, you're probably not connecting and engaging with the right people. This is a red flag to update your profile, engage more with the right people, and post more relevant content. Ranking To find your ranking on LinkedIn, click on the same link to see who viewed your profile. This will show you how you rank within your connections and your company. With Premium, you also see where you rank in comparison to other professionals like you. Your LinkedIn ranking only has to do with who viewed your profile; it has no bearing on who you are as a person or in you...

Influence and Persuasion: New Insights From Robert Cialdini

Influence and Persuasion: New Insights From Robert Cialdini

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to persuade more people to become customers? Wondering what the latest science on influence and persuasion has to say? To discover new ways to prepare people for a sale, I interview Dr. Robert Cialdini, author of Influence and Pre-Suasion. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Robert Cialdini, author of Influence and CEO of Influence at Work, a company that provides speakers and training on behavioral psychology and influence in business. Having sold more than 3 million books, he helped coin marketing phrases such as "social proof" and "scarcity." His latest book is called Pre-Suasion: A Revolutionary Way to Influence and Persuade. Robert explores the science behind influence and persuasion. You'll discover how to put these concepts into action to benefit your business. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Influence and Persuasion Robert's First Book Influence, written in the mid-1980s, shares the most successful strategies that professional influencers use to get people to say yes. It was written for consumers so they could recognize and resist these strategies when used in an unwelcome way. The initial response to the book was so mild that the publisher called back the promotional and publicity funds for promoting the book, Robert recalls. They told him it would be like "throwing money down a pit." What happened to change things? Robert explains that times changed. The idea of evidence-based decision-making began to dominate the business world, and Influence provided a compendium of evidence on what factors influence people. About three or four years after publication, the book skyrocketed to bestseller levels, where it's stayed ever since. There were two sources of information for the book. To see what was especially successful in moving people toward a sale, he looked at research literature from the behavioral sciences, marketing, psychology, communication, management, and other fields. He also looked beyond the research literature and began infiltrating all of the training programs he could get access to in the areas of sales, marketing, recruiting, fundraising, etc. This let him see what the professionals were using to train and he gleaned information from those experiences. While he expected consumers to be the audience for Influence, it was actually embraced by the business community first. They wanted to know, scientifically, which factors incline people toward yes, and how to include those factors in messages, marketing campaigns, and more. The interest in harnessing the most powerful practices and procedures for creating change led Robert to write his new book, Pre-Suasion. It's designed for people who want to become more influential. Listen to the show to discover how I was introduced to Robert's work. Pre-Suasion Robert thinks the ideal audience for Pre-Suasion is people who want to increase the extent to which their messages successfully move people in their direction. While this includes salespeople and marketers, it's also for people who want to be more influential inside their families, network of friends, charity boards, etc. Robert says that while Influence covers what to build into a message to get agreement, Pre-Suasion describes the process of gaining agreement with a message before it's sent. The process may seem like some sort of magic, but it's not. It's established science. The key is to create a state of mind in the recipient's head that's consistent with the forthcoming message.

Purpose: How Facebook Built an Empire

Purpose: How Facebook Built an Empire

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Does your business have a purpose? Are you wondering how having a purpose can help drive the success of your business? To learn how Mark Zuckerburg has grown his empire, I interview Ekaterina Walter for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Ekaterina Walter, a global social innovation strategist at Intel and member of the board of directors for Word of Mouth Marketing Association. She is also the author of the new book, Think Like Zuck: The Five Business Secrets of Facebook's Improbably Brilliant CEO Mark Zuckerburg. Ekaterina shares her knowledge about Facebook's purpose and how it helped them build an empire. You'll learn why Facebook has been so successful and what it means to have a purpose. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: The Facebook Empire Ekaterina's Facebook story. Ekaterina shares her story of when she started using Facebook for personal reasons and found what it could do for her. She discovered connections she was able to make with people who have shared interests, whether she knew them or not. She talks about how she uncovered interesting stories that she may not have found through other channels. Facebook helped her understand her connections better and by following them, she could see what was important to them. From a business perspective, about 4 years ago, Intel looked at engaging with its customers on Facebook. They first started with a Facebook Page and shared messages there like other brands, without thinking about creating a two-way dialogue. They quickly realized this wasn't the right way to approach relationships with customers. But they also understood that this was a goldmine: the ability to build relationships right there on the digital platform. Twenty to thirty years ago, Intel used to go into computer clubs to find tech-savvy people and trendsetters in user technology, because these people would then go on to tell the mainstream audience and their friends or relatives. Back then, if you talked to 50 people at a time, either face-to-face or over the phone, you were lucky. Today the Facebook platform allows Intel to connect with almost 15 million fans on their global Page and over 2o million across multinational Pages on a daily basis. It's a place where they can truly engage with their fans and understand them. Before Facebook, this would never have happened. This is the biggest community Intel was ever able to build globally. Over the past 4 years, Intel has been building their communities and engaging in the conversations. Listen to the show to find out why Facebook is exciting for a brand person or marketer. Ekaterina's role within Intel. Ekaterina's role within Intel is to figure out what social means to Intel. She felt lucky that she was able to paint a blank canvas for a number of years and help lead Intel in the right direction. Back then, they tried to figure out the basics: Should they do it internally or outsource, what should they do, how should they build the strategies and what networks should they use? Back in 2009, her role was about looking at the community Intel had built. Since then, it's been about trying to dig deeper and engage in conversations. Ekaterina was managing Intel's community and engaging with fans. She spent a lot of time having conversations with fans, finding out who they were and what kind of content they wanted from Intel as a company. Over a number of years,

Live Video and Marketing: Where the Industry Is Heading

Live Video and Marketing: Where the Industry Is Heading

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Interested in using live video for business? Have you considered creating a live video show? To find out what live video can do for your business, I interview Brian Fanzo. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Brian Fanzo, a tech evangelist who specializes in live video. He's the founder of iSocialFanz and host of the FOMOFanz podcast. Brian explores live video, where it's headed, and how it can help your business. You'll discover whether to use Facebook Live or Periscope if you're just getting started. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Live Video and Marketing What Live Video Means for Business Whether yours is a small business, a brick-and-mortar store, or an ecommerce company, you need to shrink the distance between yourself and your customer, Brian explains. Live video is much more than a marketing play because it shrinks that distance by humanizing your brand and business. Live video is also the gateway to technologies such as augmented reality (AR) and virtual reality (VR), which Brian believes will be huge by 2020. To embrace AR and VR, he says, companies and brands will need to have a live video strategy already in place. He says today's consumers want you to convince them that you can be trusted, that you're a resource, are invested in them, and can understand them. They don't want to be marketed or sold to; they want to engage and have a conversation with you. Businesses need to spend time building rapport, a relationship, and trust with their audience, and live video is a great vehicle for that. With regard to building trust, Brian believes the most valuable statement anyone can make on live video is, "I don't know." If a brand admits they don't know something on live video, it adds validity to what they do know. (When you're stumped, you can also ask audience members to send you a message on Twitter or Facebook, and say you'll have your product manager get back to them.) Listen to the show to hear more about the strategy behind using live video to break down barriers with your audience. Getting Started With Live Video Brian says that according to Cisco, 79% of Internet traffic in 2020 will be video. Nowhere did anyone say that's going to be great video, good video, or live video, Brian continues. However, he believes most brands are thinking about video. Many people think live video is scary because they picture themselves on the video. Brian has to remind them that the best live videos are often made when you're celebrating customers and employees. And if your live video brings people access they can't get anywhere else, the camera doesn't even need to be on you. For example, say you use live video to interview a client, a customer, or a celebrity while they're in the office. As the person behind the camera, you can watch the comments for questions and decide which are important enough to ask the guest. With these kinds of live videos, all of the scary elements of being on air are taken away. Listen to the show to discover my process for doing live videos. Innovative Examples of Live Video Brian says Cisco has done an amazing job with their We Are Cisco campaign. Employees in different offices are trusted to take over the company's social media accounts, including Snapchat and Instagram, to share their point of view. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=oMjEzVH1d0k Not only does the campaign celebrate Cisco's employees, it's also a great recruiting tool. The company doesn't have to convince job applicants that they trust their employees; the proof is v...

Thought Leadership: How to Remain Top of Mind in Your Industry

Thought Leadership: How to Remain Top of Mind in Your Industry

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you consider yourself a thought leader? Want to know what it takes to become a guest on a major podcast or a speaker at large events? In this episode I go behind the scenes at Social Media Examiner with Phil Mershon. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Phil Mershon, director of events at Social Media Examiner. This show is the official third anniversary of the Social Media Marketing podcast. Phil and I will explore how we pick the thought leaders in our industry for our conferences and podcast. You'll discover how to become a thought leader in any industry. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Thought Leadership What thought leadership means Phil talks about the two parts that go into being a thought leader. First, there's the "thought" element. It starts with people who have excellent forward thinking, stay on the cutting edge and push boundaries, understand deeply how things work and are able to articulate it. And second, they must be a "leader," someone whom others listen to and follow. A thought leader does those things over time, consistently producing material that people will listen to month in and month out. Before I started Social Media Examiner, I was called one of the leading authorities in the white paper world. To earn that, I constantly wrote articles, started a blog, did training, wrote a book, summarized industry research and had a monthly newsletter. Establishing yourself as a thought leader is a lot of work. Even harder is maintaining it. Mari Smith is an excellent example of someone who chose to own her title of "Facebook Expert," and is having great results. Listen to the show to discover how long Phil and I have been working together and what we did before Social Media Examiner. How we decide who should be on the podcast and on our stages When deciding on our content, we ask two questions: "What should people speak about?" and "Who should speak about those subjects?" To determine what people will speak about, we look very carefully at the data, Phil explains. We study our annual Social Media Marketing Industry Report, which is based on the subjects our readers tell us they do and do not care about. It influences decisions about the kinds of speakers we need to find, which sometimes means we need to seek out experts we don't know yet. If you want to pitch yourself to a conference or podcast, it's important to first study it. Look at the organization's typical lineup to see what kinds of things people are speaking about, and determine if you're a fit. Not every thought leader is appropriate for every situation. We get inquires all the time from people who pitch us things that aren't appropriate. Listen to the show to hear how booking speakers is like programming for television. What we look for in our speakers Phil and I share the four criteria we look for in a speaker. 1. Are they a great communicator? We're not just looking for inspirational communicators, we are looking for people who can explain or teach at a very deep level how to use the different social media platforms. A lot of people think they're great communicators, but a lot of people also think they're good drivers. I share how when Sally Hogshead was keynoting at Social Media Marketing World, she said "Raise your hand if you think you are a good driver." About 95% of the hands went up in the room. Then she says, "Interestingly enough, research shows that only 55% of people are good drivers, so that means that about 40% of you are kidding your...

Following Your Passion: How Content Can Help You Grow

Following Your Passion: How Content Can Help You Grow

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you follow your passion? Are you wondering if there might be a link between content and living your dreams? To learn how publishing content can get you to where you want to be, I interview C.C. Chapman for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview C.C. Chapman, co-author of Content Rules. He's also a blogger at Digital Dads, a photographer, a long time podcaster and founder of the Cleon Foundation (an agency focused on causes). His newest book is Amazing Things Will Happen. C.C. shares his story of how creating content about his passions has helped him gain the success and audience he has today. You'll learn how to follow your passions, while achieving your goals. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content With Passion The role of content and success C.C. shares his story from when he first started blogging 10 years ago and how content played a gigantic role in his success. When he first started blogging, it was about sharing his thoughts, photos and things around him, which eventually led to audio and video. This is how people started to connect with him. He then went on to evolve more into a marketing person and started an agency called The Advance Guard. He believes that if he wasn't sharing and creating content on a regular basis, he wouldn't have the success he has today. Listen to the show to find out why photography plays a huge role in C.C.'s life. The turning point C.C. says computers have always played a major role in his life. In college he used to send out a weekly newsletter and noticed that people reacted, loved it and shared it. Back then the process was very manual, but that was when he had a light bulb moment—realizing that if he created something, people would enjoy it. This started to grow and then he went on to do independent film for a while. He's always wanted to share everything he did. As the content he shared started to resonate with people, he began to receive comments from people around the world who shared it. C.C. was one of the very first professional podcasters. In 2005, when the first sponsor lined up for his podcast and offered to pay him to advertise, he realized that brands were interested. He then launched an agency and worked with larger brands and bigger projects. Listen to the show to find out how one brand in particular worked in partnership with C.C. Before blogging and podcasting One of C.C.'s first jobs was building intranets and doing usability studies for large internal web systems. But he says that he doesn't think like a programmer and quickly moved from the building of intranets to more managerial roles. Although he started with blogging, it was quickly followed by a podcast in late 2004. He discovered podcasting when he bought his first iPod.  All he had to do was hit Record on the microphone and he never looked back. C.C. considers his podcast the most important element of his success—his blog was always secondary. Today he still writes on his blog, but because it isn't a niche blog, people come and go. With his podcast, which at the time was about music, it was so very focused that people gravitated toward it. When he signed a contract with a big podcasting company and was paid to travel the world, his success soared in a way that he was not ready for or expecting. Transitioning from a music podcast C.C. became the digital marketing manager at the college where he worked. At the time,

How to Get Your Videos to Perform in Search

How to Get Your Videos to Perform in Search

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create YouTube videos? Want to get them seen? Amy Schmittauer is here to help you discover how to get your videos to rank in search. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Amy Schmittauer, a video marketing expert, public speaker, and host of the Savvy Sexy Social YouTube video series. Amy helps marketers with YouTube and social media tips and explores how to get your videos to perform better in search. You'll discover what goes into creating the headline, description, tags, and thumbnail for your videos. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Get Your Videos to Perform in Search Centralizing video Amy recommends to always consider the platform before uploading a video. Don't plan to create an awesome Snapchat story with the intent to upload it to YouTube. That derails your focus. The most important thing is to recognize the platform and deliver a product that will be welcomed in the context of that situation, whether it's Snapchat, Instagram, Vine, or YouTube. How you would present a video on YouTube is very different than how you would present a video on Facebook, especially since you want to create something successful for a specific environment. There's one exception to keep in mind. An influencer who wants to build a Snapchat portfolio needs to find a way to retain that material (a place to put it to be rewatched), since it will expire in 24 hours. If you create content on YouTube, it may make sense to edit in footage from Instagram, Snapchat, a live stream, or something else to give a little context. However, a Snapchat story, uploaded in its original form to YouTube, will not do as well as it would on the original platform. Someone took a bunch of Zach King's Vine videos, strung them together, and put them on Facebook and YouTube, which caused him to explode. So I asked Amy if material from Facebook Live could easily go up on YouTube. She said it could, but the platforms are still different environments. Facebook Lives aren't always as fun on playback, she explains. Also keep in mind that if you get on Live and are just sitting there, going through some sort of programming or curriculum, and talking to comments, it's going to drag on. It doesn't matter if it's 10 or 30 minutes, it won't be fun for anyone on YouTube to watch in a replay. If you broadcast with more intention (for example, mention big news that just happened) and possibly reference a couple of comments here and there (but stay focused), that may be a good repurposing opportunity for YouTube. You want the audience to feel like they're having a similar experience to when it was live. Amy says Facebook and YouTube are about the same in terms of uploading. You take a produced piece of content, upload it, and put it out to the audience subscribing to that channel, whether it's a YouTube page or Facebook page or profile. However, when people watch a video on YouTube, it's an intentional move. They have to go to a video and click Play. Then the audio and video immediately begin. On Facebook, and now on Instagram, posted videos are put in the viewers' faces. When people scroll though their feed, they may or may not see it and they may or may not click the Play or Audio buttons to watch and listen. Plus, the audio on Facebook goes on when the viewer clicks it, so they could start listening at any point in the video. Viewers go through a different thought process before they decide to watch a video on either one of these platforms. Listen to the show to learn why you want to put videos of similar le...

SlideShare: How to Market Your Business With This Growing Platform

SlideShare: How to Market Your Business With This Growing Platform

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use SlideShare? Are you looking for more leads? To learn how SlideShare can help marketers, I interview Todd Wheatland for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Todd Wheatland, author of The Marketer's Guide to SlideShare. He's also head of Thought Leadership at Kelly Services. Todd shares his insights into how SlideShare can be used to generate more exposure and leads for your business. You'll learn the tactics to use and the mistakes to avoid to ensure you get the most out of this platform. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: SlideShare for Business Why marketers should take a closer look at SlideShare Todd believes there are three reasons why marketers should take a closer look at SlideShare. 1. Pure traffic. SlideShare is one of the highest-traffic sites on the Internet, receiving over 60 million unique visitors every month. It gives sheer exposure to your potential audience and SlideShare credibility for search engines. You'll discover amazing things that can happen when you use the same content from your website on SlideShare. The inter-play between content and distribution in one place is very unique in terms of what SlideShare delivers. 2. Business audience. It's a platform that's about business. You'll find out the six words that are the most used tags on content in SlideShare. 3. Leads. The lead-capturing model that SlideShare has been using for the last couple of years is a very simple tool. It's easy for the visitor. You'll hear about how flexible the lead form is for the marketer and the control it gives when you ask for lead generation. A quick overview of SlideShare Todd explains how SlideShare began as a place for people to upload the PowerPoints they were presenting at a conference or an event. Since then, it has evolved into a content marketing platform for any form of digital content. With SlideShare, you can take any sort of presentation and insert videos and record an audio track and lay it over the top. You can then even use it as an audiovisual presentation. It's a platform for you to share any type of digital content including Word documents, infographics, webcasts and HD video. It has moved far beyond the original premise. If you're a blogger with great content on your blog and you choose to house it on SlideShare, you could decide to use your content on SlideShare specifically to capture leads. There are certain ways to handle lead capture on SlideShare versus your own site. Todd states that if you have content that has a complex design, when you host that document on SlideShare, it enables you to embed it very neatly. You'll learn why you should think of it as an enhanced YouTube embed, rather than seeing it as something competing with your website. It supports and drives traffic to your own platform. Listen to the show to find out why the average use on SlideShare is probably far less sophisticated than what the average marketer or professional is using and trying to achieve out of it. How Kelly Services uses SlideShare Todd shares how Kelly Services started to get deep on SlideShare about 2-3 years ago. At present, they have an off-brand on SlideShare called The Talent Project. It's where all their major content items including research reports, ebooks, infographics and videos are stored. You'll hear why they have a platinum network account and how it works for them. The "network" part means that their most prolific con...

How to Optimize the Product Pages of Your Ecommerce Website

by Joydeep Bhattacharya @ Unamo Blog

Someone may perform a Google search for an item in your store, but unless that product’s page is optimized correctly, they may not be able to find it easily in the search results. So, unless you wish to miss out on potential visitors, you should make sure your product pages are optimized. The recommendations below […]

Growing Social Media Examiner: The Bumpy Road of Pursuit

Growing Social Media Examiner: The Bumpy Road of Pursuit

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Ever wonder how Social Media Examiner started? Are you curious about the obstacles we faced in building a sizable media entity? Sit back and learn the story that led millions of people to us. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, my friend Mark Mason, host of the Late Night Internet Marketing Podcast, interviews me to celebrate the fifth anniversary of the Social Media Marketing podcast. We'll explore the core skills that helped me move into social media marketing. You'll also learn how I make strategic decisions about the future of the company. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Pursuit My Entrepreneurial Journey Before Social Media Examiner, I was known as a writer. I wrote a book called Writing White Papers and helped a lot of out-of-work journalists figure out how to go from writing for magazines and newspapers to writing for businesses. The job of a white paper is to persuade and educate. Businesses with expensive or complex products or services use white papers to communicate about them. For instance, a big corporation would hire someone to talk to the engineering and sales departments and translate that foreign language into something a customer could understand. Mark asks how important the helping aspect is to me as an entrepreneur. Whatever I do, I want to help the largest number of people in a way that doesn't place a huge strain on me personally. There's only so much of me to go around, and by creating products that are highly scalable, I can make helping others a big part of what I do. For example, this podcast has more than 10 million downloads and Social Media Examiner has 60 million readers. I wasn't an overnight success, however. When I started Social Media Examiner in 2009, I felt like I was really late to the social media game. A lot of people say they feel they're late today. What I lacked in timing I made up for in my ability to ask questions, understand complex things, and communicate how these things work in a way everyone can understand. This skill has helped me throughout my career. In the 1990s, my focus was creative agency work and designing websites, which was novel at the time. I also helped people design annual reports, trade show booth displays, and corporate logos. When I transitioned into a writer and later into social media, my communication skills continued to serve me well. When I started Social Media Examiner, my secret skill wasn't that I knew anything about social (I knew nothing). It was my ability to discern which people knew things, extract information from them, and convey that knowledge to my audience. No matter what you do, figure out which of your skills allow you to travel into a new space. Then you can be really successful. My entrepreneurial journey has never been easy. By the same token, I think if it had been easy, I would have been bored and moved along to the next thing. I like a challenge and solving puzzles. I'm not one of those people who wants to build a system and then sit back and retire on a beach. I want to keep pushing the envelope and figuring out ways to be better. When I was in college, I dreamed that I was in a room with a couple of hundred people who were congratulating me on my success. I had the dream when I was around 20 years old, and I'm 49 now. That dream didn't come true for around 25 years. Although I've always had certain levels of success, I've never had something amazing happen overnight. I've always been the tortoise, not the hare. I realized my dream had come true in 2014, the second year of Social Media Marketing World,

Twitter Promotion: How to Encourage Others to Promote for You

Twitter Promotion: How to Encourage Others to Promote for You

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use social media to promote your product, service or events? Are you wondering how you can use Twitter to help get more visibility and sales? To learn how Twitter can be used to encourage others to promote for you, this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast gives you insight into the subject. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, you'll discover five different ways you can use Twitter to promote what you have to offer. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter Promotion Why Twitter promotion? I believe that Twitter is the most frictionless form of social media communication. You can also create an enormous amount of buzz on Twitter. Here are five techniques to help you promote and boost excitement around what you have to offer. #1: Include a Customized Tweet Button on Every Single Page of Your Product When you have several pages on your product, service or event site, it's important to have the same tweet on every single page. The first thing you need to do is create a custom Twitter share button. The button options available are Share a Link, Follow, Hashtag and Mention. You want to choose the Share a Link button. The next step is to click on the option to include a different URL, rather than the Use the Page URL option. In this particular case, you'll use the home page of your product, service or event. So when someone clicks on that tweet button to share on Twitter, they'll be directed back to one central place, which is your home page. The next option is Tweet Text. This is where you can write in your own custom tweet. Also make sure you check the Show Count option, because it will display the total number of tweets. You'll hear why it's important to show the number of tweets on your sales page, and the advantages to the Via and Recommend Twitter ID options. The last step is to add a hashtag. When you visit our event page for Social Media Marketing World, you'll notice that once you click on the tweet button, not only does it have our customized tweet, but it also includes the URL for the home page and the hashtag for the event. Once you have created your custom tweet, it'll give you a little piece of code that you can put in a sidebar widget if you're on WordPress, or embed the HTML where you want it. The good news is that it works over and over again. Here are a few tips on how to craft your tweet: Write the tweet as if the user was writing it him- or herself. Make sure it's not overly promotional. Craft it in a way that it's easy to read. Include a hashtag. Listen to the show to discover the types of phrases you should use in your custom tweet. #2: Embed a Twitter Widget on Every Page That You Use to Promote When you visit the event page for Social Media Marketing World, you'll see the widget below. On the event page it's live. You can see the hashtag at the top, and underneath are the tweets relating to the event. The reason that they're all in one place is because of the hashtag. As you scroll through the tweets, you'll see the people who have clicked on the custom tweet, plus those who are talking about the event in general. You'll hear why the value proposition in something like this on your sales page is huge, and the reason why I decided to have it on every single page at Social Media Examiner. To create a Twitter widget, you first need to log into Twitter and then visit here. Next, click on Create New and then Search. You will see that it asks for Search Query.

4 Tips for More SlideShare Leads

4 Tips for More SlideShare Leads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use SlideShare? Wondering how to generate leads from SlideShare? With the right design and content, your SlideShare presentation can become a powerful lead-generating marketing tool. In this article, you'll discover four simple steps for creating a SlideShare presentation that people can't resist. Listen to this article: Why SlideShare for Lead Generation? The great thing about SlideShare is that the platform generates over 70 million visitors a month, and 5 times more traffic from business owners than Twitter, Facebook, YouTube, and LinkedIn. This means there is a ton of potential for you to redirect some of those valuable visitors back to your site. #1: Look to Others for Guidance It's important to understand what's already working for others on SlideShare before you spend too much time putting together a deck that no one wants to look at. To begin, search SlideShare to see what some of the most popular slide decks look like, and understand which elements you should replicate in your own decks. For example, if you're trying to get people to participate in an Instagram class you're promoting, you can search the social media category in SlideShare. Flip through some of the slide decks you see and make notes on the following to guide your own SlideShare deck: Cover slide elements Number of slides in each deck Font size and the number of words per slide Color scheme Title Types of content in each deck (slide deck, infographic, document, etc.) How and when images are used Tone of the language #2: Craft Your Content Before you start copying and pasting chunks of text into a PowerPoint template, take a minute to think about what pieces of information are absolutely crucial to your audience's interests. Carefully consider the angle you're going to use to engage people. How will you encourage people to click through your presentation to the end? In addition to text and images on your slides, consider uploading infographics or other documents that might be interesting to your audience, as in this example from Jay Baer's deck How Fast Is Fast Enough? Here are some points to keep in mind when designing your presentation: Start With an Outline An initial outline should quickly break down the text you want to include in your SlideShare. Keep it brief. Most SlideShare presentations have between 30 and 60 slides. If each of your slides has a 100-word paragraph on it, you no longer have a slide deck, you have a novela. Instead, aim to limit the text on each slide to the length of a tweet. Story is important. If you want your presentation to succeed, it has to present an intriguing angle. Want to do a presentation about how to use Facebook Live? Try positioning it as, "The Worst Ways to Use Facebook Live." Inject Personality Have a conversation. Talking directly to your readers is a great way to build trust and hold their attention. Ask questions they're likely to ponder, then continue to answer those questions. Use humor. For some reason we've been conditioned to act serious and professional all the time. But the honest truth is, people get bored easily. Humor is a very powerful tool and can boost people's opinions of you. It makes you likeable. When people like you, they're more likely to listen to and trust you. If your readers trust you, you can tell them what to buy. See what I'm getting at? Teach Your Audience The primary purpose of a SlideShare should be to teach your audience something they don't know. Showcase your expert knowledge on SlideShare and you'll get leads and traffic. Offer immediate value. Include points that offer actionable and useful tips for the reader, as in the example below from Peg Fitzpatrick's The Art of Social Media: Power Tips for Power Users. People should leave the SlideShare having learned something. You'll want to avoid general takeaways and focus on sharing valuable tools,

Podcast to Book Deal: How to Turn Your Passion Into Profit

Podcast to Book Deal: How to Turn Your Passion Into Profit

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you host a podcast or write a blog? Want to know what it takes to get a book deal? To discover how to turn your content into a book deal, I interview Lewis Howes. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Lewis Howes, co-author of LinkedWorking (a book focused on LinkedIn) and Ultimate Webinar Marketing Guide. His podcast is called The School of Greatness (a top 100 podcast in iTunes). He also has a brand-new book by the same title: The School of Greatness. Lewis will explore how he went from podcasting to a book deal. You'll discover how Lewis pivoted the focus of his business into something he loves. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Podcast to Book Deal Lewis's journey Lewis says when he thinks of musicians or performers, the ones who are really successful endure for decades by reinventing themselves every three to five years. They do this by following their own dreams and desires, while staying in tune with their audience. Lewis relates this to his own experience with building a couple of different businesses. While one of those businesses served him and other people for a while, Lewis explains there came a time when he was no longer inspired by teaching people about how to maximize LinkedIn. Lewis shares why he transitioned into webinars and ultimately began The School of Greatness podcast three years ago. Lewis explains that a lot of people connected with The School of Greatness podcast. They started asking for more programs, online courses, coaching, events and now a book. Listen to the show to discover how Lewis and I met, and what he said to me. When and why Lewis started a podcast In 2012, Lewis asked Pat Flynn and Derek Halpern what was working in their businesses to drive traffic, get leads and build their audience. Both of them said their podcast. Find out why he was surprised by their answers. In January 2013, Lewis started podcasting once a week. At the three-and-a-half- to four-month mark, he got an email from iTunes saying they loved what he was doing (the inspiration and guests) and wanted to feature him on their home page. This exposed Lewis to a whole new audience beyond the online marketing audience he'd been building. Now he was reaching people from all over the world who wanted to live a better life. Lewis shares how The School of Greatness started as an interview show and turned into a mixture of interviews and solo episodes. Listen to the show to hear how Lewis came up with the title for his podcast. Lewis's podcast audience and guests Lewis thought his audience was going to be young entrepreneurs, men and women, probably mid 20s to late 30s. He since discovered it serves a much broader audience range: college kids, moms who play it for their kids in the car, the 50-year-old guy who wants to leave his corporate job to build a business, world-class athletes, former athletes and people from all walks of life. Lewis shares how he chooses guests for his podcast and how his delivery has evolved from one podcast a week to two shows a week (Monday and Wednesday), plus a 5-minute inspirational segment on Friday. Lewis also talks about the three things he believes factored into his success: getting featured on iTunes, interviewing Tony Robbins and having people share the first episode he did on video. httpv://youtu.be/kSoO2KjVVG4 Listen to the show to discover how many downloads The School of Greatness gets each month. The book deal In 2007, Lewis read The 4-Hour Workweek by Timothy Ferriss.

8 Social Tools to Listen and Interact With Customers

8 Social Tools to Listen and Interact With Customers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you engage with customers online? Are you looking for tools to help manage and monitor customer relationships? From product discovery to purchase and support, tools have emerged to help your business manage the social customer experience on whichever channel your customers prefer. In this article you'll discover eight tools to help your business provide a seamless social customer experience. The Evolution of Customer Experience Social customer experience is not built purely on old foundations such as ticketing systems. Nor is it designed only to support customers on Facebook, Twitter, and other social media platforms. Today, social customer experience is a hybrid of the two. What started off with a simple model of customer support ("Email us and we'll help.") has since evolved to include ticketing systems, live chat, and social media. Listen to this article: For a while, there were no tools available to support the customer experience, so companies responded directly to customers on each social network. However, that made tracking a challenge. Fortunately, a number of social listening tools have cropped up to meet this need. While social is still where customers feel they're being heard most (especially when reaching out to companies that haven't humanized their culture outside of a social media platform), not everyone wants to seek support publicly on Twitter or Facebook. This fact gave rise to a newer social customer experience phenomenon: in-app messaging for websites and blogs. Read on to explore both types of tools and find out which ones can help you deliver a solidly social customer experience. Tools for Social Listening So what are the social tools catering to this great evolution in the customer experience? Here's a hint: They're not necessarily the tools you'd think to use, especially if you come from a marketer's school of thought. The idea behind these tools is engagement, follow-up, and (truth be told) reactivity. Let's take a look at some of the social listening tools that might work for your business. #1: Sparkcentral Sparkcentral is a customer service tool that lets you communicate with your customers across Twitter, Facebook, and Instagram in real time, supporting needs as they arise. The company calls itself a channel-agnostic customer engagement platform because it can focus on social media while also supporting in-app messaging for team members. Although Sparkcentral is similar to many of the other tools in this article, it's geared toward the enterprise and priced accordingly. #2: Sprout Social While Sprout Social is touted as a tool for social media marketing, it also has a deeply involved component for social customer service. You can see Tweets and Facebook posts on a dashboard where team members can respond to them. It will also allow service teams to access data such as customer history and their involvement. Think of these support issues like "tickets," which can be hidden away once they're acted on. Real-time tracking and a beautiful interface for reporting ensures that everyone is accountable and on the same page. #3: Respond Respond by Buffer is possibly the simplest user tool exclusively for social customer service, and focuses only on Twitter. You can respond to customers, review previous chat history, and follow/block users. It has an easy-to-use interface for teams and lots of accountability. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yiAiOFjnG2U If you've used Hootsuite (typically the first step in the social media customer service game, discussed below), Respond is the next step up to give you an edge on your social customer service. It can support both small and large teams looking for simplicity and no other frills. Pricing is also more accessible to smaller businesses. #4: Lithium Like many of the other tools on this list, Lithium is intended for managing customer service at scale. It will allow your representatives to respond di...

5 Ways to Use Storytelling in Your Social Media Marketing

5 Ways to Use Storytelling in Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to use storytelling in your social media marketing? Are you looking for inspiration? Building your social media campaigns around stories helps you stand out from other brands, and grab the attention of consumers. In this article you'll discover five ways to use storytelling in your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Pay Attention to Story Structure Freytag's pyramid is a powerful storytelling framework used in a variety of creative works from Aesop's Fables to Shakespeare's plays. This structure splits the story into five narrative arcs, evoking various emotional reactions from your audience. These arcs include the inciting moment, the complication or rising action, the climax (or turning point), the reversal or falling action and the moment of release. In your storytelling you can follow the steps in Freytag's pyramid or use them in parts, but the approach helps you make an emotional connection with your consumers. In 2014 Jaguar launched a high-suspense campaign with David Beckham in China, targeting local social networks WeChat and Weibo. Before revealing Beckham as the brand ambassador, the campaign asked consumers to guess Mr. Jaguar's identity. Jaguar released street interviews and videos to build suspense. They also dropped hints throughout the campaign to get consumer traction. The exercise was highly successful and drew 50,000 reposts when it started. An additional 30,000 reposts came in after David Beckham was introduced as the ambassador. #2: Sequence Your Ads to Create Stories According to the recently published The Power of Storytelling from Facebook IQ, online storytelling on social media can have a direct impact on in-store purchases. As an experiment, Refinery29 tested Facebook ads that were sequenced like stories. Overall, the experiment yielded a 56% conversion lift and an 87% rise in view-throughs. Refinery29 also saw a 7% increase in in-store purchases and a 10% increase in online purchases. Deliver sequenced Facebook ads that combine quality content with a strong call to create a social media-led storytelling campaign like this one. #3: Align Your Story with Audience Values A belief ecosystem allows you to move away from product-oriented branding to a more lifestyle or customer value-oriented branding. This is a natural fit for social media where businesses need to define a niche target group (the first believers), develop a brand communication strategy (giving consumers a simple and clear reason to believe) and create online and offline spaces for brand reach and to share stories. This approach is effective because it allows you to sharpen your brand identity, creating strong competitive differentiation and higher price flexibility. This, in turn, has a direct impact on your bottom line. In 2014 Daimler's smart division launched a campaign for the FOR lifestyle brand. As Daimler explains, "'FOR' stands for a constructive, positive and optimistic outlook that can change the world." The company set up a special portal to aggregate social content for the #WhatAreYouFOR campaign hashtag. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SB_0vRnkeOk Another component was an offline campaign centered on pedestrian safety. A key element was the Dancing Traffic Light Manikin, which entertained and asked customers, "What are you for?" This approach helped solidify smart's positioning as a consumer lifestyle choice: a green city car that cares about the world. The customer experience was the central pull for smart's campaign. This was in stark contrast to the pre-2013 online positioning of smart cars that talked more about product features than value. The FOR brand campaign also clearly differentiated smart cars from Daimler's performance-oriented cars. #4: Tell Local Stories With powerful social media reach (1 in 7 people in the world are on Facebook) and democratization of the narrative,

Facebook Retargeting Spend Increases: New Research

Facebook Retargeting Spend Increases: New Research

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to see a higher ROI from Facebook? Have you considered Facebook retargeting ads? Facebook retargeting allows you to reach your website visitors via custom ads on Facebook. In this article you'll discover recent findings from studies focused on Facebook retargeting. Why Facebook Retargeting? While everyone has probably seen Facebook retargeting, not everyone knows how it works. Have you ever noticed that after visiting a website, suddenly an ad for that site pops up in your Facebook feed or on other websites or a mobile app? When you visited the website initially, it put a code into your browsing history, allowing it to follow you around the web. When you visit a different site or Facebook, the code triggers those sites to show the initial site's ads. Listen to this article: Retargeting is an online version of the basic sales and advertising principle of the follow-up. Without retargeting, your website has only one shot to convert. All motivation to go back to it depends strictly on the visitor. As sales and marketing statistics prove, most consumers need more nurturing. Retargeting releases your website from that one static location, freeing it to wander around the Internet, following customers with an enticing ad. Google had been handling retargeting (which it calls remarketing) for websites for years before Facebook started in 2012. Of course being on Facebook, which nearly every American visits once (if not multiple times) per day, increases the odds of getting your ads in front of someone who is interested in your products or services. Once there, you can even get them to follow you, another bump down the sales funnel. #1: Marketers Are Increasing Spend on Facebook Retargeting Companies already engaging in retargeting through Google remarketing are widening their retargeting efforts by adding Facebook to the "inventory" (options for where the ad will appear). In its Facebook by the Numbers 2015 survey of 1,000 marketers, retargeting service AdRoll found significantly increased spend via Facebook. The year spanning July 2014 to June 2015 showed increased activity and improved results over the same period the previous year. In the United States, B2B companies increased average spend on Facebook retargeting by 51%. Retail companies invested an average of 26% more. Of AdRoll's global customers, the average B2B company increased Facebook retargeting spend by 66%, and the average retail company by 31%. Key Takeaway: With 1.5 billion active users globally now, Facebook user adoption is still racing ahead. From July 2014 to July 2015, Facebook's ad revenue increased by 43%. With its enormous audience, you can narrowly target your ads and still reach a decent number of consumers. You have the opportunity to reach people who not only have indicated a need, but also have already indicated interest in specific, branded products and services. #2: Increasing ROI Is Driving Retargeting Spend One of the AdRoll survey's major findings is that running ad campaigns across a variety of Internet channels (websites, Facebook and mobile apps) results in better performance and greater ROI than staying with display ads only. As the chart below shows, adding Facebook retargeting doubles the static display-ad impression reach, and lowers the cost per click (CPC) by 26% and cost per action (CPA) by 33%. The arrival of B2B advertising on Facebook pushed up retargeting results. While many marketers considered Facebook the domain of B2C, this year B2B got impressive results adding Facebook to their retargeting destinations. As the chart below shows, on average, B2B companies that spent an additional 60% of their budgets on Facebook retargeting saw an increased click-through rate of 140%. They also reduced cost per click by 11% and cost per action by 42%. Key Takeaway: It only makes sense that hyper-targeting drives improved click-through rates.

Facebook for Local Business: Creative Ways to Grow

Facebook for Local Business: Creative Ways to Grow

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is your local business on Facebook? Wondering how to market your business more effectively? To explore how to use Facebook in creative ways, I interview Anissa Holmes. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Dr. Anissa Holmes, the author of Delivering WOW: How Dentists Can Build a Fascinating Brand and Achieve More, While Working Less! Her podcast is the Delivering WOW Dental podcast. She's a practicing dentist and teaches Facebook marketing courses for dentists. Anissa explores how local businesses can grow using Facebook. You'll discover why Facebook is more valuable for local businesses than review websites. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Marketing for Local Businesses Anissa's Story After practicing dentistry in the U.S. for several years, Anissa moved to her husband's home country of Jamaica in 2010 and started a new dental practice from scratch. She knew most dentists typically get 10 to 15 new patients per month through referrals, but with a startup practice in a totally different country, she decided to try promoting her new practice on Facebook. In early 2010, Anissa set up a Facebook business page and began sharing what happened in the practice each day, including behind-the-scenes snapshots and stories about how the practice's dental services were changing people's lives. Anissa's strategy worked. Her practice began getting 5 to 10 new patients a month. Anissa figured she was onto something and began buying Facebook ads. As the Facebook algorithm changed, she made adjustments. Her practice now spends about $500 a month on Facebook and those marketing efforts attract about 50 new patients every month. With such outstanding growth, the practice's revenue tripled, and Anissa's practice was able to pay for a new office with three times the space totally out of profits. The practice is debt-free and so is Anissa. She shares that this financial success and security is a result of the business growth she achieved through Facebook marketing. After dentists started asking Anissa how her practice was achieving those crazy results, last year Anissa created a Facebook course and began lecturing to dentists all over the world about Facebook. The journey has been interesting, Anissa says, and she attributes the success to Facebook. When new customers come in, they already know the practice and how it can solve their problems. They're already connected and ready to make a purchase. Listen to the show to learn more about Anissa's background. Why Local Businesses Need to Go Beyond Review Sites If your new customers hang out on Facebook, Anissa says, that's where you need to be. People aren't hanging out on Yelp or Google. Most people (including Anissa) check Facebook first thing in the morning, between daily tasks, and in the evening. That's why Facebook marketing needs to be your focus. Anissa says creating the right content is important. A lot of businesses post information about how great they are and share a lot of stock content, but Anissa says that really doesn't work. She stresses that local businesses need to share their story and what makes their business unique. For example, if you have a plumbing company, what are you offering that's different from everyone else? To compete with photos of kids, community happenings, and articles, Anissa creates engaging posts that connect with people and make them want to click, including content about community impact and what her practice does to change patients' lives. Anissa also shares testimonials.

How to Build a Better Target Audience for Your Facebook Ads

How to Build a Better Target Audience for Your Facebook Ads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to reach the right people with your Facebook Ads? Want to learn more about targeted audiences? Facebook's demographic and segmentation tools let you serve your Facebook ads to people who match your ideal customer persona. In this article you'll discover how to build a target audience for your Facebook ads. Listen to this article: #1: Explore Facebook Ad Targeting Options There are four primary sets of attributes to consider when targeting your audience with Facebook ads. Understanding what each one represents will give you the building blocks to construct your target audience. Locations Location targeting allows you to focus on an audience in a specific geographic area like a country, city, state or zip code. With advanced options, you can choose people who actually reside in the area or are just physically located in the area. This type of targeting is critical if you're focusing on an area around a retail store and want to offer a coupon to nearby shoppers. Demographics Demographic filters give you the option to target people based on criteria like education, profession, relationship status, life events and other cultural and social affiliations. Interests Interests data is based on Facebook's gathering of specific information when you use the platform. For instance, if you like a page about pop music, you won't be flagged as having an interest in rock and roll. Use Interests to filter people based on their interactions with pages, events and apps inside of Facebook. Behaviors Base behavior targeting on online and offline habits like mobile device use, travel patterns and digital activities like online gaming. For instance, you could segment your audience by those who are planning to travel or those who have just returned from travel. With proper use of these segmentation methods, you can narrow your audience and match your message or offer to a specific audience niche. Now you might be thinking, "That's great if I know the details about my audience demographics, but I don't." Don't worry; Facebook gives you the tools you need to gain valuable insight into your customers and your competition. #2: Gather Audience Details With Insights With Facebook's Audience Insights, you can get detailed information about your target audience. If you have a large enough customer base, you can import your customers' email addresses or phone numbers into Facebook as a custom audience. Once the process is complete, you then use Audience Insights to see the information about your customers' age and gender, location, lifestyle types, education, marital status, job titles, top interests and more. With this tool, you can also run insight reports on competitors, top brands or interests. The trick is to make sure you have a similar topic or brand to offer. For instance, say you own an appliance store and want to sell more Whirlpool appliances. By choosing that brand in Audience Insights, you can see that there are 400K+ active monthly Facebook members interested in Whirlpool. Of that group, 59% are married, over 50% have households of three or more and 32% are in the healthcare industry. Do you think a sponsored story about the health benefits of Whirlpool appliances for families with kids, citing healthcare professionals, would resonate with that audience? Yes, it would. #3: Build Your Audience Now that you understand the basic concepts of audience targeting and the tools, it's time to take a look at some real-world examples. These examples show how you can target customers using techniques for a variety of industries. Remember that these are just examples. The goal is to create your own interpretations to fit your business. Realtor Suppose you're a realtor and you want to target homebuyers. There isn't a segment on Facebook for active homebuyers, so how do you do this? Think about your customers and what motivates them to...

How to Add a Slide Out Contact Form in WordPress

by Editorial Staff @ WPBeginner

Do you want to add a slide out contact form in WordPress? If your business depends on getting new leads from your website’s contact form, then one of the best ways to grow your lead source is to make your contact form more noticeable. In… Read More »

The post How to Add a Slide Out Contact Form in WordPress appeared first on WPBeginner.

What Is SEO / Search Engine Optimization?

What Is SEO / Search Engine Optimization?


Search Engine Land

Get started learning all about SEO from the industry's most trusted source, Search Engine Land. Review basics of search engine optimization, ranking factors & more.

How to Host and Promote a Twitter Chat

How to Host and Promote a Twitter Chat

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Twitter to market your business? Have you thought about hosting chats? Twitter chats are a great way to connect with customers and prospects, build authority and gain exposure for your business. In this article you'll discover how to prepare, promote and host a Twitter chat. Listen to this article: #1: Define the Objective Always start by defining the objective of your Twitter chat. Find a topic that will appeal to your target audience. The chat needs to provide value to your audience to be successful. Don't make it just about your company; tailor it to how you can help your community. For example, if you're in the photography industry, invite guests to discuss photo editing tips, black-and-white photography, photography inspiration, etc. An added benefit is that you can repurpose all of the chat contributions into a future blog post. Those who participated in the chat will appreciate having a summary of it, and readers who missed it will enjoy the insight. #2: Identify Similar Chats Once you've established an objective for your chat, find at least five Twitter chats similar to yours to gather ideas. You can find Twitter chats with tools like TweetReports and Gnosisarts. Learn how these chats work. Observe how the host controls the flow of conversation and directs topics. Also find out which guests are invited, how many questions are posed, what times the chats are held and how they're promoted. Be sure to participate as well. Answer questions and engage with others. This allows you to build your expertise and gives you insight into what it's like to participate in a Twitter chat. #3: Set the Date and Time Choosing the date and time for your chat is important. Typically the best times to hold Twitter chats are between the hours of 6 pm ET and 10 pm ET. However, avoid scheduling your chat at a time that would clash with other popular chats. Write down the times that you won't be able to hold a chat. Next, list the scheduled times for the five Twitter chats that you followed earlier. Then search for a time slot that won't clash with them. #4: Choose a Hashtag Now comes the fun part: naming your Twitter chat. Typically every chat hashtag ends with "chat" (for example, #mediachat, #influencerchat and #blogchat). Adding the word "chat" signals to people that it's a Twitter chat instead of a regular hashtag or an event. When choosing a hashtag, make sure it fits your brand. Also, check that it's not a Twitter username and hasn't been used as a hashtag previously. Brainstorm at least 15 chat names and then pick the best one. You might want to seek input from your co-workers. After you select a hashtag, make sure that you register the Twitter username. You can use this account to hold your chats. #5: Invite Guests Next, make a list of at least 20 guests you want to invite. Start securing guests at least two weeks prior to your chat. If it's your first Twitter chat, make sure you have a commitment from at least four guests a month in advance. Guests are often busy, so you need to secure them in advance. Ideally, you want someone who has experience being a guest and is interested in holding Twitter chats. If you have an influential user who loves your company, consider inviting that person to be a guest, too. #6: Prepare Questions Once you have everything in place and have secured at least four guests in advance, start preparing questions. You'll need about 7 to 10 questions for your guests. Send these questions to them at least 72 hours prior to the chat so they can prepare their responses. During the chat, spread out the questions about 6 to 8 minutes apart. Ask your last question about 10 minutes before the end of the chat to allow time for the community to discuss it. #7: Promote the Chat The key to making your Twitter chat stand out is to promote it. Here are some ways to do that: Partner With Other Chats

Sales

Sales

by Marvin Russell @ How to Run a Successful SEO Company

Learn how to successfully sell SEO and how to stand out against all the SEO competition in the world. I also share some of my early SEO sales experiences.

The post Sales appeared first on .

How To Create a Brand Ambassador Program for Employees Using Social Media

How To Create a Brand Ambassador Program for Employees Using Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for brand ambassadors? Have you considered recruiting your employees to help? When you empower your employees to talk about your company on social media, they’ll share a human perspective people naturally gravitate to. In this article you’ll discover how to set up a successful employee brand ambassador program to enhance your social media marketing. #1: Assign a Community Leader The first step is to designate a captain, someone who is able to take the reins. However, don't think of this person as someone who will bark orders. Instead, choose a person who can guide a group of people who already know the ropes. Listen to this article: Your community leader will: Provide a common voice and/or vision for the team Coach employees on responsible social media strategies Oversee and approve social media content Collaborate with co-workers to come up with new methods, stories and ideas for campaigns Lead the measurement and analysis of social media efforts You'll want to be sure your community leader is also capable of handling crisis situations. Your company will undoubtedly stumble into a social media mistake at some point, and you'll need a leader who can think fast on his or her feet. We're all aware how small things become magnified online – no matter how silly they seem to be. Starbucks' latest controversy about their holiday cups is a great example. The coffee chain didn't withdraw their original design. Rather, they made a statement in their official blog and stuck by it. #2: Communicate Your Vision The second step is to impart a single vision to everyone based on your company's mission – why your business exists. Starbucks' vision is to "inspire and nurture the human spirit – one person, one cup and one neighborhood at a time." The coffee chain embodies this concept in everything they do, including how they encourage employees to showcase inspiring ideas through social media. Thanks to their official pages on Facebook and Instagram, which are open to public view, Starbucks employees can quickly exchange ideas even if they're oceans apart. Adapting the tactic for your business will make your employees feel empowered, and at the same time encourage them to promote your company in their own circles. #3: Share Your Expectations No campaign can be successful without guidelines. Although you encourage active participation and uniqueness, your employees still need a set of rules so content remains consistent. Adobe does a great job of educating employees to act as brand ambassadors through their Social Shift program. Here's an image from a short presentation, which shows how they divide their strategy into different courses. During their training, employees are made aware of certain rules of engagement and protocols so their social media posts are consistent with the company's vision. To get a good example of how these guidelines work, take a look at the Adobe stream on Twitter. You can make your rules as detailed or as simple as you want, but you should ensure everyone agrees to them before they post. Here's a glimpse of how #AdobeLife tweets reflect a productive, fun and enriching work experience. https://twitter.com/bossjones/status/675107939921887232 According to Talent Cove, 78% of workers who feel recognized are more motivated to perform their tasks. Head of Adobe Employment Branding Natalie Kessler and her team like to reward employees with the best social media posts using #AdobeLife. Every week, they choose from compiled photos and messages online and then highlight them in Adobe offices. This shows employees how important their efforts are to the company. If you want to boost productivity and amp up your social media presence, make sure you're providing the right rewards for your brand ambassadors. You can arrange a small party or even offer giveaways or exclusive items.

Viral Videos: How to Create and Promote Videos People Love

Viral Videos: How to Create and Promote Videos People Love

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you struggle to create and promote videos? Are you wondering how to make videos that go viral? To learn about the creative process of coming up with video ideas and making them happen, I interview Mark Malkoff for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Mark Malkoff, a comedian and filmmaker. Mark shares his love and passion for creating videos and several amazing stories behind his viral videos. You'll learn about his process for creating video and how to get traction. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Video Creation and Promotion Mark has created several viral videos and has been featured on many television shows. You'll hear about the stories behind these videos and what he accomplished to get this media attention. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=CwYxuV2dVzw Mark shares how he grew up in love with comedy, the path he took before he started making videos and how he started making viral videos. Mark describes himself as a comedian at heart and the biggest comedy nerd. He feels that his love for comedy shines through in his work. The stories behind Mark's videos You'll hear the story behind Mark's first very successful video: the 171 Starbucks mentioned above. This is when he visited and consumed purchases at all 171 Starbucks locations in Manhattan in less than 24 hours. Just after this 171 Starbucks story, Mark approached IKEA with a project of living and working in an IKEA store for a week. And after 2 months of being persistent, they agreed. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Z9q0sB_Xp6A Mark's IKEA story brought the most publicity in the USA in the history of IKEA as a company. And IKEA ended up winning the PR Week of the Year Award for the campaign. But to Mark, it was all about the video content and his videos on this project got 1.8 million views. Listen to the show to discover the secrets behind his success. The goals behind Mark's videos You'll learn how Mark's goal is simply to do things that make him laugh and challenge him. Sometimes brands are involved and sometimes they aren't. Mark tells the story of when he got carried across New York City by 155 individuals, 9.4 miles in 11-degree weather. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Gi4ClspNrNs The aim of this video was to prove to the world that New Yorkers are nice. The video was a success. Sometimes brands come to him and other times he has to knock on their doors. Listen to the show to find out why Ford Motor Company was one of the best brands Mark has worked with.  The process of creating a viral video Mark shares his process to come up with ideas for the videos he makes. You'll learn how he goes from the ideas to creating a video project. And you'll probably be surprised by the amount of research and training involved behind the scenes for Mark's videos. Mark shares his experience of having hours of video and trying to tell the story in a short video for YouTube. Listen to the show to find out how he tests his videos. The story in the video Mark explains how it's his own curiosity that resonates with his audience. The story behind the Apple Store Challenge was to see what he could get away with in the Apple store. The video got over 1 million views on YouTube. Parts of the challenge included taking a goat into the store, ordering a pizza to be delivered there, dressing up as Darth Vader to get his iPhone repaired and a date night for him and his wife.

eBay SEO: How to Boost Your Visibility on eBay & Rank #1

eBay SEO: How to Boost Your Visibility on eBay & Rank #1


eBay Sellers Journey to $100,000 a Month

eBay SEO - Get your eBay listings ranked #1 and increase eBay sales! eBay's Cassini search engine Optimization explained!

How to Boost Your Engagement With Visual Content

How to Boost Your Engagement With Visual Content

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more engagement on your social channels? Have you considered using visual content? There are easy-to-use tools and tactics you can use to create visual content that attracts viewers and engages them. In this article you’ll discover how to use visual content to boost engagement. Listen to this article: #1: Create Animated GIFs From YouTube Video Millennials (people reaching young adulthood around the year 2000) are known as Generation GIF. If you check out publications like BuzzFeed, Gawker and Deadspin or browse the front pages of Reddit and Tumblr, you'll see animated GIFs are everywhere. Animated GIFs expand your marketing channels and increase the chances of your content going viral on Tumblr and Reddit. And from there, content is often picked up by major publications and blogs. There are tools that make it easy to create animated GIFs. Here are a couple you might want to try: MakeaGif is a free online tool that lets you create animated GIFs using photos, YouTube videos, uploaded videos and web camera videos. You can also use it to modify an existing GIF. GIFYT allows you to create high-quality GIFs from YouTube videos. With this free tool, you can select what portion of the video to turn into the GIF and add a caption. You can check out some of the GIFs created with GIFYT here. #2: Install On-Hover Sharing Buttons Sometimes readers are inclined to share an image, but they either don't know how or simply forget to do so. A mild mouseover call to action that encourages a share will prompt more visual shares from viewers. Use a plugin like WWM Social Share On Image Hover as an easy way to enable mouseover sharing (Here's how to securely install Wordpress plugins!) With this tool, you can automatically place buttons on all of your images so your viewers can share them in an instant. It's a surprisingly effective way to increase engagement. Here’s a page where you can see mouseover share buttons in action, and here are more plugins that add image-sharing options on mouseover. #3: Play on Emotion Connecting with your audience on an emotional level leaves a long-lasting impact. When something sparks an emotional response, the viewer is more likely to share, comment on and remember it. Visuals are great for this purpose. Humans respond to what they see, more so than any other form of stimulation. If you're connecting emotionally with users, they'll start to associate those feelings with your brand. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2K5trQS3JeA According to Fractl research, the two most engaging emotions (in terms of provoking shares) are positive feelings (such as joy, interest, anticipation and trust) and the element of surprise. #4: Celebrate Unusual Holidays From National Hamburger Day to National Book Lovers' Day, unusual holidays are hard to resist. They're also an awesome source of visual content inspiration. There's an idea for a cool image to create almost daily. Coca-Cola does a great job of using unusual holidays in their social media marketing. They published these images of cute animals to celebrate National Polar Bear Day. To find holidays and observances, you can check these useful lists of unusual holidays and days of the year for inspiration. #5: Ask Viewers to Contribute You don't have to use your own visuals to capture your viewers' attention. Flip the script and ask your viewers to contribute their images. People love seeing their work promoted by a brand, and it makes them feel appreciated and special. On your social channels, ask viewers to submit designs, logos, photographs, drawings or anything else uniquely suited to your product. Facebook, Instagram and Pinterest are fantastic platforms for this style of campaign. Here are two easy-to-implement visual contest ideas to engage your audience and create more visual context around your brand. Caption Contests Publish an interesting image and ask your reader...

6 Tips for Pinterest Marketing in Just Minutes a Day

6 Tips for Pinterest Marketing in Just Minutes a Day

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your Pinterest marketing taking too much time? Are you ready for a better Pinterest marketing plan? Time-saving Pinterest marketing tactics can deliver more results with less effort. In this article you'll discover six tactics to help you market on Pinterest in minutes a day. Listen to this article: Get Started on Pinterest If you haven't already done so, set up your business on Pinterest. It's easy to get started. First, sign up for a Pinterest business account and complete your profile. Be sure to upload the proper profile image. Then verify your website with your Pinterest account. Next, add Pin It and Follow buttons, as well as widgets, to your website. Plus, enable rich pins, depending on your content type. Once this is done, you're ready to get moving on your Pinterest marketing. Here are six tactics to manage your time and be more productive on Pinterest. #1: Repin for a Few Minutes Each Day Take around three minutes each day to curate and repin to your Pinterest boards. Enter keywords for your niche or industry in Pinterest search. Based on your initial search, Pinterest will offer additional search term suggestions. Just click on any of the words under the search bar to add them. This will refresh the search, giving you new possible content, associated with the extra keyword, to repin. You'll easily find the best content to share. To get noticed on Pinterest, you need to pin and repin regularly. Just check the links on any pins to make sure they're active and relevant before you share them. If you spend 3 minutes a day (15 minutes a week) repinning, you will increase the number of repins on your boards significantly. Let's say you have 10 boards. Target 3 boards and repin 2 pins on each one every weekday. That's 6 pins a day and 30 pins a week. Time investment: 15 minutes a week. #2: Schedule Pins to Publish on Weekends To keep your Pinterest account active on the weekend, schedule pins. I recommend you do this for five minutes on Fridays, after you post your daily pins. Choose a scheduling tool for Pinterest such as Viralwoot, Tailwind or Buffer to post images at any time. I use Tailwind, which allows me to schedule pins on the platform or through a browser extension. Schedule at least six pins over two or three different boards to post throughout the weekend. #3: Follow Relevant Pinners For successful Pinterest marketing, you must follow pinners in your niche. You can find them with Pinterest search. Follow three to five new pinners every day. However, don't just follow anyone. Once you find potential pinners to follow, review their profiles and check their Pinterest activities to see if they'll add value to your Pinterest marketing. Spend 5 minutes a day searching for new pinners to follow, which totals 25 minutes a week. #4: Comment on a Pin a Day Keep your eyes open for relevant pins on which you can offer input. Sure, you can like as many pins as you want. However, if a pin inspires you, add something to the conversation. Aim for one comment a day. Your comments can be as short or as long as you'd like. Just make sure your comment is pertinent and not self-promotional. If you have newfound data to support your comment, that's great thing to add. I often comment on others' pins and leave a link to other content. This way, I add value to the pin by providing extra resources. Take 3 minutes a day to post one value-added comment, which is 15 minutes a week devoted to commenting. #5: Create Pinterest Images in Batches Create images of your own to pin to your Pinterest boards. These can be images to go along with blog posts or stand-alone graphics. Pinterest layout supports taller images than any other formats. Ideal size for a pin is 735 x 1102 pixels. There are tools such as Canva to help you create pins quickly and easily. For example, on Canva select the default Pinterest graphics layout and create your design.

How to Recover From a Negative Social Media Update

How to Recover From a Negative Social Media Update

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Has a team member ever posted something inappropriate from your social media account? Are you ready with a recovery plan? If someone wreaks havoc on your account, you need to be prepared for a worst-case scenario. In this article you'll discover how to recover from a bad post to your social media account. Listen to this article: #1: Determine Whether to Delete the Post Whenever you discover a questionable post on your social media account, the first step in crisis management is to assess the situation. No matter the extent of your account hack or blunder, you will have to do some damage control. Just remember deleting the post will not make the entire situation go away. Many tools make it easy for someone to grab a screenshot of your social indiscretion. If you, someone on your team or an agency you've hired to run your social media campaigns created the post, deleting it could make you look bad. Plus, if it comes to light that you tried to sweep a bad situation under the rug, your brand will only look worse. That's why it's typically a better idea to let these posts stay, even if you later go on to regret them. However, there are some situations that make it permissible, if not mandatory, to delete social media posts. Lewd or Graphic Posts: It is unfair to subject your followers to images that make them feel uncomfortable, especially if your target audience is primarily composed of a younger demographic. If someone publishes wildly inappropriate (think R-rated and above) text or graphics to your account, delete the posts as quickly as possible. Obvious Hacks: If it's clear that your account has been hacked, there's a higher level of acceptance in deleting the post. In this day and age it's fair to assume people know that being "hacked" is just another cost associated with conducting business online. Remember, people won't always believe that you've been hacked. Plus, many social users are quick to call out a brand that they think faked a hack as a publicity stunt. It's also important to note that if your Twitter password is "password," you're not allowed to delete any hacked posts. #2: Take Responsibility When it comes to the apology message, there are typically two people who should send it: the person who made the mistake or someone higher up in the company. While most of the time it sounds better when the person who sent the inappropriate social message takes responsibility, it's not always an option. If that's the case, have someone who is higher up in the organization respond. This way your followers feel like you're taking the situation seriously and the spokesperson can address how the company plans to ensure nothing similar happens in the future. The Onion is notorious for their unapologetic brand of humor. However, when backlash over an inappropriate tweet backed them into a corner, they were forced to apologize to their fans. The incident took place during the 2013 Oscars when they insulted the then 9-year-old Oscar nominee Quvenzhané Wallis. After a massive social uproar, the CEO stepped up to apologize. Since it's in our nature to try to avoid fault, this is probably the most difficult part of the process. Even the largest of companies will need to swallow their pride and tell fans they're sorry. #3: Track Mentions and Engage Get ready. Your company's social messages are about to skyrocket. Granted, this depends on the size of your social media following and the level of offensiveness of the gaffe. Yet even the smallest brands should be prepared. Stay on top of posts and mentions by using a social media management tool like Topsy. These tools not only make it easy to respond to the influx of comments, tweets and page posts, many will also allow you to run social analytics that assess the damage done to your following. When you keep track of mentions, you can respond appropriately and in a timely manner.

Pinterest SEO: How to Optimize Your Pins for the 2017 Algorithm Change

by Catherine Oneissy @ Persuasion Nation

Want to use Pinterest for business? Pinterest is the new frontier for businesses looking to drive traffic to their site. In this step by step guide, we'll share Pinterest SEO best practices for 2017.

The post Pinterest SEO: How to Optimize Your Pins for the 2017 Algorithm Change appeared first on Persuasion Nation.

Facebook Ad Changes: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Ad Changes: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you run Facebook ads? Are you familiar with the latest changes? To explore a number of recent changes to Facebook that will impact all advertisers, I interview Jon Loomer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Jon Loomer, a marketing expert who specializes in Facebook advertising. Jon is host of the Social Media Pubcast and blogs at JonLoomer.com. Jon explores Facebook ad changes and what you need to know. You'll discover updates to the 20% text rule, custom audiences, and more. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Ad Changes The 20% text rule change Jon explains why the 20% rule was created and says that until recently, any Facebook ad image with more than 20% text would be rejected. The text ratio was measured by placing a grid over the image and if there was text in more than 5 out of the 25 boxes, it was considered over the 20% text limit. Since Facebook has abandoned the rule, advertisers can have as much text as they want in their image. However, the more text in the image, the less reach it will receive and the more it will cost to run such an ad. Now, when you upload an image to the Text Overlay tool, Facebook will rate the image as: OK, Low, Medium, and High. Facebook is general about the guidelines, Jon explains, but there is no longer a grid. Basically, zero text means it's OK, and 20% text is considered Low. However, if you compare Facebook's example for 20% to the actual 20% rule, it's actually a little bit more than 20%. Facebook says if you have been following the 20% rule until now, you probably won't see any changes. However, Jon thinks the system for detecting the text is a little buggy, although it's still early on. For instance, he talks about an image of nature that was flagged for having text. Jon says the best approach is to test it. Experiment with little or no text in your images, and compare the results. You'll need to determine what text you absolutely need. The logo is another potential issue since not all logos are created equal. Jon's logo has never been flagged. However, sometimes they detect it and sometimes they don't. Many advertisers and users love memes and big call-to-action text, and now they can boost them. Jon says you probably need to do a manual bid and bid really high to get that ad seen, but you never know. It may be extremely effective. Listen to the show to discover whether the text scale is at play on organic posts. Facebook custom audiences Jon is a big fan of Facebook custom audiences, which is creating audiences of people who have visited your website. It's powerful since these people already know who you are. However, Jon explains, there is a weakness in those audiences. All audiences aren't created equal. In an audience of people who have visited your site over the last 180 days, some visited once, others visited 50 times. Some people bounced after three seconds and don't even remember being there, while others have spent hours on your site. Until recently, you couldn't differentiate the two. With the new website custom audiences' advanced feature, you can create an audience based on frequency. For instance, base it on how many times someone has visited your website or performed one specific action, such as a purchase or a registration. Now, when Jon promotes his blog posts, instead of targeting all of his website visitors from the last 180 days, he focuses only on those who visited at least three times. The quality and the cost per website click have been much better.

How to Encourage Employees to Share Your Content on LinkedIn

How to Encourage Employees to Share Your Content on LinkedIn

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are your employees on LinkedIn? Do they share your company's content with their networks? Asking your employees to promote your company content on LinkedIn is a great way to reach more prospects and increase visibility. In this article I'll explain how to help your employees share your content on LinkedIn. #1: Promote the Program The first step to starting a LinkedIn employee engagement program is to find and appoint a leader. Look for someone from marketing who's enthusiastic about LinkedIn and excited about this program. You'll want to choose a passionate leader who can motivate your employees and get them excited to participate. Listen to this article: Once you've established a leader, get a couple of employees on board before rolling out the program to the rest of your staff. Later on, after you work out the bugs and streamline the processes, these employees can promote the program and encourage others to participate. Now you're ready to launch the program to everyone. #2: Communicate the Goal First, explain and outline your company's current digital marketing efforts and what it takes to get followers for your social media channels. Then, make it clear that the program's overarching goal is for all employees to attract new followers and customers by representing the company as a cohesive team. Finally, create a short but powerful mission statement that will engage employees in helping you to achieve the goal of your LinkedIn Employee Engagement Program. #3: Highlight Participant Benefits To get your employees' buy-in, share why their participation can benefit them personally and professionally. For example, the program can increase exposure to potential customers, drive more leads and increase sales, possibly resulting in higher bonuses or profit-sharing. Additionally, participating in the program can enhance your employees' personal profiles, activities and visibility on LinkedIn, and they'll be seen as industry professionals. And it may even improve their reputation within the industry your company serves. #4: Outline Profile and Engagement Expectations Spend some time going over what you expect from employees who take part in the program. Keep in mind that you don't want to overload them with too much extra work. Here are some tasks you might want to ask them to do: Optimize Personal Profiles It's important that employees have a complete and professional-looking LinkedIn profile. Ask them to update their profile with a company and job description (which may come from marketing). You'll probably need to walk employees through how to optimize their LinkedIn profiles. Show them how to: Claim a vanity URL. Add or change their profile picture. A professional-looking profile image goes a long way toward making the right first impression on LinkedIn. Set the correct industry description. Update the Summary section and add rich media (especially if your company produces high-quality videos and other rich media). Update the Experience section. Link their current position to the LinkedIn company page (thus increasing your company's LinkedIn page rank in organic searches on Google). Update and optimize their contact information. Expand Personal Networks Share how together as a team you'll be able to reach hundreds or thousands of people who may be interested in reading and engaging with the company's content. The larger their personal networks, the better. Provide instructions on how and why your staff should connect with fellow employees, customers, partners, prospects and so on. Explain how this will help expand the reach of your company's content on LinkedIn. You might share an example like the following: "Say that 20 employees in the program have 200 connections. This means that potentially 4,000 people could see and engage with our content if we shared and promoted it. Even if only a small percentage of these 4,

How to Use Promoted Pins on Pinterest

How to Use Promoted Pins on Pinterest

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to get your pins in front of customers? Have you considered using promoted pins? Pinterest promoted pins can help you drive referral traffic and increase sales. In this article you'll discover how to create promoted pins on Pinterest. Listen to this article: Why Promoted Pins? Pinterest's promoted pins, which are now available to all businesses, are designed to increase visibility to a targeted audience. They help you get your products or location in front of people who are far along in the buying process and ready to make a purchase. Promoted pins are searchable, so you can add keywords to connect with users who are searching for content like yours. With promoted pins, you're paying to have your pins placed where users are most likely to notice and interact with them. The promoted pins that users see are based on their interests and activity on the site. Users can't turn off promoted pins, but they can hide specific promoted pins that they don't like. Here's how to get started with promoted pins for your business. #1: Understand Campaign Objectives Just like with other types of social media ads, you can run promoted pin campaigns based on specific goals and objectives. There are three objectives you can choose from: Engagement: Get engagement on your pins, such as repins, clicks, and close-up views of your pins. You pay per action taken. Traffic: Send traffic to your website when users click through your pins. In this case, you pay per click to your site. Awareness: Use promoted pins to introduce and expose your brand to a relevant audience. Awareness pins are currently available only to Fortune 500 companies who have a minimum monthly ad spend, but that may change in the future. Promoted pins, like other social media ads, work on a bid system, so keep this in mind when setting your budget. #2: Create a Promoted Pin To create and use Pinterest's promoted pins, you need to have a business account. If you don't already have one, you can either create a new account or convert your current Pinterest profile to a business account. Once your account is set up and ready to go, hover over Ads at the top left of the Pinterest home page and select Overview. You see an ads dashboard similar to Facebook's Ads Manager, where you can review and create new Pinterest ad campaigns. This article walks you through how to create an engagement promoted pin, but traffic promoted pins work exactly the same way. From the Ads Manager, click on the Promote button next to Engagement Campaigns. Next, select Boost Engagement With Your Pins. If you want a traffic campaign, you'd choose Get Traffic to Your Website. On the next page, name your campaign, select a start and end date (the end date is optional), and choose a daily budget. I recommend setting an end date, since you can only have daily budgets instead of lifetime budgets. If you don't set an end date, make sure you keep an eye on the campaign so you don't spend more than you intended. After you click Pick a Pin, you'll see a list of your pins. Select the pin you want to use for your campaign. If you want, you can search for a pin using the search box, or view the pin that's been most clicked or the most repinned in the past 30 days. After you select your pin, enter a name for your promoted pin and set a destination URL. Make sure that the URL goes to the specific page where you want users to land, not a generic homepage. In the next section, select relevant topics that will help you reach your target audience in their home feeds. You want your pin to be placed in the right Pinterest categories so users come across it while browsing. Make sure to choose only relevant interests for your pin, not random interests your audience might have (as you might do on Facebook). This step is about pin placement, so it needs to be accurate. Next,

How to Manage Your Facebook Page Effectively

How to Manage Your Facebook Page Effectively

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you manage at least one Facebook business page? Are you using all the admin features? Facebook pages include many tools to help marketers and business owners get the most out of their business presence. In this article I'll share how to use Facebook's features, tools and settings to manage your business page effectively. Listen to this article: #1: Access Your Facebook Pages There are a few ways to access your Facebook pages. To see all of the pages you are linked to as an administrator, editor, moderator, advertiser or analyst, go to your Pages bookmarks. From there, click on the link to the page you want. To use your Facebook page to like other Facebook pages or comment on posts, click to log in as your page. Plus, select the settings wheel icon to add specific pages to your favorites in the left sidebar of your Facebook screen. Alternatively, access your pages using the drop-down arrow in the menu at the top of your Facebook screen. #2: Navigate Your Page Menu At the top of your Facebook page, there's a menu to direct you to the main features of your page. You should see this menu when logged in as your personal profile or as your page. The first item in the menu, Page, will take you back to your Facebook page from your Messages, Notifications, Insights, Publishing Tools and Settings. Here are the rest of the features. Engage With Users Privately Through Messages If you'd like, enable Messages in your General page settings. This will allow Facebook users to send private messages to your page. Note: You can only reply to messages your page has received. You cannot send messages (as your page) to people who have not messaged you. A great feature in Messages is saved replies. Create a template for common responses you can easily personalize to send through your page's private messaging. Click on any of your messages create a new reply. Check Notifications for Recent Engagement Notifications give you a quick summary of people who have engaged with your page, as well as their interaction. If someone asks for your contact information using a prompt on your Facebook page, like the one shown below, you'll find it in Requests under the Notifications section. See a full timeline of activity related to your page, including when other people or pages mention your page and when others share your page's posts, under the Notifications section in Activity. Review Your Analytics With Insights Insights are your Facebook page's analytics. This is where you'll learn more about your fan page audience growth and engagement. Insights show you which page posts get the most engagement, and whether your fans match your ideal customer base (age ranges, gender and location). Plus, learn how people discover your page by clicking the Visits tab. Schedule and Publish Posts Through Publishing Tools The Publishing Tools feature lets you create Facebook updates to be published immediately, schedule posts to be published at a future time and draft posts to save for later. To publish a status, photo, video, offer, event or milestone immediately, go to the Published Posts section and click the Create button at the top right. To schedule a status, photo or video post, go to the Scheduled Posts section and click the Create button at the top right. Use the drop-down next to the Publish button to get schedule, backdate or draft options. Be sure to review your analytics on the Published Posts tab as well. Search by keyword for specific updates to see their statistics. In addition to reach, it includes the name of the application used to publish the post to your page. Use this data to see which posts have the most engagement, and determine if posts shared through your page have more reach than those shared through third-party tools. #3: Configure Page Settings Your page's settings allow you to control everything from visibi...

Top 10 WordPress Themes for SEO Agencies

by Marvin Russell @

This post was actually tougher than you think. Finding 10 WordPress themes that would be perfect for SEO companies and agencies was fairly difficult to...

The post Top 10 WordPress Themes for SEO Agencies appeared first on .

How to Extend the Life of Your Social Media Content

How to Extend the Life of Your Social Media Content

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Wish you didn't have to keep creating new content? Do you need a better return on the content you create? Having a plan in place for posting, and repurposing your best content will give your content a longer life and make the most of the time you spend creating it. In this article you'll discover how to get more value out of your social media content. #1: Tailor Your Content Posts to Each Network Here's the dilemma. Some of your customers and prospects spend their social networking time on Facebook, while others favor LinkedIn. However, you have a blog post you want both groups to see. Listen to this article: The first idea that comes to mind is to post the same piece to both networks. But you're not sure that's the right thing to do, and you don't want to appear lazy or insincere to those who follow you on multiple networks. The solution is simple: Tailor that one content piece to each network you're posting it on. Posting across social channels in a way that respects the quirks and qualities of each individual network is a win-win: You'll make your audience happy and increase your marketing ROI. Here are a few things to consider when tailoring your content: Understand each platform. Each social network serves a different purpose. Facebook is very flexible in allowing you to post a mix of text, images and video content, but stiff competition might encourage you to think outside of the box. On Twitter, your goal is to engage quickly and concisely. On LinkedIn, people are primed to learn about industry trends and data that are relevant to them, be it in the form of a long blog post or short status updates. Also, extract important points from your content pieces, and use them accordingly. If you have an attention-getting one-liner from your blog, consider linking to that blog post on Facebook or Twitter. A data point that raises concerns or inspires your followers to take action might perform well as a tweet or LinkedIn status update. Finally, make sure you don't overdo it. While cross-posting content to social networks can maximize your social media marketing efficiency, it's also important to produce some original content for each network. This reduces the chances you'll be identified as a spammy marketer, thus triggering people to unfollow you and algorithms to decrease your SEO rankings. #2: Schedule Multiple Shares of New Content Links shared via social media tend to have a short half-life (that is, the amount of time it takes for links to receive half of the clicks they'll ever get) of just a few hours. An easy way to get more out of shared links is to repost them again in the days, weeks and months that follow. Why Repost Content? There are two main reasons you should consider reposting older content. First, posting content again can help you gain new followers and more engagement. When you post a link just once, only a small segment of people will ever see it. This is due to such variables as people not being online at the time you post and quirks of social network algorithms. For example, Facebook’s news feed algorithm, along with growing competition, ensure that only a small segment of your business page followers will see one of your status updates show up organically in their individual feeds. To capture more engagement, it's essential to schedule repeated postings. Second, reposting content also reminds existing followers of what's important. Here's where you might run a small risk of spamming, at least in the eyes of people who happen to see a piece more than once. But if you remind your followers why you're special through slightly varied iterations of the same content, you'll enhance your brand visibility and build thought leadership over time. Repeated contact with qualified leads is essential to moving them through the sales cycle. Simply sharing your content more than once guarantees clicks that you otherwise wouldn...

Effectus Skin 1.1 Is Available Now!

by Chris Pearson @ The Thesis Statement

Our current “update train” rolls on with Effectus version 1.1, which is available now via automatic updates or direct download (login required). This new release includes updated Design functionality and a few bug fixes, and we invite you to check out the changelog for more details. After applying the update, be sure to complete the […]

10 Ways to Get More Instagram Followers

by ThriveHive @ ThriveHive

With over 700 million monthly active users, and over 400 million active daily users, Instagram is a very large market place. If its users made up […]

The post 10 Ways to Get More Instagram Followers appeared first on ThriveHive.

Google AMP: What Bloggers Need to Know

Google AMP: What Bloggers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you heard of Google AMP? Want to know how it will impact your blog? To discover more about Google AMP and the future of blogging, I interview Leslie Samuel. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Leslie Samuel, who runs BecomeABlogger.com, where he teaches people how to blog with purpose. He's also host of the Learning With Leslie podcast and head of training for Social Media Examiner's Social Media Marketing Society. Leslie will explore Google's Accelerated Mobile Pages (AMP) project and what it means for bloggers. You'll discover how to install Google AMP and related plugins on your WordPress blog. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google AMP What is Google AMP Google AMP stands for Accelerated Mobile Pages, and is a collaboration with a number of tech companies. Its goal is to improve the performance of websites on mobile devices, which in turn improves user experience. Kissmetrics did a study, which found that 40% of mobile users leave a page if it doesn't load in three seconds. When that happens, these users don't see the publisher's ads, products, services, or events. AMP pages load 10 times faster and use 10 times less data. Plus, when people view a website on a mobile device, pop ups (such as ads and opt-in boxes) take up the entire page. There's such a small amount of real estate on a smartphone, the pop-ups really inhibit the user experience. Google has already started placing Google AMP pages above non-Google AMP pages to mobile users in search. If you do a search for any popular topic, like politics, on your smartphone, only sites that have accelerated mobile pages enabled will show up in the top stories section. This is just the beginning. In the future AMP will be even more wide-spread. Listen to the show to learn how the Facebook Instant Articles feature is similar to Google AMP. Pros and cons of AMP In addition to the benefit of preferential treatment in search, AMP's faster load times should decrease website abandonment and increase content consumption. Before discussing the cons, Leslie noted one thing in terms of how AMP is set up. When someone clicks on an AMP enabled article on their mobile device, "/amp" is added to the URL, essentially creating a second link. (For example, a Social Media Examiner article with AMP would have the URL socialmediaexaminer.com/ARTICLE-TITLE/amp.) There are now two links: the original link from the desktop article and the second from mobile (with /amp at the end), which is what Google will show above the initial version. The AMP project is able to speed up websites because it strips away a lot of the unique elements, such as style sheets and JavaScript, that make a website look and function in a specific way. AMP sites have specific standard dimensions, and elements such as sidebars, headers and comments are gone. However, there is still a lot you can do with design, Leslie explains. For instance, you can change fonts and colors, add a logo, and more. It just will not be as extensive as what you have on your website. Articles with AMP show a single column that holds both text and images, so people won't see anything you promote in the masthead and sidebar on your regular, desktop website. Leslie says while the AP version of some sites may not be as advanced as the desktop experience, they still look pretty nice. For example, The Washington Post has a simple top with their logo. Then, when you scroll down, you see other posts, social media links, and so on.

Sharing: The Art and Science of Social Sharing

Sharing: The Art and Science of Social Sharing

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create content for your business? Want to encourage people to share it? To explore the art and science of social sharing, I interview Bryan Kramer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Bryan Kramer, a social strategist and founder of PureMatter, a social media agency. His first book is Human to Human and his newest book is Shareology: How Sharing is Powering the Human Economy. Bryan will explore social sharing and what marketers need to know. You'll discover the different types of people who share, as well as mistakes people make when sharing. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Sharing Why Bryan wrote Shareology Bryan explains that he started working on Shareology before he wrote Human to Human. "H2H was a surprise baby," Bryan says. He set Shareology aside and continued with the other, because the Human to Human philosophy seemed to resonate more. Plus, he says, Human to Human provides the best platform used for sharing and not the other way around. Shareology, which is two years in the making, is the study of how, what, where, when and why people and brands share. As a self-proclaimed anthropologist, Bryan has a lot of interest in the subject. Bryan says he always asks his audience what class they took on sharing. In kindergarten, kids learn how to share their toys, but that's about it. It's a skill people learn on top of school, and is part of some classes, like communications, but is not a focus. Social sharing comes in many different flavors, he explains. Meerkat and Periscope are new flavors, but there are so many more. Shareology focuses on the evolution of sharing: the past, present and future. Listen to the show to learn how people shared articles before social media. Why people share For the book Bryan did more than 250 interviews with executives, marketers and social media people, as well as professors of linguistics, psychology, sociology and so on, with the question "why people share" in mind. The answer came down to one thing: connection. People all have the desire to reach out and connect with other people, whether it's through sharing content and having someone reply back or by sharing other people's content and helping them out. These are the six types of people who share: Altruist: Someone who shares something specific about one topic all the time. Careerist: Someone who wants to become a thought leader in their own industry, so they can see their career grow. Hipster: Someone who likes to try things for the first time and share it faster than everyone else. Boomerang: Someone who asks a question so they can receive a comment only to reply. (This can be a troll, but not necessarily. It can be a positive or a negative situation.) Connector: Someone who likes to connect one or more persons to each other. Selective: This is the observer, which some people call a lurker. The majority of the internet observes and then selectively picks pieces to direct or private message other people. Bryan says, while people ebb and flow between different types, we all tend to lean toward one. For example, tech evangelist Robert Scoble is primarily a Hipster, but it doesn't mean he isn't a Careerist or a Selective too. Bryan also touches on the future of sharing. Bryan interviewed the chief scientist of Watson Analytics and learned the computer system Watson (the computer that defeated the other players in Jeopardy!) will be able to tweet in such a way that you'll never know if it's a person or a computer.

How to Use Social Media to Build Your Personal Brand

How to Use Social Media to Build Your Personal Brand

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to build a personal brand? Interested in ways to differentiate yourself from others? Social media is a great way to develop a personal identity, establish a reputation and stand out in your industry. In this article you'll discover how to use social media to build your personal brand. Why Personal Branding? To understand personal branding, start by doing a Google search for your name. Listen to this article: Chances are you'll see a list of your prominent social profiles (namely LinkedIn, Pinterest, Instagram, Twitter and Facebook) in your search results. Google gives high authority to all of the main social media platforms. Ultimately, the more active you are on a particular platform, the higher that profile is ranked. Your personal blog, website and images are probably ranked high too, as social media and content creation are fundamental parts of personal branding SEO. Remember that everything you do online is a representation of your personal brand. Here are some ways to start shaping your message and how you're perceived. #1: Define Your Objective What do you hope to achieve when people search for your name? What do you want them to see? If you want people to see your work experience and receive new opportunities in your area of expertise, concentrate on developing your LinkedIn profile first. If you want to promote your content to a wider audience, try increasing your Twitter followers. If you're trying to sell artwork, Pinterest is your best option. You get the idea. Here are some other possible goals: "I Want to Start My Own Business" If you're a budding entrepreneur, your personal brand could make the difference in whether your idea is successful. When people research you online, what they learn about you can be a deciding factor in whether they invest in your idea. "I Want to Differentiate Myself From Competitors" With a strong persona and unique branding proposition, you're almost guaranteed to stand out from the crowd. In a competitive marketplace, it's important to show what makes you different. "I Want to Sell More" This goes without saying: When your personal brand is strong and you make yourself appealing enough that people want to connect with you, chances are you'll sell more of your product or service. #2: Identify Up to Three Areas of Expertise What do you want to be known for? Whom do you want to connect with? The Internet is flooded with entrepreneurs and experts, so you need to determine what makes you unique. You might be more than just a social media marketer. Your interests could be as broad as Peruvian cooking or dolphin training, but don't choose more than three. Your areas of expertise define who you are and what you do. They're used for writing your social media profile descriptions and should include your main keywords. #3: Make a List of Profile Links Store links to all of your social media profiles in a spreadsheet. You might have 10 or even 30 profiles (the more, the better). If you have a large number of profiles, prepare to carve out time to be active on these channels. Review each of your social media profiles regularly and update them to ensure they contain your most current information, such as your work info, website URL, social links, etc. #4: Develop a Strong Positioning Statement A positioning statement is a brief summation of who you are, what you do and what you stand for. Typically, positioning statements are created for brands or products, but in this case you're developing one for you. When creating your statement, always keep your audience in mind. Although the statement is about you, it's not necessarily for you. It's for the people you're trying to connect with. Describe what differentiates you from other people in your area of expertise. If you're not quite sure what that is, take time to research some of the well-known people in your field. Take note of their tactics,

Stop Marketing, Start Engaging: How to Get Social Media to Really Work

Stop Marketing, Start Engaging: How to Get Social Media to Really Work

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use social media marketing to grow your business? Are you wondering how to get others to say great things about your brand or product? To discover the common mistakes social media marketers make and how to fix them, I interview Scott Stratten for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Scott Stratten, author of UnMarketing and co-host of the UnPodcast. His latest book is QR Codes Kill Kittens. Scott shares how marketers can improve social media by engaging their audiences. You'll discover how to use social media marketing effectively, and how brands can get talked about in a positive way. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Stop Marketing, Start Engaging Why did you decide to write your first book, UnMarketing?  Scott explains how he used to look at business books in bookstores, and they would all have the same information, just a different title. He always thought there was a need for his book, but he didn't want to publish it without leverage. He wanted to wait for a publisher to come to him. Once he had built his blog, someone from Wiley contacted him to ask why he hadn't written a book. This led Scott to write his first book, UnMarketing. The book was aimed at entrepreneurs. People who were able and willing to shift their minds to do things a different way. You'll hear why Scott was surprised when it caught on with corporations. In 2009, when social took off to another level, Scott realized that he would have to become more focused. So he started with Twitter. He'd already tried Twitter in 2008 and didn't think much of it, but in January 2009 he decided to try it for 30 days. During this period, he tweeted 7000 times. At the start of the month, he had 1200 followers and by the end of the month, he had 10,000. This made him realize that not only was there potential on Twitter, but there was great potential for conversation. He's never stopped tweeting since. To date he has over 100,000 tweets and 165,000 followers. Scott says that one of the biggest mistakes people make with Twitter is that they create a lot of content first and then go onto Twitter with no followers and expect to pitch it. Instead you should give to the network, rather than go out there and sell. When Scott started out on Twitter, he didn't have a blog, so he had no content to share on Twitter. You'll hear how back in 2009, Twitter was more about people talking to people. The term social strategy wasn't even around. Scott believes that if he used the same strategy now for a month, his results would be a lot different than they were back then. The platform has definitely migrated and shifted. Listen to the show to find out why Mitch Joel calls Scott a storyteller. The story behind the Instant No Button The Instant No Button is a 7-minute project that Scott threw together about 4 years ago. He loved the Instant Fail button sound and decided to do a "No" version. To date it has been clicked 20 million times. Scott says the funny thing about it is that most people have seen it, but are totally unaware that it's his. This type of project goes to show that people share great content, even if it's funny or stupid. The free No Button app has recently been launched in the Google Play Store and has already gotten 30,000 downloads. Scott has Google AdWords on there and he says that he makes fun money off of it. Listen to the show to discover the amount of money it makes in a year and why it's ...

Social Persuasion: How to Move People to Action

Social Persuasion: How to Move People to Action

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Want more of your readers to take action? Are you looking to increase the persuasion of your content? To learn how persuasion and psychology apply to social media marketing, I interview Derek Halpern for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Derek Halpern, founder of Social Triggers. Derek shares the tactics he uses to get people to take action and turn them into loyal readers. You'll learn how to use the right words for your audience and gain insights from your competitors. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Persuasion How the right words help your marketing Derek explains how the right word can make sales and the wrong word can repel sales. You will discover how certain words repel people when it comes to leading them down the path to a sale of a product or service. He shares takeaways from his discussion on "wallet-closing words" with language expert Michael Fishman. Mark Twain said it best: "The difference between the almost right word and the right word, is really a large matter. It's the difference between the lightning bug and the lightning." When it comes to marketing, this still holds up. Listen to the show to discover how you can find the right words to get people to buy what you're selling. The connection between psychology and social media You'll learn how an understanding of the psychology of your audience can help you navigate the constant changes on social media. Social media is always about people. Even if the tools change, people are not going to change and social media tools are ways to talk to people. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=MzGnX-MbYE4 Psychology helps you understand people and enables you to mix and match social media tools to communicate with your audience. Listen to the show to find out why psychology is vital in social media. How to approach your content strategy Derek shares his content strategy and why he does not publish content often and how this gets his audience to do what he wants them to. If you get people to use your advice and see results, they are going to be loyal readers. You'll discover how Derek focuses on creating content and gets his readers to take action with a single tip. Derek also shares his strategy behind the Social Triggers Insider podcast. Listen to the show to learn how to get your audience to take action. How to learn from your competitors Derek talks about the fine line between copying your competition and innovating from your competition. You'll learn what to look out for with your competitors and how you can make something better for your audience. Derek shares why it's important to look outside of your competition too. Friendly competition does create a better end-product for the entire community. Listen to the show to find out what you should be doing to innovate and inspire your growth. Hot marketing tips Derek shares techniques to get people to go from passive observers to email subscribers. He shares insights into using popup and opt-in forms on your website to pull people into your email list. He also talks about the advantages of using "click-to-tweet" quotes. Find out how to highlight an interesting quote from your article or video and have readers click to tweet the quote with a link back to your site. Listen to the show to hear how this could work for you. Survival Tip: Tweetbot Tweetbot is a Twitter app that allows you to do everything you can do on any other ...

Pinterest: How to Drive More Traffic to Your Site With Pinterest

Pinterest: How to Drive More Traffic to Your Site With Pinterest

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Pinterest for business? Are you wondering how Pinterest can help your business drive more traffic to your website or blog? To learn about Pinterest marketing, I interview Melanie Duncan for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Melanie Duncan, owner of Luxury Monograms and CustomGreekThreads. She also does online training for business owners and spends a lot of time focusing on Pinterest marketing. Melanie shares how Pinterest is a different social media platform and why marketers should use it. You'll learn how to create clickable images and calls to action that will lead to increased visibility and sales. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Pinterest Marketing How has Pinterest helped your business? Melanie describes how she stumbled across Pinterest marketing in January of this year, when she started to receive a high volume of traffic and orders to her site. It wasn't until she logged into Google Analytics that she realized Pinterest's potential in terms of bringing new customers and traffic to her site. You'll discover how Melanie formed a Pinterest strategy and how it helped her business get more exposure and sales. Melanie explains how she first saw Pinterest traffic come from Luxury Monograms. People were pinning things from her site, even before she had a Pin It button. You'll learn how people can pin from your blog or website. Melanie explains that it wasn't just the high-quality product photography that was being repinned, but also the basic product photos. You'll discover why it's not all about the quality of the photos and why calls to action are so important. Listen to the show to find out what calls to action work best and how they can increase engagement by 80%. Some of the biggest mistakes marketers make on Pinterest Melanie explains how Pinterest is a very different type of social media platform and that many marketers or small business owners don't really understand how to use it for their business. A lot of us start with a personal Pinterest profile. Research shows that 80% of pins on Pinterest are repins. People log onto Pinterest, they look at their newsfeed and repin. They don't really go out across the Internet and try to find new forms of information to put on the platform. One of the biggest mistakes marketers make is that they don't create enough original content. You'll hear what you need to do to make a real difference and get the results you want. Listen to the show to find out where the opportunity is for marketers. How to determine if Pinterest is worth focusing on Melanie shares how a lot of service business owners believe that they can't be on Pinterest, as it's only for physical products. You'll learn why this isn't true. Pinterest has a free analytics tool that is available to all business pages now. You'll discover 3 steps you need to take to have access. Once you have access, Pinterest hooks up the analytics to your sites. You can now track your pin activity, such as: How many people are pinning from your website Whether your pins are being repinned and how often How much traffic is being sent to your site What your impressions are like It's a very easy tool to help track how quickly people respond and engage with your content. You'll discover the only way to get traffic from Pinterest to your blog or website and why it doesn't have to be something pretty.

13 Advanced Link Building Strategies You (Probably) Haven’t Used

by Glen @ ViperChill

Copyblogger has long been one of the most authoritative blogs on copywriting and content marketing. While they used to reveal their most popular blog posts in their sidebar (sorted by most comments) it seems that is no longer the case. But what if it was? What if you could analyse any blog and see which […]

Facebook Community Development: How to Cultivate Loyal Fans

Facebook Community Development: How to Cultivate Loyal Fans

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you creating a fan base on Facebook? Want to discover how to engage your audience via pages and groups? To explore how to nurture a community on Facebook, I interview Holly Homer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Holly Homer, a professional blogger whose Kids Activities Blog helps parents discover fun things to do with their kids. Her Facebook page (Quirky Momma) has more than 3 million fans. Holly shares how she's cultivated a thriving community using Facebook. You'll discover how Holly uses Facebook Insights to develop her content. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Community Development The Importance of Community Community is the key to performing well in the algorithm-driven world of Facebook. To serve the community of Kids Activities Blog and the Quirky Momma Facebook page, all of the content focuses on the people who make up that community. Those people are mostly moms (plus the occasional dad, grandparent, or teacher) who are looking for something to do with their small children and survive the day. Whether that content is a video, picture, or saying, it needs to help the community and bring people closer together. When Holly began blogging 10 years ago, the community developed via comments on her personal blog, June Cleaver Nirvana, as well as comments she made on her friends' blogs. A popular blog post might attract 300 visitors and 150 comments. Holly recalls that commenting made this community visible and close-knit. When social networks came along, Holly says she had to relearn how to establish community, so she steered the conversation from comments onto Facebook because that's where comments and engagement were happening. She had to tell her community where she would be engaging and eventually turned off the comments on her blog. Facebook Live changed Holly's community again. She says she can now talk directly to her fans, but Facebook Live allows her to have more of a two-way conversation and be a participant rather than the center of her community. Listen to the show to hear Holly's advice for maintaining a community as social media changes. Facebook Insights Holly is a bit of an analytics geek and uses Facebook Insights learn about her community and what they like. With Facebook Insights, Holly can learn what common traits her community shares (they're typically moms with small children), where they live (mostly the United States and Australia), when they're online, and what they do online. Holly says she can also see what types of content her community likes (such as photos, links, or videos) and even what kinds of links or videos attract the most engagement. What Holly learns in Facebook Insights helps her decide what type of content brings her community together. In Facebook Insights, Holly says she mostly focuses on the magical orange bar. This bar shows each post's reach in comparison to other content for that day or other content on the page. (You find the orange bar by clicking More under the list of posts to get a whole page of posts and then looking in the fifth column.) Holly says her team knows that if the orange bar is short, don't repeat that content. If the orange bar is long, try to figure out how to repeat the performance of that successful content. For Holly, a short orange bar doesn't mean that the proverbial algorithms didn't like some content. It means her fans didn't like the content. She says every single interaction on your page is a vote for more of that content.

Marketing You: How to Play to Your Unique Strengths

Marketing You: How to Play to Your Unique Strengths

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you struggle when it comes to marketing yourself? Are you wondering what your unique strengths are? To learn how to promote yourself based on these strengths, I interview Sally Hogshead for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. Keep reading to discover more. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Sally Hogshead, author of Fascinate and How the World Sees You. She was an award-winning copywriter at the age of 23 and worked with brands such as Nike, Target and BMW. She's one of the few women in the Speaker Hall of Fame and a popular keynote speaker (Sally keynoted Social Media Marketing World) and a simply fascinating woman. Sally shares how you can be successful and fascinating in your work and your life. You'll discover how fascination can increase your value, put you at an advantage and enable you to get more satisfaction out of your work. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Marketing You The journey from Fascinate to How the World Sees You Sally explains that the hardest part for her when writing a book is when it goes into the print stage. When her last book Fascinate was ready to be shipped to stores, she felt at a loss and didn't know what to do with herself. She started to think about doing a personality assessment, which was based on the same system that she had created for brands. So instead of it being about how consumers see a brand, it's about how the world sees you. Once the test was ready, it was put out on social media for free and it became a huge part of her business. It surpassed Fascinate. Sally soon realized that people really wanted to know how to make themselves—not their brand—fascinating. She pivoted her entire company and started to study more about it and go deep into what makes one person perceived as valuable, and someone else perceived as a commodity. Once you have done the assessment, it becomes clear why certain people like, respect and admire you, and why you turn others off. The key here is that you don't have to change who you are; you have to become more of who you are. Listen to the show to find out why it helps to see the patterns among your work colleagues, and how it can help you communicate more effectively with them. How social media has played a part in the development of this entire concept Before the days of social media, our average attention span used to be 20 minutes. Now with social media, it's around 9 seconds. People can now form an opinion of you instantly on social media. With that in mind, you now have to find a way to front-load your value. It's your opportunity to make the most accurate and authentic first impression. You'll hear what Sally and her team discovered when they ran a one-year free beta test for about 30,000 people, and why it led them to turn it into a paid model. At present, the Fascination Advantage Assessment costs $37. However, you can get free access to an in-depth, custom report, which identifies your personality advantages. Check out the key takeaways at the end of this article to find out how to enter. Listen to the show to hear the two main things that people who took the initial assessment wanted to know. Fascination and the research behind it  Sally states that fascination is a state of intense focus. When you're fascinated by something, you are totally focused on that one particular thing. It can be a person, an idea, a movie, a book or a product. As part of the initial market research that Sally carried...

Twitter Marketing: How to Succeed on Twitter

Twitter Marketing: How to Succeed on Twitter

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Twitter for your business? Are you wondering how to get more out of your Twitter marketing? To learn how to successfully market your business using Twitter, I interview Mark Schaefer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Mark Schaefer, the author of The Tao of Twitter, Return on Influence and co-author of Born to Blog. He's a college educator, blogger, consultant and speaker. This is his third appearance on this show! Mark explores what you need to know about using Twitter for your business. You'll discover the path to Twitter success, how to utilize everything Twitter has to offer to market your business, and manage your followers and lists. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter Marketing How Mark got started with Twitter  Mark believes that you really need to immerse yourself in the social web in order to truly understand it, or be successful as a consultant or teacher. Mark immersed himself in Twitter 7 years ago, when he started his own consulting business and started to teach. Mark admits that he was not an early fan of Twitter. It took him months to figure out that this platform was more than just the advertising, technology, mentions or hashtags. Once he understood the powerful human aspect behind Twitter, it changed his life and he wanted others to understand it too. Mark calls Twitter the greatest networking tool ever created. Many of the connections he's made around the world would not have been possible without Twitter and his blog. Listen to the show to discover more about Twitter's powerful ability to connect you with potential clients and opportunities.  The three elements of the Tao of Twitter Mark identifies tao as the Chinese word meaning path. He explains that there is a certain path to success. Behind every Twitter success story, perhaps behind every social media success story, there are 3 essential elements to this path: meaningful content, a targeted audience, and authentic helpfulness. You'll hear Mark discuss each of these three elements in detail and how they work to create meaningful connections for your business when you use Twitter. According to Mark, there is no better way across any social media platform to create an audience than Twitter. It offers so many ways to find the right people for your business. Listen to the show to discover how these three elements work together to lead to success on Twitter.  How businesses can use Twitter  In The Tao of Twitter, there is a chapter called "25 Ideas to Toast Your Competition". Mark offers a few examples of this in the show. He thinks that Twitter is under utilized by businesses today, yet it has the power to transform your business. For instance, Twitter search can be the most powerful source of marketing research available to you. It offers users the ability to target an audience down to a specific zip code, sentiment, or keyword. Twitter's Advanced Search allows you to find potential clients, conduct competitive research, track trends, or provide customer service, all in real-time. Mark explores the benefits of paid promotions and ads on Twitter. According to Mark, this is a great time to try Twitter advertising. The inventory is high and the cost is relatively inexpensive at the moment, but Mark projects that this may not be case for long, as more people learn to leverage this opportunity. Listen to the show to discover a little known trick that makes Twitter advertising especially attractive to marketers.  Broadcast content versus being helpful

How to Use Customer Feedback Loops to Reduce Churn

by Today's Industry Insider @ The Kissmetrics Marketing Blog

Churn is a fascinating thing. When users keep coming back month after month, it helps you grow your business rapidly and it makes you a very happy business owner. But when you’re losing more customers than you’re gaining, it can spell disaster for your business. What makes it frustrating is that you don’t always have […]

How to Grow a Business Using YouTube

How to Grow a Business Using YouTube

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to use YouTube for business? Want to learn how to script and produce YouTube videos for your business? To find out how marketers can develop a business channel on YouTube, I interview Sunny Lenarduzzi. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Sunny Lenarduzzi, a video marketing expert. Previously she was a TV news reporter and the host of the Social Update from Hootsuite. Now she produces regular videos focused on social media, creates online courses, and helps her clients find success with YouTube. Sunny Lenarduzzi shares insights from creating her own business on YouTube. You'll discover how to use social media to drive traffic to your YouTube channel. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Grow a Business With YouTube Sunny's Story Sunny has a background in traditional media (broadcasting, television, and radio), but fell in love with social media in the early days of Facebook and Twitter. She started an online magazine and after building the brand organically using YouTube and other social media platforms, she ended up with a social media consulting business. When Sunny noticed she was routinely getting the same questions from her clients (such as how to build a Twitter following or how to use Instagram video), she started using YouTube FAQ to record and send the answers to clients. Her first video tutorial now has almost 80,000 views. Today, her channel (started in March 2015) has amassed over 60,000 subscribers and 3.8 million video views. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9D7qmseGz6o Listen to the show to learn more about how Sunny came to partner with Hootsuite on the Social Update. The Path Between YouTube Videos and Business It's all the about email addresses. The biggest thing to remember, Sunny says, is that YouTube is a social media platform. She reminds listeners that social media algorithms change and you can't always rely on social media reach to get your message out. That's where an email list comes in, and she notes that YouTube is vital to growing your email list. For example, Sunny created a tutorial on How to Get More Views on YouTube, in which she offers a free YouTube SEO checklist. Every week, she gains about 200 email subscribers from that one video. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=LokwDpM1wnc Sunny explains the importance of helping your videos rank on page one of Google and YouTube search, and shares that the first 24 hours of a video's life are vital in determining where the video will rank. For this reason, when she has a new video, she spends that first day driving people directly to the video on YouTube. Sunny credits getting ranked on the first page of Google or YouTube search results with the growth of her business over the past year. People found her videos when they were searching for help on certain topics such as how to use Snapchat, Twitter, YouTube, etc. Answering questions related to these topics introduces her to potentially thousands of new people a day, and capturing the email addresses of those people grows her potential customer database. Sunny shares that she uses a customized Leadpages link, designed in the same branding as her website, to collect her leads. Sunny says to create your freebie based on what you eventually want to sell. Make it a guide, a checklist, or an ebook. If writing isn't your strong suit, there are other options to use for the freebie, such as audio training or short video courses. For example, Kimra Luna offers a two-day video mini-series for her Rock-It With Webinars.

How to Set Your Preferred Domain and Double the Power of Your Backlinks

by Marvin Russell @

Setting your preferred domain is a simple SEO tip that every website owner should know, and every SEO should know how to do. Following this...

The post How to Set Your Preferred Domain and Double the Power of Your Backlinks appeared first on .

Blog to Book to Business: How to Live Your Dream

Blog to Book to Business: How to Live Your Dream

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you dream of writing a book? Are you wondering how publishing a book can help you grow your business? To learn how you can combine your passion with your business, I interview Jeff Goins for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jeff Goins, a blogger who followed his passion and amassed 200,000 monthly followers and published three books—all very quickly. His books include You Are a Writer, Wrecked and The In-Between. Jeff shares how he achieved his dream of becoming a writer, while building a successful business. You'll learn what it takes to jump from blog to book and why you should start now. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Blog to Book to Business What do you tell people you do for a living? Jeff typically tells people he's a writer, although he does a lot of other things. He finds it easier to tell people that, and it allows him to own his identity. Jeff called himself a writer well before he was writing. It allowed him to step into the title and it reminds him of how far he has come. Listen to the show to hear why many aspiring authors don't own their dreams. The story of dreams and fears Jeff explains that he went solo about 8-9 months ago, but it has taken him about 3 years to get to this stage. He originally started with a blog, which turned into a side business. It wasn't until the end of last year that he realized he was making enough money that his wife didn't have to work anymore. He eventually quit his job at the beginning of this year to become a full-time writer, blogger and speaker. Jeff's blog, Goins Writer, isn't his first blog. Up to this point, he had attempted eight other blogs, all of which failed. It was these failures that prepared Jeff to persevere. He eventually set up his personal blog, where he talks about writing and his own struggles. This was an attempt to learn how to build a platform so he could get published and share his journey with others. You'll hear why Jeff forced himself into writing a personal blog and why he made the decision to give it two years. Listen to the show to find out what fuels Jeff's writing. The importance of writing for more popular blogs When he started a blog, Jeff did the relationship thing first. You'll discover what he did to reach out to the people he admired and why they were a huge influence when it came to the launch of the Goins Writer blog. Once he had seen the power of this in action, he was able to partner with communicators who had audiences that he wanted to connect with. Within the first year of his blog's launch, Jeff wrote over 100 articles on 100 websites. He believes it was the single best strategy for building his audience. Every multi-author blog out there constantly looks for exceptional talent and it's a win-win for both parties. It was one of the keys to Jeff's success. Jeff had listened to people like Jon Morrow, who had essentially done the same thing. Jon didn't have a blog for years. Instead he established himself first as a guest author for other blogs, including CopyBlogger and ProBlogger. So before he even wrote a single post on his own blog, he already had an email list of about 13,000 subscribers. Listen to the show to hear what Jeff discovered when he gave away his best content. Making money When Jeff launched his blog, he had a day job working for a nonprofit organization. His blog at the time was not making any money.

6 Tips to Clean Up Your Twitter Account

6 Tips to Clean Up Your Twitter Account

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your Twitter account unmanageable? Do you want to clean up your followers and profile? A well-managed Twitter account improves your branding and helps you engage with your audience. In this article you'll find six tips to clean up and revitalize your Twitter account. Listen to this article: #1: Unfollow Inactive Accounts First, tend to the users you're following. Let's start with your family members. You know the ones. They started using Twitter in 2007 and haven't been back since. They're inactive users, along with potentially hundreds of other users you followed a long time ago, and never heard from again. It's possible to go through your Twitter profile, analyze each profile and unfollow them. If you're following hundreds or thousands of people, that's a waste of your time. You can use any one of numerous tools like UnTweeps. UnTweeps scans all accounts you follow and provides a list of the inactive ones. Decide what you consider inactive (how many days since their last tweet) and fill in the number. Then check the boxes next to the accounts you want to unfollow. The idea is simple. Weed out all of the people you're following who aren't tweeting. If you're following inactive users, then you're wasting your follows. The maximum number of Twitter users you can follow is 2,000. Once you hit 2,000, you can't follow anyone else unless you gain more followers. How many more followers? We don't know. It’s a ratio, and Twitter keeps it a secret. Other tools to use to clean up inactive accounts include Tweepi, ManageFlitter, Follower Filter, Crowdfire and iUnfollow. #2: Unfollow Irrelevant Accounts After you've deleted some inactive users, take another look. You're likely still following too many users who are irrelevant. There are some options. If you unfollow almost everyone, it seems rude and you may tick some people off. It takes time to unfollow only select people. But if you keep it the same, Twitter stays messy. For example, blogger Michael Hyatt chose to unfollow all of his followers. Hyatt used to follow back everyone who followed him: all 108,698 of them. Michael realized the volume of inbox messages and irrelevant tweets he was getting was out of hand, so he took drastic measures. Chris Brogan also went this route. He unfollowed 131,000 users. Another approach is to sift through the people you follow, identify the ones who are irrelevant and unfollow them. If you want to curate your follows in this way, here's what to do. Go to your profile page, and click Following. Look at each profile and decide if it's worth following. To stop following a user, hover over the Following button. It should turn into a red Unfollow button. Click it. Just remember, if you're following a lot of people, purging like this could take a long time. Some of the tools mentioned previously can assist with the process. #3: Organize With Twitter Lists Twitter lists help you organize the different purposes you have for Twitter: work, family, influential people, etc. Create as many kind of lists as you like. There's no limit. To create a list, go to your profile page, click Lists, then Create a New List. To add someone to a list, click on Following from your profile. Then, click the settings icon next to the user, and select Add or Remove From List. Then, check the box next to the list or lists to add the user, or create a new list. Lists are an excellent way to filter through the different types of people you follow. If you follow a lot of people, you'll never see everything. This way, you can get the information you need from certain people whenever you want it. Depending on how you use lists, you may wish to keep your list private (for example, a list of competitors). Once your account is clean, get back into the Twitter swing of things. #4: Spruce Up Your Profile Another point for cleaning up your account is your Twitter profile.

What Is SEO & How SEO Works | seoWorks™ New York, San Francisco

What Is SEO & How SEO Works | seoWorks™ New York, San Francisco


seoWorks

Learn what SEO is & how SEO really works. Discover how seoWorks™, one of the leading Search Engine Optimization companies, delivers results.

How to Get Results From Facebook Ads on a Budget

How to Get Results From Facebook Ads on a Budget

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Facebook ads effectively for your business? Do you want to get results without spending a lot of money? By selecting a well-targeted audience with your Facebook ads, you can reach your goals without breaking the bank. In this article I'll show you how to set up your Facebook ads to generate big results on a small budget. Listen to this article: Set Proper Goals Before you spend any money on Facebook ads, think about the objectives for your ad campaign. Once you've set your goals, you can better determine your budget. The four most popular Facebook campaign goals for businesses are building a targeted fan base, promoting owned content, generating conversions and promoting a local business. Here's a look at what you can do with a budget of 5 to 10 Euros or Dollars per day. #1: Build a Targeted Fan Base When you get started with Facebook advertising, growing the audience for your Facebook page is the logical first step. Fans are more likely to opt into your list, read your content and buy from you than non-fans. In other words, when highly targeted people like your page, it's an indication that they want to see your content. There are many ways to target Facebook ads to grow your audience. To get the most from a small budget, focus first on attracting the people who know you best. This audience has already invested in you and is likely to convert at a higher rate and lower cost than any other group. Target Your Email List If you want to create a custom audience based on your customer email list, go to Audiences in your Facebook Ads Manager. In the upper-right corner of the page, click Create Audience and select Custom Audience from the drop-down menu. Then click Customer List in the Create a Custom Audience dialog box. To create your custom audience, upload a .CSV file with your customers' email addresses. Facebook then populates the audience and gets it ready for you to target with your ads. Target Website Visitors One of the most powerful Facebook ad types is the website custom audience. The people who visit your website already know you and are more likely to respond positively to your ads. After you've targeted a custom audience for your email list (as described above), move on to promoting your page to website visitors. To create a website custom audience, you need to install a custom audience pixel in the header of your website. Facebook lets you create an audience based on traffic in the last 30, 60, 90 and 180 days. Set up an audience for each option. You might target this audience for people who have visited your site, but aren't yet fans of your page. Target a Lookalike Audience Depending on your website traffic, it's likely that you'll always have an audience to target. But if you want to expand your options, consider lookalike audiences. You can create lookalike audiences based on your custom audience of email subscribers or website visitors. Facebook will match your database within a 1% similarity, giving you a narrower audience to target. Access Audiences from the Ads Manager and then create a lookalike audience for the location you want to target. Target Interests If you're a new business with a small customer list and limited website traffic, you may be wondering how to target your Facebook ads. Interest targeting can be effective if you do it right, but overall it's generally less effective than the options above. The reason for this is that when you target a page or interest, Facebook gives you an audience that includes people who've expressed an interest or liked pages associated with your audience. If you ask Facebook to optimize your ads, they will show your ads to the people most likely to take action. Split-Test Your Audiences After you've set up your audiences, it's a good idea to test each one over a 72-hour time period. A good rule of thumb is to spend 5 to 10 Euros or Dollars...

How to Repurpose Your Facebook Live Videos

How to Repurpose Your Facebook Live Videos

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Facebook Live? Do you want more mileage out of your broadcasts? Reusing your Facebook Live video can help improve your impact and visibility. In this article, you'll discover how to download and repurpose your Facebook Live videos on other social media platforms. Listen to this article: #1: Download From Your Facebook Profile Facebook Live lets you broadcast a live-stream video from your phone. If you've live-streamed a great video you'd like to keep, follow these steps to download the video file from your Facebook: First, log into Facebook.com and go to your profile. Next, locate the Videos tab below your profile's cover photo (along the bottom of the image or in the More drop-down). Now, click on Videos to see a list of videos you've posted to your profile. Next, click on the thumbnail of the Facebook Live video. After the video opens, click on Options (along the bottom of the video) to reveal the menu to download it. Once you click the Download option, your stand-alone video will open. Right-click on the video and select Save Video As to save the video as an MP4 file to your computer. #2: Download From Your Facebook Page If your Facebook page is lively, the steps below are your best route to download your Facebook Live video from your page. Note: You must be an authorized manager on the page to access the options below. Let's get started! Once you complete a Facebook Live video from your page, you have a few optimization options to increase the reach and purpose of your post. (The options below are presently only available for Facebook Live videos streamed from a Facebook page.) First, log into the Facebook page you used for your Facebook Live post. Next, click on the Publishing Tools tab along the top. In the left-hand column of tabs, click on Videos to see a list of your page's posted videos. Find and click on the Facebook Live video you wish to download. Look for the Video Details pop-up window. Along the bottom, you'll see any posts related to your video. Click on the post link to uncover additional optimization and download options for your video. In the bottom-right corner of the Post Details pop-up window, find and click on the Edit Post button. To optimize your Facebook Live video from the Basic tab, add titles, tags, and custom thumbnail images. From the Advanced Tab, you can also choose to allow or prevent your video from being embedded in an external website. In addition, you can upload a Closed Captioning file to your video for access by the hearing-impaired. Next, look for the gear icon above the top-right corner of your video's image. Click the gear icon and select which version you want to download. If you just went live from your page in the last day or two, there's a slightly faster way to find the download option. This brief video will show you how to quickly download your most recent live video. #3: Repurpose Your Facebook Live Videos The show doesn't stop once you click Finish and Post in your Facebook Live broadcast. While your video post can reach far and wide on Facebook, you can push that reach even further after the video has wrapped up. Upload Your Live Video to YouTube or Vimeo Once you've downloaded your Facebook Live video, you can upload your video to other video hosting sites or channels to reach a wider audience. If you upload it to YouTube, you can even use YouTube's simple video editing tools to trim your video down to the moment(s) you want to keep and share. Don't forget to use YouTube's features to add a branded watermark, action cards, a description, and tags. Share Your Live Video With Newsletter Subscribers If your email newsletter could use a shot in the arm, add your Facebook Live video into your next issue. Personify Leadership shot partner interviews at an international conference and later used the Facebook Live videos to inform newsletter subscribers.

SearchCap: Google AdWords ad suggestions, ad performance & Doodles

by Barry Schwartz @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: Google AdWords ad suggestions, ad performance & Doodles appeared first on Search Engine Land.

Advanced Blogging: How to Go Big With Your Blog

Advanced Blogging: How to Go Big With Your Blog

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a blog for your business? Are you ready to take your blogging to the next level? To explore how to build your blog readership, I interview Darren Rowse for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Darren Rowse, the world's leading authority on blogging. He authored the book ProBlogger and founded two popular blogs: Digital Photography School and ProBlogger. Darren has been blogging since 2002 and his work has inspired millions of people. Darren shares how he built a mega-blog with millions of monthly readers. You'll discover how to attract more readers, engage your audience and monetize your blog. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Advanced Blogging How Darren started blogging In 2002 Darren came across a blog for the first time and knew right away it was a medium he wanted to explore. Almost immediately, he started his first blog. Darren explains that he had no background in technology or writing, just a fascination with community and communication. He developed an audience for his personal blog over the next year and a half, writing about a variety of niche topics (photography, spirituality, movies, politics). When his audience "complained" that there was too much variety, Darren split the topics up into different blogs. From there, Darren began to experiment with making money from blogging. It evolved from a hobby into a part-time job, then grew into a full-time business. Listen to the show to hear how many blogs Darren launched over the years. Why it's never too late to start blogging When Darren first started blogging, he looked at the big bloggers and thought he was too late to start. At that point, the big names had only been blogging for a year or two. However, Darren says new bloggers are breaking through all the time. More blogs mean greater opportunities to network and the ability to grow faster, especially if you can get on the radar of an influencer in your niche. While there may be a ton of bloggers out there, Darren explains that there's nobody who has your exact set of experiences, opinions, stories, skills and perspectives, and that's what sets you apart. If you can harness your uniqueness, there's certainly a way to get noticed. Listen to the show to hear how blogging in your niche will serve you well now and in the future. Digital Photography School, then and now Darren started Digital Photography School in 2006. It evolved from one of his previous blogs—a digital camera review blog. It was quite profitable, Darren explains, but not particularly satisfying. He wanted a blog about photography that he enjoyed writing—where he could build a relationship with his readers and answer common photography questions. When the site launched, Darren wrote all of the blog content himself (two to three posts per week), focusing on evergreen content and throwing shareable content into the mix. It was on a free theme, boot strapped, and gradually began to rank in Google and develop a following. He monetized using AdSense and Amazon affiliate marketing. A photography enthusiast, Darren says he's the guy in your circle of friends who people ask to photograph parties because they can't afford a real photographer. He's also the one everyone comes to before they buy a camera. He started the site writing beginner-level content. As the site developed, he hired professional photographers to write for the more advanced audience. Now,

6 Tips to Increase Your Social Media Shares

6 Tips to Increase Your Social Media Shares

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more people to share your content? Looking for more reach via social shares? By making a few adjustments to how you create, publish, and post your content, you can increase the likelihood that others will share it more often. In this article, you'll discover six tips to help you maximize your social shares. Listen to this article: #1: Research Trending Topics It pays to do your research ahead of time. Having a better understanding of what successful content looks like in your industry increases the likelihood of it being shared. Use a tool like BuzzSumo to help identify top shared content. You can search for top shared content pertaining to a topic or keyword, results sorted by overall shares. Alternatively, you can search by domain to view top shared content specific to a website. You get a comprehensive breakdown of shares per social network, which helps you decide where to focus your efforts. PostReach is another great tool to measure content performance across each social network. Simply enter an article's URL in PostReach and run a free report. In addition, you can also run a total share breakdown report. For further exploration, you can view detailed Twitter share activity. You can plot Twitter activity across a share timeline. You can also see which users most retweeted the article and view your overall reach through sharer audience sizes. Finally, you can zero in on specific sharers and potential influencers with a detailed inventory of sharers provided at the bottom of the report. Keep in mind, the purpose of this research is not to duplicate existing content, but rather to identify popular topics in your niche and add something new to the conversation. Make it your goal to go above and beyond top shared content. #2: Make Sharing Easy for Blog Visitors Your audience is more likely to share content when it takes minimal effort. If your website already receives regular traffic, take advantage of the potential social shares by designing your most popular content for easy sharing. An effective approach is to implement social buttons on your website. If you operate a WordPress site, there's plenty of useful plugins for one-click sharing buttons, including Social Pug. The way your content reads can also encourage social engagement. Have a great tip to share in an article? Post a share button directly below your article, as demonstrated by Brian Dean of Backlinko. You can create a unique call to action using ClickToTweet. To start, enter your desired text in the text box and click Generate New Link. Make sure it includes a link back to your post. You can embed the code in the appropriate part of your content. #3: Provide Context in Headlines There's a strong chance your content is being snubbed if your headline fails to grab people. It becomes increasingly important to hook your audience with a headline, as online attention spans continue to dwindle. Social audiences tend to favor snackable content; bite-sized pieces that quickly convey their intent. BuzzFeed articles are essentially engineered to take advantage of this trend: easily consumed and shared. They further entice the audience to read the content by addressing them individually. For example, you'll encounter dozens of instances of "you" and "your" throughout. What else goes into a headline worth clicking? Conductor analyzed user preferences and found that users tend to gravitate towards numbers, personalization, educational resources, and questions. When shared, a well-crafted headline functions like a status update, in that it will summarize the user's opinion or awareness of a subject. Want your best content to receive more shares across social networks? Start thinking about your headlines in a social context. #4: Capitalize on Visual Interest Attach images to your posts to help them stand out and benefit your ...

How to Create More Exposure Using LinkedIn

How to Create More Exposure Using LinkedIn

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Wondering how your business can get more out of LinkedIn? Want to make sure you’re maximizing your LinkedIn presence? LinkedIn has a number of features that will work together to promote your business and its products. In this article you'll discover how to create an integrated LinkedIn marketing presence for your business. Listen to this article: #1: Get on the Map With Company and Showcase Pages If you want to spread awareness for a new product line, create a content hub for company news, publish employee success stories or distribute hiring resources to attract new talent, LinkedIn company and showcase pages can help you align your efforts. Create a Company Page The first step to establishing a LinkedIn presence for your business is to create a company page. Talk to key stakeholders within your company and gather the following materials and information: A high-resolution company logo and cover banner (no larger than 2 MB and 646 x 220 pixels) An approved written company description (up to 2,000 characters) A list of relevant keywords for the company specialty section General company information (industry type, organization size, URL, etc.) You're now ready to set up your company page. On LinkedIn, hover over the Interests tab and select Companies from the drop-down menu. On the right side of the page, look for the Create a Company Page section and click the yellow Create button. You're prompted to enter your name and company email address. LinkedIn will send you a verification email to ensure you're an official representative of your company. After you verify your email address, upload your company logo, cover banner image, company description and other details about your business. When you're finished, click the Publish button. Request Access to an Existing Page If your company already has a company page, you'll want to contact your page administrators to ask for LinkedIn account privileges. If you aren't sure who is responsible for your LinkedIn assets, make sure you've added your work email address to your personal profile. Then go to your company page and look for the Want to Help Manage This Page? section on the right. From here, you can contact page administrators and request moderator privileges. Set Up a Showcase Page Once you've set up your company page, you'll want to create other sections within it to market different company assets. LinkedIn allows you to do this with a feature called Showcase Pages. A showcase page is an extension of your company page and allows you to highlight other business lines, products or services, brands or even upcoming events that your company is hosting. Although showcase pages are directly connected to your company page, think of them as unique entities. They contain their own content, attract their own followers and have exclusive functionality, similar to how you'd share distinct assets on your website. To create a showcase page, go to your company profile, mouse over the Edit drop-down menu and select Create a Showcase Page. You'll then see options to get started. Creating a showcase page is similar to building a company page. However, you can provide more detailed information about a specific area of your business and bolster the visual aspects of your brand with the larger cover photo area. Rather than use your business name as the title, select a page name that both summarizes and sets the expectations for the content you'll publish on your showcase page. Keep in mind that the words you choose for your page name can influence how well your page is discovered through LinkedIn search. Distribute Content on Your Pages After creating a company page and affiliated showcase pages, you're ready to begin promoting and distributing content through these channels. Generally speaking, this is an opportunity to: Share your company branded content. Use white papers,

12 Creative Ways to Use Facebook Cover Images for Business

12 Creative Ways to Use Facebook Cover Images for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to do more with your Facebook cover image? Wondering how other businesses are using Facebook cover images? Your cover image is the perfect space to tell visitors more about your brand or products or drive home a call to action. In this article, you'll discover 12 creative ways to use your Facebook cover image for business. Listen to this article: #1: Inspire a Purchase You hear a lot about using video to show how people use a product or service. The same opportunities exist with photos. When you show off your product in your Facebook cover image, you're planting ideas with your customers that can inspire them to engage with you. In this cover image, Edible Arrangements puts its product front and center with a "Happy Birthday" message in the background. It's subtle, but you can use this tactic to paint your product in a way that says, "this is something special." It's a clever way to position the colorful display, because we all know someone with a birthday coming up. #2: Share Your Value Proposition Could you define your business in a single second? One of the best and simplest ways to spice up your Facebook cover photo is to challenge yourself to find creative ways to one-line your value proposition and present directly to the people who find your brand on Facebook. That's exactly what EYStudios did with a recent cover photo: a sharp and impactful one-liner that expresses who they are and what they can do. Lee Odden's team at TopRank Marketing shoots for the same impact. #3: Express Your Personality Any kind of visual content is a huge part of marketing, and it's one of the best avenues to show off who you are and the personality behind your business. Your cover photo is a great spot to showcase content that aligns with how you present your brand in other places online. MailChimp uses its cover photo to show off the company's personality, along with some clever use of negative space to fix your attention. #4: Appeal to the Senses Any business in the food industry (restaurants, catering, etc.) has a stellar opportunity to grab attention using enticing photos of their mouth-watering offerings. With seasonal changes that bring about new dishes and menu updates, you can swap out Facebook cover photos to showcase what's new on the menu, along with new promotions. It can be effective to have a call to action to help describe a product and get visitors moving. However, sometimes it doesn't hurt to let the product image speak for itself. Little Caesars takes that route by showing off a close-up of their new stuffed crust deep-dish pizza. In the same vein, Papa John's shows off its product to cater to people who love the look of a mouth-watering pizza. In addition, they saved space to promote a key relationship with Major League Baseball. When customers love a specific thing about your business, especially a certain product, you can leverage that connection in your Facebook cover photo. Olive Garden is confident that their customers are addicted to endless breadsticks and massive salads. So, customer favorites are featured in a zoomed-in shot, which makes you feel like you're sitting right at the table. It's cruel, but effective. #5: Speak to a Niche Audience For product-based businesses, the Facebook cover photo is a perfect way to feature new or seasonal products, along with your newest and grandest promotions. To maximize impact, include compelling copy and information about the products along with release dates and calls to action. Logitech G, a company known for computer accessories, used their cover photo to promote a specific line of products. They've highlighted an affiliation with the ESL (Electronic Sports League) to promote products for gamers. Like the Papa John's cover, this kind of affiliation can improve a business's position with specific customers. #6: Inspire Creativity

How to Improve Your Facebook Ads With Customer Reviews

How to Improve Your Facebook Ads With Customer Reviews

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Facebook advertising? Have you considered incorporating customer reviews into your ads? Facebook ads that include customer reviews blend in with other news feed stories and are better received by people browsing Facebook. In this article I'll share how to improve your Facebook ads with customer reviews. Listen to this article: #1: Choose the Right Review In social advertising it's vital to target the right people with the right message at the right time. If you want to use positive online reviews from your customers in Facebook ads, the first step is to find the right ones. It's preferable to share a review where the customer tells a personal story. For example, personal reviews such as, "I bought this game for my daughter's birthday and she absolutely loves it," have a greater impact than generic ones like, "It's a great toy." The ecommerce store Pawstruck used customer reviews with great images and positive text in their Facebook ads. When choosing reviews or any other type of user-generated content (UGC) for Facebook ads, also consider which stage in the buying cycle your customers are in. First-time visitors will need to see a different type of ad than people who are familiar with your store. Ads that show top-selling products favorited by customers are great for attracting first-time customers, because they're lured in with a specific item. This approach gets them interested in your brand, even if they're not yet ready to buy. After they've seen an ad, retarget them with authentic user reviews that deal more with your brand or site as a whole. Site reviews emphasize the authenticity and strength of your brand, not a specific product, so the reviews will reinforce that. The bottom line is use product reviews to target first-time visitors and site reviews for people who already know your store. #2: Craft Compelling Copy Content from users is the most powerful part of the Facebook ad for building trust, instilling social proof and encouraging new visitors to come to your store, but you should also pay attention to the ad copy. Keep your brand voice consistent; don't alter it to match a user's review. Also, you don't want to refer to UGC directly. For instance, when your copy says, "Check out this awesome review from our customer" or "Look at this great photo from one of our fans," your copy seem salesy and forced. The keys are to keep your text short and don't refer to the review in your copy. For a great example of how the ad should look, Perfect Locks does a fantastic job of combining short, snappy, on-brand copy with a personal experience review. The result is a super-effective ad. Don't Overdo It Reviews are wonderful because they offer authentic, credible opinions from real people. However, using reviews that are too enthusiastic or overly positive can actually have the opposite effect. It takes away from the content's credibility. You'll want to use reviews with just one exclamation point rather than those with multiple exclamation points. For example, Life BEAM combines copy that reads authentically with personal experiences. Remember, UGC and reviews that refer to personal experiences have great impact. For the best results, find stories and reviews that use words like "I," "my" or "we." #3: Set Up Your Ad Once you pick the right review or other user-generated content and polish your copy, get your ad ready to launch. When setting up your ad, here are a few ways to get better results: Make sure your ads target the right audience. When setting up Facebook ad targeting, be specific rather than general. Target direct niche competitors, not big brands. Plus, avoid targeting Facebook's default interests. You want your UGC to closely relate to the exact audience you're targeting, not a general interest group, which is much too broad. Don't create more than two ads to target the same audience.

MySiteAuditor Launches!

by Marvin Russell @

A long awaited update to SEOGROUP is finally here. We’ve rebranded and completely updated our white-label website audit tool. The tool is now called MySiteAuditor....

The post MySiteAuditor Launches! appeared first on .

HUGE SEO NEWS: MySiteAuditor Now Pulling Link Data from Moz!!!

by Marvin Russell @

MySiteAuditor is now pulling key SEO data from Moz, the most reputable SEO software on the planet. This means two things: more SEO data, and...

The post HUGE SEO NEWS: MySiteAuditor Now Pulling Link Data from Moz!!! appeared first on .

List Building With Social Media: How to Grow Your Email List

List Building With Social Media: How to Grow Your Email List

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to grow your email list? Wondering how social media can help you grow a list of prospects? To learn how to grow your email list with social media, I interview Amy Porterfield for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Amy Porterfield, co-author of Facebook Marketing All-in-One for Dummies. She's also the host of the new podcast Online Marketing Made Easy and she specializes in online training. She blogs at Amy Porterfield. Amy shares how Facebook marketing has helped grow her email list. You'll learn tactics that work for growing your list when it comes to using social media. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show. List Building With Social Media Amy's list-building story Although Amy focuses primarily on Facebook marketing, she has noticed over the years that social media is a great place to grow your leads. As an online marketer, her email list is really the heart of her business. Back in January 2010, her email list consisted of about 600 people. She realized she had to do something about it. From then on, she has made a conscious effort to focus on publishing content to attract leads. Today, she has an engaged list of around 50,000. Amy goes into detail on how she attracted online marketers, entrepreneurs and small business owners to her content to get them interested enough to sign up for free giveaways and thereby grow her list. Amy explains how her business model is creating info products for people to learn how to use Facebook to grow their businesses and get more traffic to their websites. Listen to the show to find out why having online information products is important. Is social media alone sufficient? Amy tells us although social media has become saturated, alone it isn't enough to get the exposure your business needs. You also need an email list. Social media is a great way to build relationships, make connections and sell your programs, products and services. But when you pair social media with an email list, you will expand your reach. It's a great combination for getting exposure and staying top of mind with your audience. Listen to the show to find out why our email list at Social Media Examiner is the core of our success. Some ways marketers can increase their list size Amy loves to create Signature Promotional Giveaways (SPGs). You'll discover how these giveaways work to your advantage and why they are so effective. Amy shares why she decided to create a webinar once a quarter as part of her strategy to grow her email list. When you opt in, you have access to a free 60-minute webinar and get live access to Amy. This gives you the opportunity to ask questions and at the same time get great content. Other free high-value pieces of content can be an ebook or a video series you've created. Make sure it's premium content you give in exchange for a name and an email. Amy shares one of the best tips she received from Derek Halpern of Social Triggers regarding using an opt-in on your blog. Hint: It's not just about them spending money with you. Listen to the show to learn how Social Media Examiner added 10,000 names to our email list with the 2012 Media Marketing Industry Report. Tips for using video and webinars to increase your email list Amy explains the reasons behind the 2-minute videos she makes to promote her future webinars. People's attention span on social media is very small,

Google+ Success: What Your Business Needs to Know About Google+

Google+ Success: What Your Business Needs to Know About Google+

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Google+ for your business? Are you wondering how you can be more successful generating traffic and growing a community with Google+? To learn what your business needs to know about Google+, I interview Martin Shervington for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Martin Shervington, who is a Google+ marketing expert, consultant and executive coach. He manages two Google+ communities, Plus Your Life! and Plus Your Business! and has authored numerous books including Developmental Coaching. Martin shares why he values Google+ and the benefits you can get from it. You'll learn what Google+ can offer your business and the best ways to get started. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google+ Success Why Google+ and what has it done for your business? Martin explains how he started with Google+ on March 6, 2012, when his book, Developmental Coaching, was out and he was looking for ways to promote it. He considered Twitter, but decided to go with Google+ instead. After a few days of learning everything he could about the platform, he realized how useful it was and started to make notes. People then started to relate to his notes and shared them. You'll find out what type of content he shared and why it gave people a better social experience. Over the last 20 months, Martin has built two communities. Plus Your Life! is very inspirational and about development on the personal side of things, and Plus Your Business! is all about how to use Google+ in business. Martin says that Google+ not only helped with his book, it also allowed him to start blogging too. You'll discover how Google+ helped him  find an audience and why it gave him the ability to express himself more in his writing. Eventually Martin started to blog on his own site because he could move the attention over. He now has 36,000 people a month visit his blog. Martin explains that there are two mechanisms of Google+ that make it unlike other platforms—social and search. When it comes to Google+, the connection between search and social is unique. No other platform has it. Martin says that the punchline to this is that Google+ is Google. Listen to the show to find out why the search engine becomes a personalized content-surfacer based on whom you are connected with, and what you have interacted with in the past. Google+ statistics The latest statistics state that there are 1 billion Google accounts. This number includes accounts for YouTube, Google+ and Gmail. There are 540 million active users, of which 300 million are active in the stream. You'll hear Martin explain in more detail why Google+ is more than just a social site. Listen to the show to find out why Martin believes that in a year, everyone will see that Google has done something amazing with Google+. The difference between Google+ users and other social networks Martin says that whenever a change happens with Google+, people in the Google+ community are wowed by the new features. Everybody gets very excited. There are some great communities that have formed around different niches. It's a positive environment, where everyone is supportive of one another and there is very high engagement. Martin believes that people are excited to spend time there, because they feel part of a community. You'll discover some big news that Google+ has in beta testing right now. Listen to the show to learn how Google has integrated the Goo...

Social Growth: How to Use Pinterest to Grow Your Following on Facebook, YouTube and Beyond

Social Growth: How to Use Pinterest to Grow Your Following on Facebook, YouTube and Beyond

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you active on Pinterest? Have you thought about using Pinterest to grow your other social networks? To discover how to drive traffic from Pinterest to other networks, I interview Natalie Jill. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Natalie Jill, the founder of Natalie Jill Fitness, a site dedicated to health and fitness. She inspires women around the world with her videos and visual content. She's also got a unique social strategy that helped her grow 1.3 million Facebook fans and 476,000 Instagram fans. Natalie will explore how she uses Pinterest as her secret marketing tool to build a loyal following on Facebook, Instagram, YouTube and beyond. You'll discover how to adapt your content for Pinterest. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Growth What led Natalie to social media Natalie says she got into social media by accident. While dealing with a lot of personal issues, she turned to Facebook to develop a support system and talk about her struggles. She explains how sharing what she was doing to lose weight and posting pictures of food in an album called "What I Eat" developed into a downloadable ebook of her recipes. This led to her first full product, which is now called 7 Day Jump Start. By sharing success stories of the people who bought her book and listening to what her audience was asking, Natalie's Facebook presence started to grow and her products started to take off. That's how Natalie Jill Fitness was born. Listen to the show to learn what Natalie thinks makes a good salesperson. Why Pinterest is great for marketers Natalie initially built her business on Facebook (pre-Facebook pages) and had about 5,000 subscribers when she realized she couldn't keep everything on Facebook. She started exploring other social media platforms like Twitter, Pinterest and Instagram. Natalie says she was looking for a social media site where she could post her content and reach more people over time. When she noticed older items getting repinned, she decided Pinterest had the content value-over-time effect she was looking for. A year and a half ago, Natalie started deep-diving into Pinterest and says she currently has 1.3 million fans on Facebook and fewer than 50,000 followers on Pinterest (it's one of her smallest social networks). She goes on to explain why the lower Pinterest follower count doesn't matter when it comes to content shares. She also points out that Pinterest comes up in Google search, which is a huge benefit. When Natalie noticed she was getting a lot of website traffic from Pinterest, she decided to figure out how to use Pinterest to help with her content in other places. Natalie explains how she tested her tactic, which she calls the Pinfinity concept, starting with Facebook and a Pinterest board called "Bodyweight Exercises." Now people searching for body, weight, exercise, workouts, fit mom, etc., find her on Google+ or on Pinterest, and they're taken back to her video on Facebook. Although there's no built-in option to pin things from Facebook, Natalie has found a way to do it. Natalie explains why she drives traffic to social networks instead of her website. Listen to the show to hear how many Facebook followers Natalie had before she started this experiment. How Natalie uses Pinterest to grow her other social networks YouTube is another example of Natalie's method at work. When she started her YouTube channel about a year and a half ago, she had a few videos but no subscribers. She shares how she's built her YouTube channel to ove...

26 Creative Tips and Tools for Social Media Marketers

26 Creative Tips and Tools for Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you a busy social media marketer? Do you want better tools and tips to simplify your job? Looking for ways to increase your visibility or productivity? In this article you’ll discover the best tips and tools shared on the Social Media Marketing podcast so far this year. Listen to this article: #1: The Great Suspender If you use Google Chrome a lot and jump from tab to tab, you'll notice it can hog resources from your system. The Great Suspender is a Google Chrome extension that keeps some of those tabs from running; it suspends them. Activate the extension and you can set it up with different variables. For example, you can set it to suspend your tabs after 20 seconds, you can specify to not suspend pinned tabs or set it to auto-suspend if you're on battery. (It's kind of like TripMode, discussed in a previous podcast, that manages which programs use your data when you're connected to WiFi.) You can also set it to auto-unsuspend tabs or require a click to unsuspend. The Great Suspender is a free Google Chrome plugin. #2: Goofy App Goofy, an unofficial Facebook Messenger client for Mac, lets you use Facebook Messenger without having to go to Facebook. Using the app, you can message people on Facebook without getting into the time suck that is Facebook when you have other things to do. Keep the app in the dock. Then when you need to send a message, just open it up. It’s much less distracting than going into Facebook on desktop or checking it on your phone. Goofy is a free app. #3: TripMode TripMode is a Mac laptop tool that will give you freedom to decide which apps are able to connect to the Internet using the data on a mobile device. Perfect for when you  sync your iPhone to your laptop and use it as a mobile hotspot. After you install TripMode, an icon will appear in the menu bar that allows you to choose to launch TripMode automatically when you connect to a mobile hotspot or turn TripMode on manually. You can also see data usage for each app and manage them individually. For example, you can check or uncheck Dropbox, Google Chrome, Mail, etc. TripMode offers free and paid versions. #4: Soovle.com Soovle.com is a great tool to use when you're looking for interesting keywords to use in your blog posts or advertising. It's also an excellent way to see how different search results look across social channels and search engines. Go to Soovle, type in a phrase or keyword and you'll see what comes up on Google, YouTube, Bing, Yahoo!, Wikipedia, Answers.com, eBay, Weather Channel, Netflix and more. For example, I entered "native video." On Google, I got native video advertising examples, native video and native video advertising. On YouTube, I got Native American music and Native American flute. On Yahoo!, I got Native Americans and on Bing I got Native foods. Soovle is a free service. #5: HiddenMe HiddenMe is a Mac tool that will hide all of the icons on your desktop when you launch it. If you're about to do a screenshare or a presentation, instead of putting everything on your desktop away, you can hide it. It's the equivalent of throwing everything in the closet when you have guests coming over. HiddenMe is a free app. #6: Noisli Noisli is more than a white noise generator, it's a sound environment creator available through your web browser or the iOS app. When you need to cancel out the noise in a loud location or add noise to a quiet one, Noisli lets you choose from a variety of sounds such as rain, white noise, different oscillating fans, café sounds, library sounds and more. You can even use a single sound or a combination, and change sound environments whenever you want. Now you won't feel like you're sitting in your office all day when you're working on your projects. Noisli is a free service. #7: Facebook Paper If you don't want to install Messenger for whatever reason,

Starting a Podcast: What You Need to Know to Succeed

Starting a Podcast: What You Need to Know to Succeed

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you listen to podcasts? Are you interested in starting your own podcast? To learn why you should start a podcast and what you need to know to get started, I interview Cliff Ravenscraft for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Cliff Ravenscraft, the world's leading evangelist on podcasting and founder of Podcast Answer Man. Cliff shares his knowledge and experience of hosting many different podcasts. You'll learn practical tips and advice you can use to start your very own podcast. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Starting Your Own Podcast Why is now a good time to start a podcast? Cliff believes that now is a great time to start a podcast. Recently, CNet reported that Apple is going to end up selling 1 billion iOS devices by 2015 and already 410 million of these devices have been sold. You'll learn about Apple's official Podcasts app and how this has had a very dramatic and positive impact on those podcasts that are listed in iTunes. And in September, CNet reported that 500 million Android devices have already been activated. Cliff shares why it's easy to get people hooked on podcasts. It only takes 5 to 10 minutes to install a free podcast app on a smartphone and it's easy to subscribe to your first podcast. You'll also learn some interesting numbers to note. For instance, 30 million people have a gym or a fitness club membership, and 97 million people in the USA drive to and from work every day alone in their car, with an average commute time of 26.2 minutes. Cliff believes podcasting is different than when it first came out because of the smartphone. The smartphone makes it easy for anybody to subscribe from their device. You don't have to be technically savvy anymore. Every time people go into their app, your latest episode is going to be there for them. Listen to the show to find out more reasons to start a podcast. What are the different types of show formats? Cliff believes there is no limit to the type of podcasts that can be created. Cliff  started podcasting as a hobby in the entertainment genre. He started out with the TV show Lost as a podcast, followed by fan podcasts covering the TV shows Heroes, Dr. Who, The Hunger Games, Twilight Saga and a soon-to-be-launched The Lord of the Rings podcast. These are podcasts that bring fans of existing shows together where they can share their interests with one another. You'll discover why Cliff loves this podcast format. Not only does Cliff do TV show–related podcasts; he and his wife also host one called Family From the Heart. It's a weekly show about behind the scenes with the Ravenscrafts. It's an authentic, real-life audio show. This type of show makes Cliff feel really nervous, but people love it. As for the Podcast Answer Man show, it's a show that stands out on its own. This is his brand where he teaches people about podcasting based on his experiences. Cliff has devoted more than 20,000 hours to podcasting in new media. This is double the number of hours required to become an expert, as referred to by Malcolm Gladwell. There are two shows that exist outside of Cliff's GSPN.TV "network": the Podcast Answer Man and the Virtual Assistant, which is similar to Podcast Answer Man in that it's Cliff sharing his experience and knowledge about becoming an expert in a field. Other show formats are: Solo Co-hosted Panel hosted Interview "Sound scene tours"

Live Video Strategy: How to Create a Show That Engages

Live Video Strategy: How to Create a Show That Engages

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Interested in broadcasting live video? Have you considered starting a live video show? To explore how to create a successful live video show, I interview Luria Petrucci. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Luria Petrucci, a live video expert. She's the host of Live Streaming Pros, a live show dedicated to helping businesses produce professional live streams. She's helped big brands such as AT&T and Panasonic, and influencers such as Michael Hyatt, Amy Porterfield, and Pat Flynn. Luria explores four levels of broadcasting equipment. You'll discover how to create an engaging flow for your live show. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Live Video Strategy Luria's Story Luria got started with video in 2005. She was one of the first video podcasters to create content for the video iPod. (This was before the iPhone and long before YouTube "became a thing.") Shortly thereafter, Luria started doing live video, too. By 2007, she was live-streaming from a professional studio and from mobile devices and began learning how live video creates a connection with her audience. Ever since, she's been doing a weekly or daily show. Before Periscope and Facebook Live, Luria's live-streaming tech included a NewTek TriCaster and Ustream. She also did some YouTube. Justin.tv (which is now Twitch) and Livestream were the other early platforms, although they focused more on business. Although Ustream focuses more on businesses now, it concentrated on creators back then. Luria enjoys seeing other people getting excited about going live, because she's believed in live video for so long. She says live video creates a strong relationship with her audience and is the reason her audience has stuck with her for 11 years through massive business changes, partnership changes, and all of the hard stuff that goes on in business. People tell her they've been watching her since day one. (Note: Back then, Luria was known as Cali Lewis.) Listen to the show to discover what tech Luria used in the early days, as well as what live video was like at the beginning. Why Consider Live Video Live video is the best marketing conversion tool Luria has ever seen because of its impact. When people are watching you on live video, they know you're not faking it. When you're selling something or trying to lead people into a funnel, live video is easy because of what Luria calls the "conversational call to action." Like most people, Luria has a hard time selling. People don't like to sell because they don't like to be sold to. The conversational call to action is really about helping people. You're letting them know you're there for them and will take care of them. When you offer something in a live video, it's easier to sell it because you're not really selling. When somebody asks a question, your answer proves the value of your products or services. Also, although the excitement for and accessibility of live video is new, its formulas and structure are proven. Listen to the show to hear what I love about live video. The Four Levels of Live Video Gear Luria explains what gear you need for live video in four levels. She calls level 1 the "selfie stream." You hold your mobile phone in your hand and the live video is raw, up-close, and personal. For level 2, add some gear to your mobile phone such as a microphone, video stabilizer, and a light. This gear adds a little polish to your video and removes the shakiness. Level 3 is going live from a computer with software like Wirecast. Finally, level 4 is for TV-quality video.

3 Social Image Tools That Increase Exposure and Engagement

3 Social Image Tools That Increase Exposure and Engagement

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Wondering how to improve the impact of your social media images? Looking for tools to optimize your visual content? In this article you'll discover three little-known tools to analyze the effectiveness of your visuals before you use them in your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Optimize for Conversion Bannersnack is an online app that makes it easy to create banner ads. You can adapt its behavior-based analytics feature to optimize the images you use on your social channels. First, you'll want to create a banner image using the tool's handy online editor. Then grab the embed code and add the image to your blog. After some time has passed, look at the heat map in Bannersnack to see where people clicked when engaging with that image. Tweak your image until the heat map registers a high amount of activity. When you're happy with the engagement your image is receiving, download it and use it on all of your social media channels. #2: Optimize for Visual Impression VAS (Visual Attention Software) uses its science-based algorithm to simulate which parts of the image will likely draw people's attention during the first 3-5 seconds of viewing. It also will predict the path that viewers' eyes are likely to travel when looking at the image. With the insights from VAS, you can enhance visual properties (such as edge and color contrast, brightness contrast, and faces) to draw attention to important areas of your image. Again, when you're happy with the predicted results, you can use your optimized image in your social media marketing. Tip: It's a good idea to use VAS in tandem with Bannersnack until you identify industry-specific patterns to apply to your own visuals. #3: Optimize for Accessibility The Color Contrast Analyzer extension for Google Chrome not only will analyze color contrast on your web pages, but will also assess text within images and report on how well your text overlay can be seen. This is especially important for people with poor eyesight. To use this tool to optimize your social media images, load your visuals to your blog so you can view them in a Chrome tab. Then use the Color Contrast Analyzer extension to adjust the design until you're happy with the results and add the final versions of the images to your visual marketing library. Where to Find Engagement Metrics for Visual Content Now that you have some tools to help you optimize the design of your images, it's time to put them to the test. After you use visuals in your social media marketing, you'll need to measure the results to be sure you're hitting the mark. Use the platform-specific metrics below to identify images that trigger engagement. Twitter Media Engagements On Twitter, media engagement is the metric that shows you the number of clicks to your image. It's hidden behind the Tweet Activity link, so you won't see it on the main Tweets section of your Twitter analytics dashboard. To access it, open your Twitter Analytics and click on the Tweets tab at the top of the page. Then click on View Tweet Activity under the tweet you want to review. You'll see all of the tweet activity metrics, including media engagements. Facebook Photo Views After you attach a visual to a Facebook post, you can click on that post in Facebook Insights to see the number of views that image attracted. Pinterest Clicks, Impressions, Repins, and Likes All of the data from Pinterest is image-specific because there's not much there to analyze beyond images. You can see which images have generated the most clicks, impressions, repins, and likes with Pinterest analytics. Use what you learn to identify which types of images work best for you on the platform. Instagram Likes and Comments Instagram analytics is on the rise with many tools being launched. However, there's not much to analyze beyond likes and comments. There are no clicks here and I don't think Instagram r...

How to Speed Up Your Social Media Content Production

How to Speed Up Your Social Media Content Production

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you spending too much time posting content to social media and not enough time engaging? Do you want an effective strategy for creating social media content quickly? By creating and scheduling content in batches, you'll be able to make more efficient use of your time on social media. In this article you'll discover an easy way to create social media updates in batches so you have more time for live engagement. Why Create Content in Batches? Say you decided to start having a cookie after dinner every day. You probably wouldn't whisk together a few drops of egg, a few pinches of sugar, a sliver of butter and a couple of chocolate chips so that you can bake one lonely little cookie at a time. You'd make a whole batch of cookies at the start of the week. Listen to this article: Creating one status update at a time doesn't make any more sense than baking the lonely cookie over and over. It gets in the way of your schedule, because every time you want to share something, you have to set aside the time to write it and post it. You end up constantly task-switching, which can wreak havoc on your productivity without you even noticing. That's where social batching comes in. When it really comes down to it, pretty much everything you do on social fits into one of two categories: posting original updates (status updates, photos/videos and links to your own content or someone else's website), and live interaction (replies, retweets, shares and so on). Here's how to prep everything you need for social media ahead of time, so you aren't starting from scratch every single day. #1: Make a List of Categories for Updates You're going to need a variety of different update types. Here are a few examples of the types of updates to share on a regular basis: Links to Your Own Content - This one seems obvious, but its importance can't be overstated. Link to your own blog posts, videos or podcasts. Brand Mentions - Whenever someone mentions you in original content, make sure people know about it! This helps drive traffic to your podcast, interviews or product reviews, which is always appreciated. Seasonal Promotions - If you cringe at the thought of running your seasonal promos, you’re probably doing them wrong. Take the pain out of these promos by preparing them in batches, considering each promo to be a separate category. Save your work in a library you can revisit each year to maximize the return on your effort. Other People's Content - This is an important part of a successful social strategy. Simply put, there's so much great content out there on the web that you shouldn't feel pressured to create everything from scratch yourself. Single Use - In general, repeating content on social is a very good thing. But sometimes you might want to say something only once. This can be an easy batch to create and can include everything from topical, time-sensitive questions to short-term promotions. Words of Wisdom - This is actually broken down into two categories. First, use your own tips and advice. Then add quotes from other people. Lumping them together in one category is helpful if you're just starting to build your content library. Now it's time to turn these categories into something that will save you time. #2: Create a Batch of Social Updates Say you end up with six types of updates that you routinely share. Let's keep it simple and assume that you're going to post from each category with the same frequency. If you're posting three updates a day, five days a week, that's a pretty respectable number when you're starting out. That makes 15 updates a week or 60 a month. Sixty updates a month comes down to 10 updates per category per month. Not so bad, right? Once a month, sit down and write 10 updates per category. That's it! Ten links to blog posts you think are interesting. (Shouldn't be too hard to find, right?) Ten tips or quotes. Ten links to your own blog posts,

Pinterest Success: Creative Ways to Use Pinterest for Your Business

Pinterest Success: Creative Ways to Use Pinterest for Your Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Pinterest for business? Are you wondering how your business can benefit from Pinterest? To learn some creative ways to use Pinterest to help your business, I interview Cynthia Sanchez for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Cynthia Sanchez, host of the Oh So Pinteresting Podcast. She freely admits that she's addicted to Pinterest. It's changed her life in a major way and now she helps other businesses figure out how to tap into this growing network. Cynthia shares how you can use Pinterest for market research and how to get your content seen by more people. You'll learn about some of the most popular trends on Pinterest and how to create attention-grabbing images. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Pinterest for Business How did Pinterest grab you? When Cynthia was practicing as an oncology nurse, part of her work was to develop a program called Navigation. The role involved a lot of teaching and reaching out. At the end of 2011, she joined Pinterest to find information not only for herself, but also her patients. It started to take over her life unlike any other social media platform. She had the entrepreneurial spirit, but in the medical world, the opportunities are very limited. In February 2012, Cynthia launched her blog Oh So Pinteresting. It evolved from personal use to more business use. A local company noticed she knew a lot about Pinterest and approached her for help. The business grew from there and she said goodbye to the nursing world. The reason Cynthia started with a blog first was because it seemed less technologically daunting. She used WordPress for her self-hosted site. The podcast started a year later when the time seemed right. You'll discover what type of people Cynthia interviews for her podcast and the areas discussed, with Pinterest being such a visual platform. Listen to the show to find out the reaction to Cynthia's blog at the New Media Expo. How people use Pinterest for market research Cynthia says there are a lot of ways you can use Pinterest for market research. If you already have a presence on Pinterest, take a look at the people who follow your account. You can click on the number of followers you have to see a list pop up with all of the people who follow you. From this, you'll see if you have a predominant age group or gender following you. You have to remember that Pinterest is an international type of service. When you click through your followers, you can see the other boards they're following. You'll find out what you can learn when you click through and how this can help you with some ideas for your business. There are a few other things to look out for within a Pinterest account, which include people's location and if they link up to their other social networks. You'll learn what benefits there are to people having their Twitter account linked to their Pinterest account. Cynthia shares the benefits of a free analytic service called PinLeague. The difference with PinLeague and Pinterest's own analytics service is that you can see who your most influential followers are. You'll learn what you can gain when you dig deep into their accounts. Listen to the show to find out other ways you can check out your competitors and how it can help guide your Pinterest activity. Some of the more popular trends on Pinterest Cynthia believes that the most important thing overall,

4 Ways to Save Time With Social Media Marketing Tools

4 Ways to Save Time With Social Media Marketing Tools

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you spend too much time adding customer data to spreadsheets? Looking for ways to automate some of your marketing tasks? If you're creating content for a target audience, automated tools can free up your time to engage as a human when and where it matters most. In this article you'll discover four ways to integrate automated tools into your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Search for Prospects You can use Twitter's search engine to pull together a list of leads, but the process can be time-consuming. For example, suppose you're looking for U.S. residents between the ages of 18 and 35 who are interested in Lincoln cars. Rather than do a Twitter search, let an automated tool like Audiense (formerly SocialBro) do the work for you. Once the search is complete, you'll need to check the results manually. If you added the word "Lincoln" to your search query, you want to follow leads who are interested in the car, not users quoting Abraham Lincoln in their profile. In other cases, you'll need to vet your leads. What are potential customers and audience members talking about in their tweets? Before you use automated tools to interact with users, you need to make sure that they're the users you're looking for. If you're looking for high-profile prospects, you can also use tools like BuzzSumo or Babbly to find profiles based on people's interests, past shares, and bios. For example, use the Amplification tab in BuzzSumo to search for influencers by topic. You can sort by the type of influencers you're looking for, such as bloggers, companies, or journalists. The results show each influencer's page authority, domain authority, follower count, retweet ratio, reply ratio, and average retweets. This allows you to separate and search through the list by goals and objectives. Then you can export those influencers to an Excel document and use it to target them with your marketing. #2: Segment Your Audience It's hard to remember life before Google Analytics and the days before beautiful dashboards of data existed on social media platforms. Now, you can mine most social media networks for insights and analytics data to help you understand who comprises your audience. For example, to find the demographics and locations of your Facebook fans, go to your page's Facebook Insights. Click the People tab to see a breakdown of the age and gender of your fans, where they live, and the languages they speak. Tools like Facebook Insights will provide data about your audience, but it's up to you to answer "so what?" and "why?" based on the segments represented in those numbers. #3: Engage With Leads Engagement is new territory in the world of automated tools. New tools allow you to connect with leads with strategic auto-interactions, which are a great icebreaker. Once you initiate a conversation, human interaction is essential. Your customer or audience wants to know that there are real people behind your business. Use a tool like Socedo to automate engagement with potential customers or initial engagements on Twitter. Socedo will ask you to specify who you're trying to connect with, what you hope to achieve, and what your message is. You'll also need to tell Socedo what actions to take on Twitter when you approve a lead. You'll need to approve or decline potential leads found by Socedo. Socedo will then take care of the rest based on the actions you specified. Some tools allow you to use auto-reply features based on phrases or words used in an inquiry. However, there's a margin of error that your response won't really answer the question asked. At that point, it's up to you to make sure your customers feel like they're being heard and want to continue engaging with your business. #4: Plan and Schedule Content Publishing content in real time isn't always possible when you have meetings to attend or work in a different time zone than your clients.

How to Curate Content: Tips and Tools

by ThriveHive @ ThriveHive

When used properly, curated content can improve the effectiveness of your marketing. You can garner more page views, repeat visitors, more subscribers, backlinks and so on. […]

The post How to Curate Content: Tips and Tools appeared first on ThriveHive.

10 Proven Ways to Make Your Content Go Viral

by Marvin Russell @

There’s no doubt about it. Content marketing is the future of SEO and digital marketing. But what makes content go viral? More specifically, what do...

The post 10 Proven Ways to Make Your Content Go Viral appeared first on .

5 Tips for Squarespace SEO

5 Tips for Squarespace SEO


Collaborada

A lot goes into an on-site Squarespace optimization project. This article highlights a few quick SEO tips for your website. 

How to Use Twitter Buy Buttons and Pinterest Buy Buttons

How to Use Twitter Buy Buttons and Pinterest Buy Buttons

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to sell your products on Twitter and Pinterest? Have you considered using Buy buttons? Adding Buy buttons to your tweets and pins lets people purchase your products right from their social feeds. In this article I'll share how to add Twitter Buy buttons and Pinterest Buy buttons to your products. Listen to this article: Twitter Buy Now Buttons Although it was announced a year ago, Twitter finally made the Buy Now button available on the platform to businesses in the United States. Retailers of all sizes can add a Buy button to their tweets. The price of the product or service is also displayed, and consumers can make purchases without leaving Twitter. "The goal [is to] make it as easy as possible for businesses to connect directly with, and sell to, customers on Twitter," says Nathan Hubbard, Twitter’s head of commerce. "With Buy Now, businesses can drive more conversion and remove much of the friction in the mobile purchasing process." Implement Twitter Buy Now Buttons Twitter has made it easy to get started with their Buy button. If you use Bigcommerce, Demandware or Shopify, follow the appropriate link to discover how to integrate the Buy button with your platform. Here, I'll share how to set up the Twitter Buy button on your products using Stripe Relay. First, create a Stripe account, if you don't already have one. Now, connect your business Twitter account to your Stripe account. You can do that in your Stripe Relay settings, as shown below. Just go to Apps, sign in with Twitter and click Enable. The next step is to set your shipping and tax policies. Shipping can be free or a flat rate. Tax can be included or a percentage. Go to Relay Settings to put in your preferences. These costs will be automatically factored into purchases. Once all of the basics are complete, you're ready to create products. Go to your products page and simply click "Create your first product." Next, fill in all relevant information. Now that your product is set up, you'll see a tweetable URL for that product on your Stripe dashboard. Use that URL in a tweet and the "Buy Now" button is automatically added to your tweet. Twitter users will then be able to purchase your product right from the platform. Whenever an order is created, you will receive an email through your Stripe account that you can view in your Stripe dashboard. Twitter's Buy button is still in the beginning stages of use, so we can expect to see numerous changes in the near future. However, with major brands such as Best Buy, PacSun and Adidas all signing on, it's clear the impact on the social commerce space is just starting. Pinterest Buy It Buttons Over the summer, Pinterest introduced a blue Buy It button for pins. Since 93% of pinners have the intent to purchase, this is the ideal platform for a brand that wants to expand their online business. These buyable pins fit right into the news feed, and allow browsers to purchase from pins without leaving the platform. Buyable pins are currently only available on Apple devices in the United States with payments processed through Apple Pay or any major credit card. The good news for businesses wanting to try buyable pins is that Pinterest is not taking a portion of sales. Pinterest's hope is that they can monetize from an increase in promoted pins. Big brands such as Macy's, Nordstrom and Michael's have already jumped on board. Homemade goods shop Madesmith says that 7% of their sales are coming from buyable pins. "Pinterest has been the most effective discovery platform for Madesmith since we launched in 2013," explains co-founder Nadia Rasul. Implement Pinterest Buy It Buttons As of now, companies need to use Demandware, Bigcommerce, Magento, IBM Commerce or Shopify to implement the Pinterest Buy It button. Your ecommerce platform will walk you through the specific process of adding buyable pins through their site.

Content Creation Hacks: How to Quickly Produce Valuable Content

Content Creation Hacks: How to Quickly Produce Valuable Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create content for your business? Looking for an easier way to make your content work for you? Discover easy ways to create and repurpose your content, courtesy of Nick Westergaard. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Nick Westergaard, host of the On Brand Podcast and chief brand strategist at social and content agency Brand Driven Digital. Nick is also the author of Get Scrappy: Smart Digital Marketing for Businesses Big and Small. Nick explores easy ways to create quality content. You'll also discover how to repurpose recent and historical material. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content Creation Hacks Nick's story Westergaard Advertising began 35 years ago in Iowa when Nick's father and now business partner started what was a small, general, traditional advertising agency. Nick had worked with brands in the early days of online marketing, specifically for educational publishing companies when digital really started to grow. About 10 years ago, Nick started moonlighting as a freelancer for the family business. Eventually he would come in as a partner. In addition to changing the kind of work Westergaard Advertising specialized in, they morphed into brand-driven digital to help organizations build better brands online through social media and content marketing. Nick's book, Get Scrappy, came from a phrase he found himself saying often. Nick does a lot of public speaking, and says it was one of those experiences where he quickly dashed off a title for a new speech. Then when it came time to write it, the topic took root and excited him. Plus, he was able to draw on work he did with clients of all shapes and sizes. "Get Scrappy" was a common thread. Whether it's an entrepreneurial startup, solo small business, medium-sized business, or a larger marketing team, everybody's looking to get scrappy – to do more with less. For instance, Nick talks about working with nostalgic brand Schwinn Bikes, and how it's easy to think of them as a big brand, but they're really a small, scrappy team at the headquarters in Madison, Wisconsin. Nick talked with them about this idea of getting scrappy. Schwinn's social media manager Samantha Hersil summed it up best. "We could all use a few people and a few dollars more," Hersil said. That's really at the heart of the book. Listen to the show to discover how Nick's business has changed over the last 10 years. Why marketers object to creating content Content is a tricky animal, Nick explains, so it takes a content marketing mindset. Some of the obstacles marketers encounter are from lack of a sound content strategy. The Content Marketing Institute reports that many people fly blind when it comes to content strategy. It's both an obstacle and an internal objection, because companies are just jumping on the content marketing bandwagon. Both in terms of social channels and content, Nick thinks it's easy to fall into the trap of what he calls "checklist marketing." Marketers do everything they hear about: they have a presence on every network, create every form of content, and so forth. Nick thinks if people instead develop a strategy with a business objective, their content will be better aligned with their business. Content used to be driven by the written word, Nick explains. As people scoot up to that podcasting microphone and hit the Record button with video, they get scared. There's a ripple effect, as well. Subject matter experts may feel like they're not interesting enough, or else they believe they have interesting stor...

Is it Time to Change What We Put in Our Website Menus?

by Ramsay @ Blog Tyrant: Start a Successful Blog

Your menu is still one of the primary ways that traffic navigates around your site. Deciding what to put in it, however, may be a little more complicated than first thought. In the old days, a website would have four main links: About, Blog, Contact, and a Home button. But as technology improves and changes,...

Being Useful: New Marketing Techniques That Work

Being Useful: New Marketing Techniques That Work

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you wondering how your business can be more useful? Do you provide youtility? To learn about youtility and a new way of thinking when it comes to marketing, I interview Jay Baer for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jay Baer, the founder of the award-winning blog Convince & Convert and co-author of The Now Revolution. His brand-new book is called Youtility: Why Smart Marketing Is About Help Not Hype. Jay shares the many different ways companies are already providing youtility to their customers. You'll learn the three categories of being useful and how to implement them into your business. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: New Marketing Techniques What's changing marketing that everybody needs to understand? Jay believes that marketing is harder than ever. With the incredible growth in the number of media outlets, it makes it very difficult to achieve top of mind awareness in the ways that we used to be able to do. Blogs and podcasts didn't exist before, but today they have huge audiences. Companies now have to compete for attention—not just against other companies, but against everybody and everything. Jay explains that if you take a look at your Facebook news feed, Twitter account or email inbox, you'll find a combination of both personal and professional relationships. Companies are competing for attention with consumers' friends and family members and are forced to use the same technologies to get on their radar. Since 1994, Jay has worked online and remembers how people freaked out when they bought advertising on the web for the first time. He says at the end of the day, all these things are almost free, but somebody has got to pay the free. The guys who pay the free are businesses. Listen to the show to find out what you need to do to succeed against everyone and everything. The story about @HiltonSuggests and what the take-home message is for marketers Jay talks about certain people who are an exception to the rule when it comes to being amazing. But he feels that most of us aren't amazing. So the best approach for us all is to be useful. You need to create youtility. Jay defines youtility in his book as marketing that is so useful, people would want to pay for it. Jay shares the story of Hilton Hotels' program called Hilton Suggests on Twitter and how the program came about. You'll hear a great example of how they helped a guy on Twitter who was looking for a vet in the area. They helped him when he needed it most, and this will probably lead to him booking a Hilton hotel in the future. Jay says the difference between helping and selling is just two letters, but in modern business those two letters make all the difference. At a recent conference, Jay heard Gary Vaynerchuk say, "Everybody wants to be a hunter, but nobody wants to be a farmer." Youtility is about long-term play. If you sell something, you make a customer today. But if you help someone, you can create a customer for life. You need to start to think about marketing, customer acquisition, loyalty and retention over a longer time horizon. You'll hear why Jay wishes that more businesses were less self-serving and more useful. Listen to the show to hear how Columbia Sportswear uses indirect marketing and provides youtility to their customers. What youtility is and what marketers need to understand Jay says you wouldn't necessarily charge for youtility because it's marketing...

Top 40 SEO Blogs to Read in 2014

by Marvin Russell @

These are the top 40 SEO blogs you should read in 2014. I spent over 10 hours researching, reading, and interviewing people in the SEO...

The post Top 40 SEO Blogs to Read in 2014 appeared first on .

5 Ways to Partner With Influencers on Snapchat

5 Ways to Partner With Influencers on Snapchat

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to increase your company's visibility on Snapchat? Have you considered partnering with influencers? Snapchat influencers can help you connect with your target audience in a creative and entertaining way that improves awareness and messaging. In this article you'll discover five ways to partner with influencers on Snapchat. Listen to this article: Why Partner With Snapchat Influencers? Snapchat influencers are self-made, modern-day digital celebrities who are creative, passionate, and entertaining. They were the early adopters of the platform and inherently understand how it works. They're skilled with the native tools and understand the importance of the channel's animated lenses and emojis. Influencers know how to connect with their audience and their opinions are trusted. You'll find them across all industries including fashion, sports, beauty, health and wellness, home décor, food, and more. Make sure you do your research to find the right influencers for your brand's demographic. Here are some ways you can partner with Snapchat influencers to promote your business. #1: Share Access to Exclusive Events You can partner with Snapchat influencers at all price points to provide access to different kinds of events. This in-the-moment storytelling allows you to show fans a different side to your business than images that are curated and photographed for print. Influencers bring their fan base into the experience, which ultimately leads to more brand awareness and sales. At New York Fashion Week, many top fashion brands enlist Snapchat influencers to cover their collections. Tommy Hilfiger uses Millennial models who are also social media influencers to showcase behind-the-scenes aspects of the brand's shows. Their Snapchat stories include models getting their makeup done, practicing their walks, and getting fitted for the runway. #2: Drive Traffic to Your Website DJ Khaled, the most well-known Snapchat influencer, has over 2 million followers who passionately follow his adventures and listen to his daily life lessons, or "keys." Not only does he inspire and motivate his audience, but he also monetized his user base by opening an ecommerce store and partnering with global brands like Ciroc and Apple Beats. He incorporates sales tactics in Snapchat stories by intertwining his daily keys with the products he showcases. As Snapchat content is ephemeral, the best way to drive traffic to your website is ask influencers to use the text box to write out your website or company name. This is what DJ Khaled does when he's promoting something on Snapchat. Provide the text so the influencer can copy and paste it to his or her Notes app and add it to the snap. This way, you can include more content than what is allowed by the platform. You may also want to direct the influencer to ask his or her followers to screenshot the snap so they have the information readily available. Since the influencer is telling a story, the call to action can be verbal. People are already captivated, so they'll follow the steps to purchase your products. #3: Spread Awareness for a Cause You can reach out to influencers to help with your philanthropic campaigns. They're usually receptive and their reach can have a strong impact. Since it's for a good cause, many influencers will support the campaign free of charge. Influencers are often keen to work with non-profits because they want to help create change in the world. It also gives them an opportunity to add their own personal spin to the story. There are a lot of Snapchat influencers who excel at telling stories through artistic talents. One of the most famous is Miologie. She brought awareness to Nigeria with her creative work for the #BringBackOurChildhood UNICEF campaign. Her storytelling involved the character of Badamassi, a young boy who had taken refuge but missed the environment and the animals he grew up aro...

Thinking Differently: One Agency’s Unique Path to Growing their SEO Agency

by Niko Vergis @

Jeff Hall is the co-founder of Overflow Cafe SEO and a long-time user of MySiteAuditor. In this post, we’ve invited Jeff to talk about how...

The post Thinking Differently: One Agency’s Unique Path to Growing their SEO Agency appeared first on .

Measuring Social Media: What Marketers Need to Know

Measuring Social Media: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you understand how to measure social media activities? Do you know how to gather the right data to help you achieve your business goals? To explore how you can measure social media activities, I interview Lutz Finger for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Lutz Finger, who is the director of data analytics at LinkedIn and co-author of the new book, Ask, Measure, Learn: Using Social Media Analytics to Understand and Influence Customer Behavior. Lutz shares why he's so interested in social analytics. You'll discover why Lutz believes social media analytics will have a bigger impact than the onset of the Internet did. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Measuring Social Media Why do so many businesses struggle with measuring social media activities? Lutz talks about the trial-and-error phase of social media measurement and how we've moved beyond that phase in some areas but are still learning in others. He says the promise of social media analytics has a lot of misconceptions around it. With easy access to data on trending content, followers, Klout scores, etc., businesses are trying to find a way to use the data. Lutz explains why this approach often leads to a negative outcome and why businesses should approach using data with a goal or question first. Lutz shares why it's important to understand how a metric is built and points to the Influencer metric as an example. He says that while there are at least 10 different Influencer metrics that have to do with reach, not every influencer can help fulfill every goal. He explains why he would consider Social Media Examiner an influencer if he wanted to put a new social tool in front of people who work with social media, but not if he wanted to sell clothing. Listen to the show to learn what influencer reach must be combined with to move people from awareness to intention. The difference between viral and contagious content Lutz says the term viral, when used to describe social media content, is wrong because something that's viral is equally infectious at every stage. For example, a story that is liked by 1 in 10 people the first time it's seen will be liked by 1 in 10 people in the future. He explains that when something is contagious, it gains weight as long as it travels. The more people who believe in it, the more trustworthy the story becomes, regardless of whether it's true. Listen to the show to find out how people convince an algorithm that something is contagious and how that's affected things like the New York Times Bestseller List. How social media data can empower a business Lutz states there isn't good or bad data, there's just useful and useless data. He explains that data is only useful when a business has the right question. He shares that many organizations start by asking what data they have and how they can measure it. Then they try to find something in the data to help their business. Lutz says you need to start with a question or goal, and then figure out how to capture the data that will help answer that question instead of using data to come up with a question you didn't have in the first place. He illustrates how a sales department can use data to answer the question, "How can we find new clients?" Listen to the show to discover why sentiment is an especially difficult metric to measure. How marketers can start measuring social media activities Once you have the question,

Social Media Science: How Behavior Impacts Social Media Marketing

Social Media Science: How Behavior Impacts Social Media Marketing

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Want to understand the psychology behind why people interact via social networks? During this fascinating interview I explore these very concepts. To learn about the science and psychology of social media marketing, I interview Ric Dragon for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Ric Dragon, author of Social Marketology and CEO of DragonSearch. Ric shares tips on how businesses can build relationships on social media. You'll learn how relationships develop and why the concepts of gamification and gifting are important. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Science How to develop relationships via social networks People look for other people like themselves, which is called group affinity. People want to find like-minded souls. It is much easier in this age of social media than ever before. Ric shares insights into the importance of small-talk in building relationships. You'll learn how small-talk is an extension of social grooming and how sharing a little about yourself humanizes you and makes it easier to grow your social networks. Ric talks about how people bring common salad to social media. Listen to the show to learn more about building relationships on social media. What gamification and gifting bring to social media Ric explains what gamification and gifting are and the different types of elements within social media. Learn why the most powerful rewards are the unexpected ones. You'll hear about different ways you can gift someone. Ric explains why it's important to measure the depth of engagement and also how to measure the effectiveness of your company's social media activities. Listen to the show to learn why the need to reciprocate is very powerful and relevant to your social activities. How communities develop via social media  Strong communities can form very quickly on social media and sometimes there are micro-communities.  Ric talks about how strong communities can form spontaneously on social media. He also talks about how these communities form around hashtags. You'll learn why listening is important for both pre-existing communities and when communities are forming. Ric talks about online ethnography—the studying of people in an in-depth way online. Listen to the show to learn about how communities develop. How to craft the right brand voice on social media People project personality onto brands and Ric explains why this is important to remember when you shape your brand voice. Ric shares how brands can create the right voice. For example, you need to make sure that even though you want individuals to have their own voice when they speak for your company, you also want this voice to be consistent. Listen to the show to find out why it's important to be consistent. The different subcategories of social media marketing  As social media evolves, the word community is thought of in different ways by different people. The expression social media also has different definitions for different people. Ric explains how there are at least five different types of social media projects. You'll learn why Ric believes brand management will experience the biggest area of growth. He says people are thinking most about brand management and when the brand has a really strong sense of purpose, it becomes a valued member of the community. Listen to the show to discover more about brands using social media well.

5 Ways to Improve Your Snapchat Marketing

5 Ways to Improve Your Snapchat Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Wondering how you can stand out on Snapchat? Want to know what's working for others? Taking a cue from businesses that are successfully using Snapchat can help you strengthen your own brand's presence on the platform. In this article you'll discover how to improve your marketing on Snapchat. Listen to this article: #1: Provide Specialized Content Many brands use Snapchat because of its authenticity. You can use this attribute to strengthen your community ties by publishing content that shows a similar but different side to your brand. For example, you can make your fans feel like insiders by providing content that's not available on your other social channels. This will excite users because they'll feel they're in the know and will develop an emotional connection to you and your content. Music producer DJ Khaled has created one of the most engaging Snapchat communities with over 2 million followers, a quarter of which watch his snaps within the first 5 minutes. With his 24-hour Snapchat stories, he provides daily insights, otherwise known as “keys to success,” through inspirational advice and commentary on his life's adventures. By providing exclusive content to your Snapchat community, you create a sense of trust and inclusivity. #2: Surprise Fans With Promotions and Perks Social media giveaways and contests are some of the best ways to build customer loyalty, and Snapchat users love them. Use snaps to offer insider access, promo codes or discounts with a Snapchat scavenger hunt. Build anticipation when you announce the giveaway or promotional offer on Snapchat prior to the launch date.  With their SnapWho campaign at the Coachella music festival, Heineken snapped clues hinting about special performances at the Heineken House. Fans were prompted to respond with snaps on which artists would be there. If correct, they received access and a sneak peek of when that concert would be happening. The campaign provided an exclusive element to concertgoers and reached fans who weren't at the event but enjoyed the content nonetheless. For a more sales-driven angle, you can post a 10-second snap with a special Snapchat referral code or share a daily deal with your followers. When you reward your community for following your Snapchat stories, they're likely to spread the word to their family and friends. You can track customer behavior and the effectiveness of the channel by seeing how many promo codes are used. How to Drive Users to Your Snapchat Account Before you embark on any sales offers, make sure to promote and drive users to your Snapchat account. Create a custom Facebook tab to promote your Snapchat account, or put your Snapchat name in your Twitter bio and use your QR code as your profile photo. For all of your social accounts, you can create images that drive users to your Snapchat account. #3: Involve Fans in Your Story Social media should be a two-way conversation with your community. Engage your followers by asking for their participation. For example, ask them to send in a selfie featuring your product or create a video on why they love your product. For the Super Bowl, Mountain Dew launched a 100% fan-driven interactive Snapchat campaign called Kickstory for their new Kickstart breakfast drink. Fans voted on what would happen next in the story by taking screenshots to indicate the level of engagement. Everlane took a different tack and asked their followers to screenshot their snap or chat with them for more information on their new shoe collection. To create more meaningful relationships, make sure you reply to your fans. You can do this within the chat feature or send back a photo thanking them. Going the extra mile on Snapchat will make users feel special and included in your community. #4: Include Branding Elements in Snaps Snapchat allows you to connect with your community and further enhance your brand's voice and tone in...

How to Grow Your Periscope Audience With Twitter

How to Grow Your Periscope Audience With Twitter

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more followers on Periscope? Have you considered promoting your Periscope broadcasts on Twitter? Twitter now allows users to view Periscope broadcasts live in their Twitter feeds, giving you exposure to a much wider audience than with the Periscope app alone. In this article you'll discover how to build a Periscope audience with Twitter. Listen to this article: #1: Broadcast Your Periscope Live Stream to Twitter There are a few simple steps you need to take to get started with Periscope and broadcast your live streams to Twitter. After you download Periscope (which is available for Android and iOS), you see a screen that allows you to log into Periscope using Twitter. Next, you need to authorize Periscope to use your Twitter account. Then you're in! When you're ready to broadcast on Android, tap the red camera icon in the bottom-right corner of the screen. On iOS, tap the camera icon at the bottom of the screen. Next, type in a title to describe your broadcast, and make sure that both the Twitter icon and Public option are selected. If you've signed in with Twitter, they should be selected by default. Finally, tap Start Broadcast to start your live stream. Getting started with Periscope broadcasts on Twitter really is that easy. Before, your Twitter followers had to click a link in your tweet to leave Twitter and watch your broadcast in the Periscope app. Now your live stream will auto-play directly in their Twitter feed. If viewers click the video, it will expand, unmute the sound, and show all of the interactions from other users. #2: Engage Twitter Users During Your Broadcast Now that you're broadcasting directly to Twitter, that audience is part of your Periscope audience. You'll want to make the most of the fact that you already have an audience on Twitter. You can encourage engagement by asking questions in your broadcast titles. Build interest for your upcoming broadcasts by tweeting details of your scheduled shows. You'll also want to tag anyone who has contributed to or guest-starred in your broadcast. During the live broadcast, answer your audience's questions. When it comes down to it, Periscope's native Twitter broadcasts have changed very little about how you engage with your audience. Engagement always comes down to your ability to communicate effectively with your audience. #3: Extend Your Reach With Hashtags Hashtags are used to categorize and organize tweets. They're also excellent discovery tools. Tweets containing Periscope videos are no different. Every time you tweet a broadcast, Twitter automatically adds the hashtag #Periscope to your tweet. To reach more viewers, you'll want to incorporate popular hashtags into your tweets, the same way you would when tweeting normally. Be sure to double-check any unusual hashtags before using them. Note: The "title" of your broadcast forms the bulk of your accompanying tweet. This is where you need to include hashtags, if you're using them. #4: Promote Your Broadcast With Twitter Ads The average tweet has a very low organic reach of about 1.85%. You can boost the reach of your tweets by paying to promote them. This is a way to extend your reach to users outside your community of followers. Before you can begin promoting tweets (Periscope broadcasts or otherwise), you need to get your account ready for Twitter advertising. To start, go to Twitter Ads. Then choose your country and time zone, indicate whether you'll be using Twitter advertising for personal or business reasons, enter your payment information, and type in your phone number and industry. Once that's complete, you'll arrive on a Twitter Ads page that looks like this. Now you're ready to create your first ad. Click the blue Create New Campaign button and select the goal of your ad. If you're planning to promote a Periscope broadcast,

3 Psychology Principles That Boost Social Media Engagement

3 Psychology Principles That Boost Social Media Engagement

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are your social media posts getting enough engagement? Do you want tips for connecting with your audience? Social media engagement is largely determined by how well your social posts trigger action from your target audience. In this article you'll discover how to boost social media engagement by incorporating psychological triggers in your posts. Listen to this article: #1: Focus on a Desire In Nobel Prize-winning psychologist Daniel Kahneman's book, Thinking, Fast and Slow, he shared this idea: "A general 'law of least effort' applies to cognitive as well as physical exertion. The law asserts that if there are several ways of achieving the same goal, people will eventually gravitate to the least demanding course of action." To apply this principle to your social content, you should keep it simple. In the GetResponse post below, they show that they recognize social media marketers want their email subscribers to feel as if they're having a real conversation with the brand. To do that, GetResponse suggests that marketers need to "use these strategies." The post also incorporates the word "want" ("if you want your subscribers to feel as if they're talking to a real person"). This word triggers a desire in readers' brains that convinces them that, yes, they can do this. Additionally, GetResponse captured the idea of simplicity in the article linked to in the post: 7 Strategies to Give Your Email Campaign a Human Touch. By presenting content in a simple, straightforward way, readers begin to believe that it's not as hard to connect with their audience through email as they might think and that they've found a solution to their problem. Key takeaway: You'll get more engagement with your content if you make your audience believe that they can do something. Walk readers through the hard stuff and break it down in easy-to-digest chunks of information so they can take action quickly and easily. #2: Appeal to Knowledge Seekers There is nothing people love more than an explanation. In fact, in the well-known Xerox study, Ellen Langer and her colleagues conducted a simple experiment to see how people reacted when someone tried to cut in line at the Xerox machine. Ellen discovered that she was allowed to cut the line more frequently when she explained to people why she needed to. The word "why" is one of the trigger words you can use in your own social media marketing. Use "why" to ignite readers’ brains to want to search for the answer to a question. Eric Enge from Stone Temple Consulting used this strategy to create the Here's Why video series for his target audience. In the Here's Why post below, Eric poses a question to reader: Why Is SEO So Hard? If you weren't thinking about that question before, you likely are now. Why is SEO so hard, anyway? Eric provides just enough information to grab the audience's attention. He tells them what they can expect and how they will benefit from watching the 5-minute video. Key takeaway: Communicate to your audience why they need something and how they're going to get it by reading your content, watching your video or using your product. #3: Tap Into the Fear of Missing Out It's human nature to be apprehensive about being left out. We want to be in the know and be where the action is happening. We want to be included. If we say no to an opportunity, we fear we'll miss out on something that could be of great benefit to us. For example, if there's an important conference in your industry, you may be compelled to attend because you fear you'll miss out on great opportunities that other people in your industry will be afforded. With a good industry conference, you can build your brand and business by networking with new and long-time colleagues. You can also attend sessions that help you improve your craft. The opportunity is so compelling that you're afraid if you don't attend, you'll read lots of enthusiastic posts about it in your ...

How to Tackle the Top 4 Challenges Facing Digital Publishers

by Christian Brink @ AddThis Academy

Learn how to tackle the top four challenges facing digital publishers today, including improving monetization, adapting to mobile-first, and more.

The post How to Tackle the Top 4 Challenges Facing Digital Publishers appeared first on AddThis Academy.

Facebook Branded Content: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Branded Content: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for ways to partner with influencers on Facebook? Have you heard of branded content on Facebook? Facebook's Branded Content feature allows media outlets, celebrities, and influencers to tag content that includes a third party, brand, or sponsor. In this post you'll discover how Facebook's Branded Content feature works for publishers and marketers. Listen to this article: Who Can Create Branded Content? Branded content is currently limited to media outlets, celebrities, and influencers with verified pages, indicated by the blue checkmark icon next to their name. For example, the interest result for "Cats" above is not a verified page, but the other three results are. Hence, to create branded content, be on the lookout for pages with the blue verified icon when you search for media, celebrities, and influencers. What Does Branded Content Look Like? Branded content can be a photo, video, link, text, instant article, or 360 video at launch. In a couple of weeks, live video will also be available to use as branded content. When a verified page shares branded content, it looks like this. The post itself looks normal. What makes it branded content is the "with" tag next to the name of the media outlet, celebrity, or influencer that posted about you. When people share an update you're tagged in, your name goes wherever the verified page owner's name goes. This gives you increased exposure, which could turn into new fans for your page. What's the Real Difference With Branded Content? The main benefit of branded content over page mentions is that your page and the verified page that published the post will get performance insights. In the following example, Social Media Examiner is the verified page and Kristi Hines is the page that has been tagged in a Branded Content post. First, if your page is tagged, you'll get a notification that a verified page has tagged your page in branded content. Look for these as you would for typical notifications. Also look for a notification within your page's Notifications section. Clicking on either of these will lead you to your page's insights, specifically for Branded Content posts. Here, you can monitor a post's organic or paid engagement. You'll get most of the same insights with branded content as you would your own posts, even though it wasn't made on your page. You can sort the post's analytics by organic versus paid and fans versus non-fans. You can also break down the types of engagement the post received. You can click on the link to see the full breakdown of analytics data for the post. You can also use the Share and Boost button to share the branded content to your page and boost it to your page's audience or an audience of your choosing. Now, you can know instantly how well a particular media outlet, celebrity, or influencer delivers exposure for you. If you have multiple media outlets, celebrities, and influencers promoting your campaign, you can see which ones are giving you the greatest visibility with a variety of Facebook metrics. How Do Verified Pages Brand Content? Media outlets, celebrities, and influencers can easily brand their content using the new Handshake icon. It's located in the status box when they begin a post for their page, and is accessible from their desktop browser, the main Facebook iOS app (excluding Business Manager), Power Editor, Ads Manager, the Marketing API, and the Mentions app on iOS. Android support is coming soon. On the desktop, when they click on the status box, it will look like this. When you click on the handshake icon, the verified page receives a notification about what you, the marketer, will see about the post. Note that verified pages can tag more than one third party, brand, or sponsor for each post. (In addition, note that none of the brands shown or mentioned have in any way asked for or paid for sponsorshi...

Podcasting for Business: Top Podcasters Share Success Tips

Podcasting for Business: Top Podcasters Share Success Tips

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you thinking of starting a podcast for your business? Wondering how top podcasters use their podcasts to grow their businesses? To learn how podcasting can help build your business, I interview Michael Hyatt and Chris Brogan for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). This episode is a panel discussion from Social Media Success Summit. It includes myself, Michael Hyatt from the This Is Your Life podcast and Chris Brogan from the Human Business Way podcast. The panel shares an inside look at some of the podcast secrets you can use to enhance your sales. You'll learn about podcast frequency, how to promote your offers and ways to get your audience to take action. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Podcasting for Business How podcasting can help your business Michael shares that the most obvious way it has helped his business is with reach. He gets as many podcast downloads a month for This Is Your Life as he gets unique visitors to his blog. His audience has doubled because of it. He believes that you get a different kind of follower with your podcast. Many people have said that they have never read his blog; instead they've connected with him through his podcast. You'll discover why podcasting is more intimate and why this type of connection has benefited Michael's business. Chris shares his story of how he got into podcasting in 2005, when it was still the early days for this type of platform. He started an event called Podcamp with Christopher Penn. Back then it wasn't easy for people to consume a podcast, so it wasn't a great time for the independent podcaster. A year or so ago, Chris decided to jump back in again and started The Human Business Way. You'll find out why Chris puts in a lot of effort to make sure his show is a very personal experience. Listen to the show to find out why a podcast is a great platform to build a community around. Podcast frequency Chris has tried all different schedules for his podcast. He originally put his show out weekly, then more frequently than that and has also gone weeks between shows. He originally told everybody that he would close the show at 100 episodes. This wasn't to hurt his relationship with his community, but to carry out tests as a marketer on the flexibility, expansion and depth of his show. You'll hear how these results helped him with the new show format. Michael's podcast is a weekly show. He tries to deliver it on a Wednesday morning because people count on it. You'll hear the type of content schedule Michael has and what he did last summer when he had a month off to write his book that resulted in only a 10% traffic hit. The take-home lesson is to figure out what your audience expects. You'll hear Chris share the formula that works for his audience and how he gets around people's unwillingness to commit. Listen to the show to find out one of the downsides to having too many podcasts in a short period of time. How to advertise and promote what you offer with your podcast Michael explains how he originally started with ads on the front end, where he knew he had the maximum number of people listening for him to connect with. However, someone graciously suggested to him that he should give before he expects to receive. The listeners who don't know you will want to get straight to the juice. You'll find out what technique works best for Michael and the types of ads he uses.

SearchCap: Google Search Console beta invites, Google attribution & question and answers in maps

by Barry Schwartz @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: Google Search Console beta invites, Google attribution & question and answers in maps appeared first on Search Engine Land.

How to Drive Traffic to Your Website With Pinterest

How to Drive Traffic to Your Website With Pinterest

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for ways to improve your Pinterest marketing? Do you want to make your pins more clickable? To generate leads, conversions, and sales from Pinterest, your pins need to do more than move people to like and repin. In this article you'll discover how to create pins that encourage people to click through to your site. Listen to this article: #1: Combine Cropped Images to Hint at a Story Stories evoke a combined sense of emotion in us: curiosity, arousal, intrigue, and so on. Images help convey those stories which is why advertising professional David Ogilvy advocated for the use of photographs, and why you should use them in the pins you create to promote your content. The right images can make the viewer ask, "What's going on in this picture?" Once you've captured their attention, you've likely induced them to click through to your site and learn the rest of the story. All pins use images but many include stock photography and overlaid text; these elements are so common that it's become easy for viewers to skim over them. To stand out, you will want to choose images that are much more than mere graphic representations or photos of products; you want to use images that support the thread of the story you're telling. For example, in the pin below your attention is drawn to the various tiles and, because they share a common feeling and share similar colors, your brain begins to establish a connection among them. There's a connected story going on and you're wondering what that story is. A pin that tells the viewer there's a story being told makes people stop and look at it. The longer they view, the greater the chance of a click-through. #2: Support Calls to Action With Visual Design Websites with clickable buttons that contain calls to action (or CTAs) have been around for a few decades now. As we've become regular users of websites to buy products, our brains are now wired to expect CTA buttons on websites as well as in social media content. Pins are no exception. In the pin below, you can see the phrase "Go For It" stands out clearly despite the other elements in this pin. To incorporate this approach in your own Pinterest marketing, create a pinnable image that combines a clear text-based call to action with an element that resembles a button. The urge to click on the button translates to a click on your pin. #3: Pique Curiosity With the Promise to Reveal More One thing that makes people click through from a pin to a website is something popularly known as a curiosity gap. There are a few ways to introduce the curiosity gap into your pins; you can use the title, the description, or a text overlay on your pin image. Whether you use one or all three of the options available, use them to deliver a promise of vital information that will improve the lives of people who view your pin. People will click on your pin with the expectation that you'll provide that information on the page your pin links to. In the pin below, Brilliant Business Moms promises to help people get more done in a day, but doesn't tell them how. The curiosity gap is born. Creating a curiosity gap between the information you promise through the pin and the information you deliver on your website helps your followers decide to click more quickly. #4: Capitalize on the Fear of Missing Out People are driven to check out offers that create a sense of urgency; offers that expire in a short time, products that are limited-edition or about to go out of stock, or information that the rest of the world knows about. The sense of urgency creates FOMO, or the fear of missing out. FOMO is what makes people grab the opportunity to use a discount, knowing that the offer will be gone in 24 hours. FOMO is why you click and buy something immediately because it's almost out of stock. The pin below makes viewers nervous that they'll miss out on a product that will no longer be available to them if they...

12 Proven Ways to Seriously Scale your SEO Agency

by Clayton Johnson @

Do you want to know how to scale your SEO Agency to handle tons of clients? In the last few years, we’ve been able to...

The post 12 Proven Ways to Seriously Scale your SEO Agency appeared first on .

10 Tips to Tighten Your Copy

10 Tips to Tighten Your Copy

by Lauren Hooker @ Blog

Whether you’ve been in business for 2 years or 2 minutes, you know that being an entrepreneur requires a slew of skills.  You have to be a salesperson, a marketer, an accountant, a project manager, a designer, a social media expert, a researcher, and a copywriter - all while being an expert in your particular field.  And you’re probably willingly (yet hesitantly) diving into all of those roles because you have a product, service, or idea that you enjoy and believe in. But in order to get clients and customers to pay attention to you and purchase your great product or service, you have to be able to communicate about it. You have to write about it in a way that’s genuine and persuasive. Emails, blog posts, headlines, bios, sales pages, social media updates - being an entrepreneur means you’re constantly having to write new copy for your brand and your business. But here’s the thing: Most of us aren’t trained copywriters.  We haven’t had a copywriting pro sit down with us one-on-one and teach us how to write in a way that’s concise, compelling, and personable. And if you’re anything like me, you might also have some serious resistance to promoting yourself and selling your products.  But copywriting doesn’t have to be quite so painstaking and overwhelming.  These 10 simple copywriting tricks will help you clearly communicate about your business in a way that resonates with people and encourages them to take action.

Tools to Optimize Your Social Scheduling When You Need a Break

Tools to Optimize Your Social Scheduling When You Need a Break

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Ever want to take a day off from posting on social media? Have you considered scheduling posts for weekends and holidays, or when you just can’t respond? Posting to Facebook and Twitter when many businesses are silent helps you stay top of mind with your followers. In this article you'll discover how to keep your social media accounts stocked with content when you’re on break. Why Post on Weekends? Some non-workdays are perfect times to be active on social media for certain types of businesses (think special offers for ecommerce sites during the holidays, for example). Simply greeting your followers on a holiday is a great way to build genuine likes and interactions. Listen to this article: Contrary to popular belief, social media posting on weekends is essential for your brand presence growth. The following studies show Saturday and Sunday posts can increase your interactions: Weekend posts on Facebook get more engagement than workweek posts. Weekend and Wednesday tweets are believed to be the best days for B2C companies. Weekend and afternoon tweets show the highest click-through rates. While posting on weekends and holidays can make sense for your business, the desire to take a well-deserved day off is understandable. Read on for some tips to keep your accounts active on those days. #1: Schedule Content Effectively If you'll be taking a weekend or holiday vacation, scheduling some updates for that time is a smart strategy. I recommend that you schedule updates with a tool like MavSocial because it's free and supports top social media networks. You can use the Post Manager feature to schedule your social media updates and check the Campaign Planner calendar to make sure you post each day of your vacation. Don't overschedule for holidays (especially if you are into ecommerce). Holidays can be risky: Customers wait longer for orders, and customer service is swamped. Downtime also tends to happen on holidays because hosting companies are understaffed. So it's not the best time for multiple social media updates. One timely update congratulating customers on the holidays is enough. Don't overschedule for time slots you won't be available to interact; one or two updates per day will be enough to maintain a consistent presence. I suggest a daily schedule like the one below for weekends or holiday absences: Schedule one Facebook page post: The purpose of this update is mostly to generate organic interactions rather than to convert, so post something entertaining and timely like a meme on a trending topic. You can also consider a post that acknowledges the holiday, a funny weekend picture or video, a joke or a visual quote. Schedule two to three tweets: Avoid asking questions, posting mini-contests or publishing tweets that may prompt questions or interactions you'll need to quickly react to. Instead, use this time to re-share important updates from the weekdays such as a special offer or an upcoming event reminder. #2: Tools to Improve Your Weekend Posting Although consistency is important to your success in social media marketing, so is including variety in what you share. Select an image from the MavSocial gallery to diversify your weekend and holiday social media updates on Twitter and Facebook. Unlike many other scheduling tools out there, the MavSocial Post Manager feature actually uploads your visual content to each network. To scale your entertaining content on Twitter for holidays, weekends or vacation time, use Tweet Jukebox to auto-post from a cool pre-built box you fill. I have a box of interesting quotes I use only for weekends. Simply register a free account and enable the box from My Jukeboxes. Sometimes updating your social media accounts in real time is unavoidable, which is why I like the idea of DrumUp so much. DrumUp has a great free mobile app for Android that you can use to make this process easier from your smartphone.

Franchise SEO: How to Apply Local SEO to Multiple Locations

by Avinash Nair @ Unamo Blog

From creating different landing pages to finding niche, relevant keywords, a lot of franchisors (and their SEO vendors) are neck deep in their search for the Holy Grail of franchise SEO. And that’s only the beginning. As a franchisor, you’re aware by now of the many pitfalls of attempting to unify information without duplicating it. […]

6 YouTube Tips to Improve Your Search Rank

6 YouTube Tips to Improve Your Search Rank

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are your YouTube views falling? Do you need to rank higher in YouTube search results? Understanding how you can take advantage of YouTube's algorithm will help your channel and videos be seen by more people. In this article you'll discover how to make your video rank higher in YouTube search results. Listen to this article: #1: Align Content Development With Viewer Searches To get a leg up on your YouTube competition (which may be targeting irrelevant topics or subjects), find the exact words and phrases people use to search for content like yours on YouTube. You can use both free tools (like Keyword Tool and YouTube Trends) and paid tools (VideoCents and vidIQ, for example), to get insights into what people are searching for on YouTube. The paid tools give a bit more data, but their true value comes from providing a sense of how hard it is to rank for specific terms. Here's an example of some inline keyword insights on the word 'vine' from VidIQ. You're looking to find the sweet spot, where a keyword is getting a good number of searches but isn't overly competitive. What constitutes a good number of searches will vary by industry or market. After you've identified the best keywords, you can use them when creating and publishing your content. Create Videos People Search For Hank Green's SciShow searched for the most asked questions about science and created an entire series of videos to answer them. This tactic earned the channel millions of views across the series. Optimize Your Video for How Viewers Search For all its power, YouTube still finds it difficult to read video content, so you need to tell the platform exactly what your video is about. You do this through the video's meta data. If you use your keywords strategically (without spamming), you'll be much more likely to rank for your chosen keywords, as YouTube knows that your video is related to these terms. Include your keywords in the video title (as close to the start as possible), the description, tags and transcript file (the script should contain targeted keywords). Check out this example, which ranks #2 for the search term "video marketing." The keyword is visible in the title and description. You'll also find the keyword in the tags. It's even included in the subtitles. With strategic keyword optimization like this, it's no surprise that this video ranks so high for such a competitive keyword. #2: Maximize Video Watch Time Watch time is YouTube's most important ranking factor. It's a simple fact: If you don't have strong watch times, your videos will be demoted in search. Remember that it's all about what percentage of the video is watched, not just total minutes (though it's best to increase both). Michael Stevens of Vsauce is successful at getting his YouTube audience to stick around. Even though his videos are over 10 minutes long, they routinely log hundreds of thousands of views. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=O2jkV4BsN6U He gets straight to the point in answering the title question, and uses his personality and intelligence to pique people's curiosity again, steering the conversation to a different but related topic. Take a cue from Michael and consider removing long intros and outros. Get people to watch more of your video, and YouTube knows that you're providing value to those viewers. YouTube will reward you by suggesting the video to more people and ranking the video higher in search. #3: Drive Longer Channel Sessions This may seem like a no-brainer, but try to get people to watch more than just one of your videos. All channels want this of course, but not all of them actively encourage viewers to watch more videos. This tactic has more benefits than meet the eye. If your channel consistently starts people off on long YouTube sessions (even if they go off and watch videos on other channels), your channel will be rewarded by YouTube's algorithm,

3 Tools That Speed Influencer Outreach

3 Tools That Speed Influencer Outreach

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you trying to connect with influencers? Looking for ways to streamline the process? You can make your influencer outreach more efficient and save yourself time by combining three free tools. In this article you'll discover how to automate your influencer outreach with BuzzSumo, Buffer, and Twitter. Listen to this article: #1: Identify Influencers Who Shared Similar Content The first step is to source popular posts related to the topic you're interested in promoting. Let's use this article as the topic example. Go to BuzzSumo.com and type in keywords related to your blog post. For example, the results for a search for "influencer outreach" returned similar articles. After you find similar posts that are popular, you need to identify key influencers who've shared those posts. Click on the View Links Shared button next to each post and then click Page Authority to sort your list by who has the most influence. Ideally you want to target 10-20 individuals with high authority and a large number of followers. In this example, Brian Dean, SEMrush, and Jon Morrow all have high social authority rank, a large Twitter following, and have shared an article similar to this one. When you reach out to identified influencers who have shared content similar to your own, you raise the chance they'll share your article. Plus their amplification of your content can drive huge exposure for your blog. To put your best foot forward, you'll want to start engaging and interacting with the influencers you choose a few weeks before you reach out to them on Twitter. Add your influencers to a Twitter list so you can easily monitor and engage with them on a daily basis. To put yourself on their radar, make an effort to retweet, like, quote, and spark conversations with each of your influencers. #2: Create and Schedule Automated Tweets to Influencers Once you're on the influencers' radar, create a two-column spreadsheet with personalized direct tweets to each of them. Make sure each tweet is no more than 143 characters long. To quickly work out the character count for each of your tweets in Excel, use this formula: =Len(enter cell). Your spreadsheet should look something like this (including 10-20 direct tweets). Here are some tweet templates you can adapt for your spreadsheet: [TWITTER HANDLE] Hey [FIRST NAME], I saw you shared [CONTENT CREATORS TWITTER HANDLE + POST TOPIC] post and thought you might like this ☺ [LINK TO YOUR POST] [TWITTER HANDLE] Hey [FIRST NAME], I saw you shared [CONTENT CREATORS TWITTER HANDLE + POST TOPIC] post. I hope you like my own refreshed version ☺ [LINK TO YOUR POST] [TWITTER HANDLE] Hey [FIRST NAME], I saw you shared [CONTENT CREATORS TWITTER HANDLE + POST TOPIC] post and hoped you'd like my take on it ☺ [LINK TO YOUR POST] [TWITTER HANDLE] Hey [FIRST NAME], I saw you shared [CONTENT CREATORS TWITTER HANDLE + POST TOPIC] which inspired this – hope you like it ☺ [LINK TO YOUR POST] Once you've created the spreadsheet, copy the Tweets column into a notepad file and upload it to Bulk Buffer, a free tool you can use to bulk-upload content to your Buffer account. Simply upload the saved notepad file where prompted, select the Twitter account where you want your tweets to upload, and click Send to Buffer. Once your tweets are uploaded, you'll want to space out the scheduled updates in your Buffer account. This will ensure the outreach tweets aren't too frequent and don't appear spammy. To do this, simply go to your Buffer content queue and scroll to each queued post. Then click the posting date to edit the date and time the tweet will publish. It's a good idea to space your outreach tweets for every other day, and ensure you're sharing plenty of content in between. #3: Follow Up Influencers can easily miss your direct tweet due to the volume of messages they receive on a daily basis.

How to Partner With YouTube Influencers: 6 Tips for Success

How to Partner With YouTube Influencers: 6 Tips for Success

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is YouTube part of your marketing strategy? Do you team up with influencers for video campaigns? Potential customers turn to YouTube influencers to discover products and get reviews, tips and tutorials on everything from makeup to their next mattress purchase. In this article I'll share six tips to help you partner with influencers on YouTube to get the word out about your company. Listen to this article: #1: Find Authentic YouTubers The beauty and power of word-of-mouth marketing is in finding the right influencers for your brand, and then allowing them the creative freedom to position your product organically in their videos. When a video feels fake, forced or scripted, potential customers can't click on the Back button fast enough. Find YouTubers who already embody your brand and truly love your product, and then let them do what they do best: be themselves. Remember, most YouTubers are not actors. People don't go to YouTube to watch commercials; they go to search for information and see their favorite video personalities give advice and offer interesting information. #2: Hire by Fit, not Followers When hiring YouTubers to work on a campaign, it may seem enticing to simply go for the ones who have the largest following or view counts. While this makes sense in theory, if you don't have the right fit, your message and product will likely go unnoticed. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=H-YnOvpxHRU The YouTuber behind Secret Life of a Bionerd is a natural fit for beauty-related products and services. Brands working with small- and mid-sized influencers tend to have more success, because those personalities have a tight-knit community as the target market for the brand. In particular, smaller influencers who have a highly engaged audience around a niche subject are invaluable. They have greater impact and are often more cost-effective, due to their audience size. #3: Track Response to Links To determine the success of a campaign, create and provide a custom tracking link for each influencer, which leads back to your website, blog or product page. This may seem like common sense, but it's a mistake brands frequently make. When you track activity in this manner, you can see which influencers were most effective, and determine which ones you do and do not want to work on your future campaigns. Ask your campaign influencers to add your tracking link to the top of their video description, so viewers can easily find and click the link. YouTube allows minimal space for text before a viewer has to click Show More to see the rest of the video's description. You want your link to appear in that prime real estate. #4: Offer Coupon Codes It's notoriously difficult to track video conversions on YouTube. For example, viewers search for your company organically by opening up a new browser tab, which doesn't show up in your campaign results. Or they watch your video on certain devices, such as Apple TV, which don't allow you to click description links. A coupon code is an excellent way to track ROI and entice customers to take immediate action. If a potential customer isn't sure about your product or service, especially if your brand isn't well-known yet, a coupon code helps sway them, while giving you a video conversion to track. Since YouTubers have established relationships with their audience, when they provide a "special code" to use at checkout, it proves to their audience they're true ambassadors. YouTubers also get more excited about promoting products with special discount codes, because they want their audience to see that they're getting them a great deal. #5: Create Titles That Drive Views Come up with an interesting and catchy title for the video in your campaign, just as you would write the title of a blog post or book. Work with your influencer to create a headline that makes sense for your product and fits seamlessly with the type of titles and content the ...

Becoming a Blogger: Do You Have What it Takes?

Becoming a Blogger: Do You Have What it Takes?

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you thinking of starting a blog or restarting your blog? Do you wonder if you have what it takes to attract a strong blog audience? To learn about what it takes to become a successful blogger, I interview Stanford Smith for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Stanford Smith, co-author of Born to Blog. He is also the founder of the Pushing Social blog and host of the Pushing Social podcast. Stan shares how he started out with blogging and how Pushing Social became a blog-based business. You'll learn how to recognize your personal traits and how they can be built upon to grow a successful blog. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Starting a Blog How Stan's blog has helped his business Stan explains that his business is about offering content marketing strategies for small- to medium-sized businesses. He helps people understand how social media can work for them. His blog has been the sole reason why he was able to leave his 9-5 job and work full-time on Pushing Social. The blog is the main way Stan attracts leads, talks to prospects and educates people about his services. Stan's advice for people in a 9-5 job right now is to build up your audience and understand where your next step is going to be. If you want to market yourself in a really effective, cost-efficient way, then blogging is a great place to start. He talks about how he knew he was ready to go out on his own and why he should have done it earlier. Listen to the show to find out how all of Stan's business comes from his blog without any advertising. Common traits for becoming a successful blogger Stan starts with the notion that there are five traits people have that are necessary for blogging, and the good news is that everyone has at least one. You'll learn in detail about each trait. The five traits are: Dreamer Good storyteller Teacher Persuader Curator The idea is to take that trait or role that you play, recognize it, build upon it and then use it to create a successful blog. Stan talks about his two traits and how he can weave them into a blog post. Some of the most popular bloggers have 3 or 4 traits. Listen to the show to find out how to discover which trait you have. Do you need to be a great writer to be a good blogger? Stan believes that you don't have to be a great writer to be a good blogger, in the classic sense. When people think of the word writer, they think of poets or prize-winners. However, this does not have to be the case for blogging. You'll hear what it takes to be a great conversational writer and what this means. You need to be able to communicate in a way that builds rapport and relationships. Stan explains the difference between a blog writer and an article writer. Blogging is not just about text. For example, take a look at Gary Vaynerchuk's story about his video blog. Blogging is the platform. If you feel you are better at speaking and doing audio, then put that out there and use the podcast platform. Video is also another platform. Remember, writing is just one way of expressing yourself on a blog. Listen to the show to hear the benefits of how you can talk it out, record it and then transcribe it back.  Do you have what it takes to become a blogger? Stan explains that there are three steps to becoming a successful blogger. Have a borderline obsession with a topic. To stop yourself from getting burnt out,

Social Media Evolution: What Does the Future of Social Marketing Look Like?

Social Media Evolution: What Does the Future of Social Marketing Look Like?

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you amazed at how much social media has changed over the last few years? Want to discover what's next? To explore the evolution of social media, I interview Brian Solis. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Brian Solis, a principal analyst at the Altimeter Group. He's written eight books, including Engage and What's the Future of Business? His newest book is called X: The Experience When Business Meets Design. Brian will explore how social media has changed and how it continues to evolve. You'll discover how marketers can use moments of truth to engage their customers. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Evolution From Engage until now Brian recalls that in the late 90s and early 2000s, he helped with development around what became social media and realized that two-way digital marketing aspect was going to be phenomenal. He says his book Engage was the culmination of all that work put into a book designed to help anyone in marketing or business really understand how to become social. After Engage, Brian says, the world started to change and technology started to accelerate. This is something he studies as both an analyst and an anthropologist. Brian has continued to write books, do research and speak on how to bridge the world of brand or business with technology and people. He says social has become part of that process, as has mobile and digital transformation, wearables, etc. When asked about major changes in social media that have taken place between his first book and today, Brian talks about creating an infographic called The Wheel of Disruption while he was writing What's the Future of Business? The infographic showed all of the things that were disrupting industries, with an emphasis on brand, marketing and engagement. He explains that then and now, the three things Fred Wilson once called The Golden Triangle are at the core of everything. Brian goes on to discuss how wearables, augmented reality and services like Uber, Instacart, Postmates, Amazon, Drone Delivery and Google Express are creating disruption not only on technology fronts, but also on behavioral and expectation fronts at a human level. Listen to the show to hear Brian explain how the disruption happening today has grand implications for every business in every industry. The importance of experience Brian shares that while many marketers, brand strategists and executives say experience is one of the most important things to deliver, that means different things to different people. From great customer service to great product design, it's all over the map. Brian believes that everything that happens when you buy, use, shop for or have a problem with something are moments that contribute to the overall experience. Brian shares why he thinks we should be able to define and design experiences as part of business and branding to build better relationships, and why he believes experience is the next competitive advantage. He says that while some savvy organizations have introduced efforts to define a brand experience (BX), a customer experience (CX) and a user experience (UX), all of these efforts are disparate. Thus, by default or by design, the experience is disconnected. Listen to the show to hear why Brian wants to bring all experiences under one banner of X, where everything works together. Businesses doing a great job with experience Brian explains that he chose the companies he talks about in his book not because they are examples of holistic experiences,

SearchCap: Google EU appeal, goodbye fetch as Google for apps & award list

by Barry Schwartz @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: Google EU appeal, goodbye fetch as Google for apps & award list appeared first on Search Engine Land.

Social Customer Service: How to Care for Customers With Social Media

Social Customer Service: How to Care for Customers With Social Media

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Does your business have a social customer service plan? Want to step up your customer service on social media? To discover how to improve your social customer care, I interview Dan Gingiss. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Dan Gingiss, former head of digital customer experience for Discover Card, co-host of the Focus on Customer Service podcast and head of digital marketing for Humana. Dan will explore how to better serve your customers with social media. You'll discover what your business needs to respond to on social media. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Customer Service Dan's story Dan, who has been in marketing or product development most of his career, says he has always been in a service business in some way. Dan talks about the impact of his first job out of school. He was a marketer at a direct-response company that sold high-end collectibles. One year around Christmas, he got a phone call that should have gone to customer service. A woman was upset because a gift she ordered for Christmas had not yet arrived. Dan shares how he made sure Christmas wasn't going to be ruined on his watch. Dan says taking an extra moment to think about something from the customer's point of view usually will make you a much better marketer. He talks about his roles at Discover and winning the JD Power Award for best customer experience, taking it away from AmEx. Listen to the show to hear how Dan got started in social media. How customer service fits into social media marketing Studies from Gartner say that as soon as next year, more than 85% of companies will have to compete on customer experience. It's getting too expensive for industries to compete on price, so they need to differentiate themselves by customer experience. Dan says when you interact with customers on a one-to-one basis on social media, it makes them more loyal. Loyal customers spend more with you, stay with you longer and tell their friends about you. All of these elements result in improved KPIs (key performance indicators), which is what marketers care about. Forrester's Customer Service Index is a pretty good indicator of how well large companies are doing, Dan explains. Over the course of many years, Forrester looked at the stock prices of the top- and bottom-performing public companies. The top-performing companies do well in customer experience, while the poor performers in customer experience are at the bottom. There’s a direct link between customer experience and profitability. Dan shares what happened at Discover when they looked at engagement rates on customer service responses (what happened after they responded to a customer and resolved his or her issue). Listen to the show to discover the biggest challenge of one-to-one marketing. Businesses doing customer service well On Dan's podcast they interview large brands such as Whole Foods, Jet Blue, Chipotle and Hertz, as well as lesser-known companies like Telstra. Telstra is the largest telecom company in Australia. Unlike most of the telecoms in the United States, they've decided to differentiate based on service. They've managed to connect all of their systems, including social, into a single CRM, so any customers contacting them on any channel can have the same agent help them, as long as that agent is working. Another recent podcast interview was with Scotty's Brewhouse, an upscale sports bar that has 13 locations in Indiana. Dan shares what business Scott Wise, the founder, president and CEO of Scotty's,

5 Ways to Use Fan Content to Improve Your ROI

5 Ways to Use Fan Content to Improve Your ROI

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to increase the ROI for your social media campaigns? Have you considered fan content? Using fan photos in your marketing is an effective way to highlight your brand, products and customers at the same time. In this article you'll discover five ways to drive ROI with user-generated content campaigns on social media. Listen to this article: Why User-Generated Content Campaigns? With the proliferation of online channels in addition to those of traditional marketing, you're in a constant battle for your audience's attention. Rather than rely solely on your creative team to produce content, consider turning to your customers. Putting in the time and effort to develop customer relationships typically means that your social media program will consume a large share of your marketing budget. For this reason, you may be asked to justify spending by providing concrete social media ROI. It's true that it's difficult to measure the business value of a like or a shared post, but you can successfully run social marketing campaigns and see real returns for your efforts. Take a look at how these five brands have launched and managed user-generated content campaigns across Facebook, Instagram and Twitter. #1: Turn Fans Into Product Models Charlotte Russe ran an exceptional social media marketing campaign to showcase the #CharlotteLook (how influencers were styling their clothes). Instagram users were asked to upload their favorite Charlotte look and use the campaign hashtag in their posts. The company selected the most on-brand user-generated content from the campaign and displayed it on their homepage. Charlotte Russe linked each winning photo to the product pages of the items that were featured in the photo. This tactic resulted in viewers who engaged with the customer photos being 28 times more likely to end up on a Charlotte Russe product page. #2: Reward Your Fans 6 Pack Fitness launched their #LeadThePack campaign with a weekly bag giveaway. They asked users to submit a photo for a chance be featured on the website and win a bag of their choice. 6 Pack Fitness's social media marketing strategy included displaying the best customer photos featuring their bags on the company's product pages. The company saw an immediate impact on their ecommerce performance. Customers who interacted with one of the customer photos on their product pages were 2.7 times more likely to make a purchase and had 12% larger order sizes. #3: Build on Local Pride The Breckenridge Colorado Tourism Office ran a successful social media campaign that asked: Why do you love Breckenridge? Fans were asked to share their thoughts on Twitter, Instagram and Facebook. Under the tagline #BreckBecause, fans formed an online community that showcased the authentic Breckenridge experience. As a result of this campaign, GoBreck.com increased web traffic from social media by 841% and increased Instagram followers by 93%. #4: Celebrate Customer Stories Ahnu has a customer base of active adventurers who wear their shoes. The brand launched its #Ahnu campaign to collect photos of cool things their fans were doing and interesting places they were visiting. The company displayed #Ahnu campaign submissions on their Facebook page, and viewers could vote on their favorite content. The users who engaged with these customer photos were 12 times more likely to end up on the Ahnu website. #5: Tap Into Customer Lifestyles California Natural Products wanted to increase brand awareness about their Svelte protein shakes on social media. Under the hashtag #DrinkSvelte, they asked fans to post photos of themselves and their Svelte drinks. The best photos were displayed on the Svelte website, and the photos generated more than 2 million impressions online. How to Leverage Your Own User-Generated Content The brands featured in this article went above and beyond just collecting content.

YouTube Ads: What Marketers Need to Know About YouTube Advertising

YouTube Ads: What Marketers Need to Know About YouTube Advertising

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you post videos on YouTube? Want to know what makes a video ad successful? To discover how YouTube video ads work, I interview Derral Eves. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Derral Eves, an expert in YouTube and video marketing. He's YouTube-certified in Audience Growth, AdWords, Google Analytics and Video Advertising. He's helped big and small businesses bring in more than 1 billion views collectively. Derral will explore YouTube ads and what marketers need to know. You'll discover the formula for creating great video ads. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: YouTube Ads How Derral got into YouTube In 2006, Derral was doing a lot of search engine optimization work with local businesses when he found their videos ranked easily on Google (this is back when Google had Google Video). Late in 2006, Google purchased YouTube and it became a lot easier to find something on YouTube through Google. Derral realized it was a great way for small shops to share their message and get easy ranking and visibility. Derral shares how a video that cost $99 to make in 2006 received over 385,000 views on YouTube and has sold more couches for a furniture store than any of their other advertising. A couple of years ago, Derral started doing his own videos to help clients get answers to common questions. He created a plan of execution, tried to figure out the best trending videos to make and so on. His goal was to get 10,000 subscribers and a million views in that first year. He reached his goal in three months. In six months, he was number-one for training on how to use YouTube on YouTube. Today, Derral consults with and helps businesses, brands and YouTube channels get exposure, develop an audience and monetize. Listen to the show to discover what originally led Derral to YouTube. Why create video ads? Because video ads convert at a very high level, Derral believes video marketing is a great way to deliver, engage and excite. He says video is powerful if it's done right, but can be negative if it's done wrong. Derral talks about working on the video ad for the Squatty Potty, which appeared on Shark Tank. As of this recording, the video has 43 million combined video views from Facebook, YouTube and some freebooted video. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YbYWhdLO43Q Although Derral found that Facebook video is good for branding and engagement, he says the video got better conversions with YouTube. Listen to the show to discover the benefit of Facebook video versus YouTube. The process for making video ads Derral says you need to start by determining what you want to accomplish with your video ad. He cautions that if you have 80, 10 or even 3 things you want to accomplish, then it's never going to work. You need narrow it down to one reason to make the ad. Then everything else will benefit from it. When you know what success looks like, you work backwards to get someone to take the desired action at the end of your video. Derral says you have a short amount of time to accomplish this and walks listeners through the steps he uses to build YouTube video ads: capture attention, talk about the problem and offer a solution. He believes that if you do this correctly, you can repeat it several times throughout the video and you can keep your audience engaged throughout the process. For example, even though the Squatty Potty video is long (2:54 minutes), the audience retention was high and over 80% of the people who click on it watch the whole ad.

SearchCap: SEO content audits, a search marketer’s view of Facebook & a link study

by Amy Gesenhues @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on Search Engine Land and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: SEO content audits, a search marketer’s view of Facebook & a link study appeared first on Search Engine Land.

Twitter Chats: How Marketers Can Benefit From Twitter Chats

Twitter Chats: How Marketers Can Benefit From Twitter Chats

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you participate in Twitter chats? Want to discover how to get the most out of them? To explore how marketers can benefit from Twitter chats, I interview Madalyn Sklar. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Madalyn Sklar, a Twitter marketing expert. She's host of the Twitter Smarter podcast and hosts a weekly Twitter chat at #TwitterSmarter. She blogs about Twitter at MadalynSklar.com. Madalyn explores the power of Twitter chats and how to benefit from them. You'll discover tools to make marketing with Twitter chats easier. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter Chats Madalyn's story Madalyn had been doing online marketing for a long time, and when social media came about she was hooked. Twitter was her favorite, because the 140-character limit forces you to be concise. She shares that whenever she traveled to different events and conferences, she asked people what was their favorite platform and why. She was amazed at how many people said they didn't like or understand Twitter. As a result, she went on a mission: to help people become Twitter Smarter. She began using the hashtag #TwitterSmarter as she developed online classes and eventually launched Twitter chats. Listen to the show to discover how Madalyn and I first crossed paths. What's a Twitter chat? The most simple description of a Twitter chat is a group of people coming together on Twitter for about an hour each week to have a conversation that revolves around a pre-determined hashtag. As long as people include the hashtag in their tweet, they're part of the conversation. It's a great way to meet lots of like-minded people, as well as receive and give advice, Madalyn explains. She encourages people to learn from her chats, but also to chime in and share their own expertise. A common approach, the one Madalyn takes, is to host a guest who does a Q&A for each Twitter chat. Listen to the show to hear my analogies to Twitter chats. Why participate? Madalyn says that last year, she made it her mission to participate in as many Twitter chats as possible. She confides that it's not been easy; it takes effort to be a regular participant in several hour-long chats each week. Twitter chats are great for helping you connect and network with people. For example, when Madalyn started going to #MediaChat, she didn't know anybody. She started to connect with people and ended up having a side conversation with Matt Diederichs from Hootsuite, which is one of her favorite platforms for scheduling tweets. Later on, she hosted Matt as a guest on her podcast and her Twitter chat. Side conversations are a common occurrence during Twitter chats, Madalyn adds. You're still actively participating and using the hashtag, but you're also creating a small community within the big community. It's a great way to make valuable, strong connections. Listen to the show to hear why Madalyn refers to Twitter chats as "cocktail parties." Where to find Twitter chats Madalyn finds that it works best to run a Google search for your topic and "Twitter chat" in Google search. Another option is to type in "Twitter chat," and you'll find some directories. Since directories aren't always reliable or up to date, Madalyn also recommends looking for chats on Twitter (you can identify them by the repetitive hashtag). Once you dip into a chat, you'll hear about others. She says you can also find out about specific chats in Twitter bios, because many times hosts will mention them there.

How to Use Snapchat for Business

How to Use Snapchat for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you interested in using Snapchat for your business? Wondering how to integrate it into your marketing? Snapchat presents a unique opportunity to reach a new audience that is receptive to clever, creative marketing. In this article you'll discover how to use Snapchat in your social media marketing. Listen to this article: Why Use Snapchat? Snapchat is the fastest-growing social network with more than 100 million daily active users. Of the businesses that market on social media, most use Facebook, but only 2% use Snapchat. The lack of competition on Snapchat means that your business has a great opportunity to stand out and shine on the platform. Unlike other social networks, it doesn't matter when you post content on Snapchat. Your snaps will never be buried in a busy timeline; they stay unopened until your followers have time to view them. After snaps are opened, they're available for only 1 to 10 seconds. Snaps disappear so quickly, so you may be wondering if Snapchat is worth the effort. If you think about it, most social content is viewed right after it's posted. Content tends to last longer on platforms like Pinterest and Tumblr, but it's far more common for social posts to have a short shelf life. Snapchat makes this short shelf life an explicit part of the platform. Because snaps vanish after one viewing, you have users' undivided attention. In this way, disappearing content is actually a boon for marketers. Here's how to get started integrating Snapchat into your social media marketing. #1: Develop Content First, you'll need to develop content for Snapchat. Here are some ideas that you may want to try: Create valuable tutorials about something in your area of expertise. For example, show people how to easily thread a needle or explain how to choose a secure password. Give users a glimpse behind the scenes at your company. Show them how your product is made, share the inspiration and ethos behind your company or chat with artists. Show your product in action. For example, show a person wearing your dress or reading your book. Ask users for pictures or videos of them using your product, and send out snaps featuring them. Those fans will feel valued, and your audience will discover different ways they can use your product. Repurpose content from other social networks, but make sure it's tailored to Snapchat. The tone should be casual and funny, similar to Vine and Tumblr. No social feed should be 100% self-promotion, so tell interesting stories that relate to your industry. Share a cool tip from an industry leader or give an opinion on a recent event. #2: Invite Participation Social media should be social, not a one-way megaphone for promotions. Replying to every snap isn't practical or scalable, but you can certainly do it every now and again. Imagine how great it would feel if your favorite guitar brand replied to your snap of a song. You can give your followers that feeling, too. Ask people to reply to your snap or post a reply on another social network. Sephora has used this tactic with sweepstakes. They asked users to take pictures of themselves with makeup doodles and post them to other social networks. Consider following people back on Snapchat. When they send you snaps, read them and reply if appropriate. This goes a long way towards letting users know you're a real person or a real social team behind a brand. #3: Get Creative After deciding what content you'll develop, think about how you can present it in a creative way. Here are some ways to do that: Draw or write on pictures to add humor or emphasis. Dove uses Snapchat to inspire viewers to celebrate their own beauty. In this snap the company drew on the image with bold colors to emphasize their message. Find clever ways to get people to sit up and pay attention. GrubHub used a series of images showing a pizza being eaten slice by slice to create suspense before revealing ...

4 Ways to Increase Your Pinterest Visibility

4 Ways to Increase Your Pinterest Visibility

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more visibility from your Pinterest marketing? Are you looking for ways to get your pins and boards seen by more people? There are some quick and easy tactics you can use to help more of the right people find and share your content on Pinterest. In this article you'll discover how to increase the visibility of your content on Pinterest. Listen to this article: #1: Understand Who Uses Pinterest It's important to approach each social media platform as a unique entity. Although many networks have similarities, Facebook is different from Twitter, Pinterest is different from Instagram, and so on. One big difference among social platforms is your audience. Here's a look at Pinterest's overall demographics: Pinterest has 100 million daily active users, with over 500 billion Pinterest pins. 80% of Pinterest's users are female and 90% of all pins are created or shared by women. 13% of adult men who are online use Pinterest, with a 120% growth in male users in 2015. Millennials are using Pinterest as much as Instagram. 67% of Pinterest users are under the age of 40. 60% of Pinterest users are from the U.S. If you have a business account, you can get a picture of your unique audience demographics with Pinterest analytics. You can see whom you're connecting (and not connecting) with. To access Pinterest analytics, click the Analytics tab in the top-left corner of the screen and select Audience. View the Demographics tab to see pertinent information about your audience, including where people are from, their gender and the languages they speak. Once you have a good understanding of who your Pinterest audience is, you'll be able to create relevant content for them. #2: Appeal to Users Preferences It's important to find out what your specific audience's interests are so you can better tailor your content to them. Check out your Pinterest analytics to see your best-performing pins and boards and discover their other interests. Identify Top Content Choose Analytics > Profile to view engagement metrics for your Pinterest content. You'll see your top pins and boards from the past 30 days and how many impressions, clicks, repins, likes and either pin type or numbers of pins on the board. This data provides insights into which pins and boards are resonating with your Pinterest audience. Look at Audience Interests You can also review your analytics to see insights about the interests of your Pinterest audience. Choose Analytics > Audience and click the Interests tab to see images and labels describing common interests your audience members share. Some interests are generic, like Quotes, and others are more specific, like Casual Outfits. Try to find ways to incorporate your audience's other interests into your content. For example, if you run a cooking website but notice that a large percentage of your audience is also interested in camping, you can create pins like "10 Best Recipes to Make While Camping" or "Snacks for the Campfire." The more you adapt your content to appeal to your target audience on Pinterest, the better you'll be able to connect with them. #3: Write Search-Friendly Descriptions Though Pinterest users will often scroll through their main feed or the feeds of selected topics (such Women's Fashion, Cars and Motorcycles or Geek), they'll also frequently use Pinterest as a search engine to find content they're interested in. Because of this, it's important to add relevant tags and keywords to your pins. Strategically place keywords in the descriptions of your pins and in your boards to help users find your content when they're searching or browsing through feeds of a related category. For example, if your keyword is "campfire recipes," make sure you highlight it in your board description. Though not as prevalent as on Instagram and Twitter, hashtags make a frequent appearance on Pinterest.

SEO Content Strategy: How to Skyrocket Your Traffic By 594%

SEO Content Strategy: How to Skyrocket Your Traffic By 594%


CoSchedule Blog

In this detailed step-by-step guide, you'll learn exactly how to replicate CoSchedule's own SEO content strategy to increase rankings and drive traffic.

5 Creative Ways to Grow Your Email List

5 Creative Ways to Grow Your Email List

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to grow your email list? Got a blog? New tools and placement options have made it easier than ever to create an offer that compels blog visitors to share their email address with you. In this article you'll discover five unique ways to grow your email list from your blog readers. Listen to this article: #1: Put Your Best Offer on Your Homepage To encourage email signups, show the value of being an email subscriber on the homepage of your blog. The main focus should be on your opt-in box. Place the links to other areas of your site below the fold, so readers won't see them unless they scroll down the page. Bluewire Media collects email addresses directly from their main page. Below, they offer visitors free marketing templates in addition to news and updates delivered to their inbox. #2: Use a Feature Box to Present Lead Magnets If you don't have a custom homepage or don't have the resources to redesign your current homepage, a feature box might be a good option for you. A well-designed feature box exchanges your lead magnet for new email addresses. You typically place the feature box above the fold of your page so it's immediately visible to users. Unlike entry pop-ups, feature boxes don't interrupt visitors from scrolling down the page and browsing your blog content. They can either take your bonus or scroll down the page. The feature box at DIYthemes increased the blog's subscription rate by 51.7%. Feature boxes convert well even if they're subscription-only and don't offer a lead magnet. Choose a good opt-in offer, such as a free email course. The Enchanting Marketing blog offers readers a free writing course in their feature box. If you're looking for a tool to create opt-in feature boxes, try the WordPress plugins PlugMatter Optin Feature Box or Thrive Leads. Don't forget that your homepage is one of the most visited pages on your blog, so it deserves special treatment. Think about changing your homepage design to include an engaging sign-up box as the next step after a feature box. #3: Add Content Upgrades to Blog Posts Content upgrades are another way to grow your email list. The principle behind them is the same as for any opt-in form: You give away free material (a lead magnet) and get your visitors' email addresses in return. Place a link to your bonus content with a call to action in your article and wrap it with an eye-catching box. When readers click the link, a pop-up box appears, asking for their email address to get the bonus material. Michael Hyatt offers readers a list of literary agents as a bonus in the following article, which is valuable material for his readers and relevant to the topic of the article. When readers click your download link, open a pop-up box asking for their email address. After readers complete the form, redirect them to a page with the bonus. You can use a variety of different materials in your content upgrades. Here are a few examples: A PDF version of your article A checklist An instructional video A template A list of tools or resources An infographic Remember that you need to choose bonus content that is highly relevant to the topic of your article. That's why content upgrades are often called "content-specific bonuses." To implement content upgrades on your blog, try a tool like LeadBoxes or the Content Upgrades PRO plugin for WordPress. #4: Display a Scroll-Triggered Box Another effective and unobtrusive way to turn readers into email subscribers is to use scroll-triggered opt-in boxes. Unlike pop-ups, scroll-triggered boxes don't interrupt the visitor's reading and don't cover up any content. Place a scroll-triggered box at the corner of the page when readers scroll down to a certain part of your article. By the time the box appears in front of readers, they've already read most or all of your article. They've formed an impression of you,

How an SEO Pro Increased His Organic Traffic by 157.80% – Case Study

by Andreea Sauciuc @ SEO Blog | cognitiveSEO Blog on SEO Tactics & Strategies

This is a TRUE & SUCCESSFUL story from the SEO strategist Jason Acidre – Co-founder at Xight Interactive, written and documented by himself.   From position #12 to position #5 in under 30 days. It’s definitely a huge thing, especially for consultants and site owners who are looking to get even more productive in the […]

The post How an SEO Pro Increased His Organic Traffic by 157.80% – Case Study appeared first on SEO Blog | cognitiveSEO Blog on SEO Tactics & Strategies.

Facebook Messenger Marketing: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Messenger Marketing: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to communicate with your customers via Facebook Messenger? Wondering how Facebook Messenger bots and Messenger ads can help? To explore this topic, I interview Molly Pittman. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Molly Pittman, the vice president of marketing at DigitalMarketer. She specializes in customer acquisition and teaches regularly for DigitalMarketer Engage, which is the company's membership community. You'll discover how businesses can benefit from integrating Facebook Messenger features into their marketing. Molly shares use cases for Facebook Messenger marketing. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Messenger Marketing Why Consider Messenger Ads? As soon as Facebook Messenger ads became available in November 2016, Molly started experimenting with them. Molly says she's excited about Facebook Messenger ads because they're not just a new interface element or feature. Facebook Messenger ads are a whole new channel. Molly believes the value of Facebook Messenger ads lies in the app's popularity and convenience. More than one billion people communicate via Facebook Messenger. Because that's where people are having conversations with friends, family, colleagues, or whomever, Molly believes businesses should be connecting with their customers via Facebook Messenger, too. The app's popularity makes Facebook Messenger a good place to buy ads, connect with prospects, and talk to customers. Molly says that DigitalMarketer's initial tests have shown good results. The open rate and consumption are really high. Molly has seen the benefit from the consumer's standpoint, too. A few months ago, as Molly was driving in Austin, she saw a new apartment complex being built. Molly was interested, so she went to the company's Facebook page and contacted them through their Message Us button. They responded almost instantaneously. Every step of her communication with the company was done through Facebook Messenger. I ask Molly if she believes Facebook Messenger will replace email. Molly responds that email will likely always be a powerful tool for marketers, certainly for the next five years. However, she says Facebook Messenger isn't necessarily a replacement but is the mode of communication most similar to email. In some aspects, Messenger is better than email, she continues, because people tend to respond instantaneously on Messenger, whereas people don't feel compelled to respond to emails right away. Listen to the show to hear Molly and I discuss our predictions for the future of Facebook Messenger. The Types of Messenger Ads Molly explains the two types of Facebook Messenger ads. The first one is called a destination ad because when you set it up, you choose Facebook Messenger as the destination (as opposed to your website). Like a regular ad, a destination ad appears in the news feed and can display a video, carousel, or image. When someone clicks the ad, a message to your Facebook page opens in Facebook Messenger and you can begin a conversation. For example, the first test Molly ran was a simple destination ad that said, "Do you have questions about how DigitalMarketer can help grow your business? We'd love to chat." When someone clicked the ad, a Facebook Messenger window opened where the person could type his or her message to DigitalMarketer. Molly says you can target anyone with destination ads, such as your custom audiences and interests. The opportunities are endless. The other type is a sponsored message, which is more like an email.

How to Use Facebook Mobile Apps for Marketing

How to Use Facebook Mobile Apps for Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to make your Facebook marketing more mobile? Curious about what you can and can’t do from your phone with Facebook apps? Facebook has a variety of mobile apps, from pages, to groups, to ads, that keep you connected while marketing on the go. In this article you’ll learn about the different capabilities of each of the mobile Facebook apps that are available today. Listen to this article: Facebook Mobile App First, install the basic Facebook mobile app on your phone. There are plenty of things you can do from this app, like access your personal information and pages and groups (just click on the three horizontal bars in the upper-right corner). Post to your page from there or comment on other posts as your page. When you click on the activity or insights tab on your phone, you can also see the recent activity and scheduled posts, as well as limited stats. Although the Facebook mobile app is primarily used for personal activity, there is so much more you can do with it. Facebook Pages App To maximize your connection to your page on your mobile device, install the Facebook Pages app. There are a few things that you can do with the Facebook Pages app that you can't do with the regular app, such as access the home feed of your Facebook page. Pages Feed shows the posts of the pages you've liked as your page, and you can comment as your page. Also, view and respond to messages to your page through the app, if you have messages capability enabled in general settings. To access your page's messages, click the speech bubble. Then reply to messages that have been sent to your page. Facebook Messenger App The Facebook Messenger app originally sparked a lot of controversy about the required permissions. People have since discovered that because of the way Android's app permissions are worded, the app is forced to ask for a lot of permissions (and they're not any different than other messaging apps on Android devices). Many people don't realize how powerful the Facebook Messenger app can be. You can make international calls for free to anyone else who has the app installed (data rates apply), leave a voice message for anyone with the app or make a free video call. Plus, send money for free to a contact (this feature is only available in some areas). Go into the Messenger app to see what features are available. Start a conversation with someone or access previous conversations. You can also install additional features to the app by clicking on the icon at the bottom of the screen with three dots. Currently most of the bonus features involve things like additional images, GIFs, etc. However, there are some practical apps, such as a photo editor and sketch pad. Facebook Group App While you can access your groups within the regular Facebook app, one of the biggest benefits to the Facebook Group app is the ability to easily manage your groups and watch for updates. If you're an admin of a Facebook group, this app is a must. Install the Groups app, and you can easily see which groups have new activity, indicated by the number in blue next to each group icon. Move the Facebook groups you use the most to the top of the screen. Just hold down the icon of that group and move it with your finger to the top of the screen. Decide which Facebook groups need what notifications, and set them up the way you want them, so you don't get overwhelmed with notifications you don't need. The Groups app is essential for admins or moderators to keep tabs on the activity of your groups. Manage Facebook Ads From Your Phone If you run Facebook ads for yourself or for a client, watching them while you're away from your desk is a must. Luckily the Ads Manager in the Facebook mobile app has improved over the last year. You can easily switch between accounts, turn ads on and off and adjust the schedules. Once you select the Ads Manager,

Video Authenticity: How to Perform On-Camera

Video Authenticity: How to Perform On-Camera

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to connect with your audience via video? Looking for tips to convey confidence and authority? To explore how to improve your on-camera performance, I interview David H. Lawrence XVII. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview David H. Lawrence XVII, an actor and professional voice artist. You may recognize him as the Puppet Master from the TV show Heroes. He specializes in audio and video communication and his course is called Camera Ready U, where he helps actors and marketers with their on-camera performances. David explores ways to be yourself in front of the camera. You'll discover how to prepare for a video performance. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Video Authenticity David's Story David started as a voiceover talent and moved into on-camera work. In both cases, after David found success, people asked him how he achieved that success. At events such as Social Media Marketing World, David talked about simple things people can do on-camera to be authoritative or authentic. For instance, he talks about how to hold your hands, what to do with your eyes, or how to hold your posture. After speaking, David would be mobbed by people asking about his course, so he decided to create one. As David developed his course, he discovered he knew so much more than he realized about his area of expertise. David created an inventory of all of the things he knew and that became the Camera Ready U curriculum. The same thing happened with voiceovers. David started by teaching commercials and ultimately created 36 different classes for VO2GoGo, covering not just the art of voiceover, but also the business and technology aspects. Listen to the show to discover how long David has been in the entertainment industry. Least Important Factors for Video Videos don't have to be perfect. Comb your hair, brush your teeth, put on makeup, wear your cool outfit, and whatever else you need to establish your base. After you do that, the key is not to be a better version of yourself, but your most authentic self with all of your flaws. That's what makes you human. Don't kick yourself if you flub a word or don't remember to turn your shoulder. People will connect with you when you're simply being yourself. And you can't be yourself when you're constantly trying to be that better version of yourself. The notion of perfection gets in the way of being real. Also, your equipment doesn't matter. If you want to get very artsy, you might need a more expensive camera. But you don't even need to buy a camera. You can start vlogging immediately with your smartphone. You may need to add a light, but you can simply set up a table lamp. Plus, you might want to get a $20 lavaliere microphone from Amazon. And that's it. You can do whatever you want with that minimal setup. Listen to the show to hear David and me discuss how people can hold themselves back with an "I can't until I..." mentality. Authenticity On-Camera Have you ever watched a video and thought, "This guy's a bag of wind" or "She's fake"? It's because they've spent too much time trying to present and too little time being themselves. The people viewers connect with most often are those who seem down to earth and genuinely interested in the subject. When you stop worrying about how you look and sound, you can start thinking about the content. And when you can focus on your content, viewers feel you're speaking to them. You make a connection. When you're completely interested, immersed, and can't wait to help people with their needs, your authenticity meter goes through the roof.

Facebook and Twitter User Behavior Changes: New Research

Facebook and Twitter User Behavior Changes: New Research

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your business on Facebook and Twitter? Have you considered sharing news with your audience? Research indicates that people are using Facebook and Twitter for more than connecting with friends and brands. They're now looking to these platforms for updates on current events. In this article you'll discover how the way people use Facebook and Twitter is shifting, and how brands can respond. Listen to this article: #1: More People Get Their News From Facebook and Twitter A July 2015 study from Pew Research Center reveals that increasing numbers of Twitter and Facebook users visit the platforms to get news. Of the over 2,000 study participants, 63% now depend on both channels for updates on national events and political issues, big leaps from 2013 numbers. Twitter, which was more news-oriented from the beginning, didn't have as dramatic a leap: 52% to 63% during the two-year period. Those reporting they use Facebook for news, on the other hand, grew from 47% in 2013 to 63% in 2015, or 16%. While the opportunity to stay abreast of friends and family events gets users on Facebook initially, it's news (sports, science, technology, business and entertainment) that keeps them there. As the chart below shows, Facebook's user numbers didn't budge from 2013 to 2014. Despite the inevitable slowdown, today 71% of Internet users have a Facebook account, and 70% of those go to the site daily. Forty-five percent go there several times a day. By following friends, brands, organizations and news outlets, Facebook (and Twitter) users have created their own customized newspapers. They seem to like their new handiwork. While Twitter's audience numbers made an impressive 28% leap from 2013 to 2014, the platform's failure to gain the ubiquity of Facebook has disappointed many. Twitter remains hard at work creating a niche for live-tweeting events, television shows and sports, but it hasn't shown much promise for the retailers who pay for ads. Key takeaway: As Facebook and Twitter mature, their audience growth rates are leveling off. Younger audiences abandoned Facebook for Instagram, but baby boomers, Gen Xers and mature holdouts finally claimed their profiles. Brands should align their marketing content with current events to engage users. #2: Twitter Is the Go-to Platform for Breaking News The Pew Research Center image at the beginning of this article reveals another interesting fact: Even though most Twitter users tweet just once or a few times a week (far less often than Facebook users engage), if there is a nationwide crisis, exciting sports game, gaffe by a politician or a celebrity scandal, they flock to Twitter. Numbers for those who report they follow breaking news on Twitter (59%) are nearly double those who say they do so on Facebook (31%). Twitter is the go-to destination for up-to-the-minute news and comments on that news. Twitter is also the channel where sports fans and news junkies engage by sharing their opinions. Users do more than just read the headlines, they engage. As the graphic above shows, more than half of users tweet at least once about news each week. Also, while the majority of accounts that Twitter users follow are friends and family, the majority of tweets in their news feeds come from news outlets and journalists. In the image below, you can see that while just 14% of the accounts Twitter users follow are news outlets, 33% of the tweets in their Twitter feed are from these outlets. Breaking it down further, the most popular news outlets are sports (with 35% of Twitter news followers receiving sports tweets), business/science/technology (14% getting news on these topics) and civic and political (12%). Keep in mind that in this study, the final sample providing Twitter data was small. Pew drew from its original group of 3,212 respondents only those who self-identified as Twitter users, provided their Twitter handles for analysis and had valid publi...

8 Twitter Tips to Improve Your Twitter Marketing

8 Twitter Tips to Improve Your Twitter Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your Twitter marketing working? Do you want more engagement for your tweets? Knowing how to write your tweets and when to publish them can increase visibility, boost engagement and drive traffic to your site. In this article you'll discover eight tips to deliver better tweets. Listen to this article: #1: Tweet Without Links Research shows that tweets without links get more engagement. Remember that not everything you tweet has to have a link. If you limit the number of links you share on Twitter, you'll add value to the ones you do. For example, I tweeted this same quote with and without a link. The one without the link got more engagement. Twitter is an excellent platform to build your brand and create trust, so spend time developing relationships with your followers rather than just sharing a lot of links. Plus, when you tweet fewer links, the people who trust you know whatever links you choose to share are likely worth clicking. #2: Use the Right Hashtags If you want to get noticed, add hashtags that give your tweets context. It's important not to overdo it with hashtags, however. Handy tools like Hashtagify and RiteTag can help you find the right hashtags to use. Find Hashtags With Hashtagify Hashtagify allows you to search for a hashtag you want to use. In the Search box, type in your hashtag (socialmedia, for example) and press Enter. The results let you see the most popular related hashtags. By default, you see the results in Basic Mode view, which looks like a mind map. Click the Table Mode button to see the related hashtags ranked in order of popularity. You can use any of these alternative hashtags or combine several of them for each tweet. Check Hashtag Relevance With RiteTag Once you determine what hashtags you want to use, use a tool like RiteTag to find out how relevant they are. Go to RiteTag and sign in with (and authorize) your Twitter account. Then click the New button at the top of the page. In the Compose New Tweet box, type in your tweet. You'll notice that when you add hashtags, RiteTag gives you a color-coded rating for each hashtag in real time. Green is good, blue is cool and red is overused. RiteTag also has a Chrome extension that shows the tool's codes and analytics for your tweets whenever you use Twitter, Buffer, Hootsuite or another platform to compose or schedule a tweet. Using Hashtagify and RiteTag together is a great way to find effective hashtags for your tweets to get the most visibility and reach. Use these tools to do research and then build a library of hashtags for your future tweets. #3: Add Images for Shared Links It's no surprise that tweets with images stand out and get more engagement than tweets without images. Fortunately, there are a variety of tools you can use to find the right images to use in your tweets. Twitshot is an online tool you can use in any browser that makes it easy to find images to use when you share links. It's also available as a Chrome extension and iOS app. Compose your tweet in the Twitshot tweet box and paste in the URL you want to share. Twitshot then searches for and lets you see all possible images that go with that link. Select one of the available images or upload your own image. Everyone knows that tweets with images stand out, but not everyone takes the time to add them. Consistently incorporating images will improve your engagement. #4: Tweet With the Proper Format To compose a tweet in the proper format, you need to have all of the individual elements in the correct order. Start your tweet with text and then add a link. Make sure to include the attribution with @mentions if applicable. Then add hashtags and insert your image. Now that you know the rules for composing a tweet, you can break them for effect. Come up with multiple ways to tweet the same information to add variety to your Twitter stream.

SEO and Website Image Optimization 10-Point Checklist for Marketers

SEO and Website Image Optimization 10-Point Checklist for Marketers


Content Marketing Institute

Follow this 10-point checklist to help your images win SEO favor – Content Marketing Institute

3 Social Media Engagement Techniques That Work

3 Social Media Engagement Techniques That Work

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Need some new social media marketing ideas? Looking for ways to jumpstart your engagement? Whether your goal is to spread awareness or grow your audience, better engagement is your key to success. In this article you'll discover three ways to improve engagement for your social media accounts. Listen to this article: #1: Personalize Your Approach Your audience is the greatest asset for your campaign. To run a successful social campaign with plenty of engagement, you have to know your audience and what they're likely to respond to and enjoy. To gain these insights, you'll need to do some research. Find out which social media channels the people you want to reach spend the most time on. Discover what topics they care about and what hashtags they use. Don't just listen to your audience, but communicate with them. When you show your fans that you're interested and you care, and they'll show you what makes them happy. Once you know what they're looking for, you can launch a social media campaign that they'll embrace. Many brands have leveraged Pinterest to run successful social campaigns, including Kotex's Woman's Inspiration Day. The company looked at the Pinterest boards for 50 inspiring women to see what interested them. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UVCoM4ao2Tw Kotex then brought their inspirations to life by creating handmade gifts and sending them to the women as virtual gifts. If the women then posted something about their virtual gift, they received a real gift from the company in the mail. Almost all of the 50 women responded, generating 2,284 interactions and 694,853 impressions on Pinterest. The campaign was a huge hit because Kotex was able to hyper-target a specific audience and what they want. This is just one of many examples of how you can use Pinterest to launch a successful social campaign. #2: Put the Product in Your Fan's Hands Remember the core goal of social media is to be social, so it's important to cultivate relationships with your fans and followers. This is an essential step to launching a successful social media campaign. Yes, your ultimate goal is to sell your product and your brand, but for the purposes of your social media campaign, take a step back on the selling and simply share. Don't force your product or your brand on your audience or they'll stop listening to you. Opt for subtlety instead. Give people a way to share your product in a fun and unique way and let your audience come to it. Ford's Fiestagram Instagram campaign created buzz for the release of their new Fiesta model by asking fans to post pictures that related to different campaign hashtags. Each hashtag was a buzzword describing one of the features of the new Fiesta car, such as #music, #entry, #hidden, etc. Ford then chose the best pictures for each hashtag and displayed them on digital billboards. They also awarded weekly prizes to fans who submitted photos for the campaign. More than 16,000 photos were submitted to the Fiestagram campaign and Ford gained 120,000 new fans on their social media pages. Lay's launched the clever Do Us a Flavor campaign on Facebook that asked fans and consumers to come up with a new flavor of potato chip for the company to create and sell. That year, nearly 4 million people submitted their flavor ideas via Facebook or text message. Once the finalists were chosen, Lay's asked fans to vote for the winning flavor on Facebook, receiving over 1 million votes. The prize for the winning flavor was $1 million (or 1% of sales for the chip flavor). The first campaign increased Lay's sales by 12% and was so successful at generating engagement for the brand that they continue to run it each year. If you offer your fans a chance to showcase their creativity and connect it to one of your products, you can establish a respectful relationship with your audience, linking their personal creations to your company. #3: Play the Tag Game

Selling With Story: How to Make Your Customer the Hero

Selling With Story: How to Make Your Customer the Hero

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you know what your customers really want? Want to discover how to share the solution they want and need in terms they understand? To explore how to connect with your customers through story, I interview Donald Miller. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Donald Miller, a story for business expert. He's CEO of StoryBrand, which helps businesses clarify messaging via workshops and consulting. Donald also hosts the Building a Story Brand podcast. Donald has helped more than 1,000 businesses improve their messaging. Donald explores how story is used to sell, and today you'll discover Donald's seven-part story framework. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Selling With Story Donald's Story Donald had a successful career writing memoirs. Before that, he ran a publishing company. Essentially, his business background got hijacked by his writing career. When he went back into business, he started a conference company. Although he sold millions of memoirs, not many people attended his conferences. Donald figured out the conference invitation was too vague. His message was not pointed, understandable, or accessible. It didn't hit a perceived need, so nobody could figure out why they should come. Donald needed to simplify his message so people would say, "I need that. I'm going to show up. I'm going to buy it." To do that, Donald created a framework based on the elements of story. Since he studied story to write books and screenplays for more than a decade, he knew story was the most powerful tool to compel the human brain. He took the seven most popular elements in every story, the seven things that happen in Tommy Boy, Star Wars, Bridget Jones's Diary, The Hunger Games, Moneyball, and The King's Speech, and put it all on a whiteboard. Donald discovered how to filter his marketing messages through this seven-part framework. Applying this framework, the conference grew from 350 people to 970 people to 1,200 people to 2,000, through word of mouth. People finally understood what he had to offer, Donald says. This evolved into StoryBrand. They let the conference company go because StoryBrand took off from there. Donald has worked with more than 2,000 companies, helping them clarify their message. They all struggle with the same thing. They don't know how to talk about what they do, since they're too close to it. Story is based on 2,000-year-old formulas that have been refined over time, Donald explains. And story is tested every week at the box office. Story, like music, is formulaic. The difference between music and noise is formula. Since story is such a powerful tool, Donald realized it's useful to clarify marketing messages. There's no benefit to a business getting its story out. Customers only care about their own stories. StoryBrand helps people understand the story that their customer is living and what role their business needs to play within that story. Listen to the show to discover which companies and people use story and get responses. Why Story Is Powerful Why is story so powerful? Donald says that's a question that people like Christopher Booker, Robert McKee, and Joseph Campbell have all tried to answer. Donald thinks story comes from within. People self-identify as the hero in a story that's trying to accomplish something and overcome challenges. People believe intuitively that some things come together that would create a climactic or obligatory scene that will resolve the conflict in their life. These are well-worn paths in the human subconscious.

Too Easy: Google Tag Manager and Google Analytics Experiments Boxes

by Chris Pearson @ The Thesis Statement

I’m happy to introduce two new Boxes for Thesis Professionals today: Google Tag Manager and Google Analytics Experiments. Both Google Tag Manager and Analytics Experiments require <script> placements that were difficult to access in versions of Thesis prior to 2.3, making an otherwise simple integration somewhat complicated. Not anymore. With Thesis 2.3+ and these new […]

Recent Social Media and Facebook Updates for September 7th

by Mike Gingerich @ Mike Gingerich | Add Value | Be Uncommon

There are some exciting changes from the past several weeks. I’ve collected the ones I think will impact your business the most. Facebook Facebook Blocks Ads that Repeatedly Share False News Facebook is on a mission to reduce hoaxes and false news. Now if Pages repeatedly share news that has been categorized as false by […]

The post Recent Social Media and Facebook Updates for September 7th appeared first on Mike Gingerich | Add Value | Be Uncommon.

Mobile Local Marketing: Reaching the Mobile Customer

Mobile Local Marketing: Reaching the Mobile Customer

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a local business? Want an effective way to market to people who are near you? To explore how to reach your customers with mobile marketing, I interview Rich Brooks. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Rich Brooks, author of The Lead Machine: The Small Business Guide to Digital Marketing. He's also host of The Agents of Change podcast and The Agents of Change Digital Marketing Conference. Rich explores how local businesses can use mobile marketing to deliver relevant messaging to their customers. You'll discover how to combine mobile marketing with social media. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Mobile Local Marketing The Importance of Mobile In 2017, every business should focus on mobile, Rich says, especially businesses with physical locations and a local audience. Mobile is important because people always have their devices by their side. For example, when Rich takes his daughter to volleyball practices in different towns, he uses Waze on his phone to get directions. Then after dropping her off, he goes to Yelp to find a coffeehouse or asks Google or Siri to find the nearest supermarket so he can go shopping. While he waits in line, Rich explores Facebook, Twitter, or Instagram; plays a game; or reads a news article. Because people are always on their phones, local businesses can attract customers who are looking for information on the go and making immediate decisions. If those people are in your area, you can capture their business with a strong mobile presence. Listen to the show for more about how potential customers use mobile. Mobile Offers and SMS Messages To engage people on mobile, Rich says you can create mobile offers, which are being redeemed at 10 times the rate of old print coupons. Mobile offers take many forms. You can run a Facebook campaign on mobile, promote an offer that's available on a mobile device, or tell people they can download a deal onto their phones and show it at the counter. Another option is SMS text messaging. Rich explains that SMS offers work a lot like email marketing. For example, a pizzeria can send people discounts. A massage therapist near Rich gives customers who opt into SMS text messages first dibs on appointment times that open up due to last-minute cancellations. To send SMS marketing messages, you start by finding an SMS marketing vendor in your area. These vendors work similarly to email marketing vendors, such as MailChimp, Constant Contact, AWeber, and smaller local players. Your vendor assigns you a short code and customers opt into your SMS messages by texting that code and confirming they want to receive your messages. Rich says a pizza restaurant might tell customers, "Text Pizza to 004400." After you're set up to send messages, you can start building your SMS marketing list. Rich emphasizes that people will sign up to receive messages only if you offer an incentive for signing up. For a pizza business, that incentive might be a dollar off, a free topping, or free delivery. Rich suggests promoting your SMS list on your social media profiles, website, flyers, and product packaging (such as pizza boxes). Rich says you can expect a smaller but more engaged audience for your SMS messages. Fewer people will opt in, but right now those who do are much more likely to look at their text messages immediately. Rich predicts that engagement with SMS messages may drop off if people become overwhelmed with text messages, but says that currently SMS is still fairly new and can be a boon to a local business.

Getting Started

Getting Started

by Marvin Russell @ How to Run a Successful SEO Company

Listen to how I got started as I give my personal experiences on how I launched my SEO company.

The post Getting Started appeared first on .

The Elite 8 SEO Leaders of 2014

by Marvin Russell @

I’d like to share with you who I think the most influential SEO people are in 2014. These are the people I follow and look...

The post The Elite 8 SEO Leaders of 2014 appeared first on .

Advanced Blogging: How to Make Your Blog Serve Your Business

Advanced Blogging: How to Make Your Blog Serve Your Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a blog? Want to supercharge your content and increase email subscribers? To explore advanced techniques for improving blog content, collecting more email addresses, and promoting products and events, I interview Darren Rowse. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Darren Rowse, one of the world's leading experts on blogging. He's the founder of two popular blogs: Digital Photography School and ProBlogger. He also co-authored the book ProBlogger and hosts the ProBlogger podcast. Darren shares how he learned to better serve the needs of his readers. You'll discover how Darren uses portal pages and what goes into creating them. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Advanced Blogging Determine What Type of Content to Create Darren started by writing what he was excited about in the moment, and he believes that's a great place for bloggers to start because their writing comes across as passionate. However, for bloggers to build expertise in a niche, he notes, they need to put more thought into it. Darren says there are two parts to achieving that outcome. First, you need to understand the people who read your blog and what their needs are. Ultimately, Darren's content ideas come from the conversations he has with readers; this determines what he writes about. Second, you should develop before and after avatars. The before avatar represents who his readers are when they come to the blog, and the after avatar represents who he wants his readers to become. Use your avatars to fill in what your readers need to move from the before avatar to the after avatar, he explains. For example, readers first come to the Digital Photography School blog because they don't know how to use their cameras to full potential. The "after" readers have full creative control of their cameras, along with the confidence, knowledge, and technical skills to get out of automatic mode and take their photography to the next level. Give them what they want and sell them what they need. For example, readers who come to Darren's blog to get photography tips realize they need more help when they return from vacation and discover their photos didn't reflect their journey. His ebook, A Guide to Captivating Travel Photography: Transcending Travel, delivers the things they didn't realize they didn't know, such as tips to help lift their photos. Darren used this exercise for the first time in 2006, and came up with 200 things his blog readers needed to know. Those notations became the first 200 posts on the site. Listen to the show to discover how Darren uses what he knows about what people need to collect email subscribers, attract Facebook fans, sell products, and more. Develop an Editorial Strategy Darren shares the nine different elements he and his team work through each year to figure out their editorial strategy. Voice: Is your content more conversational, teaching, or storytelling? Evergreen vs. Time-sensitive Content: What's the proper ratio? Darren's photography blog leans more toward evergreen, but he notes others may need to create more time-sensitive content. Intent: Is your aim to inform, inspire, educate, or interact? Darren's blogs focus on information and education, but mix in inspirational and interactive content here and there. As an example of content created to drive interaction, Darren says Digital Photography School does a challenge post each week in which they prompt readers to take photos using a specific technique and then share the photos in the comments.

6,595 Words on a Traffic Generation Tactic You’re Not Using (But Should Be)

by Glen @ ViperChill

I would argue that when it comes to making money online, the most important skill you need is not in being able to find untapped niches, knowing how to do A/B testing, creating attractive websites or even having a great ability to write. Instead, the most sought after skill in my eyes is being able […]

4 Ways to Improve Engagement With Hashtags

4 Ways to Improve Engagement With Hashtags

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you include hashtags in your social media posts? Want more traction from your hashtag campaigns? Adding hashtags to your campaigns can drive engagement with fans and followers, as well as attract new and prospective customers. In this article I'll share four ways to improve reach and engagement with hashtags. Why Hashtags Matter Since social media is social, it's important to participate in conversations on a variety of topics. Listen to this article: However, the virtual world does not give us body language cues, and it may be difficult to keep track of everything that's going on. This is especially important when it comes to interacting with hundreds or even thousands of people on social media. Instead of pleasant and engaging conversation, all you hear is noise. Hashtags help cut through all the noise. They connect your business with your audience and put it at the heart of conversations on social networks like Twitter, Instagram, Google+ and Facebook. #1: Align Hashtags With Your Brand Use a hashtag that aligns with your brand to reinforce the message your social, digital and traditional marketing send to your customers. Kit-Kat, the company behind the popular chocolate snack, does this particularly well. They use the hashtag #mybreak, which is in concert with their wider branding message, "Have a break, have a Kit-Kat." Kit-Kat's social media team reinforces the use of #mybreak. They favorite and retweet the social media posts of customers who use the hashtag. This engagement not only helps develop the relationship between Kit-Kat and their customers, but also more broadly extends the reach of the hashtag and Kit-Kat's branding. #2: Choose Hashtags Carefully In social media and in life, there's always the chance things won't work out exactly as planned. Your hashtag could possibly be hijacked, either by another brand or by activists with an axe to grind. Kit-Kat's #mybreak hashtag is unlikely to get hijacked. It's on-brand, and there's not a lot of online activism aimed at chocolate-wrapped wafers. When airline Qantas launched the hashtag #QantasLuxury, they hoped their business and first-class flyers would post about their dream luxury experience. Instead, the hashtag was hijacked by the far larger group of disgruntled Qantas passengers who fly economy class. Give each hashtag strong consideration before deploying it in a tweet or a post. Reflect with your team and colleagues, and ask advice from friends active on social networks about potential hashtags. While you can consider best-case scenarios (like Qantas envisioned), also be sure to consider potential worst-case situations. Choose a hashtag with the least risk of hijacking, so you can avoid a potential social media crisis. #3: Take Your Hashtag Offline Don't limit your business hashtags to only social media. It's important to use them as part of a wider branding strategy that includes offline and traditional media. For Coca-Cola’s 2015 Super Bowl campaign, the company launched the related hashtag #MakeItHappy. The hashtag populated the company's social media feeds on Facebook, Twitter, Instagram and YouTube. Plus, it appeared in television and print advertising, as well as in earned media online. Increase traction for your hashtag by using it away from your social networks. Small businesses can make it easy for their customers to share positive reviews and social comments about their experiences by encouraging the use of a hashtag. If you have a brick-and-mortar location, make sure your hashtag is displayed prominently near the point of sale, on your promotional flyers, print ads and every receipt. Online businesses should create clickable hashtags, encourage visitors to 'click to tweet' text including the hashtag and prominently display the hashtag on the company home page. Whether it's a physical or a digital business, the advice is the same.

How to Create a Facebook Video Ad That Moves People to Action

How to Create a Facebook Video Ad That Moves People to Action

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Facebook video ads for your business? Want to improve your conversions? Well-structured video ads command viewers' attention and prompt them to take action. In this article you'll discover five steps to crafting the perfect Facebook video ad. Listen to this article: Why Facebook Video Ads? Facebook's head of ad product Ted Zagat recently said that a year or two from now, Facebook will be mostly video. This is likely the reason why we're seeing so many great new features for video advertisers. When you create a new ad campaign in Power Editor, you can choose from a number of objectives for your video ads: Clicks to Website, Page Post Engagement, Video Views and Website Conversions. Facebook is continuously adding new options as well. For example, Facebook automatically creates custom audience lists of people who've viewed your video ad. Until recently, these lists would be created only if you chose Video Views as the campaign objective. But now, if you use another objective (Website Conversions, for example), these video engagement lists will also be created automatically. This means you can easily retarget these groups of people later, similarly to retargeting your website visitors. Writing a Video Ad Script To create a video ad, you have a lot of different options. Of course, you can use a recording of yourself (or hire someone to do it for you), but you don't have to. Using videos with animated text, images and music can be equally (if not more) effective. To create strong ads, it's important to get your targeting right, and communicate a powerful message. This article walks you through a framework you can use to create the perfect Facebook video ad script with only five lines of text. For each line, you have a specific goal: grab attention, build interest, elicit desire, create conviction or add a call to action. To guide you through this method, you'll follow the creation of an example video ad for a free recipe guide, with the goal of growing your email list. #1: Grab Attention How do you grab attention in today's attention-deficit world? Start with a question. You want to immediately focus on the main pain point or desire that your target audience is experiencing right now. What are your customers' biggest problems or struggles? What are they frustrated about? What are their biggest wishes? For this step, it's important to focus not only on the problem or desire, but also on how that makes people feel. When you do this correctly, you have what's called an audience-to-problem match. You want people to instantly recognize themselves and say, "Hey, that's me!" If they do, they'll likely be curious about what else you have to say. The ad above tackles a typical frustration that a lot of people can relate to: struggling to eat healthy. #2: Build Interest Once you've successfully captured your viewers' attention, you need a way to keep it so they'll watch the rest of your ad. In this second phase of the script, hint at your solution by creating an open loop. You want to paint a picture for viewers that it is indeed possible to get rid of that problem or struggle. At the same time, you don't want to reveal what the actual solution is. Only hint at it for now. This ad creates interest by using the words "new" and "easy." Can you see how this approach is creating an open loop in your viewers' minds? If they're still watching at this point, they'll likely want to know what that new and easy method is. #3: Cultivate Desire For this line of the script, create desire for your product or service. Describe your offer in a way that makes it sound amazing and like something viewers must have. To do this, focus on a specific benefit of your product, or how it's different from the alternatives out there. How-to and step-by-step guides are always popular because they help people solve specific issues.

6 New Facebook Features for Business: What Marketers Need to Know

6 New Facebook Features for Business: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you keeping up with Facebook's latest features? Would you like to know how to use them for your business? Some of the recent Facebook features could have a huge impact on your business, including whether fans see your posts, as well as how you attract leads, track conversions and more. In this article you'll discover how to use some of Facebook's newest features to promote your business. Listen to this article: #1: Encourage Your Fans to Use the See First Option Facebook now allows people to customize their news feed to prioritize updates from particular friends, groups and pages. This is great news for pages with good content, so fans can prioritize your posts. Educate your audience on how to select to see your posts first in their news feed. There are a couple of ways to access the See First option. The easiest way is to go directly to your Facebook page, click the Liked button and then select the See First option. Another option is to go to the full customization options (people, pages and groups) from desktop or mobile devices. To access it from a desktop, select the down arrow on the far right to get to News Feed Preferences. Next, navigate down to Pages. Then view the pages you've seen most recently and click the tab to list the pages in alphabetical order. Click the Following button to customize those you want to see first. This video will walk you through the desktop and mobile customization process. // Facebook News Feed Changes: How to Get Your Page More Visibility from Your FansDiscover how to use Facebook's new "See First" feature for desktop and mobile users... Posted by Social Media Examiner on Monday, July 13, 2015 When you have good content, people will want to see your Facebook business page posts in their news feed first. Tell fans how to add your page to their See First list, so you make sure they do. #2: Check Out Upgrades to Facebook Conversion Tracking If you're using website conversion ads or website retargeting, then you already know there are two types of pixels you place on your website to track these events and custom audiences. Facebook recently announced a new custom audience pixel that combines these features into one pixel, which will help with tracking and speed, so the stats are more accurate. Your current conversion pixels will continue to work, but eventually you should migrate to the new upgraded code. This involves placing the new code on your website, adding some code on specific pages you want to track and then removing the old pixels. Facebook's post explains the process and gives you the exact steps to change to the new custom audience pixel. This is still in the rollout phase. Toward the end of Jon Loomer’s post about the upgraded pixel, he explains how to determine if your account has the new pixel enabled. Ultimately the upgraded pixel will be good for marketers who are using custom audiences and conversion pixels with their Facebook ads, since it gives more accurate stats in reports. #3: Get a Facebook Beacon for Your Local Business The Facebook Beacon is a device you put in your local business that sends information to people who are on Facebook near you and have Bluetooth turned on. Send people a welcome message with a photo, recommendations from their friends who have visited the store, a prompt to check in and more. The Beacon device is free. All you need to do is request one from Facebook for your local page. It's an excellent way to increase the visibility of your local business to people who are using Facebook nearby. #4: Send and Receive Money on Facebook Earlier this year, Facebook started rolling out the ability to send money between friends through the Messenger app only to users in the United States. This service will rival Google Wallet and make it easier for people to make "in-app" purchases on Facebook in the future. In the meantime, if your friends are clients,

Is SEO Dying

Is SEO Dying

by Marvin Russell @ How to Run a Successful SEO Company

I put you at ease by tackling the question, Is SEO Dying? Don't worry, I have really good news!

The post Is SEO Dying appeared first on .

23 Tools and Tips for Social Media Marketers

23 Tools and Tips for Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you need to streamline your daily social media tasks? Looking for tools to increase visibility? The right apps can make a world of difference in the life of a busy social media marketer. In this article you’ll discover 23 of the top tools and tips shared on the Social Media Marketing podcast. Listen to this article: #1: BuzzSumo Chrome Extension The BuzzSumo Chrome extension shows you the share counts on any site you are on for all of the different social networks, including Twitter, which recently shut off the API that allowed third-party tools to collect Twitter counts on articles. If you want to track the number of shares a piece of content gets on Twitter, this plugin will reveal that data for you. There are a couple of other cool features that let you view which Twitter users shared a page you're tracking, the backlinks pointing to that page and other content from the page's author. You can also see some of the most shared content on that site and even analyze the website. The BuzzSumo Chrome extension is free but requires a free or paid BuzzSumo account. #2: Scannable by Evernote Scannable by Evernote lets you use your mobile device to take a picture of a document when you don't have a scanner. Pull up the app, hover the camera over anything (such as a piece of paper or a business card) and it automatically scans and crops it. Hold it over a business card, and like magic it scans the card without pushing any buttons. Afterward, it asks if you want to add the person as a contact. If your Evernote is connected with LinkedIn, it will create a contact and pull in their data from LinkedIn. Scannable is a free iOS app. #3: SumoRank SumoRank.com analyzes the rank and content of your Facebook page. For example, we tried it with the Social Media Examiner Facebook page. It told us our most popular post type, as well as our most popular day of the week and the most popular time to post. SumoRank shows monthly interactions and the average engagement per post type to give you a feel for whether video, link or image posts get more engagement. It even analyzes the engagement based on the number of characters inside the post, so you can determine whether short posts have higher engagement than longer posts. Plus, review your top posts over a period of time. SumoRank is a free tool. #4: Reverse Image Search on Google Have you ever seen an image on social media or on a blog and wonder where you've seen it before? Ever come across a saved image on your computer and want to know where you found it? Use Google's reverse image search to find out. Go to Images.Google.com, drag an image into the search box or paste in a URL for an image, and Google will show you other images that are exactly like or similar to that image. Easily find the origin of any image. Google reverse image search is a free resource. #5: Trello Trello is a project management system that integrates with Dropbox and Google Drive. The tool lets you create boards, cards with tasks on them to assign a deadline, lists and more. Plus, you can @tag people involved with the project. Each person assigned a particular task can leave comments, attach notes and drag in images. When Trello is open in your web browser or if you have the app on your mobile device, you immediately get an alert whenever you're tagged on something. Act on it immediately and you won't even receive an email. Trello is a free tool. #6: Reader View and Reader There are a few different ways to make it easier to read your favorite website on your desktop. Open Firefox's Reader View and click on what looks like an open book in the URL bar to remove graphics from a page's sidebar, and change the font size and the background color. Safari's Reader offers similar options. Either feature lets you quickly consume a long article without being distracted by things like animated ads and other chaos that you often see on ...

How to do an Instagram Giveaway

by Halley Belt @ ThriveHive

A great way for your small business to increase social media engagement, get more followers, and attract new customers is to run an Instagram contest or […]

The post How to do an Instagram Giveaway appeared first on ThriveHive.

How to Discover Social Media Insights About Your Competitors

How to Discover Social Media Insights About Your Competitors

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to raise the bar on your social media? Are you monitoring your competitors? Knowing what works for the competition helps improve your own social media marketing. In this article you'll discover six ways to reveal insights about your competitors' social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Analyze Your Competitor's Content Share Rates Ahrefs is a handy tool for SEO, but it has some excellent social metrics as well. If you want to look at more than just social sharing numbers, it has some stats that will give you a peek at how your competitors' content is performing socially. Open Ahrefs Content Explorer. Then type in your competitor's domain, and click Search. You'll see a spread of your competitor's content, along with a snapshot of share stats in table form. To drill down into the shares for specific pieces of content, click the down arrow located in the far-right cell. You can instantly see how the article is distributed on social media. This chart provides you with information about the sharing velocity of the content and the most popular platforms. You can access this information for every article ever published. This helps you understand how, why and when your competitor's content is getting distributed. Note: Ahrefs requires a trial sign-up or paid membership. #2: Find Out Who Shares Your Competitor's Content on Twitter It's crucial to know who loves your competition. If an audience loves your competitors, there's a good chance that they'll love you, too. Go to https://twitter.com/search-home and type in a competitor's Twitter handle and when you see the results, click Live to see Twitter users who are promoting your competitor's content. These people, for whatever reason, may follow your competitor on Twitter. They at least liked your competitor's content so much that they shared it. What should you do about it? You may want to reach out and follow these users yourself, share their content or favorite their tweets. Doing this will get you on their radar. #3: Identify Top Influencers Who Share Your Competitor's Content Every industry has those people who are actively sharing great content. Chances are, your competitors are benefitting from the social sharing of these individuals. How would you like to have these people sharing on your behalf? You can use BuzzSumo here, but if you don't have a paid account, you can carry this technique only so far. BuzzSumo imposes a daily limit on non-users, so you may have to wait a day to try this one out. (Or just buy an account; it's worth it.) Go ahead and enter a competitor's website so you can identify their top-shared content again. Now, click View Sharers. The list you'll see shows you who is sharing this content and why it's so popular. The information is roughly organized according to the top-ranked influencers. The people who are at the top are big on social media. They usually have lots of followers. If they have a website, you can also see that web address. One of the best features of this tool is the ability to filter results. Say you want to find only the social sharers who have a blog. No problem. Filter the results to show only bloggers. Now you can target the people who might be open to sharing your content on their blog, or who could be open to guest-posting opportunities. What should you do with this information on social influencers? Connect with them on their preferred social media network. Get to know them. Reach out to them and request retweets. Inquire about guest posting on their blog. #4: Discover Your Competitor's Most Popular Content What are the most popular articles your competitors are producing? What content has the most shares? Use a tool like BuzzSumo to find out. You don't need to sign up for an account to use the limited version. Enter the domain URL of the site your competitor uses to post content.

Google+ Marketing: Why Marketers Should Not Overlook Google+

Google+ Marketing: Why Marketers Should Not Overlook Google+

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you given up on Google+? Are you wondering whether it is worth managing yet another social network? To address some of the benefits and misconceptions of Google+ marketing, I interview Jesse Stay for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jesse Stay, author of several books including Google+ for Dummies and Google+ Marketing for Dummies. Jesse shares insights into Google's strategy and what this means for your business. You'll learn what's critical for a successful approach to your Google+ marketing and why Google+ may be essential to your business even if you don't think so now. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google+ for Marketers Here are some interesting Google+ stats: 250 million Google+ accounts, 150+ million active users, 50% sign on daily (Google I/O 2012 conference) 69.4% male (Google+ Social Statistics) Most Google+ users are mobile, not desktop users (The Google+ Developers Blog) Jesse explains why you cannot compare Google+ to Facebook and why he thinks Google+ is more comparable to Twitter. You'll learn why Google+ is more than a destination site. Find out how the Google+ platform is intended to be a layer on top of all other Google products and how Google+ is becoming integrated into the entire Google experience. Listen to the show to find out why Google+ is the glue that connects all Google products together socially. How Google+ can help you Jesse explains why you first need to look at your Googlestrategy to figure out how your business can use Google+ best.  For example, your Google+ marketing can help you to: Improve your search results in Google Bring social connections into your YouTube videos Add a CRM experience into Gmail and Google Calendar Build connections through Google Hangouts When you establish a presence on Google+, build relationships there and get endorsements on the content that you share through Google+, you increase your Google search ranking. Listen to the show to learn how your Google+ marketing improves your Google strategy. The future of Google+  Jesse talks about how Google has proven rumors wrong. Google+ recently released new capabilities for notifications on the Google+ platform. Plus Google+ also has a much stronger integration into Google Apps and you're now able to restrict conversations from sharing outside of the domain. This gives Google+ more privacy and makes it more friendly for business use. Google+ is continuing to grow and add more features. Jesse shares how Google+ can help you gain an edge in Google search engine results. He explains why there is no easier way to get better ranking in search at the moment than by building a Google+ presence. Learn how to give authority to the content that Google is indexing within Google  search results. Listen to the show to find out more about the future of Google+ and what this means to you and your business. Google+ marketing tools  At this time, most third-party social media tools do not integrate with the Google+ API. This can make it challenging for busy marketers to add yet another social media network to their marketing mix. Jesse says to have patience and anticipates they will be releasing APIs at some time. You'll hear about Webmaster Tools where you can find, for example, statistics to help you track how your content is affected within search results as a result of people liking it on Google+.

How to Easily Create Your Own Video Show

How to Easily Create Your Own Video Show

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for ways to position yourself as an industry expert? Have you considered using video to increase your visibility? Using video to give your own take on news and stories that are relevant to your industry can help you build influence with peers, prospects, and customers. In this article, you'll discover how to use video to deliver value to your followers on social media. Listen to this article: #1: Gather Relevant News and Stories With the proliferation of news aggregation tools, you can easily select, filter, and digest stories, videos, and content from around the world. To collect curated content, use a news reader like Feedly (available in desktop and app versions) and add the relevant industries, brands, and blogs you want to follow. For example, if you're in the tech industry, you can add Wired, Engadget, and TechCrunch to your feed list. Once you set up your feed and find a great article on your topic, simply save it, share it, or bookmark it for later use. Additionally, you can create knowledge boards in Feedly that allow you to compile (and later share) the information in a single location. Now it's time to sort the stories you've curated. Think about your target audience when you pick out interesting articles, blogs, videos, and stories, and choose five stories that will be most meaningful to your audience. For example, if you're a small business, curate a list of the best entrepreneurial stories of the month. #2: Record Your Thoughts on Each Story in a Single Video Now it's time to record your thoughts on video. At this point, you're curating the news-gathering phase for others and telling your audience why certain content is more important than other content. For this reason, it's important to have the rationale ready for why you made each decision. Be ready to explain to your audience why each story is relevant and different. Much has been written about staging and how to create great video content. But in this case, the type of video you're creating is highly personal, so staging isn't essential. The simple webcam position is enough, and helps make your audience feel they're in a chat with you. Keep in mind that poor lighting or sound will raise red flags for viewers, so leave some time for testing and retesting your look. The actual sound bites can be as short as 30 to 45 seconds, and should explain, retell, or give an opinion on the specific piece of content you're discussing. Be ready to share a quick overview of what happened or why the story is relevant. Then, give your take on the matter. Record five short snippets (one for each story) on your webcam or phone and then send them to your favorite editing software like YouTube. If you're a novice to video editing, check out these simple video editing techniques. In building the actual video, how well you incorporate music, graphics, and images in your video will affect the quality. Regardless, even five quick audio clips of you talking can get your audience's attention. #3: Share Your Video Multiple Times Once you've completed the video, the next step is to create a post to share each relevant headline on your social channels, and include your video. By following best practices on social sharing, you should be able to use a trending hashtag to find like-minded consumers. You can also head over to Google Trends. From there you can map, chart, and study search patterns both globally and regionally. Make notes of the stories that generate a lot of activity, as well as any hashtags associated with those stories. When you share content from a written article, give the journalist or blogger who wrote the piece a shout-out. For example, tag them in a Facebook post, mention them in a tweet, and tag them in a LinkedIn update. This can encourage that person to share your take on the piece. From there, you should tweet influential people who have voiced their opinion on one of the stor...

6 Tips to Grow Your Pinterest Marketing Results

6 Tips to Grow Your Pinterest Marketing Results

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your Pinterest account working for you? Want to take your Pinterest marketing to the next level? Tailoring your profile, boards and pins to appeal to your target audience will grow your followers and increase engagement. In this article you'll discover six ways to improve your Pinterest marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Optimize Your Page The best way to convince visitors to follow you is to optimize your Pinterest page. Here are some key areas to focus on. Profile For the business name, use your company's name or your name (if it's for your personal brand). Upload a relevant profile image, such as your company logo or an image with your company's name. You want to make it easy for people to recognize your brand page. If it's a personal page, add a photo of you smiling or laughing. Match your username with your business name. If the username is already taken or is too long, choose something similar to it or use an abbreviation. Write a convincing bio. In 160 characters, describe your business and let people know about the types of images and content you share on your Pinterest page. Add your town or city and other location details. This will help you attract local followers. Add your website and social media details. Don't forget to add your website and Twitter account. This information will be displayed right below your profile image. Add your Facebook account only if it's a personal page. (You don't have the option to add a Facebook business page yet.) Boards Make sure that your page has at least 10 boards. Place your most important or popular boards in the top row. That way they're displayed above the fold, and people will see them immediately when they visit your brand page. Optimize your boards by adding good board names, descriptions and cover images. Shake Up Learning's Pinterest boards have relevant cover images that contain the name of the board and their logo. For your cover image, you can use an existing pin from the board or create a unique image, pin it and choose it as the board's cover image. In the image you can include the name of the board and a call to action asking people to check out the board or follow it. Another option is to use a technique similar to pricing tables, where one option (usually the most popular) has a unique color so it stands out. To apply this tactic to your boards, use similar cover images for all of your boards but choose a unique image for your most popular board (or the one you want to drive followers to). Also create a few secret boards so you can save images to pin publicly later on. #2: Design Content to Support Goals Before you can determine what to pin, think about your goals. They might be to drive engagement and build an audience or to drive traffic. Most businesses choose a primary goal (such as driving traffic) and a secondary goal that complements the primary goal (like gaining more followers). Once you choose your goals, you can determine what to pin by reviewing your Pinterest analytics. To access this data, click the gear icon and choose Analytics from the drop-down menu. Your analytics page has three sections: Your Pinterest Profile, Your Audience and Activity from [Your Website]. In the Your Pinterest Profile section, find out how your pins are performing. Your pins are categorized depending on the impressions, clicks, repins and likes they've received. Depending on your goal, choose the category you want to view. If you want to drive engagement, for example, look for pins that have been repinned and liked most. If you want to drive more traffic, take a look at clicks. Scroll down the page to see your most popular boards. You can also adjust the date to see how your pins have performed during longer or shorter time periods. Next, visit the Your Audience section to look at your followers' demographics and interests. Browse the Demographics tab to look at the coun...

How to Use Social Media Insights to Improve Your Marketing

How to Use Social Media Insights to Improve Your Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you marketing on Twitter, Facebook or Pinterest? Do you know which type of posts your followers prefer? Social media analytics let you see who your followers are and what they like. In this article you'll discover how to use your audience insights from Twitter, Facebook and Pinterest to improve your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Track Follower Preferences on Twitter Twitter provides a free analytics dashboard with key statistics about your account. You can measure your success in a variety of ways, ranging from the number of new followers to your most popular tweets. You can access the Twitter analytics dashboard here. After you log into your account, you'll see a 28-day summary of your profile. The summary shows the number of times you've tweeted, tweet impressions, followers and profile visits. Next to each number is an up or down arrow, representing the change over the previous period. The right side of the screen shows a summary of your analytics for the current month. If you scroll down, you can see summaries from previous months so you can compare and track your progress. What do you do with this information? Start tracking it from month to month. Create a table and list the number of followers you have at the end of the month. Then measure the monthly and overall percentage increases or decreases from the first column or month you started. If you want to see more detailed analytics for your profile, click on View All Tweet Activity. The page that appears shows a helpful and informative graph that lets you see the number of impressions that your tweets have earned over the last 28 days. On the right side of the page is an overview of your engagement rate, link clicks, retweets, favorites and replies. The 28-day range is the default setting, but you can change it to a more specific or broader range of dates. Make your selection from the drop-down menu on the right side of the page. Below the main graph on this page is a breakdown of all of your tweets within the selected date range. From here, you can see the number of impressions and engagements and the engagement rate for each tweet. Click on View Tweet Activity to see more information for a specific tweet. The report details how many people engaged with the tweet and the number of impressions. It also shows how many people clicked on your profile, favorited the tweet or retweeted it. Why is this information beneficial? Because it lets you see what content is working (what your audience likes) and what isn't. This helps you refine your content strategy to post about topics that your followers care about. #2: Discover Fan Insights on Facebook Facebook offers its own version of analytics called Facebook Insights (available after your page has received 30 likes). Use this information to make improvements to your content and determine the best times to post. To access these metrics, click Insights at the top of the page. From here, you can click these tabs to view a variety of analytics. Overview The Overview section provides the most important analytics. It lists page likes, post reach (the number of people who have seen impressions of a post) and engagement (the percentage of people who saw a post and liked, clicked, commented on or shared it). Scroll down the page to see your five most recent posts. For each post, view metrics on reach, engagement (broken down into post clicks, likes, comments and shares) and if applicable, how much money you spent promoting the post. Likes In the Likes section, you'll see a graph showcasing your page's growth in terms of audience. You can change the date range to see the total page likes for a certain range of dates or a particular date. For the time period you selected, you can also see net likes, which is the number of new likes minus unlikes and paid likes.

How to Get Started on Blab: Group Video Broadcasting for Marketers

How to Get Started on Blab: Group Video Broadcasting for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you a fan of live-streaming video for business? Have you tried Blab? Blab, the newest platform in streaming video, lets you build a personal and business presence while creating community. In this article I'll explore Blab and share ways you can use it for business. Listen to this article: About Blab Blab.im, which is currently available on desktop and iOS (Android is coming soon), is a live-streaming video platform that lets you host your own live video show or conference with up to four people engaging at the same time. The moderator has control over who is in the three additional video seats, but anyone who wants to tune in can use the right panel to chat and the left panel to tweet. Blab's ease of use, simplicity and functionality give it the edge over other live-streaming platforms. For instance, Meerkat, Periscope and Facebook Mentions are mobile-only and are mostly just you talking to your audience. Plus, if you want to interview someone, he or she needs to be right next to you. And while you can include up to 10 people on a Google hangout, the session feels more like an interview and doesn't provide the same sense of engagement as a blab. Another plus is that Blab's time length is open-ended and most blabs last about an hour. According to Shaan Puri, CEO of Blab, most people using the platform spend at least an hour "blabbing" each day. Blab is more than just a new toy. It's a substantial method of connecting, and others are getting as excited about it as I am! #1: Get Started on Blab Use the same account for Blab as you do for Twitter. Just log in and you're ready to go. If you want to change your bio or notifications, click on your photo and select Settings. Once on the platform, follow people to receive notifications about their blabs. Finding people to follow is simple: do a search by name or look anyone up by adding their Twitter handle after blab.im/. To start a new blab, click the purple button next to your profile picture. Then give your blab a title and choose up to three tags (keywords). Next, set up your blab to go live immediately or schedule it for the future. Record Your Blab If you're the moderator, you can choose to record the blab. Within a minute of the end of the show, you'll receive two links to an mp3 or mp4 with the recording. After you receive those links, you can upload your recorded blab as a video to YouTube or as a podcast on Libsyn, iTunes or your preferred host. Additionally, all of the blabs you record are archived for access on your profile under Replay. While archived blabs can be replayed at any time, viewers cannot chat, send feels or follow people during a replay. Promote Your Blab If you go live, you can tweet a link to let people know about your blab. Promote your scheduled blabs the same way you would promote any event. Create a custom graphic, email your network, schedule a Facebook event, tweet it out and share on all of your social networks. Moderate Your Blab When there's an empty seat, someone can request to join in. When the moderator approves, the new person enters the video chat. Blab is similar to a late-night talk show format. There's a host and a primary special guest. When another guest comes on, the previous guest can slide over a seat and stick around. #2: Use Blab Chat Commands There are a few unique commands enabled in the chat column on the right of Blab's layout. To ask a question, type "/Q", and the word Question appears in a grey box so it stands out. To change the topic of the blab, the moderator can type "/Topic". For a bit of fun, you can add interest to your chat comments by typing "/shrug" or "/tableflip" in the chat box. I'm not aware of other commands, but it wouldn't surprise me if the Blab development team has more Easter eggs hidden. #3: Give Kudos to Blabbers Instead of hearts, like those used on Periscope,

100 SEO Tips and Tweetable Quotes from Rand Fishkin

by Marvin Russell @

I’ve compiled a list of the best SEO quotes and tips from Rand Fishkin. If you’re an SEO professional and don’t know Rand, you should:...

The post 100 SEO Tips and Tweetable Quotes from Rand Fishkin appeared first on .

How to Use Facebook Lead Ads

How to Use Facebook Lead Ads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you run lead generation campaigns? Are you familiar with Facebook Lead Ads? By autofilling lead generation forms with user details, Facebook's lead ads make it easier for people to sign up and receive your offer. In this article you'll discover how to create lead ads on Facebook. Listen to this article: Why Lead Ads? Facebook has made the process of generating leads on the platform much easier. With the new Lead Generation objective, you can ask customers and prospects for their information, and they can provide it without ever having to leave Facebook. Here's how lead ads work. Show your ad to users, and if they're interested, they'll click the call to action to bring up a form prefilled with their personal information that they've shared with the network. They can then review the information, edit it if needed and click Submit. The autofill forms make the signup process as easy as possible. And the less people have to do, the higher the probability they'll convert. If you need more information from users than Facebook can provide, you can ask for it by customizing the form. Keep in mind that Facebook has only released the Lead Generation objective to some advertisers. If you don't have it yet, don't fret. You should get it soon. #1: Create a Lead Ad Right now, you can only create and edit lead ads within Power Editor. If you haven't used Power Editor before, it's a great tool for creating and managing Facebook ads. Once you download your ads account to Power Editor, click the Create Campaign button in the top left. From there, type in a name for your ad and click the Objective drop-down menu. If you have access to the Lead Generation objective, you'll see menu options similar to the following image. Select the Lead Generation objective and then continue the ad creation process as you normally would. When you get down to the ad level, you'll see the following Lead Form section. Click Create New Form to create your first lead generation form (and every form for that matter). Next, type a name for your form in the text box and click Next. Now choose the details that you want to collect from customers and prospects. You can also add custom questions that you want to ask, such as "Are you a customer?" When you're finished adding your questions, click Next. Add a link to your privacy policy (yes, you do need one) and click Next. Now enter your website address. Customers will have the option to click through to it after they submit the form. Then click Next. Review your form, and if everything looks okay, click Create Form. After you've created all of your ads, give them a final check for typos and errors, and then upload your ad account via Power Editor. #2: Download Your Leads Accessing your leads is a manual process for now. Facebook does not yet provide an option to import your leads automatically to a tool like MailChimp or AWeber. (Hopefully this functionality will come soon.) To get your leads, go to the Facebook page that's connected to your ads and click the Publishing Tools tab at the top. From there, click Forms Library on the left side of the screen. Keep in mind that you need to have admin access to view forms. On the right, you'll see all of the forms that you've created. Click the Download link next to your form to download your leads in CSV format. The column fields are pretty self-explanatory. Columns A through F give you details about the ad, campaign, when the lead was captured and which form it was. After that, you'll see the information that you requested from users. You can upload this data to your client management tool or pass it along to your sales team to contact the leads. Lead Ad Tips Here are a few tips for creating lead ads: Tell Users What You Want Them to Do When it comes to advertising, sometimes you have to tell people what to do. "Go here." "Click this.

Top Brands Rediscovering YouTube: New Research

Top Brands Rediscovering YouTube: New Research

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is video part of your marketing mix? Wondering if YouTube is still relevant? In the past year YouTube has enjoyed a sudden surge of interest from both advertisers and young consumers, largely fueled by mobile-device use. In this article you'll discover recent findings on how brands, consumers and marketers are using YouTube today. Listen to this article: #1: YouTube Video-Viewing Time Is Surging A spring 2015 study from comScore and UBS (as reported in eMarketer) found that U.S. consumers increased their video-viewing time on YouTube by 17% over 2014. For a platform that's 10 years old, that's quite a leap. The chart below shows that the biggest year-over-year gain came from mobile users, who increased time spent on YouTube's app by 31%. With desktop-viewing hours declining 30% in 2014 and 9% in 2015, clearly YouTube captured the mobile opportunity. Google's own numbers also indicate a surge even greater than what was noted in the comScore/UBS report. In the search giant's Q2 July 2015 earnings call, CFO Ruth Porat reported that consumer watch time on YouTube had risen 60% from July 2014. That's the fastest growth YouTube has experienced in two years. Porat also shared that mobile watch time alone had doubled. In the above chart Facebook's video usage increase of 852% in 2014 may impress, but remember that it started from almost nothing, so the multiple will be large. The bottom line remains that total time spent viewing video via YouTube amounts to 34 billion hours in 2015. On the other hand, time spent consuming video via Facebook (at 14.3 billion hours) is less than half of YouTube's amount. Still, viewing video on Facebook only began rising in fall 2014, and there could be far greater upside as more consumers pick up the habit of viewing video via Facebook. The article Facebook to Overtake YouTube: Five New Research Findings covers how in a 2014 survey of 180,000 videos across 20,000 Facebook pages, Socialbakers found that direct video uploads to Facebook were increasing rapidly. More content going up means more viewing time will result. Key Takeaway: Because the biggest leap in viewer time spent on YouTube is from mobile devices, you have to credit the user-centric upgrades that YouTube made to its mobile app over the last two years. The authors of the eMarketer study YouTube Advertising: Why Google's Platform Will Stay on Top explain that the new mobile app redesign delivers only the most relevant and personalized content. Further, YouTube instituted TrueView ads that allow users to skip ads at the beginning of videos within seconds. With the power to skip away from the ads, users feel more in control of the experience. #2: Ad Revenue Is Expected to Keep Rising With viewers rediscovering YouTube as a worthwhile channel to spend time on, it only makes sense that advertisers have followed them there. A Look at the Numbers The YouTube advertising study from eMarketer also predicts the platform will remain the top digital video player until 2017 and most likely beyond, despite Facebook's incursion into video. YouTube is expected to earn $1.55 billion in advertising revenue in 2015, and that number should rise to $2 billion by 2017, according to the study's authors. This is still less than the approximately $4 billion Facebook made in ad revenue just in Q2 2015 (extrapolated to a potential $16 billion per year). But given the competition YouTube will encounter from Facebook and others, analysts are impressed with the $2 billion number. In early 2015, digital video advertising agency Mixpo surveyed 125 U.S. agency, brand and publisher executives about plans to use video advertising on Facebook, Twitter, YouTube and more. In 2014, 63% of the respondents ran video ads on Facebook, while 77.8% ran them on YouTube. In 2015, these executives shifted their plans. Eighty-seven percent were planning to run a video ad on Facebook in the coming year,

Tesla Themes Are Now Compatible With WordPress.com

by Scott Wyden Kivowitz @ TeslaThemes

It’s true. WordPress.com now offers the ability to add third-party themes and plugins. But only for customers on their Business Plan. If you are already running on WordPress.com or considering the move, then upgrading to their Business Plan makes the platform more like a true WordPress Managed Hosting company. Except without any access to FTP. […]

The post Tesla Themes Are Now Compatible With WordPress.com appeared first on TeslaThemes.

SEO for Beginners: How to Optimize Your Content for Search

SEO for Beginners: How to Optimize Your Content for Search


AddThis Academy

Get our SEO tips for beginners and learn how to increase traffic to your website by optimizing your content for search.

13 Instagram Marketing Tips From the Experts

13 Instagram Marketing Tips From the Experts

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to improve your Instagram marketing? Are you interested in the latest tips and tools for Instagram? Instagram is a fast-growing platform and businesses are eager to establish a presence and encourage engagement on the network. We asked social media experts to share their hottest Instagram tips. Here’s what they had to say. Listen to this article: #1: Shoot Square Your Instagram feed is only as good as your photographs, so starting with high-quality photos makes your Instagram marketing more effective. One of the best ways to save time and compose better photos for Instagram is to shoot square photos. Many digital cameras and smartphones have this in their settings so it’s really easy to do. This lets you save time on cropping and ensures that the essential elements in the photo won't be cropped out later. Because shooting photos inside the Instagram app can be limiting, I like to use Camera Awesome by the SmugMug team on my iPhone (also available for Android users). Using this app, you can take fantastic photos using the grid to follow the rule of thirds. Peg Fitzpatrick is a speaker, social media strategist and co-author of The Art of Social Media. #2: Use a Customized Link Shortener to Track Traffic One of the most important things marketers need to know is how well their Instagram account is driving traffic and leads back to their website. Unfortunately, Google Analytics can’t accurately track this traffic when users visit your website from your mobile Instagram account. To monitor accurate click rates, I recommend businesses use a customized bit.ly link (or a link from another shortener) exclusively for the URL in their Instagram bio. Then you can check your bit.ly data to document how many clicks your Instagram account is actually sending to your website. Create a different bit.ly link each time you change the link for a new landing page, campaign or default page to continuously track successful traffic leads. Jenn Herman is a social media trainer, blogger and Instagram advocate. #3: Be Strategic With Your Bio Link For personal use, Instagram is fun and spontaneous. But if you want to use it as a marketing tool, you have to be a little more calculating with it. I suspect the businesses that are really killing it on Instagram (like Nordstrom, Starbucks, Nike and others) plan their posts well in advance. If you’re a smaller brand or a one-man show, you can still develop a great presence on Instagram. Use the link in your bio to connect to a landing page that holds the same posts you put on Instagram, and allows you to collect leads, promote your ecommerce site, gain subscribers to your blog, collect entries for a giveaway, etc. Jim Belosic is the CEO of ShortStack. #4: Cross-Promote Your Partners Cross-promote whenever you can! The trend on Instagram now is to share the love, so to speak, by tagging others or even by outright promoting other companies, products and services. Locally we have restaurants that serve beer from the many craft brewers in the area. Both the brewers and the restaurants take full advantage of Instagram by tagging each other. The brewers also support one another with tap takeovers, which are rich grounds for Instagram photos and tags. The results are threefold: higher recognition for everyone involved, increased followers (who in turn tag the businesses during visits) and increased traffic and sales for the local businesses. Lisa Karl is a partner and founder at Savvy Digital Business. #5: Take Advantage of Trending Hashtags Users can now use Instagram's Explore feature to find posts related to trending hashtags such as #LoveWins, #CanadaDay and #FullMoon. If these trending tags are relevant to your brand, include them in timely posts to aid discovery. On the topic of search, Instagram also introduced the ability to search by emoji.

Live Video: Tips and Techniques for Creating Great Content

Live Video: Tips and Techniques for Creating Great Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you broadcast live video? Want to learn how to create an engaged following? To discover what he's learned from broadcasting over 1,000 live streams over the last two years, I interview Alex Khan. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Alex Khan, the founder of Attractive Media, a German social media agency that helps businesses with live video. You can find him online at alexkhan.tv. Alex shares his formula for beginning and ending live video. You'll discover how Alex makes his live videos look more professional. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Live Video Alex's Story Alex started his first website in the late 1990s, back when email open rates were incredibly high. In 2005, he became managing director of Attractive People, a social network. In that role, Alex discovered what builds trust and how people behave on social networks. In 2012, Alex founded Germany's first mobile marketplace for fashion, which another company later acquired. Alex continued working behind the scenes in social media until 2015, when Twitter acquired Periscope for $100 million. After a company acquired his own app, Alex says he was curious about what a $100 million app could do. In March 2015 on the first day Periscope became available, Alex downloaded it and it immediately blew him away. Alex knew that driving engagement builds trust and increased visibility; however, creating engaging content was (and is) a challenge. Periscope helped Alex solve the engagement challenge because he could start a one-to-many conversation from anywhere at any time. Alex says it's still fascinating that you can reach so many people for free. In the beginning, Alex directed his live videos with his employee as the Periscope star. They created fun content such as jumping in a pool, which had nothing to do with Alex's area of expertise. After a few weeks, Alex's business partners shared their concern that this fun content wasn't professional, especially because Alex was COO of the company. Alex agreed that their point was valid, so he decided to change his subject matter. With 10 years of experience in social media, Alex knew people would have questions about how to use this new platform. He decided to use his expertise to help people understand how to build their audience with live video. I ask Alex to share a snapshot of his audience today. Alex says that in only two years, he's built his audience from nothing to 230,000 followers and 55 million hearts on Periscope. Through cross-promotion, Alex has attracted a total of 400,000 followers on social media. To build that audience, Alex says his experience working in social media, building companies, and training people gave him the necessary expertise, but live video technology was also a critical gateway. Listen to the show to learn about Alex's first live broadcast on Periscope. Advice for Going Live Alex says that even after doing more than 1,000 Periscope broadcasts, he still gets nervous. For Alex, three questions spin around in his head when he thinks about going live: "Who are the people watching me? Will they like me? What will I tell them?" Alex has found that his viewers are regular people who are early live video adopters and curious about what he has to say. When you provide something that's valuable, Alex believes people will like you. He says the key is to educate, inspire, or entertain viewers. As far as what to tell viewers, Alex believes people watching live video are always interested in five topics:

Facebook Video for Marketers: Strategy for Future Success

Facebook Video for Marketers: Strategy for Future Success

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create videos for your business? Wondering how to best leverage your videos on Facebook? To explore Facebook video strategy, I interview Jay Baer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Jay Baer, a digital marketing and social media strategist. He authored Hug Your Haters, a book about social care, and also hosts the Social Pros Podcast and the Jay Today show. Jay discusses the differences between video on Facebook and YouTube. You'll discover the tech and tools Jay uses to produce his own videos. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Video for Marketers Facebook Versus YouTube Jay says a lot of people do very well with YouTube videos, and just as many do well with Facebook videos. However, not too many people do equally well with both because each platform has a specific use case. People watch YouTube as a replacement for television entertainment or they're searching for how-to videos. On Facebook, videos appear in the news feed and can interrupt people while they're on the platform. At Convince & Convert, Jay says they advise clients to think about what the video is and under what circumstances people will want to watch it. Based on that assessment, choose one of the platforms as the primary home for the video. I mention how views of The Last Jedi trailer on Facebook far surpassed views on YouTube within the first 30 minutes of its release. Jay responds by noting a few factors that might have contributed to that difference at that particular point in time. One is that Facebook allows users to share content with others easily. Also, Facebook defines a "view" differently than YouTube. Although we both suspect most viewers of The Last Jedi are watching the whole trailer, marketers should remember that Facebook counts 3 seconds as a view, whereas YouTube requires 30 seconds. Also, a video on Facebook may receive substantially more views immediately after it's posted but the YouTube video may receive more views in the long run, especially on a strong YouTube channel. To clarify how The Last Jedi example pertains to the everyday marketer, Jay stresses that Facebook drives exposure based on engagement. So if you put a video on Facebook and a disproportionate number of people like, comment, and share, then a disproportionate number of people will see the video in their feed. This visibility gives even more Facebook users an opportunity to share the video with somebody else, and the cycle continues. Jay sees this ripple effect every time he posts a video on Facebook. If he gets immediate engagement, then more people see it. If he doesn't, users' engagement with the video will plateau. Next we talk about streaming live video to Facebook versus YouTube. For vlogging, Jay says that you could use both Facebook and YouTube. Jay does something like this with his Jay Today show. He streams the live video first on his personal Facebook profile and posts the video file elsewhere afterward. Jay explains that Facebook's API prevents you from live-streaming anywhere else while you're streaming to Facebook Live. To stream to Facebook Live, Periscope, and YouTube Live simultaneously, you would need multiple phones or computers. That limitation is one reason Jay goes to Facebook Live first; he can't be anywhere else. He also notes that on YouTube (for now at least), you need to have 1,000 or more subscribers to stream live video from a mobile device. So YouTube's live video feature isn't as widely accessible as Facebook's. Listen to the show to hear Jay discuss his approach t...

Blog Growth: How to Build a Mega-Following

Blog Growth: How to Build a Mega-Following

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to attract a bigger audience to your blog? Are you wondering how you can write content that will generate more comments, shares and subscribers? To learn how to grow a successful blog, I interview Syed Balkhi for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Syed Balkhi, founder of multiple popular websites, including WPBeginner and List25. He's also the founder of OptinMonster. Syed shares how he grew his very popular sites and provides actionable tips that you can employ to grow your own blog traffic. You'll learn about the different types of content that work best and some profitable choices for monetization. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Blog Growth The idea for WPBeginner Back in 2009, Syed did consulting work for small businesses, with a lot of the work retainer-based. To free up some time, he decided to switch his clients to WordPress, which would give them the ability to change their own text and not have to contact him directly. Once this change happened, Syed was still approached with the same questions about WordPress. At the time there was no other WordPress resource site out there for beginners. So WPBeginner was formed on July 4, 2009. Syed explains how his goal in the beginning was to produce multiple posts a day and answer all of the questions that he was asked. The idea was to put the answers on the website so he could link back to them, rather than send an email. When he noticed that other people were using the site, he knew there was definitely a market for it. You'll hear how Syed used Twitter to help with content creation and why he used Digg and StumbleUpon to push articles. Listen to the show to find out why it was Syed's goal to help individuals, rather than have hugely popular articles. WPBeginner's site metrics Syed states that WPBeginner gets an average of 1.5 million page views a month and they have just over 70,000 followers on Twitter. Listen to the show to find out how these figures are similar to Social Media Examiner's. The lessons learned about content creation From the very beginning, Syed built an email list, but he didn't engage with it. At first, he didn't realize the value of asking people to ask you questions. Now when you subscribe to WPBeginner, it asks you one question: "What is the one thing we can help you with right now?" You'll discover why there is huge value in this one question and how this has changed the way WPBeginner creates content. Syed used to be the only person who wrote articles, but the site now has multiple writers with a very good editorial workflow. Listen to the show to hear how the interaction and response to email has developed the WPBeginner community. WPBeginner's business model Syed explains that his business is monetized through building WordPress applications and plugins. A lot of the time, it's conversion marketing for clients. The WPBeginner brand allows them to position themselves as experts. Whenever somebody wants a WordPress company to work with, they automatically think of WPBeginner. You'll hear how they use affiliate links for paid plugins. In the beginning, Syed tried display advertising. He had ads through AdSense, BuySellAds and private ad sales. You'll find out why these ads didn't work for the WPBeginner audience and how affiliate deals make more sense. Listen to the show to find out why we use DoubleClick for Publishers at Social Media Exam...

How to Craft Instagram Posts That Drive Sales

How to Craft Instagram Posts That Drive Sales

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Instagram to promote your products and services? Interested in ways to drive sales with your posts? A good Instagram post is not as simple as just snapping a photo, applying a filter and posting it to your news feed. To have a real impact, your posts need to be carefully crafted and shared with purpose and intent. In this article you'll discover how to create Instagram posts that increase engagement and drive sales. Listen to this article: #1: Design Images to Capture Attention If you're posting a photo of a product on Instagram, be creative with the shot and make sure it reflects well on the product. Find an Interesting Angle Think about whether you should show the entire product, frame the shot a certain way or include another item to accompany the product. Warby Parker posts creative photos of their eyewear on Instagram, often garnering more than 2,000 likes per post. Even with a simple pair of glasses, there are hundreds of ways to capture it in a photo. Once you find the most effective angle for your products, stick with that approach and be consistent. Don't forget that your Instagram posts are also part of your brand. Focus on Lighting Whether photos are taken indoors or outdoors, good lighting is crucial. This may seem like Photography 101, but lighting also tells a story about your product. Even with careful tweaking and tuning, Instagram's editing tools often can't fix a photo taken with poor lighting. Think about whether your photo should be shown in color or in black and white, and how to portray it best. Prada posts a variety of photos taken in unique lighting. Their exceptional professional shots speak specifically to their brand. Use a Filter Instagram realized early on that much of the app's value and appeal was in its filters. Each filter has a unique story that it communicates. While there is some evidence that photos with no filters perform best, filters may be necessary to achieve a coherent look for your brand. The novelty of the #nofilter hashtag excites some users, but artistically edited photos contribute to the purpose of your posts. Does the X-Pro II filter or Valencia filter present your product in a refreshing or edgy way? There is an array of filters at your disposal to communicate a particular mood for your brand and products. #2: Tell a Story With the Caption You can give life to a photo with the caption. Nike's caption here is evocative and tells a story instead of merely describing the product. It's important to identify what type of description resonates best with your audience. In Nike's case, this photo represents the culmination of training for the Chicago Marathon. #3: Add Relevant Hashtags Hashtags make your photos discoverable. Use popular hashtags when they apply to your photo or your brand. It's best to stick with three to five hashtags at a time. You don't want to overload your photo with too many hashtags because that can be viewed as desperation. Also be cautious about piggybacking on current trending hashtags. Some brands create their own relevant hashtags, such as Tiffany & Co.’s #TiffanyLeather or #TiffanyAtlas, strategically crossed with more purpose-driven popular tags. Create a Hashtag Campaign Regramming user-generated content is one of the best ways to promote your community and products. Create a brand-centric hashtag campaign for your followers to use. Stitch Fix asks their fashion-forward followers to showcase their styling choices with the hashtag #StitchFixFriday. This hashtag not only fosters a sense of community, but also reaffirms who your audience is. Remember that engagement is a two-way street. Follow and pay attention to your followers, and like the posts that are strategically and aesthetically aligned with your brand. #4: Use a Call to Action Consider adding a call to action to your post, which prompts customers or shoppers to do something.

Facebook Live: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Live: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Have you heard of Facebook Live video? Do you want to use Facebook Live for business? Facebook Live lets you connect with your fans, friends and followers by sharing real-time video of what you’re seeing and doing. In this article you'll discover how to broadcast with Facebook Live and use Live video in your marketing. What Is Facebook Live? Facebook has steadily been releasing Live over the last several months. It came out in August 2015 for verified public figures through the iOS Mentions app. Early in December, Live became available to select people on their personal profiles and then to all verified Facebook pages later in the month. Listen to this article: Facebook originally introduced Live to only an elite group of users for two primary reasons: to control the demand on the bandwidth and to hopefully set a higher standard for the videos streamed so there's less "noise" in the news feed. Facebook is controlling the reach of Live broadcasts through the news feed ranking algorithm, as with all organic posts. In the coming months Live will roll out to more Facebook profiles and pages, and will become available on Android. Live is currently available to some iPhone users only. Even if you don't yet have access, you can start planning your Facebook Live strategy or use some of these tactics on the numerous other live-streaming services such as Blab, Google+ Hangouts, Periscope and Meerkat. Regardless of whether you have or plan to use live streaming, you can still upload videos regularly to Facebook. #1: Broadcast With Facebook Live You can broadcast Facebook Live through your profile or through the Mentions app. To broadcast through your profile, tap to update your status and click the Live icon. Next, write a quick description in the status update (this is your title). The description is what will go out in the news feed and in notifications. Just like with your other personal status updates, you may also want to choose the audience before going live. Select friends only, a specific friends list or public. Then tap Go Live. You can point the camera at yourself or outward to capture your surroundings. During the broadcast, you'll see the number of live viewers, which friends are tuning in and comments in real time. While people are watching you, invite those viewers to tap the Subscribe button. This way, they'll get notified the next time you're live. After you end your live broadcast, it will be saved on your timeline like any other video you upload. If you don't already have the Follower option enabled on your personal profile, I recommend enabling it. Doing so will allow you to reach a much wider audience, as anyone on Facebook can choose to follow your public updates. To enable the Follow feature, go to your settings and click Followers in the left column. Then, next to Who Can Follow Me, select Everybody. Now, any of your friends or followers can subscribe and see when you go live. Keep in mind, if your previous post was public and you wish to share your next post with friends only, you'll need to select that option. Note: To broadcast through the Mentions app, the process is similar. Open the app, tap the Post icon and then tap Live Video. The only difference is you don't select an audience, since everything you post is public on a business page. #2: Improve Your Video Facebook recommends several best practices for Facebook Live. In addition, here are several of my own recommendations: Have a focus for your broadcast. Know what you plan to talk about ahead of time so you don't have a rambling discussion about nothing. Knowing what you plan to talk about and doing it well will do wonders for your reputation. Create a compelling title. It goes without saying that you should relate the title to the focus of your broadcast. When people get a notification that you're live, the title is the only thing they see when deciding whether they...

8 Collaboration Tools to Improve Your Content

8 Collaboration Tools to Improve Your Content

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you part of a team that collaborates on content? Want tools to make the collaboration process more efficient? Whether you're working on blog post or creating social media updates, the more people involved, the richer the results can be. Using collaboration tools makes the process smooth and seamless. In this article I'll share eight collaboration tools to improve your productivity. Listen to this article: #1: Map Out Content Using MindMeister MindMeister is an effective brain-mapping tool that allows you to visually break down complex concepts and show how each idea flows into another. It's perhaps the fastest, easiest way to get a point across effectively. MindMeister is browser-based and available on mobile apps. There are a variety of templates and numerous additional features for brainstorming, project plans and more. Map out your content strategy with your team, no matter where they're located. Price: Free plan gives you access to three maps. Note: MindMeister collaboration features are included in the free plan. There are multiple premium plan options, starting at $36 for 6 months with a 30-day free trial. #2: Brainstorm in Real Time With Scribblar Scribblar is an educational tool that can also be used for collaborative brainstorming sessions. Primarily an educational tool, Scribblar is a favorite among students and teachers for its ability to create multiple "rooms" that allow you to collaborate in real time. Plus, you can text and audio chat during the process. While there is an obvious academic tone, Scribblar is a great tool for creative people who excel when they let their ideas flow in a free-form conversation. When working on your content plan, eliminate endless emails and conference calls. Just jump onto Scribblar and work on the same dashboard together. Price: A very limited free plan (2 users, 1 room) and a variety of premium plans that start at $9 a month are available. Note: Chatwoo can be a good free alternative. It's online chat room software which is completely free. You can use it to collaborate with your team (on a private corporate site) or with your site visitors. #3: Compile Research on Cyfe Cyfe is a multi-purpose research and productivity dashboard that lets you collect data, create to-do lists, archive search results and more. It helps you monitor social media mentions and activity too. For companies that need a bit more oomph in their collaborative tools, Cyfe provides a long feature list to help users work together in the cloud. Price: There's a free plan with the option to upgrade to premium ($19 per month; $14 a month if paid annually). #4: Plan Editorial on GatherContent Specifically designed for collaborating, GatherContent is every social media manager's and blog editor's dream. It allows you to create an effective project or editorial calendar that has everything in the same place, and is organized through the same dashboard. This ultra-organized information keeps everyone on the team on the same page. GatherContent is easy to use and minimizes the task of managing workflow, no matter how many people you invite to be a part of the process. Never cross wires or miss deadlines again. Price: $79 per month with a 30-day free trial. Note: Check out CoSchedule as another option. #5: Manage Projects on Trello If you need a simple way to set tasks for everyone on your team, Trello is probably the best project management tool for this purpose. Once you have a plan, create boards and then pin cards with tasks to each one. Then, write either checklists or standard text instructions for what each task entails, and assign those cards to different team members. When the work is done, attach documents to the completed card if you like and list it as complete. Also, @tag team members to quickly get their attention and connect with them. Price: Free. Note: Also check out Wrike for easy project management.

4 Mistakes I Learned About Marketing and Data While Working at a Fortune 50 Company

by Today's Industry Insider @ The Kissmetrics Marketing Blog

For the past nearly 3 years, I’ve been in charge of Audience Development for one of the largest media companies in the US. I learned a LOT during that time. Even more important, I learned a lot about what NOT to do. Not all of these things were personal ‘mistakes’ per se. Some were top […]

The Beginner’s Guide to Mobile SEO

by Jessica Kandler @

It’s pretty clear that every year mobile devices become more and more critical to people’s lives. But, many websites still aren’t optimized for mobile, and...

The post The Beginner’s Guide to Mobile SEO appeared first on .

How to Grow Your SEO Company – A Video Chat w/ Rand Fishkin

by Marvin Russell @

Last week I jumped on Skype to have a video chat with the Wizard of Moz, Rand Fishkin. But we didn’t talk typical SEO strategies,...

The post How to Grow Your SEO Company – A Video Chat w/ Rand Fishkin appeared first on .

How to Drive Traffic to Your Blog Posts: A Game Plan for the Top Social Networks

How to Drive Traffic to Your Blog Posts: A Game Plan for the Top Social Networks

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to drive more traffic to your blog? Looking for ways to use social media to promote it? Understanding how to best share your blog posts on many social networks will maximize your visibility and reach. In this article you'll discover how to promote your blog articles on Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Instagram and Pinterest. Listen to this article: #1: Spread the Word on Facebook There are multiple ways to share your blog articles on your Facebook personal and business pages. Update Your Status With a Link When you first post about your blog on social media, the easiest thing to do is to share a link. But rather than simply restate the title in the update, lead into it with a question, a statistic or a bit of interesting information to tease what's in the article so people will want to read it. Create and Share Photos Image posts stand out on social channels. Facebook allows you to share one or multiple photos with a status update to your business page. (You can only share a photo or a photo album on your personal page.) Start with an engaging photo that's representative of your article, with or without the post's title. If there are multiple photos in your article or if it's a how-to or tour of your products, upload the photos as an album, or even better, a photo carousel. For clarity, it's better to upload larger photos rather than smaller ones, especially given how many people view social media via mobile. Facebook will resize the photos to fit. Here's a comprehensive list of social media image sizes. Remember to include the article link and a headline when you post photo updates. Upload a Video If you have a video embedded in your blog post, upload a snippet as native Facebook video to promote the post. The more active and engaging the video clip, the more attention it will draw in the news feed. Include an update and the article title, as well as the Watch More call to action. Then add your article link, which will show up at the end of the video. If you're feeling adventurous and you don't have a clip to share, create a short video telling people what they'll find when they read your article. Write a Note Facebook notes stand out in the news feed and will draw attention to your article. Notes recently got a makeover, and now look similar to blog posts. But rather than repost your article in its entirety, upload an image and write an intro to the article. Then add a clickable link to the end of your note calling readers to read more. #2: Tell Your Followers on Twitter Adding media to your tweets helps you stand out on Twitter. Tweet a Link As with a Facebook status update, it's easy to share a link to your article on Twitter. The tweet doesn't need to be the title, but it can be, since links don't populate unless the user clicks View Summary. Be sure to add appropriate hashtags and @mention the guest author if appropriate. Again, get creative with your tweets so people will want to read more. Share an Image Upload an image when you tweet your article. The image can have the title in a text overlay, be representative of the content or both. Remember to add the link to the article at the end of your tweet. A link takes up 23 of your 140 characters, and an image takes up 24 characters. Upload a Video (or GIF) to Your Tweet Upload a short video or GIF to call attention to your article in the Twitter feed. The maximum length of a Twitter video is 30 seconds so if your video is a little longer than that, you can shorten it after you upload it to Twitter. Remember to add the link to the article at the end of your video or GIF tweet. #3: Let Your LinkedIn Networks Know There are three ways to share articles on LinkedIn: with an update, a photo or a LinkedIn Publisher post. Update Your Status With a Link Include your article's link in your status update.

Generating Leads With LinkedIn: What You Need to Know

Generating Leads With LinkedIn: What You Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use LinkedIn for business? Are you wondering how you can use LinkedIn to generate quality leads? To learn how to use LinkedIn to attract leads and build networking relationships, I interview Stephanie Sammons for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Stephanie Sammons, who blogs at Build Online Influence and is the CEO of Wired Advisor—a firm that helps those in the financial industry. She also writes exclusively about LinkedIn for Social Media Examiner. Stephanie shares her LinkedIn knowledge, tips and experiences when it comes to social networking for your company. You'll learn about the tools and techniques that will help you attract leads and connect with business professionals. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: LinkedIn for Business Why LinkedIn is so important for business professionals seeking leads Stephanie explains how most people think of Facebook as a personal web, whereas LinkedIn is a professional web. LinkedIn is the largest professional network for working people. It doesn't matter if you're an employee or a business owner, a freelancer or a marketer within a company. People typically visit LinkedIn with a purpose to make connections, gain insights about their industry and anything that can help them get smarter. They also use LinkedIn to network. In Stephanie's mind, it's the purest form of business networking online. Listen to the show to find out how LinkedIn has evolved from just being a place to look for a job. LinkedIn tools to help generate leads You'll discover that it's not just about the awesome tools and features that LinkedIn has, it's also about how you use them. Stephanie recommends having a relationship mentality when on LinkedIn and to position yourself as a thought leader. Look where you are building influence with your network and niche. It's the right thing to do when it comes to attracting leads and people for your business. The smarter you are about marketing, the less people realize you are marketing to them. Your main goal is to aim to be consistently visible and valuable. Studies have shown that it takes someone 7 exposures to you before they really start to pay attention, listen and determine whether it makes sense to take the next step. Stephanie looks at LinkedIn as an opportunity to position herself as a resource within her niche using the various tools. For example, LinkedIn Today is a great way to quickly find content that is relevant to your target market and be able to share it on LinkedIn. You'll find out the benefits of using these rich status updates to stay top of mind. It's really important to keep your LinkedIn profile up-to-date. The more people see you on LinkedIn, the more they are likely to come and check out your profile to learn more about you. And if that person is relevant and potentially interested in your business, they may click through to your blog or website and take the relationship from there. Another great LinkedIn tool to consider is Groups. If you spend time in group discussions, you have the opportunity to connect with mutual group members whom you might not necessarily know. As you get to know some of the members in the group, you can send them an invitation to connect with you. Stephanie goes into greater detail about how many LinkedIn Groups you can join and how adding value to the conversation can lead to potential clients and customers.

SEO optimization services – SEO services Serbia

SEO optimization services – SEO services Serbia


PopArt Studio

SEO optimisation for websites - SEO optimization services for Google. SEO analysis of your current site, competition and planning to improve your online image.

How to Drive Website Traffic With Instagram

How to Drive Website Traffic With Instagram

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Instagram to market your business? Want to direct followers to your website? With a few simple tactics, you can generate quality website traffic from Instagram. In this article you'll discover how to use Instagram to drive traffic to your website. Listen to this article: #1: Add a Website Link to Your Bio The most common way to lead Instagram followers to your website is to use the "link in bio" tactic. Instagram lets you include one clickable link in your bio, so make sure you use it effectively. To add a link, go to Edit Profile and type it in the Website text box. In Birchbox's Instagram bio below, their link directs followers to a customer appreciation day promotion on the company's website. With the tool Have2Have.it, you can use your bio link to direct followers to a page with the same look and feel as your Instagram feed, where they can click images to purchase your products or read your content. The New York Times has a Have2Have.it link in their Instagram bio. When followers click the link, they're taken to a curated page with the top stories of the day. Users can click on an image to see the story behind it. With an analytics dashboard, you can gain key insights to see what content performs best. Focus on high-performing posts to form a content strategy. By tracking clicks on Instagram, you can increase revenue and subscribers to online content (such as blog posts), newsletters or email campaigns. Of course, you'll want to track your click-through rate, so use a shortened Bitly link or vanity URL to know where your clicks are coming from. Overall, you can use this tactic for any links including an ecommerce website, YouTube channel or company blog. To take it a step further, create an Instagram landing page that captures email addresses through downloadable content like an ebook. The landing page design should mirror the look of your Instagram feed so there's a visual connection for the user. #2: Place a Call to Action on Images Design Instagram photos that convert. You can layer a call to action and your website URL directly onto an aesthetically pleasing photo. In Canva's post below, the image has a call to action asking followers to enter a contest for a year of free access. The photo caption then directs users to click the link in Canva's bio. This technique is beneficial for Instagram contests where you ask your followers to enter their email information on your website. Now, you have a strong piece of shareable branded content that drives followers to your contest. #3: Include a URL in Videos Instagram video brings digital storytelling to life. In fact, videos on Instagram generate three times more inbound links than image posts, so it's definitely worthwhile to invest in a 15-second narrative. Brands like Dollar Shave Club use video in innovative ways to spice up their Instagram feed. Their videos work similarly to a television commercial. Dollar Shave Club's videos include the URL in a text overlay and a voiceover ("Shave with a fresh blade anytime; try Dollar Shave Club.com") that further drives Instagram followers to their website. The videos are quick, fun and engaging, making viewers want to learn more. #4: Invest in Instagram Ads Instagram recently announced it was opening its API to all companies and brands. By investing in the platform, you can target the right audience demographic through people's interests. With an ad spend alongside your Instagram strategy, you're likely to see an increase in website visits and ecommerce conversions. Clickable links in Instagram ads give you an opportunity not only to be creative, but also let your followers learn more about your digital campaigns or attribute direct revenue from Instagram. There are three types of sponsored Instagram ads: image, video and carousel. Image ads are single photos that tell a story with their imagery.

How to Easily Analyze the Social Activities of Your Competitors

How to Easily Analyze the Social Activities of Your Competitors

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to freshen up your social media marketing? Have you thought about looking at other accounts for inspiration? Checking out what other companies are doing on social media can help you brainstorm your own content tactics. In this article you'll discover how to analyze your competitors' social accounts to inspire new marketing ideas. Listen to this article: Why Look at the Competition? Researching your competitors on social media not only provides an overview of your industry, but it also gives you insight into the current habits of the audiences you're targeting. By answering a few key questions, you'll see what kinds of posts are effective for the people you want to reach. #1: Analyze Facebook Pages If you want to gain insight into a company's Facebook page, here are some questions to consider: How many followers do they have? What are they posting about? Are their posts mostly internal (company-based) news, blog posts and articles; mostly external news, blog posts and articles; or a mix of both? What's their brand voice? How often do they post? How many likes/comments/shares do they get per post? Do they run any polls, contests or fun games with their brand? The Facebook page for Powell’s Books, a famous independent bookstore, is worth checking out as inspiration if you're a local business hoping to make a national footprint. One of the first things you'll notice is that Powell's takes the time to create their own graphics, which often include quotes from authors. It's a great twist on a sharable meme for a bookstore. They post photos of customers at individual stores and events, so you can assume their staff participates in social sharing (a great idea for local businesses). They also share interactive posts and comment on national conversation topics to keep the feed relevant to non-local fans. Interestingly, one of the biggest buzz-generators for Powell's Facebook page is when they share posts on books and publishing from other media, such as The New Yorker. Remember that sometimes social media successes can come from other sources. Key takeaway: A brick-and-mortar brand can serve both local and national audiences with the right mix of photos and interactive content. #2: Look at Twitter Accounts If you're analyzing a company's Twitter account, here are some questions to answer to gain insight into their activities: How many followers do they have? How many accounts are they following? A good rule of thumb: An account with 50,000 followers that's following 500 users probably has more influence than an account with 50,000 followers that's following 49,000 users, unless they bought followers. What do they tweet about? Are they mostly mirroring their Facebook content, or is their content unique to the channel? Are their posts mostly internal, external or a mix of both? How many favorites/replies/retweets do they average per post? Does one engagement stand out over the others? Have they created lists? What hashtags do they use? Do they run any Twitter chats? Do they use Twitter cards for lead generation, email signups, etc.? If you look at the Twitter account for Moz, you'll notice that they use a photo in almost every Twitter post. Their photos all follow the brand's style and color scheme, and they've created a template for their Twitter images to accompany guest posts. Brand-wise, it's interesting that the "owner" of the Moz account is a robot named Roger. Choosing an on-brand character to run social accounts is a way the Moz brand stands out as playful in the generally more serious SEO industry. Key takeaway: Templates and a social media character can help a large brand stay consistent in social, even if multiple people are behind the account. #3: Examine Instagram Accounts Answer these questions to evaluate a company's Instagram account: How many followers do they have?

How 16 Companies are Dominating the World’s Google Search Results

by Glen @ ViperChill

In the Academy Award-nominated film Food Inc, filmmaker Robert Kenner reveals how the varied choice of items we see on the shelves of supermarkets is actually a false presumption. Instead, that seemingly endless variety is actually controlled by just a handful of companies. Today I’m going to reveal how the huge diversity we perceive in […]

9 Google Analytics Tips to Improve Your Marketing

9 Google Analytics Tips to Improve Your Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Google Analytics? Are you leveraging the many apps that work with Google Analytics? Integrating data from third-party tools, plugins and platforms with Google Analytics helps you gain insight about your online marketing efforts. In this article I'll share nine tips to help you get more out of Google Analytics. Listen to this article: You can also subscribe via RSS, Stitcher and iTunes. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. #1: Add Google Analytics to WordPress You can easily add Google Analytics to your self-hosted WordPress website using the Google Analytics by Yoast plugin. The plugin lets you configure advanced features such as tracking outbound clicks, downloads and internal links that redirect to external websites; for example, affiliate links you create using your own domain (yourdomain.com/affiliate/product). You can also use it to ignore traffic from admins and other users, track search results pages and 404 pages. Yoast's premium version offers more advanced features, such as tracking views per author, views per post type and other specific dimensions. #2: Integrate All Analytics Platforms If you want to combine Google Analytics data with additional analytics tools and platforms to gain insights about your traffic, try Segment. The platform allows you to manage data from over 100 different advertising, analytics, developer, marketing, sales, support and user testing platforms in one place. Simply install one piece of tracking code on your website, and the rest of the tracking codes from any platforms you choose are managed by Segment. Segment offers a free plan for using Google Analytics with 20 other specific platforms. Premium plans for more platform integrations start at $29 per month, based on the integrations you need. #3: Visualize Google Analytics Data It's possible to view and compare data from multiple websites at the same time in Google Analytics with a tool like Cyfe. Use Cyfe dashboards to show an overview of all of your websites' pageviews, sessions and users, then analyze the data to identify bigger trends in: Conversions, traffic sources, bounce rate and location of users Traffic from search engines and social networks Real-time traffic, including users, location of users, traffic sources and content they're currently viewing You can even use it to create dashboards with a detailed view of your websites' real-time traffic, including users, location of users, traffic sources and content they're currently viewing. With a premium upgrade, you can create unlimited dashboards and widgets from over 50 advertising, analytics, blogging, email, sales, SEO, social media and support platforms for only $19 per month. #4: Learn About Email Marketing Traffic Want to link your email marketing efforts to the traffic in Google Analytics? Email marketing platforms such as MailChimp, GetResponse, Constant Contact and Vertical Response allow you to track traffic from links in your emails to your email campaigns. For example, MailChimp lets you check one box to add UTM parameters to links when you create an email campaign so you can view traffic from those links inside Google Analytics. You can also set up Google Analytics tracking for your automation emails and campaign archive pages. #5: Link Social and Website Engagement If you use social media management tools like Buffer, Hootsuite and Oktopost to publish and schedule updates to your top social media networks, you'll benefit from linking them to Google Analytics. Link Hootsuite and you get an overview report with your Google Analytics data along with the social updates you published through Hootsuite. One custom report is included with the $9.99 per month pro plan. With Buffer, you can customize the UTM parameters you use to track custom campaigns within Google Analytics so they match the updates you publish through Buffer.

Is Blogging Dead? Building Your Content Home on Rented Land

Is Blogging Dead? Building Your Content Home on Rented Land

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Wondering what the future is for blogs? Is blogging dead? To discover what the future holds for blogging, I interview Mitch Joel and Mark Schaefer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Mitch Joel and Mark Schaefer. Mitch is the president of Mirum, author of CTRL ALT Delete, host of the Six Pixels of Separation podcast and a blogger at TwistImage.com. Mark Schaefer is a marketing consultant, author of The Content Code, co-host of The Marketing Companion podcast and a blogger at businessesGROW.com. Mitch and Mark discuss the premise that blogging as we know it is dead. You'll explore the future of publishing your content on social networks and beyond. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: The Future of Blogging Blogging's evolution Mitch recalls that when blogging first came to be, there wasn't much else. Technology didn't empower us to do things like shoot and post videos immediately, stream online or do podcasts. Back then, even sharing images was pretty difficult. He shares that for him, blogging started to evolve when social media platforms for smaller forms of text-based publishing turned up, like Twitter. Then images and video became easier to publish and share. Mitch says things became very different with Twitter and Facebook status updates. The updates gave people who were writing long-form articles the ability to publish stream of consciousness–style instead. He talks about how this change created a space for platforms like Huffington Post to progress and become more popular with people who wanted to write. While Mitch still looks at his blog as a place for a writer to write, he says it's no longer the primary place for his content. He talks about putting content in places such as Medium, LinkedIn Publisher, Facebook Notes and Harvard Business Review where it might find different audiences. He explains why he'd rather publish directly on these other sites and use them as his distribution platform. Mark thinks blogging will be dead when reading is dead and that there will always be a place for long-form content. He explains why things like podcasts and streaming video are taking some readership away and how smartphones play into that. Mark says that Mitch is onto something in saying what's changing most drastically is not what we're doing, but where. He points out that there are cataclysmic changes in how content is published and consumed and offers the example of Facebook Notes, which encourages people to blog on Facebook. Mark talks about the difference in publishing on Facebook, LinkedIn or other platforms and says the magnet for inbound leads isn't on your website anymore. When discussing the question of what is and isn't a blog, Mitch shares why he's moving away from using that terminology and using words such as article, writer or journalist instead. It's semantics, Mark says, and shares an insight from Tom Webster, his partner on the Marketing Companion podcast. Tom works for Edison Research where they study podcasting a lot. One of the things they found was that people don't know what the word podcast means. Listen to the show to discover what Mark says will happen with storytelling and content marketing in a few years. Building on "rented" land Mitch says it used to be that publishing on social networks was like building your house on rented land, and explains why he doesn't believe it's that way anymore. He shares that it's no longer a sense of rented versus owned; it's a combination that creates a holistic platform.

The 7 Best Content Types for Lead Generation

by Jessica Kandler @

Today, consumers spend an average of 79 days conducting online research before buying. This means SEO, web design, and digital marketing agencies need a content...

The post The 7 Best Content Types for Lead Generation appeared first on .

6 Video Tools to Ignite Your Social Marketing

6 Video Tools to Ignite Your Social Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to bring more pop to your social media marketing? Looking for video tools to help? The right tools make it easy to create engaging video content. In this article, you'll discover six tools to create and improve your social media videos. Listen to this article: #1: Animoto to Create Video Compilations Animoto allows you to create professional-quality videos with pictures and video clips. There are both free and paid versions of Animoto. Pricing plans range from $8 a month for personal use to $34 a month for businesses. Here's how to get started with Animoto. First, sign up for a free account. You can create your free account with your Facebook profile or with your email address. Then click the Create button to start your Animoto project. Next, choose a style to customize the look and feel of your video. Click on the style template preview to see what your video would look like with that style. Now you're ready to add photos, video clips, and music. Animoto accepts photo and video uploads from your computer, smartphone, or other sources including Facebook, Dropbox, and Photobucket. You can add your own song or select one from Animoto's music catalog. Tracks available include instrumentals and songs. Now you'll want to personalize your video in Settings. Be sure to add a custom thumbnail, video title, and description for your video. All of this information helps with search engine optimization. When you're finished, you can preview your work. Click the Preview Video button to see what your video looks like. If you want to make changes, close this window and make any required edits. Finally, you're ready to produce your video. To do this, click Produce. Expert Tip: If you decide to choose music from another source (such as SoundCloud or YouTube), ensure you have full rights. You may be breaching copyright laws if you don't fully check the music ownership and third-party sharing rights. #2: Legend to Build Custom GIFs GIFs are images with movement. While there are apps that offer premade GIFs, consider customizing your own. This personalizes your brand and allows you to create unique content. Legend is a smartphone app that allows you to create GIFs by combining text, flash, and images. You can download Legend from Google Play or the App Store. Here's how to use Legend to create your own branded GIFs. First, type your text. You have 100 characters to work with. Next, choose a photo. You can take a photo using the camera on your phone, choose a photo from your photo library, or select a photo from Flickr. Now it's time to select your animation style. There are 18 variations to choose from, six on each screen. When you choose your color palette, it changes the color of your photo and your text. Then tap GIF to convert your work into a GIF and tap More to save it to your camera roll. You can share your animated GIF on Instagram, WhatsApp, or in a text message from the Legend app. You can also share it directly from the app to other social networks if you've already downloaded the apps to your smartphone. Expert Tip: Make Legend GIFs in bulk and save them to your camera roll to share later. #3: Relay for Snapchat Video Geofilters Relay is a graphic design and publishing tool for people who aren't graphic designers. You can use Relay to design your own customized Snapchat geofilters, which you overlay on your videos. Geofilters act as a personal branding tactic for your Snapchat stories, which lead to greater engagement. Relay provides a Snapchat geofilter template layout of 1080 x 1920 pixels. You can sign up for a free Relay account and try out a demo for 14 days. For pro features, it will cost you $12 per month or $96 per year. Paying for the whole year up front gives you four months free. Here's how to create a custom geofilter for Snapchat using Relay. After you create a Relay account,

Flex Skin Gets Big Videos and More in Version 1.3

by Chris Pearson @ The Thesis Statement

Now featuring big video support on the Front Page template, the Flex Skin is ready to help you deliver a rich multimedia experience for your visitors. This new video support is a nice complement to the big image + action button that has made Flex so popular since we first introduced it. Other significant enhancements […]

How to Use Facebook Notes for Marketing

How to Use Facebook Notes for Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to publish longer posts on Facebook? Have you tried Facebook Notes? Facebook Notes now lets profile owners add a cover image, format text and resize photos, then share their notes with anyone. In this article you'll discover how to create Facebook Notes and use them in your marketing mix. Listen to this article: How to Use Facebook Notes for Marketing Facebook recently updated their Notes feature for personal profiles, so content creators are able to share long-form content. Facebook pages also have the option to add Notes, although the interface for pages has not yet been updated. Whether you market from a personal profile or a business page, there are a lot of great ways to use Facebook Notes. For instance, write a note that summarizes your latest blog post. Link the note to the original post to drive traffic back to your website. Another option is to create a note with supplementary content. Link the blog post to your note and vice versa. Use notes to communicate with current and potential customers. Post a Facebook note as an extended bio about yourself or your business. Create a note to introduce a new product or service, and link it to the landing page on your website for that product or service. Also, post notes to inform your fans of important news about your business or industry, as well as update customers on a current situation or crisis your business is handling. Plus, create notes to share additional details about current Facebook contests or promotions. You may also want to write a Facebook note to recognize your top Facebook fans or customers. Before you decide to use Facebook Notes in lieu of a blog on your website, there are some important points to consider. First, you never know when Facebook may change its mind and take out the Notes app, in which case you could lose a lot of content. Even if you could back up the notes, you'd still lose all of the engagement. Second, all of the benefits of your content marketing (traffic, backlinks, social shares, etc.) would be directed to Facebook instead of your website. Third, there is no way to customize. On your blog, you can use your website's main menu, sidebar, post footers and pop-ups to get people to opt into your mailing list, submit contact forms and purchase products. With a Facebook note, you only have the option to include a text link back to your website and hope people click through. Here's how to create your own Facebook notes on profiles and business pages. Create Notes on Facebook Profiles To access Facebook Notes on your personal profile, click on the More link beneath your personal profile cover photo. If you don't see Notes in this list, you will need to click on the Manage Sections option. There, you will be able to check the box next to Notes to activate the feature on your profile. Once activated, Facebook Notes will appear in your More drop-down. To create a new note for your Facebook personal profile, click on the + Add Note button at the top right of the Notes interface. This will bring up the new Facebook Notes Editor. Using this editor, add a header photo for your note, edit the title, write text and insert photos. Hover over the lines icon, which will pop up to the left of your cursor, to access formatting elements for the body of the note. Highlight specific text to access additional options. At the bottom of the Notes Editor, there's the option to delete your note, update the privacy settings, save the note as a draft or publish it. Once you publish your note, an update will be added to your timeline, and will be shown to your connections in the news feed, based on your privacy settings. Your note will also appear in the Notes box in your personal profile's left sidebar. Edit your note at any time. Just click on the Edit Note button on the top right of your note.

6 Ways to Use Periscope for Your Business

6 Ways to Use Periscope for Your Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to use mobile live-streaming to market your business? Have you tried Periscope? Periscope is already proving to be an incredibly powerful social tool, and savvy marketers are using it in innovative ways to grow their businesses. In this article you'll discover six ways to use Periscope for your business. Listen to this article: #1: Show Live Product Demos If you're launching a new product, share the details with your audience on Periscope. You can do an interactive product demonstration by answering pertinent questions from viewers. Showcase cool product features, packaging and more. In this example Instagram coach and retailer Sue Zimmerman shows viewers how to apply Flash Tattoos (gold temporary tattoos) to their skin. #2: Share Industry News Periscope is a way to break news to your online community before anyone has a chance to write about it. Publishing a half-decent blog post on an industry innovation could take hours. On Periscope, you can simply talk about marketplace trends and then use your conversation with viewers to write a blog post or produce a training video. Sharing relevant news is a great way to position yourself as a go-to person in your industry, which sets you apart from your competition and gives you perceived authority. #3: Connect With Influencers Periscope is a great way to connect with influencers in your industry. To get noticed, show up regularly to their broadcasts, make insightful comments, ask intelligent questions and share their broadcasts on your social channels. If you want to develop a deeper relationship with an influencer you've met in person, Periscope can help with that, too. To remember to tune into specific broadcasts, turn on your push notifications and then mute everyone except the people you want to connect with. If you know certain influencers will broadcast at the same time every day, add a reminder to your calendar to tune in. #4: Take Viewers Behind the Scenes To connect with viewers on a personal level, use Periscope to give them a glimpse into your life or take them behind the scenes of your business. You can start a conversation by answering questions from your audience during the broadcast. As a preview to his podcast, Lewis Howes did a Periscope broadcast from the home of fitness guru Gabrielle Reese and surfer Laird Hamilton. People were able to chime in with questions they wanted Lewis to ask the couple in his podcast interview. If you're an author, share an update about your upcoming book or ask your audience for feedback on the title or a chapter you're working on. If you own a retail shop, give people a sneak peek at new items that have arrived. #5: Build Your Mailing List Periscope broadcasts can be an opportunity to build your mailing list. During your broadcast, ask viewers to leave their email addresses in the comments to sign up. Then you can enter the addresses into your database later. While this may create a little extra work for you, the signup process removes a barrier for viewers to join your mailing list. A note of caution: Because you'll be entering the email addresses manually, you may want to turn on opt-in confirmation emails to be certain you're complying with international email marketing regulations. #6: Provide Content for Other Channels You can repurpose your Periscope broadcasts to provide content for your other social channels. Although Periscope videos can only be broadcast vertically, some users have come up with innovative ways to work creatively with the vertical layout. You can also hack the layout to crop videos for YouTube or other social channels. Here’s a SlideShare presentation showing how to hack the vertical layout by using a tripod with iPhone and iPad mounts. To repurpose your content for other networks, look for creative ways to hack Periscope's vertical layout. Be sure to turn on Autosave Broadcasts in your Periscope settings so you...

Search Engine Optimization - SEO | ThriveHive

Search Engine Optimization - SEO | ThriveHive


ThriveHive

Improve your website’s organic search ranking today with Propel Marketing Search Engine Optimization. Generate traffic and leads for your business!

How to Use Facebook Messenger for Your Business

How to Use Facebook Messenger for Your Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for a new way to connect with customers and prospects on Facebook? Have you considered Facebook Messenger? Messenger for business pages makes it easy to offer instant one-on-one customer service, while keeping a record of the conversation. In this article I’ll explain how to use Facebook Messenger with your business page. Listen to this article: Why Facebook Messenger for Business? There are 800 million people who use Facebook Messenger each month. The instant messaging service is available to anyone, whether they have a Facebook profile or not. When Messenger first became available for business pages, Facebook users could message page owners and the page owners could reply. Now, page owners can respond to anyone who has commented on their page, privately or publicly. To keep privacy levels in check, businesses can’t download the email addresses of fans nor can they initiate conversations with users. The ability to direct message your audience is extremely powerful, especially since Facebook would rather have users stay on their platform (rather than jumping over to email). More than 89% of users access Facebook on their mobile devices and they check Facebook 14 times a day. Those people have an intimate relationship with Messenger. When your company starts conversations with users, you’re befriending them on that level. This is how to change business relationships into personal ones. Globally, Facebook continues to roll out Messenger features designed to help businesses efficiently manage their communications. Note: With the number of Messenger users hurtling towards the milestone of its first billion, look for Facebook to monetize Messenger sometime soon. Mark Zuckerberg has said in the past that Facebook likes to wait until its products grow to one billion users before focusing on driving revenue. As the demand for more ad inventory increases, Facebook needs to remain nimble with its core products and offer additional ways for advertisers to reach their audiences. Why Send Private Messages? Some of the biggest benefits to being able to private message your customers are related to social customer care. Answer questions about products or services. Prospects who are looking to make a purchase might want to ask you questions privately first. Encourage prospects to contact or message your business so you can give them the information they need to pull the trigger on their purchase. Have real-time conversations giving customer support. If customers are having an issue with their purchase, Messenger is an immediate way to assist them. You can also send customers order confirmations and shipping info, and invite them to check out related products. Private support is especially important if your business is in a highly regulated industry (such as finance and insurance) where you can’t discuss certain topics publicly. Messenger is also helpful when customers need to give you their private information to resolve an issue. Handle complaints. This is one of the top reasons Facebook introduced the ability to private message people who comment on your page. When you get negative comments from users, Messenger allows you to take the conversation offline on the same platform and defuse them pretty quickly. #1: Enable Messages on Your Page Your page can accept and send messages only if you’ve enabled Messenger. To turn on Messenger for your page, go to Messages under General Settings and then click Edit. Select the option to allow messages to your page, and click Save Changes. If you find that you’re getting more Facebook messages than you can handle, you may want to consider turning the feature off until you’re able to appoint more moderators. Another option is to make use of the ‘Away’ setting (see below for more on this). #2: Configure Message Settings There are two settings to adjust for your business Messenger: Response Time and Inst...

Search Engine Optimization: How to Attract More Visitors to Your Repository - bepress

Search Engine Optimization: How to Attract More Visitors to Your Repository - bepress


bepress

What is “Search Engine Optimization”? Generally speaking, “Search Engine Optimization” (SEO) focuses on getting a website’s content to rank highly in search engines, such as Google™ and Bing™. Search engines are a major source of traffic to Digital Commons repositories, so getting your repository content listed at the top of the search results is guaranteed …

Video Blogging: How to Become a Video Personality

Video Blogging: How to Become a Video Personality

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you post videos? Want to make them better? To learn how to create great videos, I interview video blogger Amy Schmittauer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Amy Schmittauer, a video blogger and marketing coach. Amy blogs at Savvy Sexy Social and is the host of the Marketing Lifestyle podcast. Amy will talk all about video blogging and what you need to know to become a video blogger. You'll discover the secret to making great videos, as well as what mistakes to avoid. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Video Blogging How Amy got involved with video Amy joined YouTube in March 2007. She was mostly an observer, and wanted to interact with others on the platform. In 2008, she started creating videos on her first YouTube channel. Amy enjoyed having a creative outlet where she could record and share experiences with her friends. When social media gained popularity, Amy looked at video differently. "I talked on Twitter to get to know people. I talked to a camera, so I could share that experience with those people. It was that simple," she recalls. "Then I started to realize there was a lot more to this story." In 2011 Amy began working independently. She used video to differentiate herself in the marketing space and started creating videos for her Savvy Sexy Social blog. Now, she has a camera set up in her office and a fun bookshelf background. Three times a week Amy talks via video to people who want to learn more about implementing social media for their brand and their business. Although she's made other fun videos, as well as videos for brands, she recently filmed her 400th episode for the Savvy Sexy Social blog. Listen to the show to hear Amy's opinion on which came first: social media or video. Facebook video vs. YouTube Amy believes linking to a YouTube video on Facebook has never been a good idea, because you need to customize the experience based on the platform. Although a YouTube link has never been visually pleasing on Facebook, there's always been a way to work around that. Now that Facebook is pushing their own organic video, the game is changing. If you have an audience on Facebook or are hoping to grow one, it's definitely something to consider. Amy wants people to watch her YouTube videos, but within a space she controls, which is her website. Usually when Amy posts to Facebook, it's a blog link with the video embedded on her site. However, since Facebook video will perform better than a link to a blog or a YouTube video, Amy suggests another option. Since Facebook video has a clear call-to-action button that you customize at the end, it's an excellent teaser opportunity. "If the first 30 seconds of the video are really interesting, then upload that to Facebook," she says. "Then, have the call to action at the end ask viewers to watch the rest of it on your website." Listen to the show to find out what loyal YouTubers think about using Facebook video. Mistakes video marketers make "There's way too much green screen time going on," Amy says. To be a professional on video, you don't need a perfect backdrop. YouTube and other online video platforms are places to get to know someone personally, so relax. You can still have the level of prestige that your brand deserves without having a formal background. The beginning of the video is the most critical, Amy adds. A lot of marketers and businesses spend far too much time at the beginning of a video doing what they think is the right thing and not considering t...

Facebook Marketing Plan: How to Grow Your Business With Facebook

Facebook Marketing Plan: How to Grow Your Business With Facebook

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a Facebook marketing plan? Are you wondering how to grow your business with Facebook? To learn about the important elements of a Facebook marketing plan, I interview Amy Porterfield for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Amy Porterfield, co-author of Facebook Marketing All-in-One for Dummies and host of the Online Marketing Made Easy podcast. She was also the very first Facebook community manager we ever had for Social Media Examiner. Amy shares what your Facebook marketing plan needs to succeed. You'll learn why you should create a Facebook business page and the best engagement techniques to grow your audience. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Marketing Plan The benefits of a Facebook business page  Amy states that although a lot of people get good engagement on their personal Facebook profile, she strongly recommends that you set up a Facebook business page. It's only on rare occasions that she advises to stick with your personal profile. If you have a physical or online product, program or service, a Facebook business page can be extremely beneficial. This type of page gives you permission to talk about your business on a regular basis. Once you have the foundation in place and become that go-to authority in your niche, you can talk about your business freely. It's the main reason why you need to have a business page, as well as a personal profile. You'll hear about another benefit when it comes to Facebook ads. Listen to the show to discover the reason why Amy has taken all communication over to her business page but still keeps her personal profile.   Start with a Facebook marketing plan Amy teaches how to put a Facebook marketing plan together in three phases. Attraction Promotion Sales Listen to the show to learn more about these three phases. 1. Attraction First of all, you need to build a Facebook community. It's important to grow a solid fan base so you can generate some great engagement with people. You become the go-to source in your community. In the attraction phase, you need to find different ways to grow your fan base. You need to know your audience. You'll hear why Amy advises creating a persona of your typical Facebook fan. One of the easiest ways to get the word out about your page is to have a Facebook Like button on your website. Once someone clicks the Like button to become a fan, they will remain on your website. You'll get quality fans with the Like button, because these people are already visiting your site. You want them to become Facebook fans, so you can stay top of mind when they're on Facebook. Listen to the show to hear what happened when Amy advised Michael Hyatt to install the Like button on his website. How to use your website or blog to grow a following Amy explains that it doesn't matter if you have a massive email subscriber list, these are people who have taken the time to give you their name and email address. You'll learn about techniques you can use to encourage people to become fans. If you want to attract new people, then Graph Search is very valuable. Amy says it's a hidden treasure that not many people use. You'll hear some great examples of search terms that will help you gain valuable information about your audience. When it comes to promotion, you need to turn your fans into leads. You definitely want to check out this previous podcast with Amy that goes into...

Chatbot Marketing: Is It the Strategy of the Future ?

by Adrian Cojocariu @ SEO Blog | cognitiveSEO Blog on SEO Tactics & Strategies

There’s a big hype going on about chatbots. If you’ve heard of them but aren’t quite sure what exactly they are or how they work, you’re in the right place.   This article will explain what chatbots are and how they can help you take your digital marketing to the next level. I’m not using “to […]

The post Chatbot Marketing: Is It the Strategy of the Future ? appeared first on SEO Blog | cognitiveSEO Blog on SEO Tactics & Strategies.

SEO Best Practices For eCommerce Product Pages | Magento Blog

SEO Best Practices For eCommerce Product Pages | Magento Blog


Magento

Magento blog post: SEO Best Practices For eCommerce Product Pages

5 Psychology Tips to Improve Your Social Media Posts

5 Psychology Tips to Improve Your Social Media Posts

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to create social media engagement? Do you want tips to improve your posts? To get more social media engagement, you need to tailor your content to appeal to your audience on an emotional level. In this article you'll discover five psychology tips to improve engagement on your social media posts. Listen to this article: #1: Images Speak to Viewers Your image is your first call to action in your social posts. It's the front door to your content, so it needs to make an impact. It's important to choose an image that expresses what you're trying to say in your post. For example, Red Bull's Instagram images inspire their followers to enjoy life and seek new adventures. Good social images also stand out from the crowd and command attention in people's news feeds. The image in this Coca-Cola post draws the audience's attention with its use of vivid colors and an interesting pattern. Your images should also be relevant to your target audience. In this Facebook post, Zappos uses an image that appeals to their audience: women who are fashion-conscious and love to buy shoes. #2: Color Communicates Brands that make the best color choices are the brands that get the most engagement on social media. Before you start sharing your content on social media, you should choose a color that is synonymous with your brand. Your color choice not only represents your business but also impacts your followers on a psychological level. Rob Russo's visual branding stands out in his followers' news feeds and draws attention to what he's saying. That's the strategy you want to apply to your visual marketing. The Honest Company's signature color is used prominently on all of their social channels and in their posts. The color makes their posts instantly recognizable to their fans. Think about whether your brand color speaks to your target market. If you're using a consistent color for your brand but not getting the engagement you want, you may need to rethink your color choice. #3: Words Trigger Action After creating your first call to action with an image, it's time to focus on the description. The law of attraction states that "like attracts like," so start your description with words you know people want or like to hear. Six words that typically work well are who, what, when, where, why and how. These words spark an emotional response that grabs a person's attention. You can also try these trigger words to engage your audience. #4: Emotion Connects Connecting with readers on an emotional level, especially when it's something happy, can impact your social media posts. In this Facebook post, Adidas connects with their fans by sharing Flavia Pennetta's exhilaration at winning her first Grand Slam singles title. Whether you know it or not, you're prompting some sort of emotion with all of your social posts. Even if it's boredom, readers are feeling an emotion when they see your post. To make the most of this opportunity, share good things with your followers. Portray a friendly, happy brand that is helpful and generous, and people will be drawn to your posts. On Oreo's Facebook page, their posts project a fun and lighthearted personality. #5: Conversation Engages How you introduce conversation into the mix of your social media posts helps determine how much people will open up to you. The easiest, most effective way to spark communication is to ask for it. You might begin your post with a question or end with a question or a statement that prompts people to engage. In this post, Threadless engages their followers by asking them to submit a quip to use in one of their t-shirt designs. By establishing communication with your followers, you'll discover what they need and want and how you can give it to them. In the post below, Livescribe asks their followers to share stories about how the company's products have helped them in p...

What Are KPIs? And What Do They Mean For Your Digital Marketing Strategy?

What Are KPIs? And What Do They Mean For Your Digital Marketing Strategy?

by Christine Darby @ Blog | Squarespace, MailChimp | Collaborada

Your online marketing must be analyzed to ensure progress is being made and all of your business goals are on track. How do you do that? One way to measure your digital marketing strategy's effectiveness is through the use of Key Performance Indicators (KPIs). Read More >>

14 Answers to Tricky Questions About Providing Web Design Services

14 Answers to Tricky Questions About Providing Web Design Services

by Lauren Hooker @ Blog

Have you ever been designing for a client when a sticky situation pops up? Maybe they continue to ask for more revisions than you originally planned for.  Or they don’t provide enough information for the pages of their website. Or they don’t have photos that compliment your designs. How do you handle these situations? Over the past 3 years, I’ve run into numerous unique challenges while working with clients, and I often figured them out through a series of trial and error.  But to spare you the trouble of having to figure things out all on your own, I’ve rounded up 14 tricky questions from my Freelance Academy course Q+A’s and I’m sharing the answers with you in today’s post. 

How to Promote Your Business With Personal Social Profiles

How to Promote Your Business With Personal Social Profiles

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to expand the online visibility of your business? Have you thought about leveraging your personal social media profiles? Optimizing your personal profiles to highlight your business is a great way to raise awareness. In this article you'll discover how to use your personal LinkedIn, Twitter and Facebook profiles to promote your business. Listen to this article: #1: Showcase